diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-03-08 15:44:11 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-03-08 15:44:11 -0800 |
| commit | 9cdbfbb629109fd296e060bff9ad00596d52c414 (patch) | |
| tree | ecfa33d27353a3e413c385e645d1942f0725d0c7 /41200-0.txt | |
| parent | aad725c92afa1d5030d427df4550332ed1f1b619 (diff) | |
Diffstat (limited to '41200-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 41200-0.txt | 12541 |
1 files changed, 12541 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/41200-0.txt b/41200-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3de7444 --- /dev/null +++ b/41200-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12541 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41200 *** + + WORKS ISSUED BY + The Hakluyt Society. + + THE VOYAGES + OF + PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS, + 1595 TO 1606. + + SECOND SERIES. + No. XIV. + + + + + + + + THE VOYAGES + OF + PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS, + 1595 TO 1606. + + Translated and Edited + BY + SIR CLEMENTS MARKHAM, + K.C.B., P.R.G.S.; + PRESIDENT OF THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + IN TWO VOLUMES.--VOL. I. + + LONDON: + PRINTED FOR THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + M.DCCCCIV. + + + + + + + + COUNCIL + OF + THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. + + + Sir Clements Markham, K.C.B., F.R.S., Pres. R.G.S., President. + The Right Hon. the Lord Amherst of Hackney, Vice-President. + Rear-admiral Sir William Wharton, K.C.B., F.R.S., Vice-President. + Colonel George Earl Church. + Sir William Martin Conway. + George William Forrest, C.I.E. + William Foster, B.A. + F. H. H. Guillemard, M.A., M.D. + The Right Hon. the Lord Hawkesbury. + Edward Heawood, M.A. + John Scott Keltie, LL.D. + Frederic William Lucas. + Admiral Sir Albert Hastings Markham, K.C.B. + Mowbray Morris. + Commr. John Franklin Parry, R.N. + Edward John Payne, M.A. + Ernest George Ravenstein. + Admiral of the Fleet Sir F. W. Richards, G.C.B. + Henry William Trinder. + Richard Stephen Whiteway. + + Basil H. Soulsby, B.A., Honorary Secretary. + + + + + + +CONTENTS. + + +VOLUME I. + + Page + + Dedication ix + Introduction xi + Note on the Cartography of the Southern Continent. + By B. H. Soulsby xxxvii + + I.--Narrative of the Second Voyage of the Adelantado + Alvaro de Mendaña, by the Chief Pilot Pedro Fernandez + de Quiros 3 + + II.--Narrative of the Voyage of the Adelantado Alvarez de + Mendaña de Niera for the Discovery of the Islands of + Solomon, written by the Chief Pilot Pedro Fernandez + de Quiros for Don Antonio de Morga, Lieutenant-General + of the Philippines 149 + + III.--Narrative of the Voyage of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros + in 1606, for the Discovery of the Austrial Regions 161 + + +VOLUME II. + + IV.--True Account of the Events of the Voyage that the + Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros made to the unknown + Southern lands, by Gaspar de Leza, Chief Pilot of the + said Fleet 321 + + V.--Torquemada's Account of the Voyage of Quiros 407 + + VI.--Letter from Luis Vaez de Torres to the King of Spain 455 + + VII.--Legends on the Four Maps signed by Diego de Prado y + Tobar 469 + + +APPENDIX. + + I.--Eighth Memorial of Quiros 477 + II.--Memorial of Quiros, 1607 487 + III.--Memorial of Quiros, 1609 504 + IV.--Memorial of Don Fernando de Castro, 1608 508 + V.--Letters from Diego de Prado y Tobar, 1613 511 + VI.--Note on the Memorials of Quiros by the Council of + the Indies, 1610 514 + VII.--Memorial touching Papers printed by Quiros, 1610 516 + VIII.--Memorial by Juan Luis Arias 517 + + Index 537 + + +MAPS. + + 1.--Planos de las Bahías descubiertas el año de 1606, In Pocket + en las islas del Espíritu Santo y de Nueva Guinea at the end. + y Dibujadas por D. Diego de Prado y Tovar en Igual + Fecha (Soc. Geogr. de Madrid, 1878). + + 2.--New Hebrides, Banks and Duff Groups, showing In Pocket + Discoveries of Quiros in 1606. G. Mackay del. at the end. + + 3.--Routes of Mendaña, 1595; Quiros, 1606, and Torres, In Pocket + 1606. G. Mackay del. at the end. + + + + + + + DEDICATION. + + TO + COMMANDER ROBERT FALCON SCOTT, + R.N., M.V.O., F.R.G.S.; + LEADER OF THE NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, + 1901 TO 1904. + + +My Dear Scott, + + +I dedicate this translation of the Voyages of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros +to you, because the efforts and aspirations of the first navigator who +ever conceived the idea of discovering the Antarctic continent cannot +fail to have an interest for you who have actually made such great +discoveries in the Far South; as a tribute also of admiration for your +great qualities as a leader, and of affectionate regard for yourself. + + +Believe me to be ever, my dear Scott, + +Your attached friend and well-wisher, + +Clements R. Markham. + + + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +The Council of the Hakluyt Society has decided that the volumes +containing the narratives of the discovery of the Solomon Islands +by Mendaña shall be followed by a monograph on the two voyages of +Quiros. In the first voyage he was Chief Pilot to Mendaña; the second +and most famous voyage was under his own command. + +The best and most detailed narrative of both voyages is contained +in a work which remained in manuscript until twenty-eight years ago, +when it was edited and published at Madrid by Don Justo Zaragoza. It +is entitled History of the Discovery of the Austrial Regions, made by +the General Pedro Fernandez de Quiros. [1] Two copies were known to +be in existence: one in the private library of the King of Spain, the +other in that of the Ministry of Marine. Both have erroneous titles, +written by careless librarians. The narratives were evidently dictated +by Quiros, or written from his notes; but Señor Zaragoza gives reasons +for the belief that the work, in its present form, was written by +Luis de Belmonte Bermudez, a young man who was Secretary to Quiros +during the voyage of 1606, and that it contains several passages for +which the Secretary was alone responsible. Belmonte Bermudez remained +faithful to Quiros in his adversity, and, after his master's death, +he became a poet of some celebrity. Señor Zaragoza quotes several +passages which show the hand of a poet. [2] There is also a quotation +from the Araucana of Ercilla on unknown lands not yet revealed by God, +to which is added another version by the young sailor-poet on those +unknown lands now revealed by God. [3] + +The author is mentioned twice in the narrative: once as being nearly +drowned in landing on the island of Anaa [4] ("Conversion de San +Pablo"), and again in the list of officials for the municipality of +the city of New Jerusalem projected by Quiros. [5] The question of +authorship is really settled by the poet himself, in a line of his poem +entitled La Hispalica, quoted by Zaragoza. Speaking of Quiros as his +"Lusitanian master, the star of gallant Portuguese," he adds that, +in recording the history of the voyage there was:-- + + + "Want of a writer, which I supplied." + + +The Historia, as published by Zaragoza, is continuous in eighty-one +chapters. It has been found more convenient to divide the translation +into two parts: the first containing the second voyage of Mendaña, +and the second part being the story of the voyage of Quiros in 1606. + +The present volume commences with the first part of the History of +the Discovery of the Austrial Regions. It describes the second voyage +of Mendaña in much detail, including the discovery of the Marquesas +Islands and of the island of Santa Cruz, the death of Mendaña, and +the terrible passage from Santa Cruz to Manilla. It is certainly a +most extraordinary story. + +In the work entitled Hechos del Marques de Cañete, a life of one of the +Viceroys of Peru, by Cristoval Suarez de Figueroa, [6] Book VI contains +an abbreviated version of the narrative in the Historia, generally +copied word for word. Numerous details are omitted, particularly +such as are derogatory to the Spanish character. There are also a few +passages which are not in the Historia, but none having any bearing +on the events of the voyage. Suarez de Figueroa tells us that he had +the narrative of Quiros before him as he wrote. For these reasons +I have considered it unnecessary to translate the version of Suarez +de Figueroa, as it is merely a mutilated version of the narrative in +the Historia. The account in the work of Suarez de Figueroa was the +only version of the second voyage of Mendaña that was known to our +historians of Pacific voyages, Dalrymple and Burney. + +There is a short report of the second voyage of Mendaña, to Antonio +de Morga, the Governor of the Philippines, by Quiros himself. It was +translated and printed by Lord Stanley of Alderley, in his edition of +the work of Antonio de Morga (Hakluyt Society, 1868). I have caused +it to be reprinted in this volume, in order to make the monograph of +Quiros complete. + +For the voyage of Quiros in 1606, when he discovered the Duff and +Banks groups of islands, and the New Hebrides, there are no less than +four separate accounts. + +The first, and by far the most important, forms the second part of the +Historia del descubrimiento de las regiones Austriales, by Belmonte +Bermudez. It contains the full narrative, the speeches and reflections +of Quiros, as recorded by his Secretary, and the remarks of the poet +himself. The royal orders, the curious and interesting instructions +of Quiros to his Captains, the act of possession and other strange +proceedings at Espiritu Santo, the half-allegorical will of Quiros, +and other documents, are included. + +The second narrative is by Gaspar Gonzalez de Leza, the Chief Pilot +of the Capitana with Quiros. For the most part it is merely a log, +with courses, distances run, winds, and latitudes for each day, +with occasional calculations of the distance from Callao. But it also +contains accounts of the visits to the newly-discovered islands, and +some remarks of interest, which may be compared with the same events +described by Quiros, and in the work of Torquemada. The manuscript is +in the Royal Library at Madrid (J. 2); and Lord Stanley of Alderley +quoted largely from it, in annotating the letter of Torres. But it +was first printed by Zaragoza. + +The third narrative is contained in the Monarquia Indiana, a work +on Mexico first published in 1614, by the Franciscan Friar, Juan de +Torquemada, who was Provincial of the Order in Mexico in that year +(vol. i, pp. 738 to 756 the second edition, 1723) (Lib. V, caps. lxiv +to lxix). Torquemada was at Mexico when Quiros and his companions +landed at Acapulco, and came up to the capital in the end of 1606. He +must have known and conversed both with Quiros and with some of his +crew. He thus obtained his information at first hand, and was able +to write an authentic account of the voyage. Torquemada's style is +more polished and flowing than those of the sailors, or even of the +young poet, who relate the events of the same voyage. [7] + +The fourth narrative is contained in a letter from the second in +command, Luis Vaez de Torres, to the King. This letter briefly +describes the whole voyage; but it is specially interesting when it +relates the events after parting company with Quiros. For Torres, +on his voyage from Espiritu Santo to Ternate, was the discoverer +of the strait which bears his name. Dalrymple obtained a copy of +the letter of Torres, and translated it. This translation was, with +the permission of Dalrymple, first published by Burney. Mr. Major +reprinted it in his volume of Early Voyages to Australia (Hakluyt +Soc., 1859). Lord Stanley of Alderley found another copy in the +National Library at Madrid (J. 2), and translated it as Appendix VI +of his edition of the work on the Philippines, by Antonio de Morga +(p. 402, Hakluyt Soc., 1868). This is a copy of a document mentioned +by Navarrete as existing at Simancas. Ever loyal to his chief, though +disapproving of his conduct of the expedition, Torres wrote another +letter to Quiros. The letter of Torres has such an important bearing +on the voyage of Quiros, that I have considered it indispensable to +include it in the present volumes. + +The Memorials of Quiros, and other documents in the Appendix, will +be described further on. They complete the materials for a monograph +of the famous navigator's work and life. + +I now propose to state all that I have been able to ascertain +respecting his life; and to discuss his character, his attainments, +his views and aspirations, and the position his voyages occupy in +the history of maritime discovery. + +Pedro Fernandez de Quiros was born at Evora [8], in Portugal, in 1565, +the year before Mendaña sailed on his first voyage. The ill-fated Don +Sebastian was then King of Portugal. His uncle, the Cardinal Henry, +became King in 1578; but in 1580 Philip II, the Cardinal's nephew, +succeeded as King of Portugal, as well as of Spain. Quiros, though a +Portuguese, then became a subject of the King of Spain, his age being +fifteen. We are told, though an enemy is our informant, [9] that +young Quiros was brought up in the "Rua nova," then a disreputable +part of Lisbon, and that he was a clerk or supercargo in merchant +ships. This may or may not be true. He certainly became a good sailor, +and an accomplished pilot. + +In 1589, when he had reached his twenty-fourth year, he had probably +been several years at sea. He then married Doña Ana Chacon, of Madrid, +daughter of the licentiate Juan Quevedo de Miranda, by Ana Chacon +de Miranda. She was a year his senior. A son, named Francisco, was +born to them in 1590, and they must then have gone to Peru; for their +daughter Jeronima was born some months after Quiros sailed from Peru +with Mendaña in 1595. [10] + +Quiros was thirty years of age when he accepted the post of Chief +Pilot in the ship of Alvaro de Mendaña, who had received a concession +to colonise the Solomon Islands, which he had discovered thirty years +before. Quiros joined this expedition with some misgivings, caused by +the quarrelsome character of the Camp Master, the want of order and +discipline, and the position assumed by the Commander's wife and her +brothers. Mendaña was more than twenty years older than Quiros. The +Pilot's position was one of some difficulty: for while on one side +he had to exercise tact in his intercourse with the family clique, +on the other he found it difficult to avoid friction with a most +impracticable and quarrelsome old soldier who was Camp Master, and +who had a feud with the brothers-in-law of Mendaña, which continued +to increase in bitterness. The expedition culminated at the island +of Santa Cruz, a new discovery, with the slaughter of the old Camp +Master, the deaths of Mendaña and his brother-in-law Don Lorenzo, +the succession of the widow, Doña Isabel, to the command of the +expedition, and the disastrous voyage to Manilla. + +Through all this intrigue and violence the Chief Pilot steered +his course with prudence and caution. He was a reliable seaman, +and was constantly consulted. He appears, from his own account, to +have been a peacemaker, to have avoided quarrels, and to have had +some influence. He was, however, a great talker. The widow did not +like him, but she was obliged to rely upon him entirely. Her brothers +were useless. Quiros stood between the widow's selfish parsimony and +a crew on the verge of mutiny from misery and starvation. He brought +a sinking ship, with rotten spars and rigging, safely over an unknown +sea from Santa Cruz to Manilla. + +It was during this voyage, and while gaining experience in the +navigation of the Pacific Ocean and the treatment of natives, that +Quiros conceived his grand project. He was a cartographer, and, in +studying existing maps, he saw a great Southern continent extending +across the ocean, from the Strait of Magellan to New Guinea. He thought +that here was a discovery as famous as had been made by Columbus or Da +Gama. He thought that here was not only a great continent extending +to the South Pole to be added to the dominions of his sovereign, +but millions of souls to be saved and brought within the fold of the +Church. He devoted his life to the realisation of this glorious dream +with unswerving devotion, never turning aside to the right hand or to +the left; undaunted by difficulties or wearisome delays to his dying +day; literally killed by Councils and Committees; but succumbing +only with his last breath. He became a man with one idea. Alas! he +was but a dreamer. + +It was a dream. The heroic days of Spain and Portugal were passed +and gone. Quiros was the last of the long and glorious roll of +great Spanish navigators. He spoke, if not to stone-deaf ears, to +fast-deafening ears. The Viceroy Don Luis de Velasco, [11] at Lima, to +whom Quiros first explained his project, would take no responsibility, +and referred him to the Court of Spain and its Councils of State and of +the Indies. It was a happy inspiration which led Quiros to go first to +Rome, and interest the Pope in the conversion of millions of Antarctic +souls; for nothing was more likely to induce the Spanish Government +to move in the matter than a strong recommendation, which would be +looked upon almost as a command, from the Supreme Pontiff. Quiros was +himself a very religious man, deeply imbued with the superstitions +of his time and nation. + +When Quiros arrived at Rome, the Duke of Sesa, a descendant of the +Great Captain, was Spanish Ambassador. The Pope was a scion of the +noble Roman family of Aldobrandini, and had succeeded, as Clement VIII, +in 1592. + +The Duke of Sesa received Quiros well on his arrival at Rome, made him +a member of his household, and was so much interested in his project +that he assembled all the most eminent astronomers and geographers in +the Eternal City to examine and report to him upon it. Among these +experts there was a mathematician of the first rank. Christopher +Clavio was born at Bamberg in 1537, and taught mathematics at Rome +for twenty years. He corrected the calendar for Gregory XIII, and +published his Calendarii Romani Gregoriani Explicatio in 1603. He had +previously been the author of a work entitled Gnomonices, and of an +edition of Euclid. The other advisers of the Duke were Dr. Mesa and +Dr. Toribio Perez, who had been Professors of Geography at Salamanca, +and a learned Jesuit named Villalpando. + +The authority of Clavio cannot be gainsaid. He found Quiros to be an +accomplished Pilot and cartographer, and the inventor or improver of +two nautical instruments. The Duke of Sesa was satisfied by Clavio and +the other experts of the capacity of Quiros as a navigator, and of the +importance of his project. He, therefore, introduced him to the Pope, +and both Clement VIII and the Duke gave him letters of recommendation +to the Spanish Government. + +Philip III had succeeded his father in 1598 as King of Spain +and Portugal. He found the country utterly ruined, and commerce +nearly dead. Yet he continued the same fatal policy. He confided +the management of affairs to the Duke of Lerma, a man well known to +readers of Gil Blas, and the extravagance of the Court helped to lead +Spain downwards on the road to decadence and ruin. + +Quiros arrived at Madrid with his credentials in the spring of 1602, +and had interviews with Philip III, and with his Minister, the Duke +of Lerma. The Pope's influence secured his success. Within a year he +had obtained a royal order, through the Council of State, addressed +to the Viceroy of Peru, instructing that dignitary to fit out two +ships at Callao, to enable Quiros to undertake an expedition for the +discovery of the Antarctic continent. + +Quiros sailed for Peru in the summer of 1603. He seems to have left +his family in Spain. He was shipwrecked near the Island of Curaçoa, +in the West Indies, and had to pass some time at Caraccas. Here he +found the orphan children of a brother, of whom he had not heard for +many years, living with their maternal grandfather: two boys and a +girl. He thought it right to take the two nephews with him, leaving +the niece with her grandfather. One of the nephews is not heard of +again. The other, Lucas de Quiros, was his uncle's companion in the +voyage of 1606. He was Royal Ensign for the ceremonies at Espiritu +Santo. He is afterwards heard of as a rising cartographer at Lima. [12] + +Quiros arrived at Lima quite destitute, owing to the refusal of the +royal officials on the route to give him any pecuniary assistance, +although they had positive orders to do so. He found shelter in +the house of a potter; and it was some days before he could get +an audience of the Count of Monterey, [13] who was then Viceroy of +Peru. Eventually, the Viceroy recognised the necessity for carrying out +the royal orders. Vessels were tardily bought and fitted out at Callao, +for the expedition of Quiros, in the last months of 1605. There were +two ships and a zabra or launch. The ship chosen for Quiros was called +the Capitana, and named San Pedro y San Pablo. She was 150 tons. The +other ship was called the Almiranta, and named the San Pedro, 120 +tons. Her Captain was known as the Admiral, the title of a second +in command in those days. Both ships were built on the west coast, +probably at Guayaquil. They carried one hundred and thirty men and +six friars. The launch was named Los Tres Reyes. + +Luis Vaez de Torres, the Admiral or second in command under Quiros, +was a good sailor and pilot, an energetic and capable leader, and +loyal to his chief. He commanded all the landing parties, and relieved +Quiros of much anxiety and trouble. His Chief Pilot in the Almiranta, +Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña, and Pedro Bernal de Cermeño, in command +of the launch, were loyal and capable men. The junior Pilot in the +Capitana, Gaspar Gonzalez de Leza, afterwards Chief Pilot, was also a +reliable officer. Quiros had a cousin with him, one Alonso Alvarez de +Castro, as well as a nephew, Lucas de Quiros. But his most faithful +and devoted friend was young Luis de Belmonte Bermudez. Born at +Seville in about 1585, this youth had gone out to seek his fortune, +first in Mexico and then at Lima. Fired by the stories told him of +the Araucanian war in distant Chile, he composed a panegyric on the +youthful deeds of the Marquis of Cañete, the first product of his +muse. When Quiros was fitting out his expedition, Belmonte Bermudez +accepted the post of Secretary, taking with him the "Araucana," +that noble epic of the soldier-poet, Alonso de Ercilla. + +But Quiros also had in his ship men of a very different stamp. Among +them was a Chief Pilot named Juan Ochoa de Bilboa, who had been +forced upon him as a protégé of the Viceroy; [14] another officer +named Diego de Prado y Tovar; and the accountant, Juan de Iturbe. They +stirred up mutiny and disaffection on board. + +Quiros complained bitterly of the delay in fitting out the expedition, +which obliged him to sail so late in the year. He considered that +he should have sailed not later than St. Francis, or the 4th of +October. He did not obtain his despatch until the 21st of December. + +Quiros was now free to attempt the realisation of his dream, the +discovery of the Antarctic continent and the annexation of the South +Pole. All was left to his discretion. There is no reason for the belief +that the Viceroy of Peru gave any instructions beyond the letter of +farewell which was read to the men. The plan of Quiros was to steer +W.S.W. from Callao until he reached latitude 30° S., [15] where he +fully expected that he would have reached the continental southern +land shown on the maps of his time. He continued on this course from +December 21st to January 26th, when he found himself in 26° S. + +Then Quiros came to the fatal decision to alter course to W.S.W. He +says in his narrative that there was a heavy swell, and that he was +obliged by the force of the wind and the sea to alter his course. He +adds, in one of his memorials, that winter was approaching, that +there was a mutinous spirit among his crew, and that he was ill in +bed. Torres remonstrated. He wrote: "I gave a declaration under my +hand that it was not a thing obvious that we ought to diminish our +latitude till we got beyond 30° S." If Quiros had continued on his +course, he would have discovered New Zealand, and his dream would +have been partly realised. + +Having turned away from the goal, his plan was to make for the island +of Santa Cruz, discovered when he served as Chief Pilot under Mendaña, +and thence to make another attempt southward. But this was a lame +conclusion. His chance was gone. Antarctic discovery was left to +another nation and another century. + +The latitudes recorded by Quiros, Torres, and Leza, and the courses +and distances run, enable us to identify the islands discovered by +Quiros in crossing the Pacific. The first inhabited island, reached +on February 1st, 1606, has been supposed by Burney and others to be +Tahiti. It is in the latitude of Tahiti; but it is described as a low +island with a large lagoon in the centre, and no fresh water. This +could not by any possibility be Tahiti. Sir William Wharton has +identified it as Anaa, or Chain Island, one of the Low Archipelago +to the eastward of Tahiti. [16] Quiros named it "Conversion de San +Pablo," not "Sagittaria," as Burney supposed. With Anaa as a point +of departure, the other islands discovered by Quiros are easily +identified. [17] + +In following the parallel of 10° 20' S. to reach Santa Cruz, Quiros +fortunately came upon Taumaco, the principal island of what is now +called the Duff group. Here he found a native Chief, from whom he +received such detailed information respecting the existence of islands, +and, as was understood, even continental lands to the southward, that +the most sanguine hopes appeared to be approaching realisation. The +project of going to Santa Cruz was abandoned, and Quiros steered S., +fully anticipating the consummation of his dreams of discovery. Nor +was he destined to be altogether disappointed. Island after island, +all lofty and thickly inhabited, rose above the horizon; and at +last he sighted such extensive coast lines that he believed the +Southern Continent to be spread out before him. The islands of the +New Hebrides group, such as Aurora, Leper, and Pentecost, overlapping +each other to the S.E., seemed to him to be continuous coast lines, +while to the S.W. was the land which he named Austrialia del Espiritu +Santo. All appeared to his vivid imagination to be one continuous +continental land. + +Such was the enthusiastic navigator's belief when his vessels anchored +in the port of Vera Cruz, at the southern extreme of the great bay +of St. Philip and St. James. He had found the largest island of what +Captain Cook named the New Hebrides group, yet not a very large +island. He showed his belief by his grandiose proceedings. To us +they must now appear very pathetic. There was a ceremony of taking +possession, in the names of the Church, of the Pope, and of the +King. Quiros took possession of "all this region of the south as +far as the Pole, which from this time shall be called Austrialia +del Espiritu Santo, with all its dependencies for ever and so long +as right exists," in the name of King Philip III. A great city was +to be founded and named the New Jerusalem, and its river was to be +the Jordan. All the municipal and royal officers were nominated, +and a knightly order of "Espiritu Santo" was instituted, subject to +confirmation by the King. There were processions, religious dances, +high masses and fireworks. + +The great navigator had two serious drawbacks in his rejoicing. He +was disabled by a serious illness; and the natives, owing to the +misconduct of the Spaniards, were persistently hostile. After being at +anchor in this port of Vera Cruz for thirty-five days (from the 3rd +of May to the 8th of June, 1606), the little fleet sailed, with the +object of completing the discovery of the Southern Continent. Then +came the catastrophe. + +It came on to blow hard from the S.E., with a nasty sea; and it was +resolved to return to the anchorage. Late at night Torres brought the +Almiranta to anchor, and the launch was also safely brought to. Quiros +was too ill to come on deck, the Pilots seem to have lost their heads, +were confused between the lights of the other ships and these on shore, +and eventually stood out, running before the wind. At dawn they were +several leagues to leeward, outside the bay. From the 12th to the 18th +they were trying to beat up to the bay, but with topmasts struck it +was nearly all leeway. Ships built in Peru would not work to windward: +Quiros was in despair. At last, he determined to make for Santa Cruz, +which was a rendezvous in the Instructions. But when the latitude of +Santa Cruz was reached, there was a consultation. It was resolved to +cross the Line, and make for Acapulco: a four months' voyage. Quiros +bewailed his position. He had enemies on board. He does not mention +any actual mutiny, though his enemy, Prado y Tovar, who must have +got his information from the men who remained at Mexico, and perhaps +afterwards found their way to the Philippines, makes the assertion. + +Quiros consoled himself with the reflection that his return would at +least enable him to make known his discoveries, and to urge upon the +King and his Councils the importance of completing them. He also felt +confidence in Torres, his second in command, who was left behind on +board the Almiranta, and in his Pilot, Fuentidueña; and with good +reason. They were resolute and capable seamen. Quiros hoped that +they would continue his discoveries; and he rejoiced when, some years +afterwards, he received the news of the successful voyage of Torres. + +After waiting for some days for the Capitana, Torres continued the +voyage by rounding the northern end of Espiritu Santo, and steering +a course to the S.W., until he reached a latitude of 21° S. [18] He +then altered course to the N., and discovered the bay and islands at +the east end of New Guinea. In 1613 Diego de Prado y Tovar sent home +four maps from Goa, which throw considerable light on the course of +Torres's ship. The first map is a very interesting one of the bay +of St. Philip and St. James, in Espiritu Santo. The next is a map +of a land named "Buenaventura," with many islands. Torres arrived +at this land on July 18th, having sailed from the bay of St. Philip +and St. James on the 26th of June. "Buenaventura" is Basilisk Island, +so named by Captain Moresby, after his ship, in 1873. The bay of San +Millan, accurately delineated by Torres, is Jenkins Bay of Moresby. The +port of Santo Toribio of Torres is the China Strait of Moresby. + +The third map shows the great bay of San Lorenzo, and the port +of Monterey, identified with "l'Orangerie" and "Ile Dufaure" +of Bougainville (1768), on the S. coast of New Guinea. The names +of Saints given to the bays, capes, and islands, throw light on the +dates, for it was usual to give to a cape, bay, or island the name of +the Saint on whose day it was discovered. The feast of San Lorenzo +is on the 10th of August, the date when Torres arrived in the bay, +where he appears to have remained for several days. The fourth +map is of the bay of San Pedro de Arlanza, whose feast is on the +18th of October. This bay is identified with the Triton Bay of the +Dutch. The four maps have been reproduced for this volume, and the +legends on the original large-scale maps are given separately. [19] +From Triton Bay, Torres proceeded to Ternate, where he left the launch, +and thence continued his course to Manilla. His letters to Quiros and +to the King from that place are dated June and July, 1607. From the +fact that Diego de Prado y Tovar sent the four maps home in December, +1613, it is supposed that Torres had died in the interval. The letter +of Torres was first printed in Burney's Voyages, from a copy obtained +and translated by Dalrymple, who suggested the name of Torres Strait +for the principal discovery of that navigator. The Spanish Government +jealously concealed the knowledge acquired by their great explorers, +and left their noble deeds in oblivion. It was left to Englishmen to +immortalise the names of Quiros and Torres, whose achievements were +so long forgotten by their own countrymen. + +The actual results of the voyages of Quiros and Torres were the +discovery of thirteen coral islands in the Pacific, of the Duff and +Banks groups, of the New Hebrides, of the eastern end and southern +coast of New Guinea, and of Torres Strait, with its innumerable +islands: not a barren record. + +Quiros came to Madrid to urge the Spanish Government to give him +command of another expedition for the completion of his discoveries. He +had before him a dreary seven years of memorialising Councils, of +obstruction and delays. It wore him out; but he was led to believe +that he had succeeded. A timely death saved him from the anguish of +finding that he had been deceived. He was worried into his grave by +Councils and Committees. But before he died he believed that he had +at length overcome the obstruction, and his last hours were cheered +by the hope of final success. + +We gather the character of Quiros from his narratives. He was a man of +a humane and generous disposition, averse to violence and bloodshed. He +was a zealous Catholic, striving to maintain religious feelings and to +enforce morality among his people. Brave and resolute himself, full +of zeal and enthusiasm, he failed in the management of men. He was +often weak and vacillating, and had not the force of will necessary +to control the turbulent and to cheer the half-hearted. The Chief +Pilot, Juan Ochoa de Bilboa, during the voyage, caused a mutinous +feeling on board the Capitana, persuading the crew to go straight to +Manilla. Quiros merely sent this Chief Pilot on board the Almiranta +under arrest. Torres strongly importuned his chief to punish such +insubordination, but he would not. It was the same with another +mutinous officer, Diego de Prado y Tobar. He was merely sent on +board the Almiranta. To this weakness Torres attributes the slackness +and want of zeal, if not something worse, when the Capitana parted +company. Juan de Iturbe, the Accountant, in his letter now in the +Biblioteca Nacional (J. 2), merely says that the Chief Pilot went over +to the ship of Torres because he was disgusted with Quiros. We have +the evidence of Torres himself that this was not the reason. Iturbe +was another disaffected officer, and disloyal to his chief. There was +not a single instance of capital punishment during the expedition, +and not a single death, with the exception of the Father Commissary, +who died of old age. Quiros was a thorough seaman, and the best Pilot +of his time. He was not a self-seeker, but was devoted to a great idea, +and persistently strove to realise it with unswerving resolution, +until death ended his career. + +Quiros was very unlike his countryman Magellan. He rather reminds +us of the great Genoese. Like Columbus, he was a visionary, full of +dreams and religious aspirations. Like Columbus, he was devoted to +one idea, which he followed with unchanging fidelity to the day of +his death. Like Columbus, he was gentle in dealing with those who +opposed him, and often weak. One dream of Quiros was that in his +Southern Continent there should be justice to the converted natives, +and that the evil deeds perpetrated in Mexico and Peru should not be +repeated. [20] + +It only remains to record the story of the Quiros Memorials, when +we shall see the navigator, prematurely old, striving for the means +of renewing his efforts: struggling against Councils and Committees +while life lasted. + +Quiros landed at Acapulco, was very coldly received by the officials at +Mexico, and reached Madrid on the 9th of October, 1607. He was quite +destitute. He only had two maravedis, which he gave to a beggar. But +his faithful young Secretary remained true to him. During the first +eleven days, he had not money to buy ink or paper. He wrote his first +Memorial on the flyleaves of a pamphlet. He got the money for printing +it by selling his clothes. To print the second, he sold his bedding; +for the third, he pawned the royal banner under which he had taken +possession of Espiritu Santo. After seventeen months of extreme penury, +the King granted him 500 ducats. + +Quiros tells us that he sent in fifty memorials in fifty months. Of +these, eight have been preserved and printed by Zaragoza. The first +was written in 1607. [21] He describes the events of the voyage, +and makes excuses for altering course when he had reached 26° S.; and +for having parted company with Torres. He explains his view that the +Antarctic continent runs from Espiritu Santo S.E. to Magellan Strait, +a land of vast extent: "a new world." He says that he gave the name of +"Austrialia del Espiritu Santo" from His Majesty's title of Austria. He +says that the tonnage of his ships was 150 and 120, and that they +carried one hundred and thirty men, besides six friars. The cost of +the expedition was 184,000 ducats. He concludes by saying that he had +no pay, and that he owes 2,500 dollars without one quarto to pay it. + +The second existing Memorial is the eighth that he sent in. It is +given in Purchas, and was reproduced by Dalrymple. It forms the first +document in the Appendix. [22] The eighth Memorial was printed at +Seville in 1610. Purchas obtained a copy, which he reprinted in his +Pilgrimes. Hessel Gerritsz printed a Dutch version, in 1612, in his +Detectio Freti Hudsoni, reprinted by Müller at Amsterdam, in 1878, +and two French translations appeared in 1617. + +The third existing Memorial is also given in Purchas and Dalrymple. It +forms the second document in the Appendix. [23] + +The fourth is translated for the first time, and forms the third +document in the Appendix. [24] + +The fifth existing Memorial was the sixteenth he had written. It +contains proposals for colonising the new continent; and here Quiros +compares himself to Columbus, Da Gama, and Magellan. [25] + +The sixth existing Memorial refers to a royal order received from the +Secretary, Gabriel de Hoa, instructing the Viceroys to despatch Quiros +on a new voyage. He submits detailed estimates. He proposes to take one +hundred and fifty persons, and mentions the names of three Captains who +are willing to accompany him. One of them is Lorenzo Ferrer Maldonado, +a cosmographer and writer who is best known for his account of the +imaginary Strait of Anian, published in 1588. Quiros also gives the +names of eighteen Franciscan friars who are ready to go. He refers +to his extreme poverty, and asks for his debts to be paid. [26] + +The seventh extant Memorial is, according to Quiros, the fiftieth +that he wrote. It is much the longest, covering 108 pages. It +begins by recapitulating the contents of his eighth and sixteenth +Memorials. It contains an interesting report by Hernando de los Rios, +the Procurator of the Philippines, of a voyage to New Guinea by a +Portuguese named Miguel Roxo de Brito; also an extract from a letter +received by Quiros from his second in command, Torres, dated June +15th, 1607; and a report by Ruy Gonzalez de Sequiera, the Governor +of the Moluccas. Quiros repeats his proposals, and again dwells on +the importance of the intended discoveries. + +The eighth and last extant Memorial is only a further +recapitulation. He says he has been sending in memorials constantly +for fifty months. + +The Memorials are tedious, and necessarily full of repetitions. I +have only thought it advisable to give three of them in the Appendix, +as specimens. + +The fourth document in the Appendix is a letter from Fernando de +Castro, who had married the widow of Mendaña. He prayed that no +concession might be made to Quiros, as he, Castro, had inherited the +claims of Mendaña on the Solomon Islands. + +The two letters from Diego de Prado y Tovar, [27] the malignant enemy +of Quiros, follow. This man had made the voyage with Torres, and +wrote from Goa, on his way home. He forwarded four valuable and very +interesting maps, the originals of which are now at Simancas. They +are from the surveys of Torres, who had probably died previous to +the date of Prado's letters. One is a plan of the Bay of St. Philip +and St. James; the other three are plans of bays in New Guinea. They +are coloured, with long descriptive titles. [28] Reduced copies, +in colour, were published in the Boletin of the Madrid Geographical +Society, in 1878, [29] with the long titles printed separately. I +have had these maps reproduced for the present work. The abuse of +Quiros by this insubordinate officer can be taken for what it is worth. + +Another detractor of his commander was the disloyal Accountant, Juan +de Iturbe. He wrote a long letter from Mexico, dated March 25th, 1607, +[30] which was referred to the Council of the Indies and retained for +reference. He gives a fairly truthful account of the events connected +with the return of the Capitana, while trying inferentially to throw +blame on Quiros. He ridiculed the ceremonies at Espiritu Santo, and the +creation of an order of knighthood by Quiros; and while representing +the importance of the discoveries, he added that Quiros was not a fit +man to command a new expedition. I have not thought it necessary to +insert the letter of Iturbe, as it contains no new information. + +The next two documents in the Appendix speak for themselves. One +is a Minute of the Council of the Indies on the demands of Quiros, +and on the most politic way of treating him. The other is an order to +check him in the printing and dissemination of his Memorials, which +were to be considered confidential. We know that two at least had +been published at Seville, and had fallen into the hands of Purchas +and Hessel Gerritsz. + +The last document in the Appendix is the Memorial on the discovery of +the Antarctic continent and the conversion of its inhabitants, by a +Chilian lawyer named Juan Luis Arias. It is bound up in a volume in +the British Museum, with other documents, chiefly memorials, relating +to the Church of Spain. [31] The text was reprinted at Edinburgh +in the last century, and translated by Dalrymple in 1773. Its chief +interest lies in the statement that Juan Fernandez led an expedition +from Chile which discovered the Southern Continent, landed on it, +and had intercourse with the inhabitants. Dalrymple and Burney treat +this fabrication seriously, and conjecture that the discovered land +might have been New Zealand. I have discussed the career of Juan +Fernandez in a footnote to the Memorial of Arias in the Appendix. [32] + +We get a glimpse of the view taken by leading Spanish statesmen +under Philip III, of the Memorials and aspirations of Quiros, from +the Minutes of a sitting of the Council of State in July, 1609. [33] +The Cardinal-Archbishop of Toledo, [34] the Constable of Castille, +[35] the Duke of Infantado, [36] the Count of Lemos, [37] and other +grandees, were present. + +The letter from Juan de Iturbe, as well as the Memorials of Quiros, +were before them. The Count of Lemos wrote a Minute strongly against +the employment of Quiros. The feeling was that further expenditure +on such voyages was undesirable, and that it would be wiser to spend +money in completing the exploration of Peru and Mexico. They looked +upon Quiros as a very discontented and dangerous man, who might sell +his knowledge and services to the English. The best course would be, +they thought, to keep him quiet in Madrid by promises. He might be +employed to draw maps and charts. If he continued to insist upon +going to Peru, a letter of recommendation might be given to him for +the Viceroy. But it was further suggested that the letter of Iturbe +should also be sent to the Viceroy, with a contra-despacho, leaving +the matter to his discretion, with orders to entertain Quiros and +his proposals, but not to despatch his business. + +This treachery was the final conclusion when Quiros started. Worn +out by delays and obstruction, worried almost to death by Councils +and Committees, he gladly accepted the promise to give him command +of an expedition. Ignorant of the contra-despacho, he put his trust +in the honour of the new Viceroy of Peru, a great man, Don Francisco +de Borja, Prince of Esquilache, [38] with whom he proceeded on the +voyage to Peru, accompanied by his wife and two children. He thought +that at length, after years of wearisome solicitation, his grand +ideas were to be realised. Fortunately for the brave enthusiast, +he was saved from the anguish of being undeceived by a timely death +at Panama on his way out. He died at the age of fifty, quite worn +out and driven to his grave by Councils and Committees, with their +futile talk, needless delays, and endless obstruction. His faithful +Secretary, Belmonte Bermudez, who had edited the Memorials for him, +stood by him to the last. [39] + +The ideas of Quiros respecting an Antarctic continent were, no +doubt, fixed in his mind by seeing the coast-lines delineated by the +map-makers of his time. It, therefore, becomes very interesting to +trace this southern coast-line on the principal maps from the time +of Ortelius down to the last map that showed it before Captain Cook's +second voyage finally disproved its existence. Mr. Basil Soulsby has +kindly prepared a note on this subject, which follows the Introduction. + +The voyage of Quiros was the first event in the story of +Antarctic enterprise. Its object was the discovery of the Southern +Continent and the annexation of the South Pole. It was the dream +of an enthusiast. It was a failure, but not altogether a barren +failure. Others of another nation were to follow up his idea. He +fell, worried to death by Committees. But he opened the glorious +record of Antarctic discovery. Captain Cook made known the Southern +Continent imagined by Quiros, and actually seen by Torres. Captain +Cook first crossed the Antarctic circle, and searched all round it +for the supposed coast-lines of Quiros. Great communities were to +arise in the Southern Continent, in Australia and New Zealand, but +not of Spanish race. The achievements of the peoples of the Iberian +peninsula were of vast importance to the world; but they came to an +end with the voyage of Quiros. The mantle of discovery fell on other +shoulders. James Ross followed Cook in realising the dream of Quiros; +and now we recognise Robert Falcon Scott as the greatest and most +successful of Antarctic discoverers. + + + + + + +COMPARATIVE LIST OF MAPS OF THE NEW HEBRIDES, ETC., 1570-1904. + +With British Museum press-marks. + + +1.--1570. Antwerp. Typus Orbis Terrarum. In Abraham Ortelius's +Atlas.--The Terra Australis, with Beach provincia aurifera, extends +right across the world, and from the Tropic of Capricorn to the +S. Pole. New Guinea appears as an island. The Molucca Islands are +shown. [Maps. 46. c. 2.] + +2.--1578. Antwerp. Universi Orbis seu Terreni Globi in plano +effigies. In G. de Jode's "Speculum Orbis Terrarum," 1578.--New +Guinea forms one end of the Terra Australis, in which Terra del Fuego +appears in the centre, and which stretches across the whole Circulus +Antarcticus. [Maps. 31. c. 5.] + +3.--1587. Antwerp. Typus Orbis Terrarum. In Abraham Ortelius's +Atlas. 1592 edition.--The Terra Australis. The Solomon Islands, +discovered in 1568, appear with this name for the first +time. [Maps. 46. d. 2.] + +4.--1587. Duisburg. Orbis Terrae Compendiosa Descriptio. By Rumold +Mercator. In G. Mercator's Atlas, 1589.--The Terra Australis, but +without the Solomon Islands. Java Minor appears to the S.E. of Beach +province. [Maps. 34. c. 2.] + +5.--1589. Antwerp. Totius Orbis cogniti universalis Descriptio. In +C. de Jode's "Speculum Orbis Terrarum." 1593.--New Guinea an +island. Otherwise as in 2. [Maps. 24. c. 7.] + +6.--1590. Amsterdam. Orbis Terrarum Typus De Integro multis in locis +emendatus. Auctore Petro. Plancio.--Terra Australis Magellanica, with +Beach provincia aurifera, extends across the Antarctic Circle. "Nova +Guinea nuper inventa quez an sit insula an pars continentis australis +incertum est." Insulae Salomonis alone of Quiros' islands are +shown. [920. (266.)] + +7.--1612. Antwerp. In A. Ortelius' Atlas, Latin edition. Same as +No. 3. [Maps. 46. d. 12.] + +8.--1628. London. A New & Accurate Mappe of the World. By +R. Vaughan. (From "The World encompassed by Sir Francis Drake").--"This +South part of the world contayning almost the third part of the globe +is yet unknowne, certaine sea coasts excepted, which rather show there +is a land then discry eyther land people or comodities," appears on +"The Southerne Unknowne Land," across the Antarctic Circle. New Guinee +is shown. [920. (46.)] + +9.--1630. Amsterdam. Nova Totius Terrarum Orbis Geographica ac +Hydrographica Tabula. By Henricus Hondius. In H. Hexham's English +edition of G. Mercator's Atlas. 1636.--The Terra Australis, with the +Beach province, is defined in very faint outline. The Ladrones appear, +also Baixos de S. Barth, I. d. S. Petro, J. Vesinos, Barbudos, I. de +Paxaros. The Solomon Islands are not given. [Maps. 34. d. 8.] + +10.--1641. Amsterdam. Same as No. 9. In J. Jansson's +Atlas. 1653. [Maps. 88. e. 1.] + +11.--1662. Amsterdam. Nova et accuratissima totius Terrarum +Orbis Tabula. Joannes Blaeu.--The large Terra Australis has +disappeared. Hollandia Nova is outlined, but N. Guinea is only +partially outlined. + +Zelandia Nova has a western coast-line only. Antonii Van Diemans Landt +is partly outlined. The words Australia Incognita occur on the circle +of the Southern Polar Region. [Maps. 64. e. 1.] + +12.--1660. London. A New Map of the Terraqueous Globe according to the +latest discoveries and most general divisions of it into continents +and oceans. In Edw. Well's "A New Sett of Maps."--"New Zeland supposed +to be part of ye Southern unknown Continent." 35° S. + +"New Holland esteemed to be part of ye Southern unknown continent," +mixed up with New Guinea, touching the Equator, and all only partly +outlined. + +The smaller islands are not named. [Maps. 87. d. 3.] + +13.--1667. Paris. Mappe-Monde. In N. Sanson's (d'Abbéville) Atlas.--New +Guinea appears as an island. The Beach Province is only partially +outlined. Terre Magellanique Australe Incogneue is outlined right +across the Southern Hemisphere, as in No. 1. Nearly all the islands +in the New Hebrides mentioned by Quiros are shown. [Maps. 88. d. 3.] + +14.--1668. Paris. Carte Universelle de tout le Monde. Par +H. Jaillot.--Terra Australis, showing Beach provincia aurifera, +extends right across the Antarctic Circle. Petan Island and Java Minor +are to the E. of Beach. Nova Guinea jam recens detecta ab I. Lamero, +is partly shown in outline. [920. (61.)] + +15.--1674. Rome. Mappa Mondo. By Gio. Lhuilier. In G. G. de Rossi's +Mercurio Geografico.--Terra di Quir, N. coast, is shown in outline, +S. of Solomon Islands, 10° to 20° S. Nova Guinea appears as an +island. Terra Magellanica embraces the Arctic Circle. Nova Olanda is +shown, but without the E. coast. The smaller islands are not given. New +Zealand appears in outline. [Maps. 64. d. 10.] + +16.--1680.--Oxford. Orbis Terrarum nova et accuratissima +Tabula. Auctore Joanne à Loon. In Moses Pitt's "The English Atlas," +vol. i. 1680.--New Zealand, E. coast, shown in outline. The islands +mainly as in No. 13. N. Guinea and Hollandia Nova are shown in outline +on W. coast. Van Diemen's Land shown in detail. The Terra Australis +does not extend across the Antarctic Circle. [Maps. 85. e. 3.] + +17.--1690. Amsterdam. Nova Orbis Tabula in Lucem edita a F. de Wit. In +F. de Wit's Atlas.--The small islands are as in No. 9. N. Guinea +and Hollandia Nova join, and the western coast is outlined. Zelandia +Nova is outlined also on the W. coast. Australia Incognita is printed +round the circle of the S. Pole. [Maps. 86. d. 11.] + +18.--1690. Amsterdam. Orbis Terrarum Nova et Accuratissima +Tabula. Auctore Nicolao Visscher. In N. Visscher's Atlas +Minor. Tom. 1.--Same as No. 17. [Maps. 89. e. 3.] + +19.--1696. Paris. Mappe-Monde. By N. Sanson. In H. Jaillot's "Nouveau +Atlas."--As in 15. Carpentaria, N.W. coast, appears below Nouvelle +Guinée, between 10° and 20° S. [Maps. 84. e. 1.] + +20.--1700. Paris. Mappe monde. Par Guillaume Delisle. In G. De L'Isle's +Atlas. 1715.--Nouvelle Guinée and Nouvelle Hollande are joined, and +are outlined on the W. coast, as in Nle. Zelande. Terre de Diemen is +outlined on the S.E. coast. + +The following routes, in dotted lines, are shown:-- + + + Ferdinand Magellan, 1520. + Juan Gaetan, 1542. + Mendaña and Gallego, 1568. + Mendaña and Quiros, 1595. + An English Pilot, reported by Robert Dudley, c. 1600. + Olivier du Nord, 1600. + Le Maire and Cornelius Schouten, 1616. + Pelsart, 1629. + Abel Tasman, 1642. + William Dampier, 1686. + + +"Isle découverte par Drak" occurs in lat. 66° S., long. 75°, above +the S. Polar region. Terre que la flote de Mendaña crut être la +Nle. Guinée occurs in lat. 6° S., long. 188°. [Maps. 86 d. 1.] + +21.--1705. Paris. Mappe-Monde. In N. de Fer's "Atlas +Curieux."--N. Guinée and Nouvelle Hollande are connected, and shown +on W. coast. Nouv. Zeelande, W. coast, appears in outline. The smaller +islands are not shown. [Maps. 1. c. 46.] + +22.--1710. London. A New and Correct Map of the World. By +C. Price.--New Guinea and New Holland are not connected, but +the E. coast is not shown. Diemen's Land is given, due S. of +N. Holland, between 39° and 45°. The smaller islands are as in +No. 9. [Maps. 63. f. 2.] + +23.--1720. Paris. Mappemonde. Par Guillaume De L'Isle.--In G. De +L'Isle's Atlas, 1732.--Mainly as in No. 20. Mendaña's "New Guinea" +appears as the Solomon Islands. "Les Marquises de Mendoce" are +shown. [Maps. 91. e. 3.] + +24.--1720. Amsterdam. Diversa Orbis Terræ ... in Planum Orthographica +Projectio. By Peter Schenck. In J. B. Homann's Atlas. 1740.--Hollandia +Nova nearly complete. To E. of Carpentaria comes Quiro Regio, between +10° and 20° S. Most of Quiros' smaller islands are shown. Zelandia +Nova, and Antoni van Diemen's Land are partly shown. Baye S. Philippe +and St. Jacques occur both in Quiro Regio and in Zelandia Nova. The +continent of Terra Australis, across the S. Pole, now disappears. [Maps +87. e. 12.] + +25.--1730. Augsburg. Diversi Globi Terr-Aquei ... in planum delineati +Orthographici Prospectus. In M. Seutter's Atlas Novus.--Same as No. 15, +with various route tracks added. Regio habitata detecta per Mendaña, +occurs between 10° and 20° N. Terra quam vidit Mendaña occurs on +the Equator, 260° Long. Baye de S. Philippe et S. Jaques occurs in +Zeelandia Nova, 40° S. The smaller islands are shown. [Maps. 89. e. 4.] + +26.--1740. Amsterdam. Hémisphère Meridional. Par G. Delisle.--Terres +Australes, Nouvelle Hollande, W. coast shown in outline. Terre Australe +du St. Esprit (R. Jordan, Port de la Vraie Croix, R. S. Sauveur, G. de +S. Jaque et S. Philippe), shown in outline, E. of Carpentarie. Routes +of Quiros and Gallego, Le Maire and Schouten, etc., shown. Cape de +la Circoncision, Jan. 1, 1739, between 50° and 68° S. [960. (1.)] + +27.--1752. London. A New and Accurate Map of all the Known World.--In +Emman. Bowen's "Complete Atlas."--New Guinea, New Holland, and Van +Diemen's Land are shown as one continent, New Zeeland, W. coast, +in outline. "Land and Is. discovered by Quiros," between 10° and 20° +S. but not named. [Maps. 89. d. 2.] + +28.--1752. Paris. Mappemonde.--In Robert de Vaugondy's Atlas +Universel. 1757.--Terres et isles vues par Quiros en 1605, shown +without names. New Guinea continent as in No. 27. Terre découverte +par les Vaisseaux de la Compagnie des Indes en Janvier 1739, shown +between 50° and 60° S. 30° Long. [Maps. 69. e. 1.] + +29.--1753. Paris. Nouvelle Mappe-Monde. Par Guill. De la Haye.--T. du +St. Esprit, is shown, 160° Long. [920. (83).] + +30.--1755. Paris. Mappemonde.--In J. Palairet's "Atlas +Méthodique."--Same as No. 28. [Maps 68. e. 2.] + +31.--1761. Paris. Hémisphère Occidental ou du Nouveau Monde. Hémisphère +Oriental ou de l'Ancien Monde. Par le Sr. D'Anville.--Nouvelle Guinea +and Nouvelle Hollande are one. The E. coast is not defined. Terre +du St. Esprit, Terre de Quiros, appear due E. of Nouvelle Hollande, +between 10° and 20° S. Nouvelle Zeelande and Terre de Diemen are +partly outlined. [920. (272.)] + +32.--1773. London. Map of the World, after D'Anville. By +T. Kitchen.--Tierra del Spiritu Santo, Land of Quiros, is shown. New +Zealand, with two islands, appears in detail; New Holland, with New +South Wales, and Van Diemen's Land, also appears with a complete +coast-line, for the first time. [Maps. 86. d. 5.] + +33.--1776. London. Chart of Discoveries made in the South Pacific +Ocean in H.M. ship Resolution, under ... Captain Cook. 1774. By +W. Palmer.--Tierra del Espiritu Santo, and the rest of the New +Hebrides, are shown in very complete detail. [981. (4.)] + +34.--1786. Paris. Hémisphère Occidentale, etc. (see No. 31. 1761.) Revu +par M. Barbié du Bocage.--Terre de Kerguelen appears 50° S. The map +is an improvement on 1773, but Nouvelle Guinée is not shown complete, +and Terre de Diemen is still part of Australia. [Maps. 86. d. 2.] + +35.--1790. London. New World or Western Hemisphere.--Eastern +Hemisphere or Old World. In W. Faden's General Atlas.--Shows +Cook's Track, 1769-78. Furneaux's Track, 1774. Van Diemen's Land +is part of Terra Australis. The smaller islands are clear and more +correct. [Maps. 2. e. 1.] + +36.--1798. London. Chart of the Pacific Ocean. By A. Arrowsmith.--New +Holland (S. coast excepted) in outline. Van Diemen's Land shown as +an island. New Guinea only partly shown, and in outline. [980. (10.)] + +37.--1799. London. Map of the World, after d'Anville, by +T. Kitchen.--Tierra del Spiritu Santo now appears as part of the New +Hebrides. Otherwise as in No. 32. 1773. [Maps. 89. e. 6.] + +38.--1799. London. Chart containing the greater part of the South +Sea, etc. By Laurie and Whittle.--New Zeeland, in two islands. Tierra +(Austral) del Spiritu Santo, in New Hebrides. Route of Mendaña in 1567 +shown. Below the Society Islands, "Islands seen by Quiros." Between +25° and 30° S. "Santelmo the southernmost island of Quiros according +to Ulloa." [981. (2.)] + +39.--1799. London. Western (Eastern) Hemisphere. In "Cary's New +Universal Atlas," 1808.--New Holland, with New South Wales, is shown +complete, except Northernmost point. New Guinea is not complete, and in +outline. The islands are as in Laurie and Whittle. [Maps. 92. f. 17.] + +40.--1824. St. Pétersbourg. Carte Générale de l'Océan +Pacifique. Hémisphère Austral. In Krusenstern's "Atlas de l'Océan +Pacifique."--Australia appears so-called for the first time. The +islands, Nlles. Hebrides, etc., are shown with the dates of +discovery. [Maps. 7. e. 11.] + +41.--1827. Bruxelles. Carte d'Assemblage de l'Océanie. In +"Ph. Vandermaelen's Atlas Universel."--Nouvelle Hollande and N. Guinée +are shown in complete outline. New Zealand in three islands. The +smaller islands are now as before. [Maps. 68. e. 1.] + +42.--1827. Gotha. Australien. No. 50 in Ad. Stieler's +"Hand-Atlas."--Neu Holland and Neu Süd Wales appear as parts of +"Austral-Land." Neue Hebriden and the other groups of islands are +shown. [Maps. 85. d. 10.] + +43.--1835. London. The World, on Mercator's Projection. In +J. Arrowsmith's London Atlas.--"New Holland or Australia," without +any inland towns. First use of the name of Australia for New Holland +in a general Atlas. New South Wales still extends to the Gulf of +Carpentaria. The Solomon Islands, New Hebrides, and the other +islands are now completely shown. New Zealand, without inland +towns, in three islands. Terra Australis or Australia occurs in +the Atlas to Capt. Matthew Flinders's "Voyage to Terra Australis, +1801-1803." 2 vols. London, 1814 [455. c. 13, 14. and Tab. 437. a.] In +vol. i. pp. vii-x, he mentions Torres's discovery of Australia. In +J. Arrowsmith's Map of the Pacific Ocean, 1832, the dates of discovery +are given to most of the islands. [Maps. 86. d. 7.] + +44.--1866. London. New Caledonia, New Hebrides, and Loyalty +Islands. Admiralty Chart.--This is the best modern map of Quiros's +islands. The Atlases between 1836 and 1865 do not show much change +or much detail. [Sec. xv. (1380.)] + +45.--1886. New Hebrides Islands. Banks Group. Surveyed by +H.M.S. Dart. Admiralty Chart.--Gaua (Santa Maria) and the other +islands are shown on a large scale. [Sec. xv. (174.)] + +46.--1892. London. New Hebrides Islands. Malo Island to Efate +Island. Admiralty Chart.--This is on a much larger scale, +and gives the islands in full detail, surveyed by H.M.S. Dart, +1890-91. [Sec. xv. (1570.)] + +47.--1896. London. New Caledonia, New Hebrides, and Loyalty +Islands. Admiralty Chart.--This is a new edition of No. 44. The +islands are shown in much more exact detail, and with more information. + +48.--1904. London. British New Guinea and the Solomon, Santa Cruz, +and New Hebrides Islands. In Edward Stanford's London Atlas. 3rd +edition. 1904.--This is a very excellent and clear map; scale, +1:4,089,064. 64.537 English miles to 1 inch. + + + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHY, + +With British Museum Press-marks. + + +Antonio (Nicolas).--Bibliotheca Hispana Nova ... 1500 ad 1684. [Edited +by T. A. Sanchez, J. A. Pellicer, and R. Casalbonus.) 2 tom. Apud +Joachimum de Ibarra: Matriti, 1783-88. 4°. [2049, e.--126. h. 5, +6,--128. h. 4, 5,--G. 53.] + +---- Bibliotheca Hispana Vetus. [Edited by E. Marti.] Roma, +1696. fol. [617. m. 14.--1788.--2049. e.--126. h. 3, 4.--128. h. 2, +3.--G. 52.] + +Arias (Juan Luis), Dr. [A Memorial addressed to Philip III., King of +Spain, respecting the exploration, colonisation, and conversion of +the Southern Land.] [Madrid, 1640.] fol. [4745. f. 11. (18.).--1324, +k. 5. (72.)] + +---- [Another edition.] [571. k. 11. (14.)] Edimbourga, 1773. 4°. + +---- [Another edition.] In R. H. Major's "Early Voyages to Terra +Australis." Hakluyt Society: London, 1859. 8°. [Ac. 6172-23.] + +Bougainville (Louis Antoine de) Count.--Voyage autour du Monde +par la frégate du Roi La Boudeuse, et la flûte L'Etoile en +1766-69. pp. 417. Saillant & Nyon: Paris, 1771. 4°. The map +at p. 19 has the track of Capt. Cook marked in pencil by +himself. (C. 28. 1. 10.--454. a. 1.--215. c. 5.--G. 2831.] + +---- A Voyage round the World ... 1766-69. Translated by Johann +Reinhold Forster. Plates and maps. pp. xxviii. 476. J. Nourse: London, +1772. 4°. [983. d. 1.] + +Brosses (Charles de).--Histoire des Navigations aux Terres +Australes. [An English translation, with additions, was issued by John +Callander in 1766-68.] 2 tom. Durand: Paris, 1756. 4°. [454. a. 17, +18.--566. h. 5, 6.--215. a. 15.--G. 7382-3.] + +Burney (James), Admiral. A Chronological History of the Discoveries +in the South Sea or Pacific Ocean. 5 vol. pp. 680. G. & W. Nicol: +London, 1803-17. 4°. [455. b. 17-2.--G. 7231-2.] + +Callander (John).--Terra Australis Cognita: or, Voyages to the +Terra Australis, or Southern Hemisphere, during the Sixteenth, +Seventeenth, and Eighteenth Centuries. [A translation, with additions, +of Ch. de Brosses' "Histoire des Navigations aux Terres Australes.] 3 +vol. A. Donaldson: Edinburgh, 1766-68. 8°. [566. c. 1-3.--G. 16065-67.] + +Clavius (Christophorus).--Gnomonices libri octo. pp.654. Apud +Franciscum Zanettum. Romæ, 1581. fol. [533. k.2.] + +---- Romani Calendarii Gregorio XIII. P.M. restituti +explicatio. pp. 680. Apud Aloysium Zannettum: Romæ, +1603. fol. [532. k. 10.] On the binding of this and the previous work +are the arms of King James I of England. + +See also Euclid. + +Coleccion de Documentos.--Ineditos para la historia de España. 1842, +etc. 8°. + +See Fernandez de Navarrete (Martin). + +---- sacados del Real Archivo de Indias. 1864-83. + +See Pacheco (Joaquin Francisco). + +Collingridge (George).--The Discovery of Australia ... Illustrations, +Charts, Maps, etc. pp. xv. 376. Hayes Bros.: Sydney, +1895. 4°. [9781. g. 13.] + +Comedias Escogidas. + +See Spain. + +Cook (James), Captain.--A Voyage towards the South Pole +and round the World; performed in his Majesties ships, the +Resolution and Adventure ... 1772-75, etc. 2 vols. W. Straham +& T. Cadell: London, 1777. 4°. [454. h. 7-8.--213. d. 8, +9.--Maps. K. 12. Tab. 21.--G. 7416-17.--K. 12. Tab. 20.] + +Cordova (Diego de) Fray.--Cronica de la religiosissima provincia de la +Orden de San Francisco. Salinas, 1651. [Not in the British Museum. A +copy in the Library at Lima.] + +Daça (Antonio) Fray.--Quarte Parte de la Chronica General de +San Francisco y su Apostolica orden, etc. [Being a continuation +of M. da Silva's Chronicles of the Friars Minors.] Valladolid, +1611. fol. [4783. d. 5.] + +Dalrymple (Alexander).--An Account of the Discoveries made in the +South Pacifick Ocean previous to 1764. Part 1. pp. xxxi. 103. 7 +plates. London, 1767. 8°. [1045. e. 26.] + +---- An Historical Collection of the several Voyages and +Discoveries in the South Pacific Ocean. 2 vols. Printed for +the author: London, 1770-71. 4°. [560. h. 9. (2.)--454. h. 5, +6. (1.)--212. d. 11.--C. 1781.] + +---- 35 Charts, 1769-98. [460. g. 6.--435. k. 17, 18.--570. h. 1-4.] + +Daza (Antonio), Fray. + +See Daça. + +Duro (Cesario Fernandez). + +See Fernandez Duro (Cesario). + +Ercilla y Zuñiga (Alonso de).--La Araucana de Don A. de Erzilla y +Çuñiga (Canto primero-quinzeno). Madrid, 1569. 8°. [C. 58. c. 25.] + +Euclid.--Euclidis Elementorum Lib. xv. ... illustrati ... auctore +C. Clavio. 1589. 8°. [8533. aaa. 23.] + +Fernandez de Navarrete (Martin).--Coleccion de documentos +inéditos para la historia de España. (Indice, 1891.) Madrid, 1849, +etc. 8°. [9197. f.] + +Fernandez de Queiros (Pedro).-- + +See Quiros (Pedro Fernandez de). + +Fernandez Duro (Cesario).--Disquisiciones náuticas. (lib. 6: Arca de +Noe.) 6 lib. Madrid, 1876-81. 8°. [8806. dd. 14.] + +Figueroa (Christoval Suarez de). + +See Suarez de Figueroa. + +Gerritszoon (Hessel). + +See Hudson (Henry), the navigator. + +Gil Blas. + +See Le Sage (Alain René). + +Hudson (Henry) the Navigator.--Descriptio ac Delineatio Geographica +Detectionis Freti ... recens investigati ab. H. Hudsono ... Item +Narratio ... Australia Incognitæ ... per P. Ferdinandez de Quir, +etc. [Edited by H. Gerritszoon.] Ex officina H. Gerardi: Amsterodami, +1612. 4o. [1045. e. 15. (1.)--G. 7163.--1613. 1045. e. 15. (4.)--500. +b. 25. (10.)--G. 7164.] + +---- The Arctic North-East and West Passage. Detectio Freti Hudsoni, +or H. Gerritsz's Collection of Tracts by himself, Massa, and de +Quir, on the N.E. and W. Passage, Siberia and Australia. Reproduced +with the maps, in photolithography, in Dutch and Latin after the +editions of 1612 and 1613. Augmented with a new English translation +by F. J. Millard ... and an Essay on the origin and design of this +collection by S. Muller. Amsterdam, 1878. 4o. [10460. bb. 7. This +entry does not occur under Hudson in the British Museum Catalogue.] + +Jiménez de la Espada (Marcos).--Relaciones geográficas de Indias. [Not +in the British Museum Catalogue.] + +Juan y Santacilla (Jorge) and Ulloa (Antonio de) Admiral.--Noticias +secretas de America ... escritas ... segun las instrucciones +del ... Secretario de Estado y presentadas en informe secreto a +S. M. C. ... Fernando VI., por J. Juan y a de Ulloa ... Sacadas a luz +para el verdadero conocimiento del gobierno de los Españoles en la +America meridional por de Barry. (Apendice. Informe del Intendente de +Guamanga Don D. O'Higgins al Ministro de Indias.) 2 pt. John Murray: +London, 1826. 4o. [795 m. 5.--G. 6270.] + +La Espada (Marcos Jiménez de).-- + +See Jiménez de La Espada (Marcos). + +Le Sage (Alain René).--Histoire de Gil Blas de Santillane. Troisième +edition. 3 tom. Rouen, 1721-1724. 8o. [243. h. 25-27. Neither the +First nor the Second Editions are in the British Museum.] + +---- Avec des notes historiques et littéraires par M. le Comte +François de Neufchateau. L. P. 3 tom. (Collection des Classiques +François.) Lefèvre: Paris, 1825. 8o. [12512. g. 25.] + +Mac Kenna (Benjamin Vicuña). + +See Vicuña Mac Kenna (Benjamin). + +Major (Richard Henry), of the British Museum.--Early Voyages to +Terra Australis, now called Australia. A collection of documents, and +extracts from early MSS. Maps,... from the beginning of the sixteenth +century to the time of Capt. Cook. Edited with an Introduction by +R. H. Major. pp. cxix. 200. 13. 5 Maps. Index. (Ser. 1, 25). Hakluyt +Society: London, 1859. 8o. [Ac. 6172/23.] + +Moresby (John), Admiral.--New Guinea & Polynesia. Discoveries & +Surveys in New Guinea and the D'Entrecasteaux Islands: A cruise +... of H.M.S. Basilisk. pp. xviii. 327. John Murray: London, +1876. 8o. [2374. c. 8.] + +Morga (Antonio de).--Sucesos de las Islas Philipinas. ff. 172. Mexici +ad Indos, 1609. 4o. [C. 32. f. 31.--G. 6939.] + +---- The Philippine Islands, Moluccas, Siam, Cambodia, Japan +and China, at the close of the sixteenth century.... Translated +from the Spanish, with notes and a preface, and a Letter from +Luis Vaez de Torres, describing his Voyage through the Torres +Straits, by the Hon. Henry E. J. Stanley [Lord Stanley of +Alderley]. pp. xxiv. 431. 2 Illus. Index. (Ser. 1. 39.) Hakluyt +Society: London, 1868. 8o. [Ac. 6172/60.] + +Navarrete (Martin Fernandez de). + +See Fernandez de Navarrete (M.) + +Pacheco (Joaquin Francisco).--Coleccion de Documentos inéditos +relativos al descubrimiento, conquista y colonizacion de las posesiones +españolas en América y Occeania [sic], sacados, en su mayor parte, +del Real Archivo de Indias, bajo la direccion de ... J. F. Pacheco, +etc. (Segunda serie, publicada por la Real Academia de la Historia.) 40 +tom. Madrid, 1864-83. 8o. [9551. g.] + +Petherick (Edward Augustus).--Bibliography of Australia. In "The Torch +& Colonial Bookseller." vol. i. 89-97, 162-172; ii. 2-8, 127-140; +iii. 136-138. Colonial Booksellers' Agency: London, 1887-92. 8o. + +Quiros (Pedro Fernandez de). + +See also Hudson (Henry), the Navigator. + +Quiros (Pedro Fernandez de).--Historia del descubrimiento de +las regiones Austriales hecho por el General Pedro Fernandez +de Quiros. Publicada por Don Justo Zaragoza. (Biblioteca +Hispana-Ultramarina.) 3 vols. M. G. Hernandez: Madrid, +1876-82. 8o.) [9771. ee. 17.] + +---- Begin. Señor. El Capitan Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, etc. [The +original petition of P. F. de Quiros to Philip III of Spain concerning +the discovery of Australia.] ff. 2. [Seville, 1610.] fol. [G. 7240.] + +---- Relation Herrn. P. Fernandes de Quir.... Von dem new erfundnem +vierten Theil der Welt, so bissher in Mappis der Land [t]afflen +Terra Australis incognita genannt, und desselben Länder.... In +Spanischer Sprach ... getruckt, jetzo aber ... ins Teutsch +gebracht. pp. 9. C. Dabertzhofer: Augspurg, 1611. 4o. [1295. b. 18.] + +---- Account of a Memorial presented to His Majesty [Philip III, King +of Spain] by ... P. Fernandez de Quir, concerning the population and +discovery of the fourth part of the world, Australia the unknown, +its great riches and fertility ... printed ... anno 1610. From the +Spanish ["Relacion de un Memorial."] With an introductory notice by +W. A. Duncan. Spanish and English, pp. 38. Thomas Richards: Sydney, +1874. 8o. [10492. bbb. 1.] + +---- The Copie of a Petition presented to the King of Spaine by +Capt. P. F. de Quir, touching the discouerie of the fourth part of the +world, called Terra Australis Incognita. [From the Spanish. Another +Petition in Spanish, giving an account of his discoveries.] In "Purchas +(Samuel), Purchas his Pilgrimes," pt. 4. 1625. fol. [679. h. 14.] + +---- Voyage. Memorial presented to Philip II of Spain.--Relation of +a Memorial presented ... to His Majesty about the settling ... of +... Australia Incognita. (In Dalrymple (Alexander).--"An Historical +Collection," etc.) 1770, etc. 4o. [566. h. 9. (2.)] + +---- Fernand de Quiros to Polynesia and Australasia. (In "Callander +(John) Terra Australis cognita.") vol. 2. 1766, etc. 8o. [566 c. 2.] + +Quiros (Pedro Fernandez de).--Voyage de Quiros. (In "Charton +(Edouard)), Voyageurs anciens et modernes. tom. 4. 1854, +etc. 8o. [10027. g. 2.] + +---- MS. in Private Library of the King of Spain. Another copy in +Library of the Ministry of Marine, Madrid. + +---- Informaciones presentados por el Capitan Pedro Fernandez de +Quiros para paser a las Indias con su mujer y hijos, en la casa de +contratacion de Sevilla, 24 Marzo, 1615. (Archivo de Indias.) + +---- Narratio ... Regi Hispaniæ facta super tractu ... cui Australiæ +incognitæ nomen est, recens detecto. (In Hudson (H.)) Descriptio +... geographica detectionis freti ... sive transitus ad +Occasum. 1612. 4o. [1045. e. 15. (1.)] + +---- [Another copy, with an additional title-page.] Exemplar Libelli +supplicis, potentissimo Hispaniarum Regi exhibiti, a Capitaneo Petro +Fernandez de Quir: super detectione quintæ Orbis terrarum partis, +cui Autraliæ [sic] Incognitæ nomen est, etc. [G. 7165. (2.)] + +---- [Another edition.] In Orbis.--Recentes Novi Orbis +Historiæ. 1612. 8o. [1061. a. 4.] + +---- [Another edition.] In Bry (J. T. de) and (J. I. de) +[Indiæ Orientalis. Part. x.] Indiæ Orientalis +pars. x. 1613. fol. [986. h. 20. (7.)] + +---- [Another edition.] In Hudson (Henry).--Descriptio ac Delineatio +Geographica detectionis Freti, etc. 1613. 4o. [1045. e. 15. (4.)] + +---- [Another edition.] In Bry (J. T. de) and (J. I. de).--[India +Orientalis. Part x. 2nd edition.] India Orientalis pars +x. 1633. fol. [215. c. 13. (4.)] + +---- De Terra Austriale Incognita. [Another edition.] In Bry +(T. de.) (America, Part 13.) Decima tertia pars Historiæ Americanæ, +etc. 1634. fol. [566. 1. 9. (2.)] + +---- Terra Australis Incognita, or a new Southerne Discoverie, +containing a fifth part of the World, lately found out +by Ferdinand de Quir. pp. 27. John Hodgetts: London, +1617. 4o. [T. 809. (8.)--C. 32. g. 33.--C. 13 a. 11. (1.)] + +---- [Another edition.] pp. 31. W. Bray: London, +[1723.] 8o. [B. 513. (1.)--112. a. 67.--G. 15929.] + +---- Verhael van seker Memorial ... aengaende de bevolckinghe ende +ontdeckinghe van 't vierde deel des Werelts, ghenaemt Australia +incognita, etc. [Amsterdam, 1612.] 4o. [1045. e. 15. (2.)] + +---- [Another copy.] In "Samoyedes."--Beschryvinghe van der Samoyeden +Landt. 1612. 4o. [10055. b. 34.] + +---- [Another edition.] In L'Hermite (J.)--Journal van de Nassausche +Vloot. J. P. Wachter: Amstelredam, 1643. 4o. [1061. g. 42.] + +---- Copie de la Requeste presentee au Roy d'Espagne par le Capitaine +Pierre Ferdinand de Quir, sur la descouverte de la cinquiesme partie du +monde, appellee la terre Australle, incogneuë, et des grandes richesses +et fertilité d'icelle. pp. 16. Paris, 1617. 8o. [10491. aa. 13.] + +---- Relation einer wunderbarlichen Supplication, +Ihr. Königl. Magest. in Spanien, von ... P. Fernandes de Quir +... belangendt die Entdeckung dess ffünfften Thiels der Welt, Terra +Australis incognita genandt.... In Hulsius (L.) [Collection of Voyages +& Travels.] Thl. 12. [1598, etc.] 4o. [10028. d. 37.] + +---- ---- [Another edition.] See Bry (J. T. de) & (J. I. de). [Indiæ +Orientalis. Pt. 10. German.] Zehenden Theil der Orientalischen Indien, +etc.) 1613. fol. [10003. e. 13.] + +---- ---- [Another edition.] See Bry +(T. de). [America. Pt. 13. German.] Dreyzehenden Theil Americæ, +etc. 1628. fol. [10003. e. 33. (2.)] + +Spain.--Primera (--quarenta y ocho) parte de Comedias escogidas de los +mejores de España. (Catalogo de Comedias, 1681.) 48 pt. [MS. notes by +L. Tieck.] Madrid, 1652-1704. 4o. 11725, b. c. d.--11726. h. MS. notes +by J. R. Chorley.] + +Suarez de Figueroa (Christoval).--Hechos de Don G. Hurtado de +Mendoza, quarto Marques de Cañete. [With a prefatory notice by +G. Caravajal de Ulloa.] pp. xiv. 324. Emprenta Real: Madrid, +1613. 4o. [1199. h. 18.--278. f. 29.] + +---- [Another edition.] Introduction by D. Barros +Arana. pp. viii. 126. 1864. In "Coleccion de Historiadores +de Chile." Tom. 5. Imprenta del Ferrocarril: Santiago, 1861, +etc. 4o. [9772. e. 19.] + +Torquemada (Fray Juan de) Franciscan.--Ia(--IIIa.) Parte de los +veynte y un libros rituales y Monarchia Indiana con el origen y +guerras de los Indios Occidentales de sus poblaçones descubrimento, +conquista, conversion y otras cosas maravillosas de la mesma tierra. 3 +pt. Matthias Claviso: Sevilla, 1615. fol. [601. k. 16.] + +---- [Another edition. Edited by A. Gonzales-Barcia.] 3 pt. Nicolas +Rodriguez: Madrid, 1723. fol. [146 e. 11-13.--G. 6452-54.] + +Ulloa (Antonio de) Admiral.--Noticias secretas. + +See Juan y Santacilla (Jorge) and Ulloa (A. de), Admiral. + +Ulloa (Antonio de), Admiral.--Relacion historica [by A. de +Ulloa] del viage a la América meridional, etc. (Appendix to +Tom. iv. Resumen histórico ... de los Incas y demas Soberanos +del Peru.) [With plates and maps.] 5 tom. Antonio Marin: Madrid, +1748. 4o. [687. k. 10-14.--983. g. 19, 20.--215. a. 6-9, and +144. e. 14.] + +---- [French translation by E. Mauvillon.] Illd. 2 tom. Arkstee & +Merkus: Amsterdam, 1752. 4o. [211. c. 7, 8.] + +Vicuña MacKenna (Benjamin).--History of Juan Fernandez. Santiago, +1883. [Not in the British Museum Catalogue.] + + + + + + + NARRATIVE + OF THE + Second Voyage + OF THE + Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña, + BY + THE CHIEF PILOT, + PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS. [40] + + + + + + +SECOND VOYAGE OF ALVARO DE MENDAÑA. + +CHAPTER I. + + How the second voyage to the Isles of Solomon was commenced by the + Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña, in whose company Pedro Fernandez + de Quiros went as Pilot and Captain. Recounts the departure + from Callao. + + +Many years having passed in silence since the first voyage of Alvaro +Mendaña, God was served that in the city of Kings, residence of +Viceroys of Peru, the enterprise should be proclaimed which His +Majesty had ordered the Adelantado [41] Alvaro Mendaña to undertake +to the Isles of Solomon. He hoisted his flag, his Captain being his +brother-in-law, Lorenzo Barreto; and he sent another Captain, named +Lope de Vega, to the valleys of Truxillo and Saña, with orders to +recruit men and collect provisions. The Adelantado met with some +difficulties and obstacles in fitting out the expedition, which +Dom Garcia Hurtado de Mendoza, Marquis of Cañete, and then Viceroy +of Peru, helped him to overcome. [42] Thus four vessels were got +ready with as much despatch as possible, and the Adelantado went +from Lima to Callao, with his wife Doña Isabel Barreto, and all the +people he had to take from thence. With the diligence he exercised, +he persuaded and induced Pedro Fernandez de Quiros to come with him +as Captain and Chief Pilot. The Pilot de Quiros had raised several +points with the Adelantado in the conversations they had together +respecting the conduct of the voyage, both in going and returning; +but all were settled, and he ended by resolving to join the expedition. + +The disorders which took place in this expedition were numerous; +and in order that this history may be clear, it is necessary to say +something of them, as it seems to me that they were the cause of the +unfortunate ending of the enterprise. + +The stars of the eighth heaven are unequal in dimensions, for some +appear to our vision great, and others so small that they are scarcely +visible. There are those who say that if one of these should be wanting +in heaven there would be equivalent loss on earth. I mean that the +most minute circumstance that has ceased to do harm may have its +effect on the course of events. + +The Master of the Camp [43] embarked, and the first thing he did was +to interfere with the Boatswain in matters pertaining to his office, +using words to him which oblige little and offend much. The Boatswain +excused himself and the Master of the Camp, wishing to be avenged, +certain persons in the accounts department prevented him. At the +same time the Chief Pilot was talking to Doña Isabel, who said: +"The Master of the Camp is severe. If that is the way in which he +asserts his position, he may have a prosperous end, though I am very +far from thinking so." The Master of the Camp returning, she said that +it seemed to her that the Adelantado would not be pleased to have his +people treated with the contumely he showed to them, and still more +when the occasion was so slight. The Master of the Camp replied with +great impertinence: "Oh look! what have we here?" The Chief Pilot, +with good reason, showed much indignation. The Master of the Camp then +said, in a loud voice: "Know me! Understand that I am the Master of +the Camp, and if we sail together in one ship, and I ordered the ship +to be run on some rock, what would you do?" The Chief Pilot answered: +"When that time comes I shall do what seems to me to be best; and, +in this fleet, I do not recognise any other head but the Adelantado, +who has delivered the charge of this ship to me, whose Captain I am; +and when he comes he will state what my duties are to be. Believe me +that if you want to be lord of all that is about to be discovered, +rather than be under the orders of one who takes so much upon himself, +and shows so little discretion, I would give up the voyage." Two +soldiers, who were present at this colloquy, came to the Chief Pilot +and said that their persons were at his service, having so much +need for him during the voyage. The Pilot valued their good will, +but answered that he did not come to form parties. I leave the rest +that passed on this occasion. + +The Adelantado came on board, and, as he said that he would apply a +suitable remedy to what had occurred, the Chief Pilot remained. On +Friday, the 9th of April, of the year of our Saviour Jesus Christ +1595, orders were given to weigh the anchors and make sail from the +port of Callao of the city of the Kings of Peru, which has a latitude +of 12° 20', [44] shaping a course for the valleys of Santa Truxillo, +and Saña, on the coast of the same province. + + + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + Of what happened to the fleet until it reached the port of Payta, + and what ports it touched at. + + +Having made sail, there was so little wind that the ship could not +get out of the port. A boat was sent on shore, but presently returned +with a report that the beach was full of armed men, who prevented any +landing. The night passed, and when the day came the galeot went on, +and our other vessel made for Callao. She had been at the ports of the +coast, visiting the ships she met, and taking what was wanted out of +them. After those on board had behaved like corsairs, they arrived at +the port of Santa, where they found a ship on her way from Panama to +Lima, laden with merchandize and negroes. They took the vessel, placing +a guard to prevent them from going until the Adelantado should arrive, +to whom they gave the advice to take her as she was, for his better +despatch, sending her value to the owners when God should provide +it. The Adelantado would not do this, nor consent that it should +be done. The Vicar, zealous for the service of God, reprehended the +Captain with sharp speeches, and told him that he was excommunicated, +charging him to pay for what he had taken. Having done this he was +absolved, and the business was closed. Here a soldier was punished, +the reason being kept secret. + +Making sail, they anchored in the port of Cherrepe, which is that for +the town of Santiago de Miraflores, where the Captain, Lope de Vega, +had enlisted a good company of married people. Here the Adelantado +married this Captain to his sister-in-law, Mariana de Castro, giving +him the title of Admiral. + +There was at anchor in this port a new and strong ship with a cargo +of flour, sugar, and other things, bound to Panama. The officers of +the Almiranta having made friends with those on board the other ship, +they were persuaded, by means of efficacious reasoning, to let the +General take her, and receive their vessel instead, which, owing to +age and bad construction, they might well do, because thus the King +would be better served. But the Adelantado showed great annoyance +at these intrigues, and replied that his ship was very good for the +service on which it was to be employed. Those who intended evil felt +the good intention, and, in order to gain their end, they secretly +made seven gimlet-holes in the ship, in order to oblige--as they +did oblige--the soldiers to say that they would not go in a ship +so unseaworthy if they could not take the other. In consequence of +this, the Pilot and Master presented a petition to the Adelantado, +setting forth that his ship was making a great deal of water, and was +unsuited for so long and risky a voyage as she was intended to make; +and begging him to take the remedy that was at hand. The Adelantado, +seeing the determination of all, and compelled by necessity, referred +the matter to the Master of the Camp, before whom information was +taken which proved what was wanted, and if more was wanted, more could +be proved. So the General ordered the Master of the Camp to take the +ship; and that the carpenters should make an estimate of the excess of +value over that of the vessels to be exchanged for it. They reported +that the difference amounted to 6600 dols. + +Presently, the Master of the Camp sent a guard on board the ship, +and began to unload her. There was a priest on board, who owned half +the cargo. He protested vigorously against the injustice and robbery, +when he saw the loss that he would sustain. He made strong protests and +claims on the ship, in his own name and in those of other interested +parties. He sought the ship, stating that his remedy was there. He came +and went to the Capitana with his complaints, but got no redress. It +was said that a soldier gave him a push, and threatened to throw +him overboard. The priest felt all this very deeply, and loudly +declared that when he had to pray to our Lord, in his sacrifices, +he would ask that the ship might never reach safety if she was +unloaded. The good priest caused great sorrow to the compassionate, +both on account of the force with which he was treated and the loss +of his property; and the grief was doubled at the enterprise being +one that was undertaken by their own masters, to whom he earnestly, +but vainly, complained of his loss. At last the ship was unloaded, +when the Adelantado satisfied the priest respecting his share, +which somewhat quieted him. The Adelantado also undertook to pay +the difference before he came from the Solomon Islands to Peru, +mortgaging to the creditors all his ships. The Adelantado felt and +complained much of this proceeding, which had been forced upon him, +and he threatened those who he believed to be the cause of it. + +As the effects are seen in all things, and even in the justice +of God are never wanting, it was understood that usually in that +port there was much merchandize, collected in certain warehouses, +from all those valleys, to be embarked for Lima, Panama, and +other places. They embarked some of these goods, with the owner, +his wife and children. Many things were left, and nothing was said +about them, for the shadows of things are sufficient to see them by; +and expeditions without a royal purse cannot, it would seem, be set +forth without some mischief being done. + +The Master of the Camp, because it was his ordinary and first thought +not to keep the peace, had a certain slight difference with the +Admiral, which, although trifling, appears to have been the beginning +of disorders. For if such exist, however small they be, when the +Devil stirs them they revive. The Adelantado was very desirous of +entering respectable men only; and so, for reasons that moved him, +he put certain men and women on shore. I well believed that he might +have turned them all out, and proceeded alone on his voyage. Here, +for a slight cause, he turned out a sergeant. Who was the instigator +the reader will pardon me for leaving it to be understood, for I am +not a friend of telling, though it should be a bad affair. + +These things being settled, the Adelantado ordered the Chief Pilot +to make five charts for the navigation, one for himself and four for +each of the Pilots. He was not to show more land on them than the +coast of Peru from Arica to Payta, and two points north and south, +on one side or the other, the one in 7° and the other in 12°, and +1,500 leagues to the west of Lima, which, he said, was the extreme +distance in longitude of the islands of which he was going in search, +whose longitude was 1,450 leagues. The other 50° was to be added so +as the better to arrive with some margin, and no more land was to be +delineated lest some ship should steer to or desert to it. + +The Admiral embarked on board the new ship, and the provisions were +distributed, but they were not in such quantity nor so good as was +necessary. The defects were made up by what the soldiers and other +people bought, and by other means. + +It only remained to arrange for the water supply, but the supply +was scanty and the port was bad. The Corregidor of the district, +Dom Bartolomé de Villavicencio, arrived, and the goodwill he showed +is admitted by the Admiral in his report. But as he saw, when he +came, the overwork that was being exacted, he went to his house, +taking with him all the Indians and horses that were helping us, +so as to oblige us to depart. This was the reason that induced the +Adelantado to make sail, and pursue his course with only the water +that the Chief Pilot had on board. Recognising such a serious defect, +the Pilot represented that it was a terrible thing to start with half +the jars empty, knowing that we had to enter the largest of the gulfs, +and that it must be well considered, lest we should have to leave the +land without taking the full supply of water needed for so long and +doubtful a voyage. The Adelantado answered that the soldiers asked +for it to be obtained in the ports where it was found to be very +expensive, and that if a ration of half a gallon ought to be given, +a pint might be served out. To this the Chief Pilot replied that it +was his duty to see to everything, and not to allow himself to be +conquered by the importunities of people who did not know what they +were asking. The Adelantado answered to this that he was convinced, +and that he would settle the matter with them; which he did with +some good and some bad reasons. This done, they made sail, arriving +at the port of Payta to take in water. + + + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + Of what passed in the port of Payta, and how the fleet set sail + and commenced the voyage. + + +In each port there was disorder, and as this is one of the best +ports on the coast of Peru, the best quarrel was reserved for it. The +anger of the Master of the Camp, who excused no one, fell upon the +Vicar respecting certain proceedings in his department. There were +words between them; and there would have been acts as well if the +Adelantado had not been present to prevent them. But they remained +angry and unfriendly. Bickerings also commenced between the Master +of the Camp and the Captain Don Lorenzo, respecting luggage which +some of the soldiers had with them. + +The Master of the Camp gave a blow with a stick to a person of +consideration. He said that he did not know about that, but that +the party would know very well how much a stick weighed. There was +some disturbance; the Master of the Camp drew his sword (at which he +was always ready) and struck another soldier, who was annoyed at the +blow given to his companion. He fled, but was taken, and incontinently +was to be punished. Doña Isabel came out to plead for him. The Master +of the Camp showed himself to be so compliant that he threw down the +stick and went on board; but this was not that he might not give the +Adelantado a faculty against the prisoner. The Chief Pilot would have +interceded, but the Adelantado did not wish to hear him, saying that +the man had put his hand in his beard, which was a sort of mutiny. The +Chief Pilot prayed that nevertheless the Adelantado would hear the +case, and dismiss it; or, if he did not wish to do that, that he would +judge the matter officially; for that the man had been brought by +force, and that it did not seem just to take away his honour. At last, +yielding to these prayers, the Adelantado set the prisoner free. The +Master of the Camp had gone on shore, and presently he sent for his +clothes. But as the Adelantado showed a wish that he should stay, the +Admiral and Captain Don Lorenzo persuaded him to return to the ship. + +It appeared to the Chief Pilot that it was very uncertain what would be +the end, when the beginning was so disordered. He, therefore, requested +the Adelantado that he might be left behind; and for this course he +gave many reasons which did not appear to be bad. The Adelantado threw +his arms round the Pilot's neck, declaring that only an angel could +conduct things as he said, but that all should be put in good order, +and that a remedy should be found. The Chief Pilot still insisted +upon his dismissal, saying that where the General's person was, who so +well understood the art of navigating, he might well be excused. The +Adelantado was much grieved on hearing this, and with his sagacity, +he showed himself so kind and friendly, and used such honeyed words, +that they induced the Pilot to remain. He went on board and, as he +passed the ship, the sailors said: "Ah! Sir Chief Pilot, what goings +and comings are these? We are informed of what you think of doing, +for no one wants to remain in this ship though it cost all their +lives." Jumping on shore, the Admiral, the Lieutenant of Payta, +and other persons of the fleet, came to the Pilot, and he gave his +reasons to all. + +At this time the Master of the Camp came up and said, in a loud voice: +"Well, Sir! the Devil walks loose among us, to see if he can injure +this good work. Let us go whence we came, and let him show himself +for what he is. For, though he works with diligence, we will advance +forward such a Christian undertaking, and in this voyage we will +truly serve God and the King." The Chief Pilot gave him this answer: +"Sir Master of the Camp! in all things there should be moderation and +fair dealing, but your Honour was very hasty in raising the stick, +drawing your sword, and abusing the seamen whose services are so +necessary. As I know the mischief that is done by such conduct, I +wish to see the remedy, so as to comply with all my obligations." The +Master of the Camp, more gentle when he was on shore, answered that +a Camp Master could not be so moderate. The Chief Pilot said that he +must be both careful and moderate; that as yet they were in Peru, +and that the seamen had to bring them to the islands, and to guard +the ship when they had arrived; and that if they were aggrieved, +as men, there would be serious trouble; that they had to bring the +news and return with succour, and speak well of the land, or evil +though it was good, for revenge. The Camp Master was not quieted with +this argument, but was wedded to his own idea, and answered that men +did not do what they were told at sea; that he had to make them stir +quickly; and that all he had done was necessary that the fleet might +not be disorganised, and that each man to his own office seemed good, +and was in order. With this, and many other things that were said at +the time, the incident was closed. + +The two embarked, not very friendly, and the Adelantado engaged a man +here, who gave him 2,000 dols. for the place of Sergeant Major; and +with this he left off recruiting. He embarked 1,800 jars of water, +and gave instructions for the order that was to be maintained, and +for the navigation that was to be carried out. + +They carried in the fleet 378 persons by the list, of whom 280 +were capable of bearing arms; 200 arquebuses and other weapons, +offensive and defensive, respecting which testimony was given before +the Lieutenant of Payta to send to the King our Lord, as was done. + +The Capitana was named San Jeronimo, and there went in her the +Adelantado, his wife, his sister-in-law and her brothers, the chief +Officers, and two priests. + +The Almiranta was named Santa Isabel, under the Admiral Lope de Vega, +with two Captains, and a priest. + +The galeot was named San Felipe, under Captain Felipe Corzo, with +his officers and men. + +The frigate was named Santa Catalina, under Captain Alonso de Leyva. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + The Island of Magdalena. + + +Having made sail, the fleet shaped a S.W. course, displaying the +royal standard and the flags, playing clarions, and feasting on such +an auspicious day as this was considered to be. The winds were from +the S. and S.S.E., which are the winds of Peru, until we reached +a latitude of 9° 30', and from that point the course was W.S.W. as +far as 14°. From thence the course was W.N.W. to 21°. The sun was +taken at noon, and having made the computation, the result was 10° +50'. At 5 in the afternoon, an island was sighted 10 leagues distant, +being N.W. by N. [45] The Adelantado gave it the name of Magdalena, +as it was the eve of that day. He thought it was the land that he +sought, for which reason he was very joyful in every one's sight, in +that he had come in a short time with a fair wind, the victuals good, +and the people amicable, healthy, and cheerful. During the voyage +there had been fifteen marriages, scarcely a day passing without +some one wanting to be married next day. It seemed as if all would +run in couples with the good fortune, with high hopes, many stories, +and none for the good of the natives. + +The Adelantado said to the Vicar and Chaplain that they were to chant +the "Te Deum laudamus" with all the people on their knees, and that +they should give thanks to God for the mercy of sighting land. This +was done with great devotion. + +On the following day, with doubt whether that island was inhabited, the +ships were steered to the south of it, and very near the coast. From +a point under a peaked hill towards the eastern end, there came out +seventy small canoes, not all the same size, made of one piece of wood, +with outriggers of cane on each side, after the manner of the gunwales +of galleys, which reach to the water on which they press to prevent +the canoe from capsizing, and all their paddles rowing. The least +number they had in a canoe was three, the greatest ten, some swimming, +and others hanging on--altogether, four hundred natives, almost white, +and of very graceful shape, well-formed, robust, good legs and feet, +hands with long fingers; good eyes, mouth, and teeth, and the same with +the other features. Their skin was clear, showing them to be a strong +and healthy race, and indeed robust. They all came naked, without any +part covered; their faces and bodies in patterns of a blue colour, +painted with fish and other patterns. Their hair was like that of +women, very long and loose, some had it twisted, and they themselves +gave it turns. Many of them were ruddy. They had beautiful youths who, +for a people barbarous and naked, it was certainly pleasant to see; +and they had much cause to praise their Creator. + +Among them there was a boy, who appeared to be about ten years of +age. [46] He came rowing in a canoe with two others. His eyes were +fixed on the ship, and his countenance was like that of an angel, with +an aspect and spirit that promised much, of a good colour, not fair but +white; his locks like that of a lady who valued them much. He was all +that has been said, so that I never in my life felt such pain as when I +thought that so fair a creature should be left to go to perdition. [47] + +The natives came with much speed and fury, rowing their canoes, +pointing with their fingers to their port and land, speaking loudly, +and often using the words atalut and analut. They came to our ships, +and when they arrived they gave us cocoa-nuts, a kind of food rolled +up in leaves, good plantains, and large canes [48] full of water. They +looked at the ships, the people, and the women who had come out on the +galley to see them, at whom they looked, and laughed at the sight. They +got one to put his hand on the ship, and, with coaxing, they got him +to come on board. The Adelantado dressed him in a shirt and put a hat +upon his head, which, when the others saw, they laughed and looked, +crying out to the rest. On this about forty came on board, beside whom +the Spaniards seemed of small stature. Among them there was one taller +than the rest by a head and shoulders, and taller than our best men, +though we had one very tall. They began to walk about the ship with +great boldness, taking hold of whatever was near them, and many of them +tried the arms of the soldiers, touched them in several parts with +their fingers, looked at their beards and faces, with other monkey +tricks. As they saw that our men were dressed in various colours, +they were confused; so the soldiers bared their breasts, let down +their stockings, and tucked up their sleeves to satisfy them. When +they were shown this, they quieted down, and were much pleased. + +The Adelantado and some of the soldiers gave them shirts, hats, +and other trifling things, which they presently put round their +necks, dancing and singing in their fashion, and loudly called to the +others to look at what they had been given. Their conduct annoyed the +Adelantado, who made signs to them to go; but they not only would not +leave the ship, but became more free in taking things they saw. Some +cut slices from our bacon and meat with knives made of cane, and +wanted to take other things. At last the Adelantado ordered a gun to +be fired, and when they felt and heard it, with great terror, they all +jumped into the water and swam to their canoes, only one remaining in +the ship. He was clinging on to the main channels, and they could not +make him let go, until some one wounded him on the hand with a sword, +which was shown to the others, and they took him into a canoe. At +this time they fastened a rope to the ship's bowsprit, and, by rowing, +tried to tow her on shore, thinking they could thus take her. + +When the native was wounded, they all became warlike, and were +marshalled by one who carried a parasol of palm leaves. Among them was +one old man with a long and well-ordered beard, who cast fierce looks +from his eyes, put both hands into his beard, raised his moustaches, +stood up, and cried out, looking in many directions. They played on +shells, and striking with their paddles in the canoes they showed their +hostility: some taking up the lances which they brought, tied down; +others with stones in slings, not having other arms. With good will, +they began to hurl stones, and wounded a soldier; but first they +had come near the ship, and those with lances threatened to throw +them. The soldiers pointed their arquebuses, but, as it had been +raining, the powder would not ignite. It was a sight to behold, how +the natives came on with noise and shouts; and how some, when they +saw weapons pointed at them, jumped from the canoes into the water, +or got behind the others. At last, the old man who made the menaces +was shot in the forehead, and fell dead, with seven or eight others, +while some were wounded. They fled from our ships, and presently three +natives came in a canoe, calling out. One held up a green branch, +and something white in his hand, which appeared to be a sign of +peace. They seemed to be asking us to come to their port; but this +was not done, and they departed, leaving some cocoa-nuts. + +This island has a circumference of about 10 leagues, so far as we +could see. It is clear and open towards the sea, lofty and wooded in +the ravines, which is where the natives live. The port is on the south +side. It is in latitude 10° S., and a thousand leagues from Lima. It +is thickly inhabited; for, besides those who came in the canoes, +the beaches and rocks were covered with people. The Adelantado did +not know the place, and, being undeceived, he said it was not one of +the islands he came in search of, but a new discovery. + + + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + How three other islands were sighted, their names, and how they + came to a port in that of Santa Cristina. + + +At a short distance from this island three other islands were sighted, +for which a course was shaped. The first, to which the Adelantado +gave the name of San Pedro, was 10 leagues W.N.W. from Magdalena. It +was not ascertained whether it was inhabited, because it was not +visited. It is about 4 leagues in circumference, with much forest, +but apparently not very high. At the east end there is a rock at a +short distance from the coast. + +There is another island called Dominica, with a circumference of some +15 leagues, bearing N.W. from San Pedro, distant 5 leagues. The island +is beautiful to look upon, and runs N.E. to S.W. It has fine plains +and mountains, is thickly inhabited, with many groves of trees. + +To the south of Dominica there is another island to which the name +of Santa Cristina was given. It seemed to be about 11 leagues in +circumference, and is a little over a league from Dominica, with a +clear and deep channel between them. The Adelantado named all four +islands together "Las Marquesas de Mendoza," in memory of the Marquis +of Cañete; because by this, and in making sail with his ships from +any port, he wished to show how grateful he was for the assistance +given by that Viceroy in the despatch of the expedition. + +While tacking off and on, and seeking a port in the island of Dominica, +many canoes full of natives came out, who seemed to be of a browner +colour, and crying out, showed the same good will as the others. In +one canoe there came an old man, carrying a green branch and something +white. At this moment the ship was put about, and, thinking that she +was going away, the old man began to renew his shouts, make signs +with his hair, and pointing downwards with his hair and fingers. The +Adelantado wanted to return, but he could not do so because the wind +freshened, and no sheltered port for anchoring could be seen: though +the frigate, which stood close into the shore, reported having seen +many more people than were visible from the ship, and that a native +had come on board, who with great ease had lifted a calf by one ear. + +On the following day the General sent the Camp Master in the boat with +twenty soldiers, to seek for a port or a watering place on the island +of Santa Cristina. Many natives came out in canoes, and surrounded +them. Our people, wishing to make themselves safe, killed some of +them. One, to save himself, jumped into the sea with a child in his +arms. Clasped together, they were sent to the bottom by a shot from +an arquebus that one of the soldiers fired off. He said afterwards, +with great sorrow, that the Devil had to take those who were ordained +to be taken. The Chief Pilot said to him that he regretted that he +had not fired in the air, but the soldier said that he acted as he +did lest he should lose his reputation as a good marksman. The Chief +Pilot asked him what it would serve him to enter into hell with the +fame of being a good shot? The Camp Master returned without having +found either a port or a watering place. + +At the same time four very daring natives had gone on board the ship, +and while no one was looking, one of them took a small dog, which +was the gift of the Camp Master. Then, with a shout they all jumped +overboard with great courage, and swam to their canoes. + +The next day, which was St. James's day, the General again sent the +Camp Master, with twenty soldiers, to the island of Santa Cristina to +find a watering place and a port. He effected a landing with the men +in good order, and surrounded a village while the inhabitants stood +looking on. The Camp Master called to them, and about three hundred +came. Our people then drew a line, telling the natives by signs +that they were not to go beyond it. On asking for water they brought +some in cocoa nuts, and the women brought other kinds of fruit. The +soldiers said that many of these women were very pretty, and that they +were ready to come near in friendly intercourse, and to give their +presents with their hands. The Camp Master sent the natives for water +with the jars, but they made signs that our people should carry them; +running off with four jars, for which reason we opened fire on them. + +The General, having seen the port into which the Camp Master had gone, +ordered the ship to be taken into it and anchored. But the wind died +away under the land, and the ship was taken by a wave to within a +lance's length of a rock, with 50 fathoms close to it. There was great +consternation at the obvious danger. Sail was made, and God was served +that a breeze should spring up, and the ship stood off. Then there came +another report that the port was bad, full of sunken rocks, and that +it was impossible to get out again if a ship had once entered. The +Adelantado was much annoyed to hear the complaints of the hard work, +and was moved to continue the voyage, saying that the water they +had on board would be sufficient for the voyage to his islands. The +Chief Pilot reminded him of the uncertainties of the sea, to which +he answered: "If we cannot find a port, what are we to do?" The Chief +Pilot replied that we must return to Magdalena, which we had already +seen, and where the frigate had anchored, and that for a little +more work it was needful to secure more necessaries. Meanwhile, +the Camp Master had been coasting along the island; and very near +the port that had been entered he found another, which he reported, +and there the fleet anchored. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + How the Adelantado landed on the island of Santa Cristina, and + what took place with the natives. + + +On the day after the arrival, which was the 28th of July, the +Adelantado went on shore, with his wife and the greater part of the +crew, to hear the first mass said by the Vicar. The natives knelt +down in silence and attention, imitating all they saw the Christians +do. A very beautiful native sat near Doña Isabel, with such red hair +that Doña Isabel wished to cut off a few locks; but seeing that the +native did not like it she desisted, not wishing to make her angry. + +The General, in the name of His Majesty, took possession of all the +four islands, walked through the village, sowed maize in presence of +the natives; and, having had such intercourse as was possible with +them, he went on board. The Camp Master remained on shore with all the +soldiers, who in a short time began to quarrel among themselves. Then +the natives threw many stones and lances, wounding one soldier in the +foot, without doing any other harm. They then fled to the mountains +with their women and children, our people following them, until they +were all in the woods. Being fired at, the natives reached the summits +of three high hills, where they entrenched themselves. In the mornings +and afternoons they all, with one accord, made a resounding noise, +which echoed through the ravines, and was replied to by shouts. They +wished to do us harm, hurling stones and lances, but their efforts +were in vain. + +The Camp Master placed guards in three positions to secure the village +and the beach, where the women were resting and the sailors getting +wood and water for the ships. What I have to say is, that some of these +natives, being strong and courageous, used arrows, while there were +not wanting others who seemed more cautious. They were very diligent +to attack; but seeing how little harm they did, and how much hurt +they received from the arquebuses, they tried to establish peace and +friendship. For when the soldiers went to their work, they came out to +them lovingly, offering them bunches of plantains and other fruits. It +seemed that they felt the want of their houses, for they asked, +by signs, when the Spaniards would go. Some came to the guards with +food, which they gave to the soldiers. One native especially, of good +presence, was taught to make the sign of the cross, and to say "Jesus +Maria," and the rest. They were in conversation with their comrades, +for each one had a comrade, whom they sought out and sat with, when +they came; and by signs they asked each other the names of the sky, +the earth, the sea, the sun, the moon and stars, and everything else +within their vision. All were well content with what they said, calling +each other friends and comrades. As this friendship was not without +payment, there was a certain man who joyfully said to the General, +that he had his dog well fed by the natives, by a forage he had made +in the preceding night, when his company had the guard. + +On another day eleven natives came in two canoes, and two of them +stood up with some strings of cocoa nuts in their hands, and shouted +while they showed them. Orders were given not to answer, and for the +soldiers to be ready with their arquebuses. When the natives found that +they were not answered, they came close to the ship, when a volley was +fired. Two were killed. The soldiers shot three more, and throwing +down what they had, the rest rowed away and fled. They were chased +in a boat, but the natives got on shore and fled. Jumping on shore, +only three were seen to run to the top of some high hills. Those in +the boat took the canoes, with three dead bodies in them, for the +rest had fallen into the sea. The cruelty of the Spaniards was such +that there were not wanting those who said that the bullet wounds, +so fierce and ugly, would frighten the other natives, and that the +swords, making wide wounds, would have the same effect. In order +that the natives might see, it was ordered that the bodies should +be taken on shore, that the Camp Master might hang them up where +they would be seen by the natives. It was said that this was done +in order that the natives, if they came with false intent in their +canoes, might know what the Spaniards could do. But it seemed to me +that four armed ships had little to fear from unarmed natives in +canoes. The Camp Master hung up the three natives in a place best +adapted for the intended object. A certain person came to see them, +who gave one of the bodies a lance-thrust, and praised what had been +done. At night the natives took the bodies away. + +An evil example gives rise to licence, and reason conquers him who +knows it. A certain person had an arquebus in his hut, and a friend of +his loaded it, and pointed it to fire at the natives. The other took +it out of his hands, and asked him what he was going to do with so +much diligence. He replied, that his diligence was to kill, because he +liked to kill. "It is not right," replied his friend, "that you should +show such readiness to cause the death of men. What harm have these +natives done to you that you should treat them with such cruelty? It +is not valorous to show yourself a lion amongst lambs, nor to kill +when it takes your fancy. If you do not know what a foul and sinful +thing it is to murder a body which contains a soul, it is high time +that you learned, and though it has weight it is not profitable." + +The native who was friendly to the Chaplain came to the guard, and +being seen by the General they embarked very joyfully, the native +crying out, "Friend! Friend!" The Adelantado received him very +cordially, offering him conserves and wine, but he would neither eat +nor drink. He began to look at the sheep, and seemed to give them a +name; he gazed at the ship and the rigging, counted the masts and +sails, went below and noted everything with care, more so than is +usual with a native. They told him to say "Jesus Maria," and to make +the sign of the cross, which he did with great amusement, showed +good will in all things, and presently he asked for persons to take +him back to the shore. Such was the intelligence of this native that +when he understood that the ships would depart, he showed regret, +and wanted to go with us. + +The Adelantado wanted to colonise these four islands, to make his +business with them, and to leave thirty men, some of them married. But +the soldiers complained of this, and seeing their ill-will he gave +up the idea. + +It may be held as certain that two hundred natives were killed in +these islands, for the impious and inconsiderate soldiers dropped one +or two or three. Their evil deeds are not things to do, nor to praise, +nor to allow, nor to maintain, nor to refrain from punishing if the +occasion permits. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + In which an account is given of the port, island, and inhabitants; + of their customs, and other things. + + +This island of Santa Cristina is very populous, and lofty in the +centre. It has its ravines and valleys, where the natives live. The +port was named "Madre de Dios." Praise to her! It is in the western +part, in latitude 9° 30', sheltered from all winds, only excepting the +west, which never was found to blow. Its shape is that of a horse-shoe, +with a narrow mouth, and at the entrance it has a clear bottom of +sand, with a depth of 30 fathoms, in the middle 24, and 12 near +the beach. The marks by which it is known are a hill to the south, +rising from the sea, having a peak terminating in three others on +its summit; to the north a concave rock; within the port five wooded +ravines, all coming down to the sea, and a hill which divides the +little beaches of sand, having a stream of excellent water falling +from a height of a man's stature and a half, the thickness of a fist, +where the barrels can be filled. Near it there is a stream of equally +good water, flowing near a village which the natives have there. So +that waterfall, stream, and village are all on the shore, which is on +the north side of the hill. On the south side of it there are houses +scattered among the trees. To the east there are high rocky hills, +with some ravines whence the stream descends. + +Some of the natives of these islands did not appear to be as white as +those of Magdalena. They have the same form of speech, the same arms +and canoes, with which they communicate. Their village is built on +two sides of a square, one north and south, the other east to west, +with the surroundings well paved. The rest is a space with very +tall and thick trees. The houses appear to be for the community, +after the manner of slave quarters, and open to wind and water, the +floor being raised above that of the street. It appeared that many +people were lodged in each house, for there were many bed-places, +and these low. Some houses had low doors, and others had all the front +open. They are of wood, interwoven with very large canes having joints +of more than 5 palmos [49] in length, and of the thickness of a man's +arm. The roof is of the leaves from the trees in the open space. + +The Chief Pilot did not see anything of the women, because he did not +land at the time that they came; but all who saw them reported that +they had beautiful legs and hands, fine eyes, fair countenances, +small waists, and graceful forms, and some of them prettier than +the ladies of Lima, who are famed for their beauty. Respecting their +complexion, if it cannot be called white, it is nearly white. They +go with a certain covering from the breasts downwards. + +Apart from the village there was an oracle surrounded by palisades, +with the entrance on the west side. Within there was a house, almost in +the middle, in which there were some wooden figures badly carved; and +here were offerings of food and a pig, which the soldiers took. Wanting +to take other things, the natives interfered, saying they must not +take anything, showing that they respected that house and the figures. + +Outside the village they had some very long and well-made canoes +of a single tree, with the form of a keel, bow, and stern, and with +boards well fastened with ropes made from cocoa fibre. In each one +there is room for thirty or forty natives as rowers; and they gave +us to understand, when they were asked, that they went in these +large canoes to other lands. They work with adzes, which they make +of thick fish-bones and shells. They sharpen them with large pebbles, +which they have for the purpose. + +The temperature, health, vigour, and corpulence of these people tell +what the climate must be under which they live. One suffers cold at +night, but the sun does not cause much molestation by day. There were +some showers, not heavy; dew was never felt, but very great dryness, +so much so that wet things, when left out all night on the ground, +were found quite dry in the morning. But we could not tell whether +this was so all the year round. + +They saw pigs, and fowls of Castille, and the fishery is certain +wherever there is sea. + +The trees which have been mentioned as being in the open space +before the village yield a fruit which reaches to the size of a boy's +head. Its colour, when it is ripe, is a clear green, and when unripe +it is very green. The rind has crossed scales like a pineapple, its +shape not quite round, being rather more narrow at the end than near +the stem. From the stem grows a leaf-stalk reaching to the middle +of the fruit, with a covering sheath. It has no core nor pips, nor +anything uneatable except the skin, and that is thin. All the rest +is a mass of pulp when ripe, not so much when green. They feed much +upon it in all sorts of ways, and it is so wholesome that they call +it white food. It is a good fruit and of much substance. The leaves +of the tree are large, and much serrated, like those of the papay. [50] + +They found many caves full of a kind of sour dough, which the Chief +Pilot tasted. There is another fruit covered on the outside with +prickles like a chestnut, but each as big as six of Castille, with +nearly the same taste. Its shape is like a heart, flattened. They +eat many, roast and boiled, and leave them on the trees to ripen. + +There are nuts the size of those of Castille, and appear to be almost +the same in taste. The outside is very hard and without joint, and +its kernel is not attached to the rind, so that it comes out easily +and entire when opened. It is an oily fruit. They ate and took away +many of them. + +They saw calabashes of Castille sown on the beach, and some red +flowers pleasant to look on, but without smell. As our people did +not go inland, and all the natives retreated into the woods, as has +been said, this is all that can be related. The soldiers said that +all the trees appeared to bear fruit. + +Our men were very well received by the natives, but it was not +understood why they gave us a welcome, or what was their intention. For +we did not understand them; and to this may be attributed the evil +things that happened, which might have been avoided if there had been +some one to make us understand each other. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + How the Adelantado departed from this island, and how the murmuring + began among the soldiers by reason of faults and of not finding + the land. + + +While the Adelantado was at this island he ordered the galeot to be +repaired, for one day, before anchoring, she was in great danger from +having fouled the bowsprit of the Capitana. He also ordered wood and +water to be got on board, the people to be embarked, and the ships +to be got ready. On the 5th of August he raised three crosses, each +one in its place, and another was cut on a tree, with the day and +year. He then weighed, and made sail in search of the islands of his +first discovery. A course was shaped W.S.W., with the wind E. varying +to S.E. In this way, sometimes altering course to N.W. and due west, +they sailed for about 400 leagues. + +After three or four days, the Adelantado said that on that day they +would see the land of which they were in search, news which greatly +rejoiced the people. But, looking in all directions, they neither +saw land on that day nor on many days afterwards; and for this reason +the soldiers began to say things, and to conspire because the voyage +was so prolonged. There was scarcity of food and water, for at the +news of the proximity of land the people had indulged themselves +freely. Now they began to show slackness and suspicion. It is no +cause for surprise that in such enterprises those who have to bear +the blame and the responsibility should be the chief workers as well +as the chief sufferers. + +On Sunday, the 20th of August, having covered the said 400 leagues, +the dawn found us close to four small and low islands, with sandy +beaches, and many palm and other trees. Together they appeared to +be 8 leagues in circumference, more or less. They are in a square, +very close to each other. From S.W. to N.E., and towards E. there are +banks of sand, where there are no means of entrance, and a point was +found in the reef which goes more to S.W. The General gave the name of +"San Bernardo" to these islands, as it was that saint's day. He wanted +to find a port among these islands, but desisted at the request of +the Vicar. It was not known whether they were inhabited, although the +people in the galeot said they had seen canoes, but this was believed +to be a mistake. The islands are in 10° 20' S., and in longitude 400 +leagues from Lima. + +Passing these four islands the wind came from S.E., which always blows, +sometimes with light showers, and thick dense cloud-masses were not +wanting. These masses were of various colours, and, strangely enough, +they formed themselves into various figures, and in contemplating +them they remained for a long space of time. Sometimes they were so +fixed that they were not dissipated during the whole day. As they were +in an unknown direction, it was thought that they were indications +of land. We continued to steer a westerly course, sometimes N.W. and +S.W., always in latitudes in accordance with the will and instructions +of the General, which were not to go higher than 12° or lower than +8°. Generally we were in 10° to 11°. + +On Tuesday, the 29th of August, we sighted a low round island +covered with trees, and surrounded by a reef which rose above the +water. It was about a league in circumference, and in latitude 10° +40' S., distant from Lima 1,535 leagues. As it was by itself, it +was named "Solitaria." The Adelantado ordered the two small vessels +to go in shore and seek for a port, so as to get wood, of which the +Almiranta was much in need, and to see if water could be procured, +of which there was also much scarcity. They anchored in 10 fathoms, +and with loud cries told the General to stand off, as the bottom was +full of great rocks. They were going and coming with the sounding +line sometimes finding 10 fathoms, at others 100 fathoms. There +was no bottom in places, and to see the vessel among such rocks +aroused alarm. There was no want of haste to get her away into the +open sea. All round this island there are a great number of rocks, +and the channel between these rocks is to the south. + +At this time the soldiers, being influenced by their privations, and +wearied from the disappointment of their hopes, formed both public +and private assemblies to murmur and talk, which was a dissolution +of discipline, and an indication of what would happen afterwards. + +The Camp Master (as has been said) was somewhat violent, and he had +quarrels with many people in the ship. In fine, experience and time +taught me what should be said, and I saw what should be done with +regard to his evil behaviour and menaces. In general we said as +follows: "We do not come here to lose but to gain. The Camp Master +orders things for the King's service, as the King desires he should +order them, and we all have to obey. Do your duty, and leave the +things that do not belong to it. Avoid insults and threats to the +stick, for we will not suffer it. With so small a company so many +heads may be dispensed with. Our General is enough, for we are not +going where the usages of Flanders or of Italy are needed; nor are we +naked Indians, and for us death-dealing soldiers are not necessary; +but we are courageous and well-intentioned persons. Above all, we must +watch the General and the Camp Master, that each one may do his part, +and carefully and in detail give an account of what he may succeed in +hearing; while they conceal things in such a manner that, when asked +about them, they know nothing." For unjust eyes have been turned upon +those who are far from any fault, and these, when they wish to defend +themselves, it would be necessary to have angels for their sureties, +for there is no place for a fair hearing. + +There was little reason, and so life was passed, many saying that there +was an end of it, for that we should never find the land; that there +was no necessity for so much rule, death being certain. Others said +that the Isles of Solomon had fled away, or that the Adelantado had +forgotten the place where they were to be found, or that the sea had +risen and covered them. Others said that, to call himself a Marquis +and advance his own relations, he had taken them, with 400 pounds of +biscuit, to perish in that great gulf, to go to the bottom and fish +for those wonderful pearls he had talked about. They put forward their +arguments and said one thing and another: that we had navigated for so +many days in 10°, and the islands we seek are said to be in the same +latitude, and yet they are not to be found. Either we have passed them, +or they do not exist, for by this road we shall go round the world, +or at least we shall come at last to Great Tartary. Neither the Chief +Pilot, nor the other Pilots, nor the Adelantado, know where they are +taking us to, nor where we are at present. They could easily give or +take away rewards to whom they chose, and follow their own likings. + +The Pilots of the other ships said that they took their vessels on +rocks and over the land, because the place where they were painted +had been rubbed off for many days, owing to the great and little +height they had navigated; and they said other things which were for +the soldiers. Also, there were those who said that in hard times and +long voyages the soldiers know their true friends. + +The Chief Pilot, against whom there were suspicions that he would +never find the sought-for land, knowing that they had passed far +beyond the longitude given by the Adelantado, and yet that he was +the authority to whom they all turned, spoke to the General with a +view to consoling the soldiers, who were so afflicted. He answered, +that they had also said to him that all would be lost. The Chief +Pilot, for satisfaction on his part, said many things in a loud +voice, and concluded by saying: "Hear me, and do not answer to +what is said. Hold yourselves in the belief that my words merit, +for consider that I did not come to navigate in order that I myself +might perish." The Captain, Don Lorenzo, then came forward with some +remarks very far from the mark, to whom the Chief Pilot answered: +"Those who do not understand the affair, why should they speak to +others?" After these discourses there were those who complained, +saying among themselves: "This business is very different from what +it was supposed to be. Here there is neither honour nor life, as we +are all companions who live in this house without doors, and without +tokens of friendship." But there did not want those who said: "What +hospitals have been founded or served by those that desire to please +God and obtain their desires? Take what is given us with joyful faces, +for this is the best way; and this being so, what is wanting will be +that which need not concern us." + + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + How an island was discovered, that of the volcano was examined, + and the loss of the Almiranta. + + +These complaints caused much suffering to the Adelantado, making him +avoid both public and private sins, which he did as much as was in his +power, and giving an example in order to obtain peace for all. With +the beads in his hand, and without loss of a day, he ordered the +"Salve" to be raised before the image of Our Lady of Solitude, which +the Chief Pilot had brought for his own devotions. He also caused the +vespers of Holy Days to be solemnly observed, banners to be displayed, +and streamers to be hoisted, while warlike instruments were played. To +practice the soldiers this was done every afternoon, others assisting +as much as they could, although it should entail additional work. + +In this state was the Capitana when the Almiranta asked the Adelantado +for a boat-load of wood, saying that, for want of fuel, they had +burnt boxes, and were using the upper works of the ship. This was +granted, and on another day the Admiral came on board the Capitana +to greet the Adelantado, as was customary. He then told the General +of his necessities, and begged that they would not part company, +and with this promise they were rejoiced. He sought for succour as +regards water, saying that he only had nine jars left. The Admiral +showed much despondency, saying that the defects of his ship were +numerous, but that he was determined to die with his people, because +for that he had come. The Adelantado did what he could to cheer him, +and ordered him to make sail, saying that the islands could not be far +off. The Master represented that, owing to there being little ballast, +the ship was very crank, and for this reason she would not bear much +sail; that there were one hundred and eighty persons on board, and +that he hoped he would at least give them twenty jars of water. The +Adelantado, although at that time he had more than four hundred jars +full, would not give one, for the report seemed to him false. + +With these and other misfortunes they sailed on until the 7th of +September, when, with a rather fresh S.E. breeze, the ship only had a +foresail on her without a bonnet, [51] steering west. There was seen +ahead a mass of dark smoke, for which reason the Chief Pilot ordered +the galeot and frigate to go on, keeping in sight of each other, +and see what land or reefs there were, and to report by burning two +lights, and two others in reply or in warning. But they were to return +before nightfall. + +With this anxious doubt they continued to navigate with the care that +such a night made necessary. At 9 the Almiranta was seen, and at 11, on +the port side, there was a great and thick mass of cloud, which covered +the horizon in that direction. The sailors, and all who turned their +eyes upon it, were doubtful whether it was land. The fog raised its +curtain, which was in the form of a dense shower, and land was clearly +seen, less than a league distant. It was announced in the customary +way, in a loud voice, and all hands came out to see. The galeot made +many signals to the other ships, and, though the night was dark, +they could be seen at a great distance. The two ships answered, but no +signal was seen from the other. The night was passed praying to God to +send the day. When it came, a point was seen rather dark and rounded, +being covered with trees, looking very beautiful; but, looking round +for the Almiranta, she was nowhere to be seen; on which every one was +sad and anxious, showing the feeling that it was natural they should +have. It was Mariana de Castro, the Admiral's wife, who felt it most, +for she blamed herself, and wept continually. The General, though he +wished to do so, could not dissimulate, for all saw that his thoughts +were bitter. What may be said is, that he was always apprehensive of +the loss of this ship, for many reasons which might be given, some of +which were spoken at Saña, now at a distance of 1,085 leagues. Next +day, at dawn, they were repeated by a native woman, who mourned for +the loss of a soldier, a friend of hers, who was in the ship. + +When the daylight appeared, they beheld a single pointed mountain +rising out of the sea like a sugar-loaf, all cut out, and to the +S.E. another small hill. It seemed to be distant about three leagues, +being eight from the island, and it has no port, nor any place where +one could jump on to the slope. It is quite bare, there being no trees +nor anything green. There are some crevices, two especially on the +west side, and out of them as well as from the summit of the mountain, +a great quantity of sparks and fire came out with much noise. It may +be said with truth that ten volcanoes together do not send forth such +flames as this one does by itself. When it was first sighted it was +not seen to send out flames. It had a very well-formed peak; but, +a few days after we anchored at the island, it threw off its crown +with a great trembling, insomuch that, being 10 leagues distant from +it where we were anchored, we heard it, and it moved the ship. From +that time forward, every now and then, there were mighty thunderings +within the mountain at the time that the flames burst forth; and when +they finished, there was so much and such dense smoke, that it seemed +to cover the whole concave of the first heaven. [52] + +The Adelantado gave orders to the frigate to sail round the volcano, +which was to the west, to see if perchance the Almiranta was on +the other side of it, and was becalmed under the land, and then to +proceed in the direction of the island. He also ordered the soldiers +to be confessed, and, to set an example, he himself confessed in +public. The Vicar also persuaded them, for they were about to visit +an unknown land, where enemies and dangers would not be wanting. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + How a great number of canoes came out to the ships from the land; + gives an account of them and of the natives, and of the rest that + took place until they went into port. + + +Being near this island, there came out from it a large canoe with a +sail, and behind it a fleet of fifty smaller canoes, the people in +them calling to the ships with shouts and waving of hands, our men, +though doubtfully, calling in return. They arrived. The natives in +them were of a black colour; some of them tawny, with frizzled hair; +many of them having it white, red, and of other colours. It certainly +must have been dyed, and half of it removed from the head in some, and +there were other differences. They were all naked. Their teeth were +dyed red. Part of their bodies was covered with woven stuff, and all +were painted with lines blacker than their own colour, and they had +lines on their faces and bodies. They had many turns of a black reed +round their arms, and many strings of very small beads of bone and +fish's teeth round their necks, and many plates of mother-of-pearl, +small and great, hanging from various parts. The canoes were small, +and some came fastened together, two and two, with frames rather +high, as counterpoises, like those of the former islands. Their arms +were bows, with arrows having very sharp points of toasted wood, and +others with bone harpoon-shaped points. Some were feathered, with +the point anointed, and carried in quivers. The ointment appeared +to be from a herb. Although they do little harm, they carry stones, +clubs of heavy wood, which are their swords, and darts of stout wood, +with three rows of harpoons, in length more than a palmo [53] to the +points. They carried from a shoulder-belt a kind of bag, well worked, +and full of biscuits, made from a certain root, which they were all +eating as they came along, and readily gave away some of it. When +the Adelantado saw their colour, he took them for the people he was +in search of, and said: "This is such and such an island or land." He +spoke to them in the language he had learnt during his first voyage, +but they never understood him, nor did he understand them. + +They went on to look at the ships, and all went chattering round +them; but they would not come on board, though we tried to persuade +them. On the contrary, after consulting, they took their arms quickly, +apparently incited by a tall and lean old native who was in the front, +and without more ado they drew their bows ready to shoot. The old man +addressed them, the word was passed from one to the other, and for some +time there was indecision; but, finally, their resolution was formed, +and, giving a shout, they shot off all their bows, and sent many arrows +into the sails and on other parts of the ship, without doing any other +harm. Seeing this, orders were given to the soldiers, who were ready, +to fire their arquebuses. Some were killed, many others were wounded, +and they all fled in great terror. They were followed in the boat by +four arquebusiers, and overtaken. Two jumped into the water to save +their lives, who were spared, and the rest, jumping out on the beach, +hid themselves among the trees. + +We stood off and on, seeking for a port, which all so much desired, +with the patience taught by the severe work they had gone through, +understanding that a landing would bring us certain refreshment. The +frigate came back without having seen the Almiranta, which aroused +our grief and fear afresh, and all three vessels anchored at the mouth +of a bay, under the shelter of some rocks. The bottom was dangerous, +and with the rising tide the galeot got adrift at about 10 in the +evening. Seeing the danger of driving on the rocks, the General came +out to give courage to the men, and raise the anchors. The noise +and hurry was great, the danger being imminent, and the night time +made it appear greater than it was. The negligence of the soldiers +was reprehensible, and there were not wanting those who cried out: +"The services which merit approval from the King are neither these +cares nor want of care. Let the brave Peruvians go below, and let those +who get the credit do the work. This ship must be looked after among +them, for it is for their credit, and to save their own lives." They +did not want to work, and had no shame; but, without their help, +God was served by our getting up the anchors. Having made sail, the +ship got out into the open sea, though not without some difficulty, +for the waves came on board and made her heel over. + +At dawn the Adelantado went on board the galeot to seek for a port; +and the Chief Pilot found one, though small. The volcano bore N.W. The +port was sheltered to the S.E., and had 12 fathoms of depth, a village, +a river, fuel and timber, and fresh air. The Adelantado came back +without having found a port, and the ships entered the bay. As it was +late they anchored under a point. The Sergeant landed with twelve +arquebusiers to secure a position. The natives of the village came +out, and shot off arrows with such force, that our men were obliged +to take refuge in a hut. Two volleys were fired from the ship, which +put the natives to flight, and the boat was sent for the men. All that +night the ships were at sea, and the next day the Adelantado found a +harbour sheltered from all winds, where he anchored in 15 fathoms, and +near the shore, where there were villages and a river. All night the +noise of music and dancing was heard, striking drums and tambourines +of hollow wood, at which the natives passed their time. + + + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + How the natives came to see the ships; how they found another + better port; of the guazabra that the natives gave; and what + happened until the settlement was formed. + + +Having anchored in the place already mentioned, many natives came +to see the ships and our people. Most of them had red flowers in +their hair and in their nostrils, and some of them were persuaded +by our people to come on board the ships, leaving their arms in the +canoes. Among them there came a man of fine presence and tawny-coloured +skin, with plumes on his head of blue, yellow, and red, and in his +hand a bow, with arrows pointed with carved bone. On either side +of him were two natives, with more authority than the rest. We +understood this man to be a personage, both because he appeared to +be greater than the others, and because of the respect with which he +was treated. Presently he came forward, and asked by signs who was our +chief. The Adelantado received him with much love, and, taking him by +the hand, let him know who he was. He said that his name was Malope, +and the Adelantado said that his was Mendaña. Malope understood, and +said that henceforward his name should be Mendaña, and that Mendaña's +name should be Malope. When this exchange of names had been effected, +he showed that he put great value on it, and when anyone called him +Malope he said no, that his name was Mendaña; and pointing with his +finger to the Adelantado, he said that was Malope. + +He also said that he was called Jauriqui: that name appearing to +mean chief or captain. The Adelantado dressed him in a shirt, and +gave him a few trifles of little value. To other natives the soldiers +gave feathers, little bells, glass beads, bits of cloth and cotton, +and even playing-cards, all which they put round their necks. They +taught the natives to say "friends," and to make a cross with two +fingers, embracing them in token of peace, all which they did learn and +constantly practised. They showed them looking-glasses, and with razors +they shaved their heads and chins, and with scissors they cut their +finger and toe-nails, at all which they rejoiced and were astonished; +but they begged hard for the razors and scissors. They also found out +what was under the men's clothes, and, being undeceived, they played +monkey tricks, such as those used by the natives of the first islands. + +This continued for four days, and they came and went, and brought what +food they had. One day Malope came, for he was the one whose visits +were most frequent, and who showed most friendship, the ships being +anchored near his village. The natives assembled with fifty canoes, +in which they had their arms concealed, all waiting for Malope, who +was on board the Capitana. They all fled because they saw a soldier +take up an arquebus, and made for the shore, our people following +them. On the beach there was another crowd of people, who received +them with joy, and they had a great consultation. The soldiers were +disappointed at such signs of peace, and would have preferred that +they should have given occasion to break the peace and make war. + +On that same afternoon the natives took all they possessed in +the nearest houses, and retreated to the village of Malope. On the +following night there were great fires on the other side of the bay, +lasting nearly until morning, which seemed to be a signal for war; +and this was confirmed when canoes were seen going in great haste +from one village to another, as if they were warning or giving notice +of something. + +Next morning a boat was sent from the galeot to take in water at +an adjacent stream. While they were thus employed, some concealed +natives shouted and fired off arrows, which wounded three of our +men. They followed down to the boat, where they were repulsed by the +arquebusiers. The wounded were attended to, and the Adelantado at once +ordered the Camp Master to land with thirty men, and to do all the +harm they could with fire and sword. The natives stood their ground, +when five were killed, and the rest fled. Our people retreated, and, +embarking, came back to the ships, having cut down palm trees and burnt +some huts and canoes. They brought away three pigs, which they killed. + +On the same day the Adelantado sent the Captain, Don Lorenzo, in the +frigate, with twenty soldiers and seamen, to seek for the Almiranta, +with instructions to examine all the coast that was in sight, and to +return to the place where they anchored on the first night of seeing +the land. Thence he was to steer W. and N.W., which was the direction +the Almiranta might have taken, beyond the route taken by the Capitana, +and he was to see whether anything could be found in that direction. + +He also ordered the Camp Master to rise early, and go quickly with +forty soldiers to some huts which were near a hill, to punish +the natives for having hit our men with arrows, in order that, +by means of the chastisement inflicted on them, it might have the +effect of preventing greater evils. He arrived without alarming the +natives, occupied the paths, surrounded the houses, and set them on +fire. Seven natives who were inside, seeing the fire and the people, +defended themselves like brave men, and attacked our soldiers without +regard for their own lives. Six were killed, and the other escaped +by running, but was badly wounded. The Camp Master came back to the +ship with seven wounded men and five dead pigs. + +In the afternoon Malope came to the beach, for the houses and canoes +that had been burnt belonged to him. In a loud voice, he cried to the +Adelantado by the name of Malope, saying: "Malope! Malope!" and beating +on his own breast, saying: "Mendaña, Mendaña!" In this way he made +his complaint, showing the harm they had done him by pointing with his +finger. He also made signs that his people had not shot arrows at our +men, but that the aggressors came from the other side of the bay. He +strung his bow, intending that we should all go against them, and that +his people would help us in taking vengeance. The Adelantado called +him with the intention of explaining matters; but he did not come. He +went away, returning on another day, and friendship was restored. + +On the day of St. Matthew, Apostle and Evangelist, they made sail from +this port, steering for another which was better and more convenient, +at a distance of half a league, and in the same bay. While altering +our berth, the Captain, Don Lorenzo, came back with the news that +in sailing round the island he had found another bay not less good +than the one in which we were, and with more people and canoes; also, +that further on he saw two fair-sized islands, near the large island, +which were thickly peopled. To the S.E., at a distance of 8 leagues, +he saw another island; 9 or 10 leagues to E.N.E. from where we hove to +for the night when we first sighted land, he came on three islands, +one 7 leagues round and the two others very small. They were all +inhabited by brown people of a clear colour, covered with palm trees; +and many reefs ran out to W.N.W., with openings and channels, of which +no end was seen. [54] No sign whatever was seen of the ship of which +they were in search. + +We anchored in the second port, and the natives passed the whole +night in shouting, as if they were bull-fighting or having games, +and very clearly we heard the word "amigo," and presently shouts. In +this and making fires the night was passed. When morning dawned, +a troop of about five hundred natives came to the beach, all with +their weapons in their hands, menacing and hurling arrows, darts, and +stones at the ships in hostile fashion. Seeing that their missiles did +not reach, some of them advanced into the water up to their breasts, +while others began to swim; in short, all were equal in willingness, +diligence, and noise. They came so near that, grappling with the buoys +of the ships, they went on shore with them. Seeing their audacity, +the Adelantado ordered Captain Lorenzo, his brother-in-law, to take +fifteen soldiers in the boat, and to skirmish with them. Those with +shields protected the arquebusiers and rowers, so that only two +were hit, but there would have been more if it had not been for the +shields, which were passed from place to place. The natives fought +in very scattered formation and by rushes, but showed themselves +to be valorous, so that it was understood that we had met with a +people who knew well how to defend their homes. But this only lasted +during the time that our arms did not do the harm that they did and +saw. As soon as they were undeceived by the death of two or three, +and several wounded, they retreated from the beach, and, abandoning +their aggressive attitude, took the road to their homes, carrying the +dead and wounded, creeping with the speed that we gave them into the +woods. They carried the wounded in their arms, and helped others to +walk, leaving the trail of their own blood where they went. + +The Captain, Don Lorenzo, although he had no orders to land, +followed the natives with his men, and the Camp Master, who was +watching everything from the ship, shouted that the men were being +placed in risk, and that if he was in another place he would punish +one who assumed a licence that had not been given to him. Doña Isabel +felt this very much, and wished it to be understood that, being her +brother, for him there was no limit of licence in things military. The +Camp Master landed with thirty soldiers, and went in pursuit of the +natives, but as he would not wait, he had nothing to report. + +It may be looked upon as certain that the Camp Master had said to +the Captain, Don Lorenzo, that if he would not obey he was not fit +to be a Captain; that he must pull up and know his duty, and that +there were not wanting those who would teach him. When this came to +the knowledge of Doña Isabel, she said things which were very deeply +felt by the Camp Master; who did not come back, but went alone to +pass the night at one of the villages of the natives which was near, +and all that night silence was well kept. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + How they began to treat of a settlement, and what passed in + forming it, and the complaints of the soldiers. + + +The following day, the Camp Master being on shore, he proposed to +the soldiers to clear a place which was close to a large stream, and +to found a settlement. The soldiers were not pleased with the place, +which appeared to be unhealthy, and for this reason some of the married +men went on board to inform the Adelantado of the determination of +the Camp Master, and to ask leave to go on shore and settle in one +of the native villages, where the houses were ready built and the +place already used. Others represented that there was no better place +than the one selected, and that if the natives had not settled there, +it was a token of their bad disposition. If not, they could do what +seemed best. + +The Adelantado agreed to this, and went on shore. As the unmarried +men were of the same opinion as the Camp Master, they at once got out +axes, wood knives, and spades, and began to cut down trees with smooth +trunks, lofty and tufted, but with very diverse leaves. The Adelantado +was not at all pleased at the decision, for it was his intention to +form the settlement on a bare point near the entrance of the bay, +where he went with the Camp Master and the soldiers. All came with +the opinion that the land was like Andalusia, that the natives had +many farms, and for a settlement that the place was as good as it +was agreeable. + +The soldiers cut down the trees with good will, brought poles with +which they built huts, and branches of palms to roof them. Their +former work and troubles, and the gift they had left behind, were +forgotten, as well as the small store they then had. They did not +remember their country, nor that they had left the province of Peru, +so rich and extensive, where there is no man who is poor in hopes. They +would overcome all the difficulties of which they were told, and which +were before their eyes, for their God and their King. The spirit and +valour of Spaniards could do all, for neither labour nor ill fortune +could daunt them, nor could dangers, however terrible and fearful +they might be. So they built their houses and set up their tents, +each one doing the best he could, as a beginning of what they would +have to perform in parts where they would live and end with honour +and fame. The Devil was able to work so well with some of them, that +they kept in mind the delights of Lima; and this sufficed to rob the +rest of their lofty thoughts, and thus to abate that constancy which +it is necessary to preserve and maintain in such affairs. + +The Adelantado did not disembark, but gave his orders for the good +government of his people from the ship. But the soldiers, to whom +a limit to what they are permitted to do seldom or ever seems good, +began to complain of an order which the Adelantado had given. It had +reference to the good treatment of the natives, their houses and +property. Those were not wanting who said that they did not want +to have a division but a moderate profit, that it was sufficient +that they had been brought to that coast, and that all belonged to +them. In other ways they noted and reminded themselves of what they +had spent and left behind, and of what they had suffered, and of +their hopes. Hence complaints arose, and too surely they began to +lose their love and loyalty point by point. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + In which a particular account is given of this bay, the natives, + the port, the villages and food, with what else was seen. + + +This bay, to which the Adelantado gave the name of "Graciosa," +for so it is, has a circuit of 40 1/2 leagues. It runs N.N.E. and +S.S.W., and is at the western end of the island, on its north side, +and south of the volcano. Its mouth is half a league wide, and there +is a reef on the east side, but the entrance is very open. The bay +is formed by an island to the westward, which is very fertile and +well peopled, both on the shore and inland. We called it our garden, +"Huerta." [55] It is separated from the large island by a short +space, full of rocks and reefs, with some small channels, so that +only boats and canoes can pass. The port is at the bottom of the bay, +where there is a very copious stream of clear and excellent water, +which, at the distance of a musket shot, runs under some rocks and +so enters the sea. The settlement was formed on the banks of this +stream and of the sea. To the east of the stream, at the distance of +an arquebus shot, there is a moderate-sized river. The port is in 10° +20' S., and 1,850 leagues from Lima. There are breezes from the S.E., +which do little harm. The bottom is mud, with 40, 30, and 20 fathoms, +and anchorage close to the shore. In all this bay there is no place +for a ship to anchor except in the port, and in the first, which we +left because it was small. Over all the rest there is foul ground +owing to rocks. There is another spring on a beach of clean sand, of +excellent water, and a river and stream, which flow near the houses +of Malope, and there enter the sea. + +In this country there are many pigs, which they roast whole +over stones. There are fowls like those of Castille, many of them +white. They fly up into the trees and breed there; also partridges, +like those of Castille, or of another kind very like them. + +There are large wild pigeons, grey, with white necks, small doves, +herons, black and white, ducks, swallows, and other birds which I +do not know. Of reptiles I only saw some black lizards, and ants, +but no mosquitos: a new thing in such a low latitude. + +There are many kinds of fish. The natives fish with three-pronged +poles which they have, large, and many of them. The line appears to +be of fibre, with floats of light wood, and sinkers of stone. + +They have many plantains, of seven or eight kinds. Some are reddish, +and as broad as the width of a hand; others of the same colour, +but very small and tender, even when ripe. Some have the rind green, +and the pulp not so green. There are others very large, twisted with +one turn, which are of a delicious taste and smell. Each bunch has +many plantains. + +There are great numbers of cocoa-nut trees and very large sweet +canes. There are also almonds with three sides, and the pulp of +each one contains as much as four almonds of Castille, the taste +being delicious. There are some very beautiful pines of the size of +a man's head, with the kernels the size of a Spanish almond. The +trees on which they grow have few leaves, and those they have are +large. There is another kind of very good nuts, which grow in very +large and long bunches on small trees with round leaves, and each one, +with its rind, will be of the size and shape of a date. There is also +the large fruit which we praised much at the first islands, and the +nuts and chestnuts like the others. There is another fruit which they +called a pippin. It grows on a tall and large tree, and another kind +which is not so good, the way of growing being like that of pears. As +we did not go all over the land, nor were there all the year round, +it is not known what other fruits there may be. + +There are three or four kinds of roots, all in abundance, which form +their bread, and they eat them roast or boiled. One of them has a sweet +taste, the other two prick a little when eaten. A soldier ate one raw, +from which a great nausea resulted, but he was none the worse. Of these +roots the natives make a great quantity of biscuits, dried either in +the sun or by fire. They keep them in baskets of palm leaves. This +food is sustaining. It has the drawback of being rather heating, but +much is eaten of it, and of the roots roasted and boiled, and in pots. + +There is plenty of fibre, which throughout the east is used as cord. + +There are large and red amaranths, greens, and a sort of calabash, +plenty of sweet basil with a very strong smell, and several kinds +of red flowers beautiful to look at, which the natives are very fond +of. They have no smell. They train them on small trees, and have them +in small pots near their houses. + +There is plenty of ginger, which grows without being sown. There is +also a great quantity of a tall branching shrub called indigo, from +which the indigo dye is made. There are aloe trees, much demajagua, +[56] from which they make their cords and nets, as well as from the +cocoa-nuts, though not so much. + +There are shells like the curious ones that are brought from China, +and pearl oyster-shells, some large and others small. + +In our settlement, on the banks of the stream, there was a tree +which the natives wound in the trunk, and there comes out a liquor +of a sweet smell, which is very like turpentine, and with this, +or another mixed with it, they fill their calabashes. The natives +make bags and purses of palm very well worked, and large sheets or +mats which serve as sails for their canoes. They weave a fabric--I +do not know from what it is woven--on some small looms they make, +which serve for mantles, with which the women are clothed. + +I have already said that the natives are black and tawny, and they are +like the people we have among ourselves of those colours. They make +great use of a root which is also used in the East Indies, called +betel, and in the Philippines buhio. It is a cordate-shaped leaf +of the size of a hand, more or less, its smell, taste, and colour +like a clove. They put lime with it, apparently got from shells, +and fruit the size of acorns, which grows on wild palms. They spit +out the first chewing, and keep the pulp that is left. It is well +spoken of as wholesome, and strengthening to the stomach, as well as +good for the teeth. + +Their villages consist of twenty houses, more or less, and they build +them round, of boards one over the other, on a single frame of stout +wood. They have two lofts, to which they ascend by ladders, with roofs +of interlaced palms, like hen lofts in Castille. They are all open, +half the height of a man, and surrounded by a wall of loose stones, +with an opening instead of a door. The eaves do not reach to the +boards of the roof, and serve as a shelter. In each village there is +a long house, used as an oracle, with human figures in half relief, +badly carved, and another long house, which appeared to be for the +community. In the centre of them there were barbacoas of cane. There +are ten or twelve of these villages on the sea shore, and in each +one or two wells, curiously lined with stones, with steps such as +are in use among us, by which they go down, and the opening has its +covering of boards. On the shore there are some yards encircled by +stones where, when the sea rises, they fish with a certain contrivance, +having a pole worked like a pump-handle. + +They have some large and beautiful canoes, with which they navigate to +a distance, for the small ones only serve to go for short distances +from their homes. They are flat-bottomed, made of a single tree from +stem to stern. They have their hatchway in the middle, out of which +they take the water which comes in by the mast. They fix a frame +of crossed sticks, very securely fastened with cords, from which +comes an outrigger with a cross plank, which steadies the canoe, +and prevents it from capsizing. In this way one such vessel will +serve for thirty or more men with their things. The sail is large, +and made of matting, wide above and narrow below. The canoes are +good sailers and weatherly. Our frigate succeeded in getting one, +and hoisted her up, under the bowsprit. + +They have their cultivated patches, and fruit gardens well ordered. The +soil is black, spongy, and loose. The parts that are sown are first +well cleared. The temperature is the same as that of other lands in +the same latitude. There was some thunder and lightning, and many +showers, but not much wind. + +The Adelantado gave the name of Santa Cruz to the island. It appeared +to have a circumference of 100 leagues. All the part which I saw +runs almost east and west. It is well covered with trees. The land +is not very high, though there are hills, ravines, and some beds of +reeds. It is clear of rocks, and those that do exist are close to +the land. It is well peopled all along the sea shore; but I cannot +give an account of the interior, as I never explored it. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + How the trouble among the soldiers began with a paper and + signatures; what the Adelantado said on the subject to certain + soldiers; of some complaints that were made, and some disgraceful + things that occurred. + + +As has been said, the Adelantado did not land because no house had been +built for him. So that he was in the ship, while the Camp Master was +on shore and had charge of the ordering of things there. Our people +began to seek for food, and whenever a leader with twelve or fifteen +soldiers went to the villages of the natives (which were numerous +and near our settlement), or to their cultivated patches, they always +came back with from six to twelve pigs, many cocoa nuts and plantains, +and everything else that the island supplies. They found the natives +submissive and inclined to peace; for though it is true that at first +they took to flight, afterwards they remained quietly in their houses, +with their wives and children. They themselves brought supplies to +near the camp. They were not allowed to enter, lest they should see +how small were our numbers. The same was done by them as regards the +ship, and their solicitude seemed to show that they were friends. + +Malope also conducted himself in the same way, and from the goodwill +that was shown by all, it seemed to us that the friendship with them +was firmly established. It arrived at such a pitch that the Captain +Don Lorenzo was able to make an agreement with the natives that +they would come to help us to build the houses, praying that their +own might be left to them, and showing much feeling when they were +pulled down. One day, when they came the Vicar went out to them, +and many with him. He made a cross with two poles, ordering all +present to show reverence to it. Presently the natives did the same, +and went with it to their village in procession. + +Things being in this condition, there began to arise among the soldiers +opinions very different from those of the Adelantado. They said that +the land was wretched and very poor, that there was nothing in all +the country, and that the position of the settlement was bad. They +were dissatisfied with everything. What yesterday appeared very good +to them now seemed very bad; guided by their fancies, and forgetful +of the obligations of those who follow the banner of their King. At +last a document was prepared with several signatures, in which the +Adelantado was asked to take them away from that place and find a +better one for them, or to take them to the islands he had talked +about. The Adelantado had notice of the paper and signatures, through +the gossip and the post which the Devil always has ready to carry +tales. He fell ill at the trouble of seeing such a bad beginning to +what he had hoped would have a good end. Seeing, however, into what +disorder things were falling, he went on shore. Meeting one of those +who had signed the paper, he said: "Is your worship a ringleader +of the party? Do you not know that it is little less than mutiny +to sign that paper?" The man replied, with the paper in his hand: +"Here is what we want, and if anything else has been said it is a +lie." A soldier put forth another argument, and the Adelantado said: +"Silence, for you have cause to hold your tongues." He then went +on board again, and ordered the Pilot of the galeot to go on shore, +where he was received by certain of the soldiers. It is reported that +he said to them that they should leave that land, and that in less +than thirty days he would take them to a better one. + +In the midst of these troubles our church was built, for which there +was a charitable promise in the future of 10,000 ducats; and each +day the priest said mass in it. + +They had to seek for food, and they cut much fibre to make ropes, +collecting all they could get from the natives. Meanwhile the signing +of the paper proceeded, and it was considered certain that there would +be eighty signatures. Those who asked men to sign did not forget to +make the most of the island, and to remind them of their hardships +and hard work. Some of the men answered that there was the need to +work everywhere, and that the work in that land was of a kind which +was quite suitable to them. + +The deaths of the natives took place in the following way. One of +them, being in friendship with us, a soldier shot him in the neck, +of which wound he presently died. The other, being in conversation, +four soldiers called him apart, and killed him with stabs. These +things were done with the object of inducing the natives to make +war upon us, and thus produce a scarcity of provisions, so as to +make it the desire of all to leave the island. Also it was thought +that the natives attacking, the camp would have to be strengthened, +the Adelantado would be applied to for the artillery, and he being +disarmed they would remain strong. It was said that they wanted to +kill some of us, I know not who, but certain persons were followed, +with the object of taking their offices and giving them to friends +of the disaffected. It was also said that it was intended to give a +false alarm at night, and, when those who were loyal to the Adelantado +came out of their houses, to set upon them. + +It was made public that, one night, a troop of armed malcontents came +to enter a house where some loyal men were watching, and after they +had pointed arquebuses at their breasts, they turned back and went +into a tent. There they tried the beds, and, not finding the owners +in them, who from fear had fled into the woods, they only terrified +their wives. At another place they tried the place in a bed by driving +a sword into it, and not feeling anything they went away. This was +related by the people themselves. But as the stories wanted evidence, +nothing was done. I say myself that a soldier said to me that others +had asked him whether he wished to return to Peru; that he had answered +in the affirmative, and seeing what his wishes were, they asked him to +sign the paper they showed him, to be presented to the Adelantado. As +soon as he had signed they said to him: "Now that you have signed you +must have your weapons ready, and if you see the Adelantado and the +Camp Master opposed, take the side of the Camp Master, and act like +a good soldier. Point with your arquebus and fire. You are not told +to kill unless," etc. The same thing was said on another occasion: +"It is a pity, for at night I am disturbed lest they should not kill +as many men as they want to kill." + +Among the various proposals of the malcontents there was one that they +should make gimlet holes in the ships, because it was not desirable +that news should be taken to Peru, for the islands would not be found, +even if search was made for them they would not be discovered, and thus +either all would go or none. To this a well-intentioned person answered +that the coming had been for the good of the people of those parts, +and that if the King was not informed, so that succour might be sent, +the service could not be performed. This honourable answer so enraged +the other that he raised his arm in anger, and said that "they would +not be converted, a flock of sheep, and as they have been until now, +so they will continue to be henceforward; but we are not going to die +here when we can be saved." The other, continuing the conversation, +said: "I should be fortunate if the Lord granted that I should be +the means of one soul being saved; how much more when there are so +many here to be saved." This plan of returning to Peru was so fixed +in their minds, that they did not even like the Chief Pilot to go +out to sea on the important business of his calling; saying, that if +he went with the sailors he would not come back again. This had such +an effect on the mind of the Adelantado, that he had all the sails +unbent, and put them under guard. This was not the only false testimony +that was borne; for another lie was told of another person. It was a +small thing to take life, so long as they could gain their ends. But +it was seen by experience that attempts against truth and innocence +profit little, because the author of them is soon discredited. I can +well say that the harm they intended me has been pardoned. A friend +said to one of them: "Is your worship one of those who wish to leave +this land?" The reply was: "What can we do here?" The other answered: +"What we came to do! and if all others went away, I should remain to +do my duty; and the friend who should deny this ought to be answered, +without further ado, with a dagger in his blood." + +This confused time was good for each one to declare his good will +if he had it. Discontented and vacillating soldiers, when they saw +no firmness, felt that the door was open for them to try the minds +of others, and find out who was resolved and who was not. One said +in public: "the Camp Master is my cock; all are afraid of him. What +he orders is obeyed. Now things are ripening. Before long we shall +see something, and before long we shall have liberty." It was also +said that the clothes of Doña Isabel were intended to last two +years. Another said that he might think himself fortunate who could +take his wife by the hand. Another said: "Such and such could stay, +but we intend to go, let it give pain to whom it might pain, for in +my kingdom I may rule." Such like nonsense would lead to death. It +was also said: "We carry such a one as pilot, who is not known +to the world. He will take us to the deserts of Chile, and with +that we shall be contented, and we will go to Potosi." In short, +each word that was said was mutinous and insubordinate. Well was +this tower of confusion built up over the ashes of vindictiveness, +vanity, and disordered ambition and avarice, the pests of such an +enterprise. This it is to want understanding and prudence. Will it +not bring ruin? Further on we shall see. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + How the Adelantado went on shore, and what happened, and what he + said to the Camp Master; and the transaction between the Vicar + and the Chief Pilot. + + +Seeing that there was so much disorder, the Adelantado determined +to go on shore, where he met several soldiers with swords in their +hands. He asked them why they carried them so, and one replied that +it was because there was war. The Camp Master came to the Adelantado, +and said: "It is well that your Lordship has come. It seems to me +that these bellicose men go and come with complaints, and refer me +to your Lordship; and if your Lordship does not apply a remedy, all +those will be found some morning hanging from a tree"; and he pointed +with his finger. To this the Adelantado answered with great patience, +and showing much sorrow. The Camp Master replied: "They are rascals who +would not dare to take a crumb from a cat. Apart from your Lordship, +whom I hold to be above my head (this with his hat in his hand), +I do not care for any of them, from the smallest to the biggest, and +I look upon them as the dirt under my feet, and none of them merits +notice except myself, for I am a gentleman. All who are here, except +your Lordship, want to go away and leave this land, but I must obey +and serve your Lordship; God knows that if it had not been for me the +honour of your Lordship would have been in the dust; and last night +they would have killed all those who were in two of the houses if I +had not prevented them. One is the house of such an one, and as to the +other I will keep silence." They told me that he said more. I am not +any longer informed about it. They can do what they like. On this day +a soldier took the liberty to address the General. The Camp Master was +present, and he quarrelled with the man. The Adelantado, seeing this, +and considering the liberties that had been taken on other days, said: +"Now they lose respect for me." The man was respectable, and was on +the side and held the views of his chief, and would have stood by him, +and for the honour of the King. But the Adelantado took him by the arm, +and said: "This is not the time!" + +The General paid several visits to the camp, to see if his presence +would smooth matters. One day he met the Camp Master, and said to +him: "For all that is happening the fault is your worship's, for +you give the soldiers wings, and they suffer misrepresentation." The +Camp Master answered: "The false statements are on board the ship, +and I show no favour to the soldiers, but I make them respect your +Lordship and obey you as governor." + +On another occasion the Camp Master took the hand of the Adelantado, +and complained of what Doña Isabel had said of him. The Adelantado +was more annoyed this time than on others. The Camp Master went +away, and the Adelantado went to the corps du garde. He laid down +on a chest, and showed much feeling. They had to help him to raise +his feet on to it. Presently, the Chief Pilot and some others came, +saying that he should not be troubled, and that all were his servants +and would follow him. Having rested a little, he went on board, and +repeated what he had said to the Camp Master. With arms in his hand +the General came for me, and told me, that the Camp Master had said +also what a thing it was not to have come provided, as was reasonable, +and they had deceived him in not having brought two hundred axes and +three hundred wood knives; for they had come to a land where neither +God nor the King would be served by their arrival, and if this people +were taken to another part it would be a great advantage. These things +about the Camp Master I relate partly from the reports of others, +for I do not myself remember them all very well. + +The next time the Adelantado went on shore was to arrange and mark +out with the Camp Master a site for a stockade to be used as a +fort. Touching this, and the ground for sowing, and other matters +relating to the administration of the settlement, he had to give his +attention and to hear much folly. There were questions of entails, +titles, relationships, and ownerships; such demands, replies and +settlements; such wasting of time and breaking of heads. In fine, +they did not trust each other. On this day two arquebusiers left the +camp, and the ball of one of them went whizzing over the Chief Pilot, +who was on board the Capitana. The other ball passed over the frigate, +and I know not at what birds they were aiming. + +On the following night the Chief Pilot was keeping watch, +and at dawn Don Diego Barreto came in a canoe to speak to his +brother-in-law. Having spoken to him, he said to me that things had +come to such a pass in the camp that it did not promise less than his +death, and the deaths of his brothers and brother-in-law, with all +those who remained true to their duty. At this time the Camp Master +was saying on shore, "Arm! Arm!" The Chief Pilot ordered that the +Constable should fire off a piece that was pointed at the village, +sending the ball in the air, to terrify the natives, or at least to +let them understand that we did not sleep without a dog. The noise of +all ceased, and that of one voice sounded, saying that the General +should send them powder and cord. We were deaf for the time, but at +dawn we sent them what they asked for; asking at the same time the +cause of the disturbance. The answer was that the branches of trees +rubbed against the posts in one part of the camp, and, thinking it +was the natives, they had sounded to arms. + +On the same day the Vicar went on shore to say Mass, according to his +custom; for he also still lived on board, there being no house for him +in the camp. When he returned in the afternoon, he said to the Chief +Pilot: "Those people will go without fail." The Chief Pilot asked where +they would go. The Vicar replied, "I only know what I say;" and the +Pilot said: "What sailors have they to take them? Will they kill us, +or use force?" The Vicar said Yes; that all were determined to do +so. He asked the Chief Pilot to procure that the soldiers should be +appeased, for if they should go the natives will be the losers. He +shrugged his shoulders, saying that with very good will he would +spend four years there, teaching the natives. The Pilot answered: +"A month has not even passed since we arrived. How can there be so +little firmness in honourable men?" + + + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + How the Chief Pilot asked leave to go, in the name of the General, + to speak to the soldiers on shore, and what passed between them. + + +The next day, being a Friday, the Chief Pilot, seeing the determination +of the men in the camp, from what the Vicar had said, and the illness +and low spirits of the Adelantado, asked permission to go on shore +and speak to the soldiers in his name. The Adelantado answered: "I +know not whether those people will listen to anything in my favour +and that of the land, being so determined, and having declared that +they would have their own way." The Pilot went to him a second time, +and at last he consented. So the Chief Pilot went on shore, and the +first person he met, with a scornful gesture, and his head turned +derisively, said: "Are you ordered to go with a report to Peru? Now +is the time to take my letters." Then a soldier, who was a friend to +the Adelantado, came to the Pilot, and said: "Things look very bad; +I know not what will happen." Another said: "Though I wish to see +you proceeding with the enterprise, I am very sorry to see you here, +because of the menaces with which you will be received." + +On going further into the camp, many soldiers came to him. Some were +saying: "Where have you brought us to? What place is this whence no +man goes, and to which no man will return? Even if notice was sent, +people would only come to take gold, silver, pearls, or other things +of value, and these are not here. The Adelantado is not to send notice, +nor will all of us, or any of us, consent to it." + +Others said: "We did not come to sow: for that purpose there is plenty +of land in Peru; that is not the way to follow the service of God +or of the King. We have obligations to our own people, not to these +savages. These are not the islands the Adelantado told us of, nor will +we remain here. Embark us and take us to seek those other islands, +or take us to Peru or some part where there are Christians." Resolute +words of people without a master! Of these and other like things +one and the other talked, in the direction whither their desires +guided them, or rather drove them, without attending to whether the +things they wanted were profitable or harmful. For mutineers have +their wills so unrestrained that they have no bridle to check them, +though the words spoken to them may be words of truth. + +The Chief Pilot enquired for the reasons which made them think that +the land was bad, to which they answered that it yielded next to +nothing. On this he asked them what they had left in Peru, and what +they had brought from there? and what they sought for to pass this +life, unless it was money to buy a house and sustenance: a thing which +few succeed in doing until late, most men passing their lives in hopes; +that the present is good for working, without knowing what may come +after, or what may be discovered. They said that when that time came +twenty years would have passed away, and they would be old. The Pilot +said to them that according to that, they ought to know how to find +cities, vineyards, and gardens; to enter a house ready furnished, +with the tables spread, and to make the owners give up their property +and go into servitude; or they should know how to find mountains, +valleys, and plains of emeralds, rubies, and diamonds, ready to be +loaded and taken away. It should be remembered that all the provinces +in the world had their beginnings; that Seville, Rome, and Venice, +and the other cities of the world, were once forests or bare plains; +and that it had cost the inhabitants what great things cost to create +them, that their successors might enjoy the fruits of their labours, +as they do now enjoy them. "What I understand is that you want others +to have worked that you may rest, without remembering that all have +to work, though the first workers may have made the beginnings." + +But they looked upon the Chief Pilot with suspicion, and they gave +for a reason that it was he who was to go with the news, and he +therefore favoured the settlement of this land that he might remain +in the other. He asked them what riches they had seen him take that +they thought this of him; that he it was who risked most, having +to go for their good to discover routes over unknown seas; besides +the labour he had to go through, to look out for a rock at night, +and to complete calculations. + +He further addressed them as follows:--"Gentlemen, who is it that +deceives you and makes you discontented? What is the bad conception +which makes you think that you can all leave this place with the +ease that you promise yourselves? Tell me who they are, for I will +explain to you the impossibilities there are in going from here +to Peru, or any other part whatsoever." One of them answered: "Let +that be how it may, for I would rather die at sea than where I am, +and between the two we are in irons." The Pilot said to this man: +"Know you not that we follow our General, who is in the place of the +King, and that we are bound to desire what he desires for the King's +service; and to want any other thing is to want to go contrary to the +royal service." They all answered: "Here we are not going against +the royal service." To this the Pilot replied: "What is it to go +against the will of your General; to refuse to improve the land which +he has settled in the royal name; and what is it to disobey, incite, +and menace those who do not agree with you?" They answered: "We only +desire that notice be not sent to Peru, and that, as we are a small +body of men, we may be taken from here and taken to the islands of +which we are in search, or to some better place." The Pilot replied: +"The Adelantado is the person whose duty it is to see that all goes +well. It should be left to him, who now wishes a second time to search +for the Admiral at the island of San Cristobal, which he was instructed +to search for. If it should be found all will be well, and if not, +a Christian view of things should be taken. The Adelantado's person +and that of his wife were in the same place where they all were, and +all would share the dangers together. If the Almiranta was found, +all must approve. Moreover, it was not the Chief Pilot who had to +go, but the Adelantado, who was well prepared." The Pilot added that +their leader was ill, and that it was not reasonable to expect that +his person should be exposed to new risks. But when he should wish +to go, there should be none to contradict, being such honourable men +whose faith could be trusted in this and more. + +At this time others had come to give their opinions, but as the music +was loud and so much out of tune, it did not sound well. + +Continuing the discussion, the Chief Pilot, whose services in having +navigated the fleet and discovered four islands whence they could +take a new departure with a fair wind and short voyage, were nearly +forgotten, now said: "You should all remember that if God had not given +us the island on which we now are, we should all have perished; and as +He gave it, we ought to be willing to remain here for a time. Now it +may be seen that the same wind which brought us detains us here; the +wind that was fair is now contrary, and a return to Peru is impossible +without seeking a very high latitude. The ships have many defects, +and we cannot careen them, we have no cables, and the rigging is +rotten. As for provisions, we have nothing left but a little flour, +and the jars for water are diminished in number, as many of them have +been broken; while the barrels are out of order, there being no one +who can repair them. The route is long and unknown, and we do not know +what would be the duration of such a voyage. These things are certain, +and cannot be avoided, without the risk of your own lives and those of +your comrades." He said further: "I desire that the wind would change, +but we must go west, being the only course with a fair wind. We may be +certain that we shall not be a longer time on the voyage than we were +in coming here, where we can have as much, in the way of supplies, +as we started with. Why should we have gone through so much labor, +wasting our property and running such great risks, undertaking such +an honorable enterprise, if we do not go through with it? + +"Remember well that the King has had and still has other vassals, +who have defended frontiers and maintained provinces against warlike +people of great power, and sometimes eating dogs and cats rather than +suffer dishonour; and all without expecting any reward such as may +be hoped for here. At present neither will supplies be wanting in so +fertile a soil, nor will an enemy cause serious danger; nor are there +other drawbacks which we are obliged to forget, but which others will +not forget. For we have an honourable opportunity which many others +would like to have without ever having it offered to them, which we +can perpetuate at the cost of much careful management. Why should we +avoid such a chance? We should show resolution, for there is time for +all things, and it is as well to reach the place we want in May as in +September. In short, where is it desired that we should be, if we are +to say that we only come to seek our own welfare; and even to procure +that we want the spirit, for very soon, and without more cause than +our own cowardice, we should be undone. We should be looked upon as +the enemies of God and the King, and of the honor of our General and +our own, if we abandon such an enterprise and such a land. + +"Enemies to God, because we abandon so easily, and without sufficient +cause, the work we came to do for the honour of God and the salvation +of souls. It is the great interest on which we have to turn both +our eyes, to rescue from the captivity of the Devil those whom he +looks upon as so secure; to turn the worship of the natives from him, +and turn it to God, to whom they owe it, and whose it is. + +"Enemies of the King, for impeding his service, which may be promoted +in this place, without making other discoveries, incurring fresh +expenses, or risking other fleets. It may be that what was intended +will be achieved, for when the new world was discovered it was not +known at first how important it was, there being only a few small +islands of little or no value; yet, through the constancy of the +discoverers, there were afterwards found the great and rich provinces +of New Spain and Peru; while the return to Spain, for a long time +laborious and difficult, is now made easy through the mercy of God. + +"Enemies to the honour of our General, because he has expended his +resources on the enterprise, leaving what he has left in Peru. Do you +wish, solely for your whim, to destroy such Christian aspirations, +which have endured so long? + +"Enemies of our own honour, because, from this position where we now +are, there is no place to which we can go that will not be in the +dominions of our King, and whose Ministers will exact a very strict +account of whence we came, where we have left the General, and what +reason we had for abandoning a land which had been settled in the name +of the King: more especially such a land as this which is fertile, +with friendly and numerous inhabitants. In one way or another we +cannot escape from offending our consciences, risking our lives, our +honour, and our liberty. For all to go it is not possible, although +we may wish it. To leave women and children, and helpless persons, +would not be just. Would you go to New Spain? The Adelantado has +already taken that route when he was in these parts before, but many +died, and all went through terrible hardships during a long voyage; +moreover, it is not always the season for such navigation. To go to +the Philippines also has its difficulties." Thinking it all over, and +doing his best to combat their inconsiderate desire, the Chief Pilot +concluded by saying: "Why do you litigate without any grounds, saying +that you will embark presently? I will show, with the Adelantado, +that what you want to do this day is impossible." + +Some of them, opening their eyes, appeared to be convinced by these +arguments; but others were still obdurate. They preferred to trust +to the ship rather than to what the land offered, and the water could +be taken in 10,000 cocoa nuts, in joints of the canes, or even in the +canoes of the natives, covering and caulking them; and they proposed +other equally feasible contrivances. But the Chief Pilot said: "This +is only a waste of time. Is it not for the Adelantado to decide what +shall be done?" They said that "if the land will yield much food, +how is it that we get nothing to eat from it?" "What certainty have +you," said the Pilot, "that the provisions obtained here will not get +bad." They answered that they were ready to risk that. As to water, +they said that they would fall in with other islands on the route +whence they could take in water; and that they would listen to reason, +for they were reasonable beings. + +Finally, they went back to their old song that they wanted to +go to Manilla, which was a land of Christians. The Pilot said to +them that Manilla was also a land of heathens, and that there being +Christians was due to the discoverers who settled there; and that in +our expedition a similar duty was required of us. In Manilla there are +only some soldiers stationed by the King to guard the estates of the +settlers; and it is better to remain here where we might become such +as they are in fame and honour, than go marching there with shouldered +arquebus. To this one of them answered that honour was where the Pope +and the King were, and not among Indians. The Pilot then said that +it was better to ask for what they wanted from their General, who was +not a man to close his ears to a just petition; and that they should +consider that their position was very offensive to the General, who +desired to do what the King had ordered. What word soever sounded ill +there would also follow as many more and as free. To this, one of the +soldiers said: "Leave off! leave off! and leave it for he who wants to +stay, for we intend to go, dislike it who may." I was without a sword, +and he with seven or eight others, went for theirs, and presently came +back with heightened colour. Asking for the Camp Master, they all bowed +their heads, with their swords in their hands, looking very fierce, +not wanting much whispering, and secrets among some who spoke within +hearing. They said publicly that they came to kill the Chief Pilot; +and there was one who swore that they came saying: "Come, let us kill +him, for he is the cause of our being in this land;" and others swore, +and went so far with their menaces as to say: "What shall they drink +in his skull." Things did not look well. God knows what they intended. + +He who had declared that they would go, spoke and said: "There is no +one who does not wish to go from this land; one who keeps most apart +was he who showed most willingness, but it does not signify." He said +most on that side, and was most resolved, both then and at other times; +but as there were many people, there were as many arguments, and with +loud voices. The Chief Pilot concluded what he had to say by declaring +that all he had put before them was in the service of God and the King, +and that he would sustain it to the death, as he had proved. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + How the Camp Master came on board the ship; what passed with the + Adelantado, and between the Camp Master and the soldiers on shore, + where the Chief Pilot talked to the Camp Master. + + +This was the state of affairs when the Camp Master came on board the +ship to speak with the Adelantado, who, had he been alone, would have +strangled him and hung him on one of the masts. So Doña Isabel, his +wife, urged him (according to her own account), saying to her husband: +"Kill him or have him killed. What more do you want? He has fallen +into your hands, and if not I will kill him with this knife." The +Adelantado was prudent, and did not do so. He understood that the +desire of the Camp Master was not to go so far in offences of his +own as it was said that he intended. The Camp Master returned to the +shore, and said to the soldiers: "Gentlemen! I come from speaking to +the General respecting his affairs and this settlement; and he said +that it had come to his knowledge that all of you were afflicted and +troubled, saying that this is not a good land, and that you wanted to +be taken to a better one. He says that you ask for a paper, and that he +will answer, which is reasonable, as he is our General." Presently he +said: "This is not mutiny, but it is when, without saying anything to +their superiors, the soldiers suddenly break out, killing and crying, +'Down with the rascals!' Your worships have a right to ask, and to +go and seek the Almiranta; for those on board were our comrades, +and it is not just to leave them without making any search. + +"But if I were not the Master of the Camp, I would do and say more, +for it is not understood that in my position I can give consent, +when the Adelantado has said that his friends were those who have +most declared themselves: a reason for giving all to understand that +one enjoys his friendship. + +"No soldier, whatever his condition may be, can to-day speak a +word without its coming to the ear of my General; for I have to be +subordinate, though I may be his best friend. My General has given to +me his honour and the service of the King, and they are in that place +I have to serve. Each one watches another. I am watched because I +favour your party. I have not to lose my honour, nor is it ever to be +supposed that such evil and unjust things can ever enter the thoughts +of a person with my obligations, position, and experience. Nor is +it reasonable to think that such honourable soldiers as are in this +camp would wish to do by force what is suggested. Each one performs +the duty assigned to him, for we only came here to obey and serve +the King, and he who serves him not will be punished." + +The soldiers began to talk among themselves, saying they need not +be alarmed nor bear it in mind; and one of them said, referring +to a search for the Almiranta, that he would offer to go in search +in the name of the rest; that if he volunteered the thing would be +safe, as he was more confident than the others, not being altogether +ignorant of the art of navigation. Another said that the Adelantado +is expert, and could not be deceived; and said that it should be the +Camp Master. Another objected that he was not a sailor. He laughed, +and said: "Gentlemen, I do not understand those affairs, and can +easily be taken in." He added: "Some one has to go, and some one has +to be trusted in the business." This ended what was said in public. A +witness swore that, the Chief Pilot being there talking, one soldier +said to another: "Let us choose this traitor; we will kill him." + +The Chief Pilot took the Camp Master aside, and asked him to listen +for a moment; then looked round carefully, and in a short time +discussed many things that have already been referred to. Respecting +the navigation, the Pilot said that, when the time came, he would do +the work well in accordance with instructions of the Adelantado. + +The Camp Master said that now he did not value his life, and that he +would say nothing unless he was asked to speak. + +The Chief Pilot then took his leave, and went on board to report what +had happened to the General, adding that, in his opinion, it would +be well if the General would go on shore and speak to his people; +that he thought it would be easy to reduce them to obedience by his +presence, his will, and by putting before them the just reasons which +actuated him. + +On the following day the General went on shore. As he jumped out, +a servant of his said, while he seized his arms: "There are going +to be black puddings." Some soldiers coming towards the Adelantado +said to one another: "Our General comes with the martingale. He +also comes armed. What think you of the words his servant spoke to +him?" That day the Adelantado had arranged with Don Lorenzo and three +other soldiers that the Camp Master should be put to death. This was +very different from what I had understood that he intended to do, +but such things ought to be stated as, in my opinion, will explain +the change. A certain person told me that a bad third person had +said to the Adelantado that if he would have the Camp Master stabbed +(he did not say that he should be killed), but that if he should be +killed--Let those of better understanding judge, for I do not hold +it to be right to sit in judgment on the living and the dead. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + How the Chief Pilot went to seek for provisions, and how Malope + came to make peace, and the friendship that was established. + + +On the following day the Chief Pilot asked permission from the +Adelantado to go in search of food. Having received it, he went in +the boat, with twenty men, to a village where he only saw one man +with a little boy. The rest had fled into the woods. On entering and +searching the houses, nothing to eat was found. The Pilot followed a +path which seemed to lead to the cultivated patches of the natives, +and some pigs were seen, which ran into the woods. The Chief Pilot +then heard the report of an arquebus, and presently another. On this +he went back to the beach, where he had left the boat in charge of four +arquebusiers. Arriving on the beach, he found Malope, who had come with +two canoes, and said: "Friends; let us all come and eat." These words, +and some others, we had learnt. He then told us by signs that we should +embark, and come with him to a place where he had many pigs and other +food. He sent the other canoe in advance. The Chief Pilot embarked, +and told Malope to call the natives of that village. They came back, +and arranged, on their return, to have food collected. Malope rowed +his canoe, our boat followed, and, arriving at two other villages, +a similar arrangement was made. We then entered the village of +the warlike natives. They gave us a pig, and a few cocoa-nuts and +plantains. As this seemed little, the Chief Pilot asked for more. But +the natives took up arms, and retired behind their houses and the +trunks of trees with their bows and arrows, shouting and apparently +calling to Malope. He seemed to be undecided, looking at one party and +then at the other. The Chief Pilot, who always kept Malope by his side, +drew his dagger and threatened Malope if he should attempt to go, or +should not tell the natives not to shoot off their arrows. If they +did, they would all be killed with the arquebuses. With an ignited +cord he got ready to fire them off. Malope went to the village, and +induced them to offer that, when the sun showed it to be three o'clock, +they would come with what they could get ready. Malope called them, +and they presently came, giving us many plantains and cocoa-nuts to +eat. They also invited us to come and shoot natives on the other side +of the bay, and to kill pigs. Having embarked, the boat followed the +canoe, but the Chief Pilot marched along the shore with sixteen men +and three native guides. Seeing some birds, the natives made signs +that we should shoot them with the arquebus. The Chief Pilot would +not consent, though some of the men urged it. His reason was that +to shoot a ball at a small object would have a doubtful result; and +he did not wish the natives to think that the result was uncertain; +that they might not lose their fear of the arquebus. + +Malope landed, the boat and canoe remaining side by side. All being +on shore, they found the spring which has been mentioned. Malope +sat down by it, and made signs that we should drink. From there +we went to a village where the natives had ready for us a great +heap of many plantains, sweet canes, cocoa-nuts, almonds, roots, +biscuits, mats, and two pigs. Thus we went from village to village, +and they gave fourteen pigs and of other things as much as we could +take. The natives were always quiet, with the large canoes ready with +their paddles, and themselves sitting under the shadow of them. There +were some who gave us plantains and roasted roots, open cocoa-nuts, +and water taken from the wells, doing all with as much good will as +if they had been well paid. Malope showed himself to be contented, +and said that we might come further, and he would get more food for +us. He took us to a higher part, and all the natives round heard and +respected him as Lord or great friend. + +The Chief Pilot, by signs, told him to make the natives carry that +food, and at a word from him they had it all on their shoulders. It +was worth seeing when more than a hundred natives went along the +shore in a line. Having reached the boat, they put all they carried +into it. Malope told the Chief Pilot to embrace the General for him, +and took his leave. The Chief Pilot embarked, and went to the villages +already mentioned, receiving from the natives what they came out in +their canoes to give us. + +The provisions that we brought were good, but to some it seemed too +small a supply. They said to the Chief Pilot that he should let them +go on shore; that they would take, burn, and kill; that the natives +were dogs, and that they did not come from Peru to be satisfied with +nothing. The Chief Pilot replied: "Does a boat laden with what has +cost no money, and given with good will by our friend Malope, seem +to you to be nothing?" They answered according to their knowledge, +and the Chief Pilot proceeded as appeared to be necessary. + +I have related this in such detail, because it is much to the purpose +in this narrative, as will be seen further on. Having arrived at the +ship, Doña Isabel told the Chief Pilot that the other day the soldiers +went from the camp to kill Malope. The Adelantado sent to tell them +of the friendship Malope had shown, and desiring that notice should +be given in the camp not to do him any harm, as he had done so much +good to us. The Adelantado appreciated what this native had done, +praising his good conduct. He rose from his bed to see what had been +brought on board, which was very fairly distributed, and he said to +the Chief Pilot that he only wanted the same share as a companion. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + How the Adelantado went on shore with the Chief Pilot, and + ordered a squadron of soldiers who were going in search of food + not to kill Malope. It relates the death of the Camp Master, + and other cruelties. + + +When the night came, the Adelantado sent for the Chief Pilot, and +made him sit by his bedside, where he was lying ill. With very great +caution, he told him that he intended to go on shore the next morning +with four men in whom he had most confidence, all armed, and that he +would be accompanied by the royal standard, and would proclaim the +will of the King at the proper time; for that he had to go and to do +justice on the Camp Master, for reasons which moved him so to act. + +That night the Chief Pilot caused the usual careful watch to be +kept, and at dawn they asked for the boat from the camp, with loud +voices. On hearing them, Doña Isabel came from her bed, saying: +"Alas! alas! they have killed my brothers, and they ask for the boat +to come and kill us." The Adelantado would not listen, and as soon +as it was day a squadron of thirty soldiers came out of the camp. The +Adelantado ordered them to be told not to go on before he had spoken +to them. Embarking with his people, he asked who was their leader, who +had sent them, and where they were going. The Lieutenant answered that +he was the leader, and that they were ordered by the Camp Master to +go to the village of Malope and seek for food. The Adelantado warned +them not to kill Malope, nor to do him any harm, nor take any of his +property, as he was our friend, and that they should take him with +them. He knew quite well that they came for food, and, turning to +the Chief Pilot, the Adelantado told him to relate to the soldiers +all that had passed with Malope the day before. They heard it laughing. + +The Adelantado had with him the Captain of the galeot, who carried +a great wood-knife. [57] On the shore the Captain, Don Lorenzo, +his brothers, and a few sailors, were waiting. Having landed, the +Adelantado joined those who were on the shore, and went to the fort +which the Camp Master was constructing in great haste. Before arriving, +there were not wanting those who asked what was it they were wanted +to do there, and one was cleaning his arquebus. The General arrived +at the camp when the Camp Master was having his breakfast. He came +out just as he was, without coat or hat, to receive the General, +and when he found himself among so many who were not his friends, +he called for staff, dagger and sword. + +Those who had to do the deed were arriving. The Adelantado raised his +eyes to heaven, and, giving a sigh, put his hand to his sword, saying: +"Long live the King! Death to traitors!" Upon this, without any delay, +one Juan Antonio de la Roca took the Camp Master by the collar, and +gave him two stabs, one in the mouth and the other on the breast. Then +a Sergeant, with a Bohemian knife, gave him another in the side. The +Camp Master cried: "Oh, gentlemen!" He turned to get his sword, but the +Captain, with his wood-knife, nearly cut off his right arm. He fell, +saying: "Oh, leave me time to confess." One answered that "there was no +time. You can well feel contrition." The wretched man was palpitating, +stretched on the ground, and crying, "Jesus Maria!" A good woman came +up, and helped him to die in peace. One with a kind heart did no more +than draw out the sword, and the woman gave it up. So the body was +left, and the Adelantado approved the slaughter. + +This being done, it was presently ordered to be proclaimed that the +Camp Master was dead, and that all the rest were pardoned in the +name of his Majesty. The Camp Master having expired, the drummer, +coveting his clothes, left him naked. + +The Camp Master was very zealous, a hard worker and good soldier, and +in all enterprises he was the first. He appeared to be about sixty +years of age, for his hair was quite white, and, though old, he was +vigorous, but very impetuous. He knew how to think much, but he could +not be silent, and I believe that for no other thing he was killed. + +At this time Don Luis and the Chief Pilot were talking near the tent +of two friends of the Camp Master, and Don Luis seized one of them +and stabbed him. The soldier cried out: "For me? For me? What have +I done?" Don Luis left the dagger, and drew his sword; but the Chief +Pilot defended the man, saying: "What is this, that without more ado +men are to be killed thus?" A soldier came out of another tent with his +sword drawn, and said: "What is this? Like the Camp Master?" Don Luis +attacked him, and many others coming up, the soldier retreated inside, +saying: "What have I done? What have I done?" Then the Captain, Don +Lorenzo, came, and they killed the soldier by some houses where he +had fallen. The drummer stripped them, and soldiers were stationed +to guard the goods of both. + +Don Lorenzo and his brother came with a party of soldiers, but +they found the Chief Pilot at the door, who opposed their advance, +saying he would report them. Don Lorenzo told him to leave the door, +crying "Death to these traitors!" The Chief Pilot said that they were +friends. "Kill them! kill them!" they replied, "they deserve it more +than the others." The Chief Pilot urged that they should mind what they +were doing. Don Lorenzo answered that only St. Peter, if he was there, +could induce them to spare the lives of such people. At the cries and +noise of arms, the women came out, alarmed and agitated. Some prayed +for their husbands; others wrung their hands and lamented. The men +were like lunatics, going about with their eyes seeking those they +would kill, shouting, with drawn swords: "Long live the King! Death +to traitors!" It seemed that this was a day for avenging injuries; +but to me it seemed a day of licence to lads who might go any length. + +After the disturbances the Sergeant-Major came out of his tent, and +that he might be able to say that he had also fleshed his sword, he +gave a page of the Camp Master a cut on the head, and another to one +of his servants. He also tried to wound a black man who had served +the Camp Master, but he saved himself by his feet. The two who were +wounded went to seek protection from the General, who ordered the +Sergeant-Major to leave the boys alone. + +One came out who was suspected; another, who cried for the King, would +have killed him if the Chief Pilot had not protected him. The cry was +that traitors came out with their arms; this one should have a rope; +dead and alive all need to have honour. They came out, they said, +to accompany the royal standard which Don Diego Barreto hoisted, +and cried out for the King, to which all answered, "Death to traitors!" + +The Captain of the wood-knife took the two heads which the General +had ordered to be put into nets, and each one was set on a pole +near the corps de garde. [58] At this time the boat came from the +ship in a great hurry, with the Vicar holding a lance in his hand, +and the sailors under arms, crying out, "Long live the King! Death +to traitors!" Coming to where they found the Adelantado, they said: +"We have all come to serve his Majesty and to die with your Lordship," +and they rallied round the royal standard. One of them asked the +General whether it was done, and when he replied in the affirmative, +the man said it was well done. On seeing the two heads he exclaimed: +"A wall has henceforward fallen from before me." + +At this time Doña Isabel and her sister came from the ship, for the +Captain with the wood-knife had been on board to announce the victory +to them, and to boast of having given a good stab to the Camp Master, +and of having cut off the two heads. He said: "Now you are mistress +and marchioness, and I am Captain, for the Camp Master is dead. I +say that it is terrible to fear wicked men with licence." When Doña +Isabel landed, she went to the corps de garde. + +At this juncture a soldier came out of the camp, with plumes in +his hat, dissimulating, and asking carelessly what was the matter, +pretending that he did not know. This was the man who raised all the +questions, and to whom all turned their eyes. He was allowed to be +free, because the persons were few with whom he had treated. Many +were frightened, and they had themselves given the occasion for +the insecurity. Some commended themselves to their friends who had +really been true, and they freed them. The Adelantado ordered that +all should go to the church to hear Mass, which the Vicar said. When +he had finished he turned his face to the people, and told them not +to be scandalised at the deaths, for it was ordained. He recommended +them to be quiet and obedient to the General, reminding them that by +that way there was safety. They returned from the Mass in the same way +they had come, with the standard, to the corps de garde. The baggage of +the dead men was opened, and their enemies made a division of it. The +Adelantado ordered the bodies to be buried, with which this first +tragedy ended. All were dismissed to assemble again in the afternoon, +with the consequence that will be described in the next chapter. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + How the soldiers killed Malope; of the arrests that were made in + consequence of the murder, with the deaths of an Ensign and of + a murderer of Malope. + + +In the afternoon all assembled at the corps de garde, and the +Adelantado ordered the heads to be taken down and the standard to +be concealed; when one arrived who had gone with the soldiers in the +morning, and reported to the Adelantado. He said that when the soldiers +came to the house of Malope, he had regaled them and given them what he +had. The innocent man felt secure, when a soldier raised his arquebus, +pointed it at him, and fired. He fell to the ground palpitating, when a +certain person, to put him out of his pain, came to him with a hatchet +and cleft his skull, saying we had never done a better thing. In this +way they most unjustly killed Malope, returning so much evil for so +much good. It was the work rather of a devil than of a man. He had +kept the country at peace, and had given us food. He was the means of +inducing others to give, and his kindness had been very great. They +excused themselves by saying that Malope had intended to commit +treason. This seems to have been an invention to give colour to the +outrage they had committed. They gave up the murderer, and he said, +ordering his arms: "He is well dead. Is there any one who wants to +seek my death?" The Adelantado felt it much, and so did every one, +not only the deed itself, but the trouble it would lead to. The +murderer was brought in a canoe, with his hands tied behind him, +and the Adelantado ordered both feet to be put in the stocks. + +Most of the soldiers came marching along the shore. The Adelantado +ordered those who were with him to conceal themselves in the corps de +garde, and as they entered, coming four and four, to seize them. The +Lieutenant of the Sergeant-Major entered, and four with him, who +were seized and put in irons. They looked about in all directions, +and, seeing the page of the Camp Master, they asked him with their +eyes about his master. The boy took hold of his throat with one hand, +meaning that his master was dead. The prisoners showed their sorrow. A +nephew of the Camp Master then came in, whom the General honoured much, +saying he knew what a good servant of the King he was; and the same +with Don Toribio de Bedeterra. + +Presently the Ensign came with the rest of the soldiers, and Don +Lorenzo disarmed him, and delivered him to four arquebusiers with +irons, to be taken to a corps de garde at some distance. The wife of +the prisoner went crying among the houses and branches, well aware +of the danger of her husband, for she was weeping before he came. + +Don Lorenzo went to call the Chaplain, and the good father, as +one seeing a turbulent river, did not dare to pass it. He said: +"Sir Captain, what is it that you want with me? Remember that I am a +priest. Oh, for the sake of the one God, do not kill me!" "Come with +me," said Don Lorenzo, "just for a little." "Here! here!" said the +priest; "I cannot go any further." It was explained to him that it +was to confess the Ensign, and he was reassured. He presently was +taken behind a tree, where the prisoner was. He began to persuade +him to confess, as they were going to kill him. The prisoner said: +"I to die? wherefore?" The priest undeceived him. Those who were +present relate that the Ensign then said: "Let it be then as God +wills;" and he knelt down at the feet of the confessor, whose duty +it was and who performed his office. A black servant of the General +had orders, and, with a knife, gave him a blow and then another, by +which his head was cut off, and put with the other two. The body was +covered with some branches, and soon afterwards thrown into the sea, +at which his wife wept bitterly. + +The Ensign being finished with, the Captain, Don Lorenzo, in +the hearing of the General, asked who should be taken out of the +stocks next. He ordered that it should be the Lieutenant of the +Sergeant-Major, but all entreated the Adelantado to spare his life, +which he did, taking him in his hands and receiving the oath. He then +retired, that he might not be asked by the next one who was ordered to +be taken out of the stocks, for the Sergeant-Major had him by one arm, +the Chief Pilot taking the other; but the prisoner, shaking them off, +exclaimed: "Here I am. If I deserve it, cut off my head." Doña Isabel +and all the others entreated the Adelantado to spare his life. He +made him take the same oath as the other, and pardoned him. Rising +up, the prisoner cast his eyes on the head of the Camp Master. With +his hands over his face and weeping, he said, in a voice so that +we could all hear: "Ah, thou honoured old man! and have you come +to this at the end of so many years of service to the King? This is +the reward they have given you! a vile death, and your head and grey +hairs stuck on a pole." There was a soldier by his side, who said: +"I cannot but mourn for the sad fate of the Camp Master, whom we +looked upon as a father." The Adelantado heard them, and ordered +them to be silent. They said that he should give thanks for having +been delivered from the dangers in which he was, and that he should +be grateful to his sponsors for the good intercession they made. He +gave thanks to all, and embraced his companion with many tears. + +While this was passing, the murderer of Malope called to the Chief +Pilot, and told him of his condition. In the name of God, he entreated +the Pilot to be a good intercessor for him in his need, and for a +second time he asked him to pray to the Adelantado to pardon his +crime. He might be sure how well he would serve hereafter, and he +wanted to marry Pancha, the Adelantado's servant (this was a native +girl of Peru, of bad character, carachanta, [59] and the rest), +whom the Adelantado had in his service. The Chief Pilot reassured +him, saying that he might be certain that, without doing what he +had pointed out, he would be a good mediator, as he would presently +see. The Adelantado came to take him out of the stocks with his own +hands, that he might be judged. The Chief Pilot prayed that his +life might be spared, but the Adelantado said, almost in a rage: +"How am I to pay for the death of my friend Malope but with the death +of this man?" The Chief Pilot replied that he might show the heads of +the two who were executed to the natives, and make them think that +they were punished for the death of Malope; adding, that he must +remember we are few, and that the position of affairs made pardon +advisable. The Adelantado answered that he would consider that, and +would keep him a prisoner. The Chief Pilot gave thanks for the mercy, +and the prisoner was taken out of the stocks and sent on board the +ship in charge of four men. + +This man did not care to eat, and drank salt water, turning his head +to the wall with shame because some said to him: "Why did you kill that +good native without cause?" Others told him he deserved to be quartered +for having committed such a crime. At last it seemed to him that it +would be better to die than to live. He left off caring for himself, +and died very suddenly after a few days, having first received the +holy sacrament, a privilege not enjoyed by the others. With this +ended the tragedy of the islands where Solomon was wanting. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + Of the great mourning for Malope among the natives. The great + sickness that prevailed in the camp; with the deaths of the + Adelantado and the Chaplain, and the victories gained by the + natives. + + +Next morning, great cries of sorrow were heard in the village and +house of Malope, raised by a large assembly of people. The Adelantado +ordered that a party should presently go with the head of the Ensign, +and give it to the natives, telling them that, as the best thing +that could be done, this other life had been taken for the death of +Malope. But when the natives saw the boat coming to their village, +leaving their mournings, they all fled into the woods. Those in the +boat called to them to come back, holding up the head; but it was +no use, they all hid themselves. Seeing this, the head was left at +the door of the house, and the boat returned. At the petition of the +Vicar, the Adelantado ordered the other two heads to be taken down +from the poles, that they might be buried. The burial was neglected; +and, as they were left that night on the beach, they were found next +morning with all the flesh and skin gone, for the dogs had eaten them. + +All this time the Adelantado became each day more unwell. He ordered +a house to be built for him in great haste, in which, having landed +with his family, he established himself. + +Now the punishment came down from Heaven which we deserved for our +treacheries, disorders, and cruelties, in the shape of sickness +without the means of curing it. + +The Captain, Don Lorenzo, in whose charge all things were now placed +by land and sea, early one morning sent twenty soldiers and an +officer in the boat to seize some boys, with the object of teaching +them our language, as we could not understand theirs. The natives, +who carefully concealed themselves, defended the landing with such +vigour that before our men could get back the officer and seven men +were wounded with arrows. Enjoying the occasion, they followed up +the repulse with many shots of arrows and stones, and with great +shouts. They came so near the camp that Don Lorenzo had to issue +forth with the banner displayed, and all the rest of the men who +were not sick, to defend the gate. As the natives retired, they +fired a volley of arrows which went home, wounding six men and Don +Lorenzo himself, who were brought in and attended to. Upon this, +Don Lorenzo sent a soldier in charge of a party, to burn canoes and +houses, and to do as much damage as possible, the result being eight +wounded soldiers. With these three victories, all gained on the same +day, the natives became so audacious that they shot arrows into the +camp at night, and threw stones with such effect that they wounded +two men, one of them dying. Owing to the sickness of the Adelantado, +and the number of wounded soldiers, we could only defend and secure +the camp, the attempts of our soldiers being confined to getting +"bledos," which sometimes cost them dear. + +On the Vigil of St. Luke the Evangelist, the first of our companions +died, the Chaplain, Antonio de Serpa, for whose decease the Vicar +mourned deeply, and raised sad lamentation, turning up his eyes to +heaven, and saying: "Oh, my God! how great is the punishment that You +send for my sins. You leave me, O Lord, without a priest to whom to +confess. O, Father Antonio de Serpa! Happy are you to have died after +having received the sacrament. Who would not change places with you, +and not remain in mine, in which I am so abandoned, for I can confess +all who are here, but have no one to confess me." He went about with +his face hidden, and would not be consoled He went to the church, +and wept at the altar. The good Vicar said that, in mourning for the +dead, he opened the tomb where he was buried. + +On the following night, which was the 17th of October, there was a +total eclipse of the moon; when it rose in the east it was completely +eclipsed. The Adelantado was so weak that he gave orders about his +will, which he could scarcely sign. He left Doña Isabel Barreto, +his wife, as general heir, and nominated her as Governess, for his +Majesty had issued a special decree giving him power to name any +person he chose for his successor. He nominated his brother-in-law, +Don Lorenzo, to be Captain-General; and, ordering the Vicar to be +called, he complied with all the obligations required for his soul. + +In this way the night passed, and the day arrived, which was that +of St. Luke. Seeing the end so near, the Vicar said that a person of +good life knew how much it imported to die well, so that there might +be time to make his peace with God. He said other things alike holy +and pious, which the Adelantado heard, showing not only attention but +great contrition, and making it to be well understood how submissive +he was to the will of God who created him. The Vicar had a crucifix +brought, in whose presence the Adelantado seemed to bend the knees +in his heart. Helping to say the Miserere mei and the Creed, at one +o'clock after noon our Adelantado passed from this life, with which +there ended his enterprise, so much and for so long a time desired. He +was a person zealous for the honour of God and the service of the King, +to whom the things ill done did not appear good, nor did those well +done appear evil. He was very plain-spoken, not diffuse in giving +his reasons, and he himself said that he did not want arguments but +deeds. It seemed that he saw clearly those matters which touched his +conscience. It seemed to me that he might say with reason that he knew +more than he performed, yet he saw nothing that passed by stealth. The +Governess felt his death, as did others, though some rejoiced at it. + +In the afternoon, with as much pomp as the circumstances would admit, +we prepared for his sepulture. The body was placed in a coffin covered +with black cloth, and carried on the shoulders of eight persons of +the highest rank. The soldiers stood with their arquebuses reversed, +in accordance with usage at the funerals of Generals. The procession +went with two banners displayed, and from two drums covered with +mourning cloth came slow and muffled sounds, while the fife expressed +the like sentiments. Arrived at the church, the Vicar performed the +service, and we then returned to the Governess to condole with her +on her misfortune. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + How the Vicar delivered some admonitions to the soldiers, and + the examples he gave. + + +After the two deaths already described, the Vicar reflected how +serious the sickness was, and that one, two, or three died every +day, and began to perambulate the camp, crying with a loud voice: +"Is there one who wants to confess? Put yourselves well with God, +and attend to the welfare of your souls, for a punishment has come +upon us, from which none can escape, how numerous soever we may be. The +natives will triumph over us, and will remain, enjoying our clothes and +arms and all we possess in this place, where God holds us prisoners, +to chastise us according to our deserts. Think that if God punishes +a whole kingdom for one sin, how will He punish here where they are +so many. There are men here who have not confessed for three, five, +seven, nine, fourteen and thirty years, and one who has only confessed +once in his life. There are men here who have caused the deaths of +two and three other men; there is a man who does not know whether +he is a Moor or a Christian; others have committed sins so foul and +so serious that, being such, I will not name them. Remember how God +conferred with David, and told him out of three punishments to choose +one. We have among us sickness, war, famine and discord, and we are +far from any remedy. Reflect that we have God incensed against us, +and that the naked and bloody sword of His justice, with which He +goes forth to kill, is ready to put an end to us. Fully justified is +His judgment. The punishment is not so great nor so rigorous as we +deserve. Confess yourselves! clean your souls, and with the repentance, +appease the anger of God, Who wishes not the death of a sinner, but +rather that he should turn from his wickedness and live. Open your +eyes, and see what a terrible chastisement is this." + +The good priest went about day after day performing his office, giving +the sacrament to the sick, burying the dead, and seeking the means of +inducing those who did not wish to confess to yield. At other times, +with the same anxious spirit, he said that the mercy of Christ was much +greater than our sins, how ugly and heinous soever they might be; and +that one single drop of the blood which was shed in the Passion was +sufficient for the sins of infinite worlds. None of those who were +there, be their sins what they may, should lose hope; rather, with +the faith and constancy of Christians, they should put their trust in +God, Who knows how to pardon sinners. In order further to console and +encourage them all by examples, he told the two following anecdotes:-- + +In a town in Peru there was a Franciscan friar in his convent, of pure +life, at whose feet a soldier, who was his neighbour and known to him, +knelt down to confess; and as he knelt, he put his eyes on a crucifix, +and said in his heart: "O Lord, have mercy on this soul!" On the +instant, the image came down from the cross, came half the distance, +and said: "Doubt not! confess and be absolved. It was for thee, +and other sinners like thee, that I came to the world." + +The other story was that, in the Indies, there was a man rich in +goods, but poor in virtue, who sinned, and had old and well-grown +roots in many vices. He was a man who sometimes came to the camp with +dagger and lance, closed teeth, and eyes raised to heaven, saying: +"O God! come down here, to this place, and come with me to see who +is the bravest;" and he said other things, showing as little fear or +reverence for God as this. This man, being out one night, and passing +a room of his, praying with some beads, heard a voice which said: +"Oh! such an one, wherefore do you not recite with devotion on that +rosary?" Astonished and full of fear, he struck a light, and looked +into the room, but saw no one. Continuing to search, he found an image +of Our Lady, painted on paper. Raising it from the ground, he put it +on the wall, and, kneeling down, he held it with one hand, while he +recited on his rosary. While thus employed, two negroes came to him, +put out the light, stripped him naked, and flogged him until he was +nearly dead. At this juncture he saw the room brilliantly lighted, +and a voice said: "Go! go! and leave this soul which is not thine, +for My Son has granted it to Me through His mercy and My prayers." In +a moment, the negroes left him, and the light disappeared. The patient +went away as well as he could, and laid down on his bed. He sent for +a friar, who asked what had happened that he should send for him in +the middle of the night. He related what had happened, showed him +the wounds and bruises, and begged urgently to be confessed, saying +that it was thirty-eight years since he had confessed. The confessor +heard and consoled him, saying that much worse sins were pardoned +by God with a free hand. His confession lasted for seventeen days, +and he was absolved with a small penance. A fever came upon him, +and wasted him so, that on the day when he finished his confession +he died like a saint. + +With these stories, and in many other ways, as Christian as these, +the Vicar secured the salvation of the souls which could be brought +into the right way; and the better to fulfil the duties of his office, +he came on shore to live in the house of one of the men who had died. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + In which is related what more passed with the natives. + + +Knowing the time, the natives came in pursuit of their vengeance, +and sought out our people every day, carrying shields, thinking to +defend themselves against the arquebus, as the shields protected us +from their arrows. They were very careful to take warning, and so, with +this animosity, they shot arrows from among the trees and branches, +aiming at the face and legs, which were, they saw, unprotected. It +was the soldiers' fault, because they took up the arrows and drove +their points against the shields and other protected parts, to show +the natives that they did no harm. But it only showed the natives +that they must aim at the eyes or legs; so they understood the secret, +and always shot at those two places. The General, Don Lorenzo, seeing +that they came to seek us in camp, ordered a soldier, with twelve +others under him, to go to the village of Malope and do harm there, +assuming that it was his people who made the attacks. They burnt the +village and returned, the inhabitants having fled into the woods. + +While this was going on, the natives nearest to the camp were shouting +and saying: "See what they are doing to the village of Malope, and +the disposition that these people are showing." We called to them +from the camp with a flag of peace (they also use the same). After a +time some of them came, and the General came out to speak with them, +taking the Chief Pilot with him, and six arquebusiers in attendance +to be ready for anything that might occur. But the natives, when +they saw the arquebusiers, began to go back, at the same time making +signs that they were not to come. The General ordered them to stop, +and using endearing terms, he said that we were friends, asking +why they did not bring in food as they used to do. They complained, +saying by signs that if we were friends, why did we kill them, there +being peace? They said "Malope! Malope! why friends pu" (the name they +gave to an arquebus); meaning that if we were friends of Malope, why +had we killed him with an arquebus, and were now burning his village, +pointing with a finger. The General replied that those who had done +the harm were now dead, and a head had been sent to the village as +a punishment for what had been done. They asked for the Jauriqui, +[60] their name for the Adelantado, and were told that he was in the +camp. Don Lorenzo asked them to bring food; and they did so, coming on +the following and subsequent days. These natives appeared to me to be +well ordered and easy to be brought into habits of peace; and they kept +faith entirely. In my opinion we waged war upon them, while they gave +their property to us. All the time that peace was broken with them, +we were in great need for want of their helps, and the soldiers could +not go out to seek for food. This want was supplied by the flour that +had been brought from Peru, which was the life of the expedition. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + In which it is related what happened until the death of the + General, Don Lorenzo Barreto. + + +Don Lorenzo, with his infirmity, did what he could for the sustenance +and welfare of the camp, and for a third time sent the frigate, with +the Captain of artillery, to search for the Almiranta, giving him +instructions as to the course he was to pursue. The Captain went, +and worked diligently, but did not find her. He shaped a course to +one of the three islets already mentioned, surrounded by reefs. Here +he captured eight youths, four grown up, and all of tawny colour, +well made, with fine eyes, and good presence. He also collected some +pearl shells, which he found in a village, and with them he returned +to the ship. + +The General sent Don Diego de Vera, as leader, with some soldiers +who were most healthy, to seek for natives, to be held as hostages, +so as to induce the rest not to try to do us harm. They brought in +three women and six children, and their husbands often came to see +them, with many others. They came to pray for their liberation, +with many caresses, and to content them we gave them up. + +There was a movement to seek permission from the Governess to leave +that land; and those who worked it ordered the soldiers to sign a +document which the Vicar gave them, so that it should be submitted in +the name of all. One answered that they should not be ordered to sign, +for that the Adelantado had killed the Camp Master and two soldiers +for signing a paper. He was assured that if he signed there would +now be no penalty, as the time was different. + +The Vicar drew up a petition in which he gave the reasons, which he +said were sufficient, for abandoning the settlement. The Governess +and the General ordered that information should be taken, of which, +when the magistrate asked for a copy (as he said) they ordered him +to pass on: as all the people on shore had signed the paper, they +took all the seamen as witnesses. As the Chief Pilot had shown how +much the desire to form a settlement would cost, I say that one day +a friend of his came to him on board, and, I know not whether it was +out of charity or envy, told him to hold his tongue, for if not he +would be killed or left alone on that island. His persistence reached +such a point that he offered to sow, and maintain the seamen; but +the suspicion and hatred they conceived of such a proceeding was such +that they never wished to let him go on the excursions they made by +sea. Thus they attacked the intention of coming there, after leaving +the chances of being able to do much in Peru, to employ themselves +on discoveries of such importance. + +This seems to me to free the land from much that our sailors say +about it, that it was the worst that was known: giving as a reason +the numerous deaths and the sickness. + +It is quite clear that to change of temperature, diet, and customs, +to work and go about in the sun, to get wet without changing, to +settle in woods in winter, to sleep on the ground with damp and other +things inimical to health, with men who are not made of stone, will +bring on sickness; while the want of medical men who understand what +is wrong, and of remedies that should be applied, nor the presence +of any one to give them, are the open doors of death. Besides, there +are positions more healthy than others in populous cities and towns; +so that I understand that only a small part is exposed to the above +evils. Even here those who remained on the sea never fell ill. If +the land was as unhealthy as was represented, the sick, with so much +against them, would not have survived so long. Many lived for weeks +and months, and none died suddenly, as happens at Nombre de Dios, +Puerto Bello, Panama, Cabo Verde, San Tomé, and other unhealthy places, +where, with all needful remedies, the sick succumb in a short time, +even in a few hours. + +The sick continued to die, and it was a sad thing to see them +in the clutches of disease, stretched out, some delirious, others +nearly so; some wanting to go on board, hoping to find health there, +others wanting to go from the ship to the camp, hoping to find it +on shore. The General supplied their wants so far as was possible, +and the Governess did what she could, other persons helping out of +charity; but all that could be done was little, seeing that the needs +were great. At this time the Vicar fell ill, and as the land did not +seem a good place to him, he returned to the ship. + +The General who, as has already been mentioned, was wounded in the +leg, found it necessary to take to his bed, where he got worse every +minute. The camp was now in such a condition that it did not contain +fifteen healthy soldiers, and these were all lads who could endure +fevers better, though in fifteen days the fever does not run its +course. The Chief Pilot went to visit Don Lorenzo, to inquire after +his health, but he replied in much affliction: "Ah! Chief Pilot! I +shall die without confession;" and presently he said: "Ah, death! in +what a condition you take me." With his eyes fixed on the crucifix, +he exclaimed: "I am a sinner. O, Lord! pardon me." + +The Chief Pilot, knowing his great need, consoled him by saying that +he would go and ask the Vicar to come as he was. He went on board +and entreated the Vicar, for the love of God, to come and confess +Don Lorenzo, because he was dying fast. The Vicar replied that he +was dying too; that if he would bring Don Lorenzo on board he would +confess him. The Chief Pilot answered that Don Lorenzo was passing +away; that even to turn him in his bed it was necessary to have a line +hung from the roof, and that only with this, and the help of two men, +could he be turned. He was young, and the Vicar knew that he ought +not to allow him, nor any other person who sought confession, to die +without it. "Your worship wishes to kill me," replied the Vicar; +"can you not see that I am unable to stand on my feet? So little +do you care for my health. Let them carry me where they please, +though I may die." So he was put in the boat, trembling and wrapped +in a blanket. He was carried to the side of Don Lorenzo in his bed, +whom he confessed, as well as all others who wished to confess. A +soldier, seeing how ill the Vicar was, said very sorrowfully: "Ah, +Sir! what is this that I see? What have we come to?" They returned +to the ship. That night Don Lorenzo was much worse, and at break +of day, the 2nd of November, he died. May God pardon him! He was +mourned for, and buried in the same way as his brother-in-law, the +Adelantado. Among the rest a soldier died, who received death with +such a cheerful countenance that in the words he spoke, and what he +did, he seemed to be a pilgrim on the road to heaven. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + In which the unhappy condition of our people is related, the + death of the Vicar, and the embarkation of all hands. + + +Our condition, as above related, had reached such a point that, if +only ten determined natives had come, they could have killed us all, +and destroyed the settlement. At last the sick, pressed by the evils +they suffered, which were great, went on board the ship, and the +Governess with them, leaving the flag on shore with the few soldiers +who still retained some health, to provide wood and water. On Monday, +the 7th of November, the flag and the rest of the people were embarked, +and so an end was given to this promising enterprise. I never expected +anything else, and it must be left in the claws of him who held it +before, [61] until God permits others to come forward who are more +desirous of the welfare of those lost ones, that with a finger they +may show the way to that salvation for which they were created. + +The settlement remained a spectacle for sentiment and reflection on +the disastrous and brief course of events which took place in it. It +was a noteworthy thing to see the dogs running along the beach and +barking, as if they were asking why the people went away and left +them behind. The smallest dog rushed into the sea, and came swimming +to the ship, and for such fidelity was taken on board; and of him it +may be said that fortune favours the brave. + +The Vicar made his will, and three soldiers kept watch with him during +the following night. He asked one of them to read to him the "Symbol of +the Faith," by Fray Luis de Granada. When day came, the Chief Pilot, +seeing the little hope there was for his life, and that he appeared +to be dying, said to him that the time was short, and that he should +look to what concerned his soul. He answered that it was well, and +that he did not grieve for anything. The Chief Pilot said that his was +the office of a friend, to tell him that he must not deceive himself, +for that he was near his end. "Why did you not tell me so sooner," +said the Vicar, and the Chief Pilot answered that he never thought +that the illness would bring him to his present condition. The Vicar +asked for a crucifix, and with it in his hands he said: "Oh eternal +Father who sent me; that which I should do I understand not, and +presently power of speech will be gone." Thus his death-agony came, +and he gave his soul to the Saviour and Creator. + +This loss was what we deserved for our sins. Punishment and castigation +came that we might not deceive ourselves, but know that God was +enraged against us, for after so many bodily afflictions He now +took from us our spiritual gift. His death was much felt, though +not by all, for all do not know how to feel such losses. The Vicar, +Juan Rodriguez de Espinosa, was a very honourable priest, for whom, +by reason of his virtue and good parts, much love was due. + +The Chief Pilot caused him to be buried in the sea; not being willing +that it should be on shore, lest the natives should disinter and +insult his remains. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + How we made two more incursions, which were the last, and what + passed until we made sail. + + +Next day the wind was from the north, and, although moderate, three +cables parted, by which the ship was secured, leaving only one slight +cable which appeared to be too weak to hold a ship. Yet it was so +strong that it saved the ship from going on shore, which was very near. + +Later, Luis Andrada was sent in charge of thirty men to seek for +provisions for the voyage. He went to the small island which we +called the garden, "Huerta," and found five large canoes in a bay, +laden with the biscuit of that country, which the natives had there +concealed, and without any difficulty he collected them all and sent +them to the ship. He said that he killed one hundred and twenty pigs, +of which he brought some. He found the natives peaceful at first; +but afterwards they were hostile, because the ill-disposed soldiers +illtreated them. They made holes in the narrow paths, covered with +branches and earth, and in them they planted upright stakes, on which +a soldier hurt his foot. With what was obtained by this incursion, +order was taken for the sick, and the ship was supplied with the whole. + +The leader came back, and soon afterwards the Chief Pilot went, +with twenty men, to the same island, following many canoes of the +natives. Leaving six men in the boat, he jumped on shore with the rest, +and the natives, threatening war, received them with arrows in their +hands, making the perneta, shouting and dancing round. The Pilot held +up a white flag as a sign of peace, but they danced and shouted all +the more. It was a narrow path, with trees on each side, and they +began to send arrows and stones from all directions. Two arquebus +shots were fired, and the village was entered; but nothing more was +found but biscuits in the houses, and roots tasting like oranges, +and of the same colour. The natives were followed to a hill, and, +reaching the top, we found ourselves on a fine plain, with great +abundance of fruit cultivation. The soldiers cut many large bunches +of plantains, got a quantity of cocoa nuts, and found a great supply +of biscuit in a house. Laden with these provisions, and keeping close +to each other, they all got into the boat without any further mishap; +and though there was an encounter with the natives, none were either +killed or wounded. For the Chief Pilot gave orders to the soldiers +not to fire to hit but to frighten. + +Having done this, he ordered the boat to follow along the shore to +a place where he went to cut small palms. But when he arrived, the +boat was not to be seen, however much they tried to find her. All +agreed that the best plan would be to go back to the place where they +first landed. They marched until sunset, when they came to a place +where some rocks made a good shelter. For this reason, and having +found a canoe there, the Chief Pilot decided on passing the night, +and sending a man in the canoe to report their position to the ship, +that those on board might send to look for them. The Chief Pilot said +that he was anxious about the boat, and much more when he considered +the insecure position in which the best sailors were placed, without +whom the rest could not take the ship to any place where they would +be saved; and thus there would be no notice of the discovery that +had been made, nor of the rest that was surmised. + +He asked what powder the soldiers had. They replied that they had +ten rounds. He said that was little, and that it would be better to +go on and look for some of the canoes. When taken, if the natives +required them, after all the powder was expended, they would defend +themselves with swords and shields. If anything had happened to the +boat, the natives would have seen, and would have hidden their canoes +so that we might not get away. This was agreed to. A soldier was given +command of the vanguard, and he, with some others, marched along the +beach where the trees grew very thick, no one having touched them +since their creation, with some great rocks. It was almost impossible +to make a way through this in the day-time; how much less on a dark +night. Sometimes the water was up to their knees, and at others to +their middles. They went climbing and descending from trunks and rocks, +making their way either in the sea or through the woods. Altogether, +there were ten of them, two being ill and asking the others to go and +leave them, for that they could hold out no longer. The Chief Pilot, +who heard this, said that they must not be left behind, but must +be brought along, even if it became necessary to carry them. They +pushed on a little further, but it was past midnight when they heard +two arquebus shots, and presently two more. The companions in front +pressed onwards to ascertain the cause, and found that the boat had +just arrived. They had been detained by contrary winds, and had made +the round of the island. The party got into the boat and returned to +the ship, arriving at break of day, and finding all on board anxious, +owing to their long absence. + +On this day the Governess proposed to the Pilots that they should +depart from that island in search of San Cristobal, to see if the +Almiranta was there, and to do what would be best for the service of +God and His Majesty; and that if she was not found, her determination +was to go to the city of Manilla in the Philippines, to engage priests +and people, and return to complete that discovery. On this subject she +asked, persuaded, and ordered each person present to give his views +in the form that appeared most convenient. The view and opinion of all +was that a W.S.W. course should be shaped so long as was necessary to +reach a latitude of 11°, and if neither the island nor the Almiranta +were found, then to proceed to the Philippines. They all signed their +names, and the Chief Pilot undertook to return in company with the +Governess, if she returned as she proposed. + +The Chief Pilot said to the Governess that the ship being so injured, +both in hull and rigging, the sailors few, the men sick, and it +being necessary to give thirty of the most healthy to navigate the +frigate and the galeot, it would be best to abandon those two small +vessels. For if this was done, the voyage of the Capitana would be +much more secure; for the two small vessels were in bad order, their +pilots were not satisfactory, and their rigging, sails and people +would all be serviceable on board the Capitana. To this the Captain +of the galeot said that it was because the ships had not cost him any +money that he wanted to abandon them. The Chief Pilot replied that he +had no other motive than consideration for the good of all; that in +Manilla, whither they intended to go, they would find other and better +vessels for less than 200 dols., and for such a small sum it was not +worth while to risk so much. The Captain of the galeot had on his +side certain ill-conditioned enemies of truth and reason, and these +the Governess had for her council of state of war and marine. Each +one said a little, and so things remained, nothing being done. + +Presently they wanted to get rid of the trouble and charge of the +sick. It was ordered that they should be sent to the frigate. The +Chief Pilot protested, saying that it was unjust to send them where +the conveniences were much less, or to deprive them of the comfort +they had where they were in the ship, especially as all could +be accommodated in the large ship, safe from the sun, night air, +and damp. They replied that a sail could be set up to form a tent, +underneath which they could lie at their pleasure. The Chief Pilot +answered that the navigation would not always admit of tents being +set up, and that the sick always needed care. It was publicly ordered +that they should remain, but nevertheless a sergeant began to get them +into the boat. One cried out, and the Chief Pilot came and delivered +them from men with so little pity and so much folly. Finally, the +Governess ordered that they should stay, and so they remained. + +In the afternoon the Chief Pilot went to visit the frigate and +the galeot, leaving with them the necessary supplies of flour and +water. He gave them instructions respecting the navigation they would +have to work, and a chart to the Pilot of the frigate, who neither +had one nor knew how to use it. At night the Captain, Don Diego de +Vera, with some persons of his company, went on shore to disinter the +body of the Adelantado, to be taken on board the frigate to Manilla; +for on board the Capitana they would not consent to receive it, +owing to objections which are never wanting. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + How the ship and the other two vessels departed from the bay of + Graciosa; the labours during the voyage; the loss of the galeot; + and gives an account of a hermit. + + +The distance from the bay of Graciosa to Manilla is 900 leagues. On +the following day, the 18th of November of the same year, the three +vessels sailed in quest of the island of San Cristobal; and the gear +was in such a state that the falls carried away three times in getting +the boat in. + +In one month forty-seven persons died. Nearly all the rest were ill +but joyful, as it seemed to them that their troubles were over. They +turned their eyes to the huts of the settlement, saying: "Ah! there +you remain, thou corner of Hell, that has cost us so much! mourning +for husbands, brothers, and friends," they said; and went on, overcome +by their own feelings. + +On this day and the next they steered W.S.W. Having taken the sun, +and made the calculations, the result was 11°. We looked to see if +land could be seen in any direction, but none was seen. On this same +day the Boatswain and four other seamen fell ill. The five or six +who remained well said to the Chief Pilot that the ship was unfit for +sea, full of sick, in want of water and food; and that they could not +continue to plough the sea in her. The soldiers joined with them, and +there was no want of voices; nor was there wind, and the mainstay was +carried away. There was appearance of evil, which lasted for a bit, +owing to the opinions being different. Things being put right, the +Chief Pilot said to the Governess that they were in the latitude of +11°, and that, in accordance with the agreement, she must order what +should be done. She replied, that as the island of San Cristobal was +not in sight, and the Almiranta could not be found, she would shape +a course for Manilla. + +The Chief Pilot made his course N.W. with the wind S.E. to avoid New +Guinea, which was very near, and not to get among the islands. If it +had not been for the wretched condition of the ship, I should have +given orders to coast along that land, and find out what it was. + +On this course we continued to sail until the 27th of the month, when +we were in 5°. On that day we saw a great trunk, a great mass of reeds, +with three almonds like those we had left, much straw and snakes. The +wind was S.W., with squalls and showers from that direction. By these +signs we understood that New Guinea was close on board. We began to +experience great waves coming from N.W. and N.N.W., which knocked the +ship about, and it was worse when there were calms or light winds: +a sign that these winds come from the other side of the line. This +continued nearly as far as the Ladrone Islands. There were also +variables up to 5° N., where breezes sprang up from N.E. which lasted +all the voyage. If the sun should be near the zenith when it was in +Capricorn, I know not how it would be on crossing the equinoctial line. + +We sailed on until the 10th of December, when I found the latitude half +a degree from the line, a position in which the sky was clear, the air +quiet, the sea smooth, but no land in sight; but so cold at night that +it was necessary to use blankets. Yet in the day the sun was so hot, +that even when it was near the horizon the heat could hardly be borne. + +The galeot had not been seen for several days, for she had parted +company; so, wishing to comply with her obligations to the Capitana, +the Governess ordered that her Captain should be notified that, on +pain of being declared a traitor, he should keep his position, and +not be more than half a league off. For it seemed that the Capitana, +from her general unseaworthiness, and having her mainmast sprung, +could never reach safety. Yet on that night the galeot stood on +another tack, and disappeared, without being any more seen. + +The ration that was served out consisted of half a pound of flour, +of which they made mashed-up paste with salt water, baked in the hot +ashes; half a quartillo [62] of water full of powdered cockroaches, +which made it very nauseous and stinking. There was not much good +fellowship, owing to the great sickness and little conformity of +feeling. What were most evident were the ulcers coming out on feet +and legs, the sadness, groans, hunger, infirmities, and deaths, with +mourning for those whom it concerned. Scarcely a day passed without +throwing one or two overboard, and on some days there were three and +four. It came to this: that there was no little difficulty in carrying +the dead up from the between decks. + +The sick became rabid from the effluvia of mud and filth that was in +the ship. Nothing was hidden. All the prayers were for water; some +begged for a single drop, showing their tongues, pointing with their +fingers, like the rich man and Lazarus. The women, with children at +their breasts, prayed for water, while all complained of a thousand +things. Here could well be seen the good friend, he who was a father +or a son, the charity and patience that was shown. Here, too, might be +seen one who could accommodate himself to the times, and who could be +resigned. Many deaths without confession took place, and other evils +which to think of together were to feel above measure. The Salve was +recited in the afternoon, before the image of Our Lady of Solitude, +which was all the consolation in this pilgrimage. + +There had come on this expedition a venerable old man and good +Christian, who in Lima was barchilon, [63] and served in the hospital +of the natives. His name was Juan Leal, which he was through all the +events he was concerned with. This servant of God and worthy man, +in poor health, for he was convalescent, without rest, which in good +sooth it had been well if he had found, but he only sought time to +occupy himself night and day without ceasing--was he who, in camp and +on board, and in the present voyage, devoted himself to the service +of the sick with cheerful faith. He showed that his bowels were full +of charity, for all that was done for the sick passed through his +hands. He bled them, cupped them, made their beds, helped them to a +good death, prepared and accompanied their bodies to sepulture, or got +them out of danger; a man, in short, who did well in word and deed, +though deeply feeling the numerous miserable sights he beheld. But +there were ears to which his voices reached, and not finding doors, +they returned to their master, who afresh converted them into more +love and care to help, as he did help with his accustomed piety. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + Of the state in which the ship was as she continued her voyage, + and of the death of the hermit. + + +A list was made of the surviving sick, and each one was given, besides +his ordinary ration, a plate of fritters helped out with honey and +treacle, and in the afternoon a mug of water with a little sugar +to help as sustenance. Those who were a little stronger had double +rations to enable them to work at the pumps four times a day, at which +they suffered fearfully, for some hid themselves, others sat down, and +others stopped, saying they could not work. Night passed without being +able to give rest from the evil that was so near, for its clamours and +forced necessities were two things which it was not possible to remedy. + +The rigging and sails were so rotten that repairs were incessant, +and splicing and sewing was constantly needed. These were evils +that could not be amended. The main mast was sprung from the step, +and the step of the bowsprit, from not being morticed, hung on one +side, taking the bowsprit with it, which caused us great anxiety. The +sprit sail with all its gear fell into the sea, and none of it could +be recovered. The main stay carried away a second time, and it was +necessary to make another stay with part of the hemp cable, and the +backstays of the mainmast, which were unrove for the purpose. There +was not a yard that was not bent downwards owing to parted lifts, +the topsail ties were gone, and perhaps for three days at a time +the sail was flapping in the waist, because no one cared to hoist it +with a rope that had been spliced thirty-three times. We took down +the topsails and mizen in order to mend the courses, which at last +were the only sails we used. Of the hull of the ship it may be said +with truth that only the beams kept the people above water, for they +were of that excellent wood of Guayaquil called guatchapeli, [64] +which never seems to grow old. The ship was so open in the dead wood +that the water ran in and out of the ship when we sailed on a bowline. + +The sailors, from the hard work and their weakness, and from seeing +the ship in such a state, set no store by their lives; and one of them +said to the Chief Pilot that he was tired of being always tired, that +he would rather die once than many times, and that they might as well +shut their eyes and let the ship go to the bottom. They did not want to +work, saying that neither God nor the King required them to do what was +impossible. The men said they were without strength, and if one took +another in his arms he was unable to hold him up. If they should die, +who was there that could revive them? The Chief Pilot answered one of +them that if he should jump overboard, the Devil would have him body +and soul. Many others said that as he knew how to command, he should +give them nourishment from the jars of wine, oil, and vinegar which +the Governess had, or that it should be sold to them in exchange +for their work; that they would give receipts and pay at Manilla, +or make a return in kind. They said this was necessary for them in +order to recover strength to work the ship, and that if they all died +she would die also. When there was the greatest necessity for them, +then they would show her needs and remember what had passed. The Chief +Pilot submitted their prayer to the Governess several times during the +voyage, saying it was much worse to die than not to expend stores. She +said that there was more obligation to her than to the sailors who +talked of her favour, and if two were hanged the rest would hold +their tongues. The Chief Pilot answered that he only referred to the +matter in order to apply a remedy to pressing needs, that the sailors +were good men, that if he advocated their cause it was not for any +obligation he owed to them, but that the ship might be taken where she +herself wished, and that the obligation to please her did not relieve +him from the duty of his office, the pay being equal to the debt. At +last she served out two jars of oil; but they were soon used up, +when the complaints were renewed and continued throughout the voyage. + +The soldiers seeing so long a time before them (for no time is short +to those who suffer) also said a good deal: that they would gladly +exchange this life for a sentence of death in a prison, or for a place +on a bench in a Turkish galley, where they might die confessed, or +live in the hope of a victory or a ransom. Hope in God, whose power +is greater than all our necessities, said one, for that will prove +an armed voyage, and above poverty. + +This death, which I hold to be a happy termination to a life of good +works when received with meekness, was doing service to the Lord in +calling, in good time, our dear Juan Leal, who went to his reward in +heaven for the merits of what he had done on earth. He died alone and +forsaken, like the rest. He was exemplary in his life and customs, +he valued the world and its affairs for what they were worth, he went +about dressed in sackcloth next to his skin, and reaching half down +his legs, with bare feet, and long hair and beard. He had passed many +years in this severe course of life, serving hospitals, after having +previously served for many years as a soldier in Chile. On the same +night a sick man fell overboard, it was not known how, crying out +for help; but he was left and was no more seen. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + How there was a proposal to elect a General; the reply of the + Chief Pilot to it; the advice given by a man to the Governess, + and the loss of the frigate. + + +The Chief Pilot took great care of the water, as there was little +left, and, by secret means, there were great wasters of it. He was +therefore present when it was served out. The Governess used it very +largely, requiring it to wash her clothes, for which purpose she sent +a jar to be filled. The Chief Pilot said that the position should +be considered, and that it did not seem just to use so much water, +when there was so little. At this she took great offence, and felt +it so much that she said very angrily: "Cannot I do what I please +with my own property?" The Chief Pilot answered: "It belongs to all, +and it will go to all. The cup is good for him that cannot wash, +and it is your duty to curtail your own allowance, that the soldiers +may not say that you wash your clothes with their life's blood. You +should put a high value on the patience of those who are suffering, +for they might take by force what there is in the ship. Starving people +sometimes know how to help themselves." Upon this the Governess took +the keys of the store room away from the steward, who was an honest +man, to whom the Chief Pilot had entrusted them, and gave them to +one of her own servants. There were not wanting those who said to +the Chief Pilot that he ought not to allow himself to be ruled by +a woman, and that if it was put to the vote, the majority would be +for a man. But the Chief Pilot answered that they should leave her to +enjoy her just title for the brief space that remained. When the time +came that he was forced to act, it would then appear more reasonable +to say what is now said without considering her. + +One honest man [65] was anxious to see less bickering in the ship, +and more order and peace than prevailed there. Knowing that some of +the hungry and suffering people had determined to force their way into +the store room when it was opened, and knowing what must happen from +this project, whether fights or other mischief, so that the little +food that remained would be got by blows--he said many things to +the Governess touching her rule. There were not wanting those who +told her not to trust him, and knowing this, he spoke thus to her: +"Consider, Lady, that those who speak to you are not saints, and well +they show it in what they say, for they seek their own benefit and +the evil of others. Trust in the men in whom your husband trusted, +for have you not seen that in his necessities and your own they have +loyally done their duty, seeing your risk. Be assured that here there +is no one who desires to rise, nor who would consent to it, nor any who +do not owe to you a sole obedience in all that is just." She replied: +"Here they come to me with complaints that I do not wish to hear." He +answered: "Do not listen to them nor believe them, and treat the +men well. See with what heavy loads they are laden. They might throw +them off, and refuse to carry them, or make some evil agreement, so +as to agree afterwards. Be sure that each one thinks that, although +miseries overflow, compensations are not wanting. To these your +brethren be considerate. Do not look upon them as a petty government +of many heads without feet, or of many feet without a head. Reflect +well on what are new affairs. These people wish for little, and here +they suffer much. They owe nothing, yet they owe much; and for what +they owe to you they dissimulate. If they had not come here, no one +would owe anything, nor would what is wanted now be wanted; and to +you all is more than owing." At last this man asked her, "What ought +he to do who was warned that some wanted to kill others on board the +ship?" She answered that he should look out. He then said: "I know +that it was you yourself and your brother who plotted to kill me, and +you sharpened the knives; but I did not believe it easily, though I +was told by a friend. Nor did I fail in caution, though now I may. You +see here how it has been made sure, and if you should wish it, you can +have assurance, though you may not believe who it was that deceived +you. I am not afraid of what I have told you and excused, for there +are very few women with such heads as Dido, Zenobia, and Semiramis." + +With these troubles we went on steering the same course, N.N.W., until +Tuesday, the 17th of December, when we were in 3° 30' N. The men in +the frigate were worn out by work at the pump, and it was necessary +to give them three more to help them at their labour. Sailors were +sent to check the water, which was coming in at many places. No +diligence availed, and she could not keep up with the Capitana. The +people were very sad, yet desirous to save the vessel because the +body of the Adelantado was on board. Knowing the danger, the Chief +Pilot said to the Governess several times, that it seemed right to +abandon the frigate, taking off the people, who would be safe, while +the ship would be better manned. As he could not prevail, he said to +Don Diego de Vera, Captain of the frigate: "You know how to complain; +how is it you do not know how to make things safe? Do you not see +that it will be the death of yourself and your companions? Come on +board this ship, for here you will be welcomed like brothers." At +last the frigate was lost sight of at night, for which cause the +Chief Pilot eased off the sheets, and waited until the next day in +the afternoon. The soldiers began to make an outcry, saying it was no +time to delay the navigation, for that the frigate would not appear, +that she may have gone ahead, and that if not it was God for us all +and each for himself. The Chief Pilot answered that it would be an ill +deed to abandon that vessel full of friends on the high sea, without +such a pilot as could take her to safety. If she parted company, +she could not be secure of reaching port. She was never more seen. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + How they came in sight of an island bearing north, and of the + great danger in which the ship was placed. + + +With the wind from the E. and N.E. the ship continued her +N.N.W. course, and on the following Saturday she came in sight of +an island, for which they steered cheerfully in hopes of a port and +provisions. But as it did not appear well to the Chief Pilot to go +too near an unknown land during the night, he ordered the ship to be +tacked. The sailors, accustomed to work, said they were not tired, +and that they were quite ready to go on. The Chief Pilot eased off +the foresheet, put the helm down, and the ship went round. This seemed +to be the inspiration of an angel, for if she had not been put about +she would certainly have been lost, as will be seen further on. Up +to where the ship was the sea was clear and unbroken, but further on +it was not known what the ship would strike against. + +At dawn the ship stood in to where she was before night. A sailor +was sent to the mast-head, as was the custom morning and evening, +and he reported that to the N.E. there were some great reefs, the +termination of which he could not see. The ship had no after sails to +enable her to work to windward; and the water was breaking over the +rocks. The ship was so near them that there appeared to be no escape, +and death seemed ready to swallow us up. A certain person made a +prayer and a promise, in his heart, to St. Anthony of Padua; and it +served the Lord that on this day, which was that of His holy birth, +the ship came out of the danger in which she was placed. At three in +the afternoon she doubled the reef, it may be said by a miracle. + +Natives came in their canoes from the island under sail, others +paddling. As they were unable to cross the reef, they jumped on it, +and made signs with their hands. In the afternoon one single native +in a small canoe came round the end of the reef. He was at a distance +to windward, so that we could not see whether he had a beard, the +position being near the island of the "Barbados." He seemed to be a +good-sized man and naked, with long, loose hair. He pointed in the +direction whence he had come, and breaking something white with his +hands he ate it, and had cocoa nuts for drink. He was called to, +but did not want to come. + +It was evening, and, for that reason, a sailor went aloft to look +out. He reported two small islands and many rocks, by which the ship +was surrounded as in a yard. There was reason for despondency, as +whatever course was taken (to those who did not understand) seemed +to threaten danger. The ship was put on a course steering N.N.W. + +This islet is in latitude 6°. It is nearly round, and about 30 +leagues in circumference. It is not very high. It has many trees, +and at their sides there were flowers and cultivated patches. At 3 +leagues to the west there are four low islands, and many others near +them, all surrounded by reefs. The sea appeared to be more clear to +the southward. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + How they came in sight of the Ladrone Islands, and what happened + there. + + +Continuing on a N.N.W. course, they were in 14° N. latitude on +Monday, the 1st of January. The wind was west, and the ship was +going free. On Wednesday, the 3rd of the same month, we came in +sight of two of the Ladrone islands, for which we were making. One +was called Guan, and the other Serpana. We passed between the two, +which lie N.E. and S.W., by a channel 10 leagues wide, keeping on +the side of Guan. A man who was handing the foresail fell overboard; +and in the whole ship there was only one line. It was thrown over +where the man had fallen alongside, who got hold of it and came up, +thanks be to God! Many canoes came out from Guan under sail, with a +number of Ladrone natives in them, who are stout men of a reasonable +colour. They were crying out "charume," which means friends, and +"heoreque," signifying "Give us iron," which is what they seek, being +very fond of it. As so many came there was a great press, and some +canoes fouled each other and were overturned, whose masters swimming, +turned them over again with great ease. They are built with two prows, +so that they can turn the sail without having to turn the canoe. They +brought many cocoa nuts, plantains, rice, water, and some large fish, +giving all in exchange for old iron. Those of the ship were delighted +with these people and their refreshing provisions. The exchange being +completed, the natives went away, all but two who were killed by an +arquebus, owing to a matter of a piece of cask hoop. [66] + +The soldiers insisted much with the Chief Pilot that he should +go into port at this island and procure provisions. He was very +willing; but he gave it up because there was no gear for getting the +boat into the water. He said this to all; but they still insisted, +saying they could do it with their hands. The Chief Pilot replied: +"And how will you get it on board again?" They answered: "Why cannot +it be left here?" Then the Chief Pilot said: "It is not well to lose +the boat, having to navigate among so many islands of which we go +in search." They were very persistent; but he turned a deaf ear, +and continued to shape a westerly course until Friday, the 12th, +when, on taking the sun, he found the latitude to be 13° N. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + How, when they came in sight of the Philippine Islands, the ship + was in many dangers, and how she anchored in a good harbour. + + +The Chief Pilot navigated only by information, and without a chart, +seeking for the cape of Espiritu Santo, the first land of the +Philippines. At daybreak land was sighted, being the peak of a high +mountain; and nothing else was then seen owing to a shower of rain +that came on. The land was welcomed with as much content as if we had +really reached a safe haven. Some said: "Soon we shall hear Mass and +seek God. There is no longer danger of death without confession, for +that is a land where Christians dwell." Amidst these anticipations +and great rejoicing, there were others so weak that they could not +stand on their feet, and who were like skeletons ready to die; and +their refrain was that they no longer wished to bring to light their +propped-up bones. Presently they all applied for a double ration of +water, for the want of it caused the greatest sufferings. But the +Chief Pilot said that he could not give more than the cup, for there +was very little left, and we should still be at sea some time before +we anchored. + +Having come near the land, a bay was seen on the shore running north +and south. The people said that this was a port, and that we should +make for it, for God had shown us such signal mercy that He had guided +us there. This was also the view of the Chief Pilot; for there was +a soldier on board, who, some time before, had made this voyage and +knew the coast. We continued to coast along, looking out for signs +that would be satisfactory. The wind was strong from the N.E., and +there was mist over land, while the sun was obscured. It did not seem +advisable to the Chief Pilot to proceed further, nor to enter such a +dangerous place, in which, if once embayed, it would not be possible +to get out, the wind being contrary, there being few hands, and the +whole furniture of the ship being bad. For these reasons he ordered the +ship to be put about, intending to see if he could get the latitude by +a star observation, or the sun next day, so as to be sure where he was. + +They began to persuade him to go in, and he told them that it would be +better to endure one day more of suffering than to lose their lives. He +then examined the soldier in great detail for his reasons for being +satisfied that that was the opening that we sought. His replies were +as far from the truth as he was near to a mistaken notion. After all +this, he and others gave their opinions to the Governess. They made +their complaints, and said that the Chief Pilot did not understand +how to take advantage of such a good chance. To all this he answered +that no one desired the salvation of the ship more than he did, +whose duty it was to seek a port on pain of loss of credit in case +of failure; while as regards their lives they were all equal. "God +has been pleased to bring them there, and He would also take them +to Manilla;" adding that if others had the responsibility they would +not feel so certain about what they said. + +The Governess also said that it appeared to be the opening, for that +everyone said so. The Chief Pilot answered that she should leave it to +him, for that he understood his duty; if not, she could appoint some +one else. He knew that for anyone to enter that opening and get the +ship into danger, he would not be without blame whoever he might be, +and there would be no escape. "And how," he added, "could the sick, +and all the women and children they had on board, be saved? Even if +they were saved, how could they be fed and taken on their way? And +what certainty was there that there was peace in that land? Even if +there was, how much better was it to take such measures as would +make safety certain, than to make the voyage to Manilla doubtful, +it being still 300 leagues distant. Moreover, the night was coming +on, which made it necessary to stand away from the land." At last +the ship was put about, and kept on that tack with the care that was +necessary during a night without moon. + +At dawn we returned to seek the land, though it was not visible owing +to mist, in consequence of which great murmurs were raised against +the Chief Pilot. They said that they could only be drowned once, +and it would have been better to have taken the ship in when they +spoke before than to risk nothing. At last the land came in sight, +in the form of a cape a little to windward. They set the bonnet, +and ran in for the land, with the intention of coasting along it, +the sounding line in the arm, and the deep-sea lead in the hand, +ready to anchor, or decide upon what it was most desirable to do. The +yard was hoisted up, and the tie was carried away. The sail fell, and +the people, who were tired, did not care to apply a remedy. At last, +persuaded by good reasons, and by the proximity of dangerous reefs, +the yard was got up again, and secured to the mast by stoppers. But +these stoppers would not hold; the yard fell again, and to hoist it +once more required both hands and tongue. The night before there +had been a great swell, and now it was the same, and as the ship, +head to wind, laboured much, the rigging almost all carried away, +especially the running rigging belonging to the foremast, and there +was only one shroud left on each side. The mast appeared so badly +supported that the least thing would make it go by the board; but +it was a good spar, and held on. Firmness is needful in all cases, +for without it all else is worth little or nothing. + +As for the reefs in sight, they were said to be the Catanduanes, where +a ship is in great danger of foundering with all on board; while if +anyone escaped by swimming, the natives shoot arrows into him like +San Sebastian, which they know how to do very well. Others said we +were between those reefs and the island of Manilla, in a part where +it was impossible to get out. Others, that the channel was astern, and +that the fault was with the Chief Pilot. Others declared that the ship +would sink, that he should die who would die; and other disconcerting +opinions like these, sufficient to upset the most collected. + +The Governess, in her retreat, appeared to be making arrangements with +death. A book of devotions in her hand, her eyes turned to heaven, +making ejaculations, and as afflicted and tearful as the rest. The +Chief Pilot regretted that he could not do what he intended. Some +clamoured, others appeared sad, and all turned their eyes to the Chief +Pilot, with whom was the whole solution. They asked him what land +that was, and where they were, as if it was enough merely to see it +in order to know it without further ado. At last, at the end of all +this and much more, the blame was put on the soldier who professed +to know that coast: for it was thought that some devil had possessed +him that day, to bring all to their deaths, if the intervention of +God did not save them. + +The Chief Pilot said: "What is it that you want me to say to you? I +never saw the land in my life until now, nor am I a sorcerer. I came +in search of the Cape of Espiritu Santo. It ought to be here, within +two leagues, more or less. Can you not see that the land is covered +with clouds, and so is the sky, so that I am prevented from making +use of my instruments. Now we will coast along the land, and when we +find a port or anchoring ground, we will bring to; for by all means we +must keep the ship from grounding." He then told two sailors to set +up two backstays to support the foremast, and another strong lad to +have the anchor ready to let go as soon as there was bottom. But they +turned their backs without answering, and made use of bad language. + +The ship and crew was in this state when it pleased the Lord to look +down with the eyes of clemency, and to be served by turning the bows +of the ship right into a bay. A breeze sprang up, and we ran in, with a +reef on either side. At this juncture three natives came to reconnoitre +us in a canoe, and placed themselves to windward of the ship without +saying anything. The only man on board who knew the language spoke to +them, and when they saw that we were Christians, they came on board, +and showed us the anchorage which we were then seeking. We anchored +in the middle of the bay, in 14 fathoms. One of these natives was an +interpreter. The other was the man that the English navigator, Thomas +Cavendish, took with him to point out to him the channels among these +islands. I asked them what land that was. They answered that it was the +Cape of Espiritu Santo, and that the bay and port were called "Cobos;" +also that the opening was near, and that the ship was on her right +course. I asked who was then governing Manilla. They replied that Don +Luis Perez de las Mariñas was Governor for the Spaniards. I asked this, +because it was reported in Peru that Japan was preparing an attack +with a great fleet. This news was given to people who seemed an hour +before to be sentenced to death, and now were to live. They could not +conceal their joy, and showed it by tears and thanks to God, Who knows +how to show these mercies when He pleases to the man who serves Him. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + Of what happened during the time that the ship was in the bay. + + +The natives went to their village, from which others came, one with a +wand of justice; and, on seeing it, and a cross on the land, the crew +believed the natives to be peaceful and Christian. They brought fowls +and pigs, at two or three reals a piece, together with palm wine, by +drinking which some of us talked various languages; also many cocoa +nuts, plantains, sweet canes, papays, roots, water in bamboo joints, +and fuel. They took in exchange reals, knives and glass beads, which +they value more than silver. During three days and nights the galley +fire was never put out, nor was there any cessation of kneading and +cooking, or of eating the boiled of one and the roast of another, +so that they were eating day and night. + +With mouths sweetened and stomachs satisfied, they all remained as +contented as it is possible to imagine. The Chief Pilot said that +this was the present work, to enable them to arrive at the port they +so much desired. Some wanted to embrace him; others said that he had +made them happy; and he said to all that they should give thanks +to God. He said to the two sailors who would not hear his orders: +"Does it seem to you that if you had had your own way you would have +given a good account of yourselves? Tell me whether you are better +off here, or where you importuned me to take you?" + +The natives here are of a brown colour, not very tall, and their +bodies tattooed. They have no beards, nor any sign of them. Their +hair is black and long. Their loins are covered with cloth, and in +the villages they wore a tunic of the same material, with no colour, +and reaching down to their calves. They have large gold earrings, ivory +armlets, and similar ornaments on their legs, of gilded bronze, which +deceived some of our people. These natives are so selfish that without +silver or something they want in exchange, they will give nothing. + +The sick, being so little accustomed to abundance of food, and +eating without moderation, did themselves serious harm; three or four +even died of it. The natives came morning and evening, bringing and +bartering their produce, so that in fourteen days provisions were +collected for the rest of the voyage. + +The bay is open to the N.W., and when it blew hard from that quarter +there was a heavy sea. The ship rode by a small cable that looked +like a thread, so that it was a new mercy of God that strength was +given to it to hold the ship during two days and a night, while it +strained against its slender cable, with rocks and mangrove swamps +to leeward. The Chief Pilot, seeing the danger in which the ship +was placed, proposed to the Governess that the royal artillery and +munitions should be got out and stored in one of the villages, with +her property, and that of the women and children, or at least what +was of most value; while, as regards the ship, he would always be on +board, with the sailors, ready for anything that might happen. She +replied that, for the eight days they were going to stay, what danger +could there be? He then said that he would not feel secure of the +ship's safety for a single hour; and seeing the want of care of the +Governess, he repeated what he had said. As she would not consent, +he said he would make a protest for his own security, for she made +certain of her own freedom from blame by reason of the care he took. So +he drew up a brief protest, saying in it what, in his opinion, ought +to be done. When she had read it, a council was called and an act was +prepared, ordering that sail should presently be made for Manilla, +and that they should not remain in that port. The Chief Pilot said +that he gave his protest as a reply, for that the ship was not then +fit to go to sea, as first she must be refitted and victualled so +far as was necessary; also that the wind was then blowing into the +mouth of the bay, being the direction by which they must go; also that +he must protest afresh against his request not being complied with, +for the ship was not safe for a moment. They drew up another order, +that within an hour he should take the ship out and shape a course +to Manilla, and that his conduct was disrespectful and mutinous. All +these and other similar things happened there, and the Chief Pilot +spoke to the soldiers to this effect: "See you not that these concerted +replies of mine are to provide for your necessities? I know not what +steps to take in order to bring this lady to reason. It ought to be +understood that my obligation is to serve her and to endure her. But +see you not that this ship is only held by a cable that can be clasped +with two fingers?" + +On this occasion the sailors signed a paper and gave it to the Chief +Pilot, asking him, who they looked upon as their commander, that he +would give them food, or an instalment of their pay; otherwise, that he +would dismiss them soon, that they might go to seek for other service; +for here they had sold what they had, and if they applied for rations, +or advances, or pay, they had nothing but excuses and evil answers. The +Chief Pilot showed the paper to the Governess, and said that their +plan was for all to go or to seize the ship. The sailors said that +it was tyranny; that the King, being over all, paid, fed, and gave +liberty. The Governess to this replied by saying to the Sergeant-Major: +"Go to Manilla, and bring me a judge, with soldiers and a frigate, +so that they may come to me and punish these people." She spoke as +she understood, and would work in this way if she could, having shown +her disposition. All complained and all suffered. The Chief Pilot +said: "I do not wish to say during this expedition anything more, +but rather to suffer a woman as Governess, and her two brothers; and +all this from my desire not to offend the name of the King's presence, +for now I am in the hands of Doña Isabel Barreto." + +The Chief Pilot, not neglecting his duties, had soundings taken in +a certain port round a cape, whither he presently took the ship and +anchored her. With reason, it may be said that to avoid one danger he +ran into another which was more certain, the one being quite as much +by chance as the other; for both ends of the lee foresheets carried +away outside the thimble; the wind was fresh, and the rocks quite +close. But at such moments temerity often brings safety, as on this +occasion. Sending a hawser on shore, the ship was brought into a safe +port. Here he ordered the natives to make a strong cable of fibres, +and other ropes, with which he both rigged the foremast and secured +the ship. + +In reply to the sailors, the Governess had ordered a proclamation to be +made that no one was to go on shore without leave on pain of death. It +happened that a married soldier went on shore without leave to get some +food, or with leave according to his own account, and for this he was +ordered to be arrested. A council was assembled, and presently an order +was given that the prisoner should be flogged. The Sergeant-Major, +who had to carry out the order, was not handy in rigging what was +required, and at last told the Boatswain to reeve a tackle and hoist +up the yard. While this part of the comedy was proceeding, an ensign +came up the hatchway, followed by some halberdiers as long and thin +as himself. They came by authority of the sentence, with the drum +which was nearly passed its work, and the most wonderful costumes, +for there is no play without an interlude. The Boatswain was one Marcos +Marin, an Aragonese, a large man, now old and very respectable. As he +knew better how to understand things, and complain of them, than to +pronounce the Castilian language, it was a wonderful thing to hear his +honest liberties and well-founded complaints, which he took even to the +Adelantado himself. But he was very careful, and highly intelligent +in his office. As the Sergeant-Major hurried him very much, and he +had very little inclination, he said: "Report, Sir Sergeant-Major, +that we are all chastised with so much hunger, sickness, and so many +deaths during the time we have been at sea, that it will be better +to reflect on all this rather than flog another." The Sergeant-Major +replied that he must obey at once, for that the Governess had given +the order. The Boatswain answered: "The Lady will do equally well in +giving us to eat from the store she keeps for herself; and the jars +of wine and oil, given to those who need them, would be better than +these floggings. I have an order, but who orders me to do what is +right?" The Sergeant-Major was enraged, and the Boatswain, without +any hesitation, said: "We have good security--flog here, hang there, +many orders, and to die of hunger!" + +On this there arose cries and complaints, and the wife of the prisoner +was praying for justice from God for the injury that they were going +to inflict on her husband. The Chief Pilot went to represent to the +Governess that it seemed to be an unjust thing that in return for so +many hardships that the man had suffered, having lost four children +and expended his property, he should be left without anything, and +to die without honour. The Governess answered that he had disobeyed +her orders, and that it was proper he should suffer for it. The Chief +Pilot replied, saying that "they also broke the orders of God with +punishment in the life hereafter, and those of Holy Mother Church +with punishment of excommunication, and those of the King with the +punishment of a traitor, which is loss of life, honour, and property, +who hastily make the sword run with blood." The Governess said she +had given the order to frighten the sailors. The Chief Pilot begged +that she would not do so at such cost, and that he would look after +them. With this the prisoner was set at liberty, and the solicitude +of the Sergeant-Major ceased. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + How the ship sailed from this bay, and of what happened until + she arrived at the entrance of that of Manilla. + + +The ship left this bay of Cobos, which is in 12° 10' N. latitude, +on Tuesday, the 29th of January, and in going out we committed two +bodies to the deep. By five in the afternoon we were well clear of +the entrance, and left the island of San Bernardino, which is in the +middle of the mouth, far astern. At night, near an island called Capul, +we encountered a strong cross sea, caused by currents which are here +very powerful, so that the ship was turned right round, and there +was cause for thankfulness that she was not driven on shore. Next +day several natives came out in barangais from a port on the island +of Luzon called Nivalon. They brought quantities of fowls, pigs, wine +and fruit; but the soldiers now had scarcely anything to barter with, +and were able to buy little. We kept the island in sight all day, +and in the night we were among many others, passing through places +of which experienced pilots said afterwards that they could not +understand how it was that we had not been lost among the numerous +reefs which we never saw. The Lord was served in protecting us. + +On Thursday, the first of February, the Governess, at a place called +Galvan, sent her two brothers, with seven other men, in the boat, to +seek for food. This business came to such a point that the Captain, +Don Diego, ordered an arquebus to be fired at one of the sailors who +went up the mizen mast. The Chief Pilot said to the Governess that to +no one was it more important than to her that the expedition should +end in peace. This was a foolish affair, and so it was left. The +boat did not come back, although we waited for her all day. They +went to Manilla, which was 15 leagues distant, by a certain strait in +the island, to report our approach. On the next night, before dawn, +the ship was so embayed among islands that no way out was visible, +without a boat and without food, for the provisions taken in at the +last port were consumed. We saw many natives in canoes; but they all +fled from us, although we made signs to them. The reason was that, +as this was not the time when ships arrive from New Spain, they +thought the ship was English. For they remembered the ship of Thomas +Cavendish, and the warning of the Governor to act thus. There was +no want of anxiety about our condition, and much more that we could +not see how to extricate the ship. We proceeded as well as we could, +for it was nearly calm, and at last we saw a channel, so narrow that a +stone might almost be thrown across it. The wind freshened and we made +for it, coming out between the islands of Luzon and Caza, near a point +which is called Azufre, in the wide sea of a great bay called Bombon. + +Where there is hunger there is discontent. The soldiers stood +menacingly round the hatchway, because the Governess would not +give the order for their rations to be served out. The Chief Pilot, +seeing this, asked the accountant to request the Governess to be so +kind as to order food to be served out to the people. If she did not +like to give it, the Chief Pilot would sign an obligation to pay her +at Manilla what the cost of the provisions would be from that time; +or, if that would not do, to give it her in specie. If she refused, +it might be that the store-room would be broken into. For it was not +just that, there being provision on board the ship, the crew should +die for want of it. The Governess sent for him and said: "Sir Captain, +have you spent 40,000 dols. as I have on this expedition, or have these +people undertaken it at their own charge? The Adelantado is ill paid +for the great things he expected." The Chief Pilot replied to this: +"My Lady, I spent my property, and each one spent what they had; +many gave up their lives, and all expended all they knew. As for the +Adelantado, I was a better servant to him than he was friend to me; +but these passed memories do not oblige me to look favourably on +present faults which give much trouble, as may well be known. These +men have the same necessity to eat on one day as they have on another, +and as we all have; and until we bring them to Manilla we are bound to +give them to eat and drink. That which belonged to the Adelantado, and +that which belongs to your Ladyship, must be used for the necessities +of the voyage; and upon me falls the duty of guarding it, disposing +of it faithfully, measuring the quantity, according to the time that +this ship may spend with reference to the small amount of sail she +is able to carry." The Governess having been convinced, said that a +calf might be killed that she had on board. + +While this business was being arranged, two boats came in sight, +each rowed by forty natives, twenty on each side. + +A signal was made to the one which came in front. She turned, but +did not care to wait. They ran into each other, and made fast to +a line which was thrown to them. They were asked whence they came +and whither they went. They replied that they were from Manilla, +which was 20 leagues distant, speaking in the Castilian language, +and that they were on their way to Zebu, the first settlement that +was formed by the Spaniards in those parts, an island 100 leagues +from Manilla. I asked for a native as a guide, because the ship had +to pass some reefs called "Tuley" during the night. They gave one a +wage of 3 dols. for his trouble. The Chief Pilot bought from them two +large baskets of rice for two pair of shoes, which was divided among +the people. The Governess wanted to buy two more, but she could not +agree about the price; so, having given us the guide, they let go the +line and proceeded on their way. A careful watch was kept during the +night, and next morning we came in sight of the opening to the bay, +which we kept nearing by coasting along the land of the island of +Fortun. The wind was contrary for entering on the west side, for +there was a breeze from the north-east. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + Of what took place with the sailors on the arrival; how four + Spaniards came on board; and other things that happened until + the ship was anchored at Cavite. + + +There is an island called Marivelez, at the entrance of the bay of +Manilla, where there is usually a Spanish look-out man, with native +rowers and light boats, to go out and reconnoitre any ships that are +coming in, so as to give early intelligence to the Governor. There is +also a small rock called El Frayle, bearing north from Marivelez. These +two islands form three channels, and to enter the one between Marivelez +and El Frayle I began to alter course. As the only sails we had +were the two courses, and the crew weary and disinclined to work, +while not unwilling to injure the ship so as to revenge themselves, +we made little or no way, and indeed began to lose ground. We went +on like this for three days, all tired and annoyed to find that we +did not sight the island, and were thus deprived of the pleasure of +reaching and resting at Manilla. All was sorrow, and waiting for one +tide after another, counting the hours for its flood, that we might +get inside; but as no order was kept, that hour did not come. The +sailors said to the Chief Pilot that he should run that ship on shore, +for that they had worked enough, and done more than they were bound +to do. The thing that ought to be was to see the land on both sides, +and the smoke of Manilla. When they gave any help, they did so very +slowly, as if it was done as a favour. There was now neither food to +eat nor water to drink. There was only a foul wind, and the affliction +expressed in consequence. The Governess said that she had only got +two sacks of flour and a little wine, and that she wanted it all to +say masses for the soul of the Adelantado. + +The Chief Pilot showed much feeling against the sailors who wanted to +run the ship on shore, and told them to look and see that all that +coast was steep to, and with a heavy sea. "See you not," he said, +"that we have no boat, and that the ship is full of sick without +food. If you would give notice at Manilla, there is nothing to take +you over the sea, and by land it would take several days. It is not +possible to sustain the people for one more day. Let it not be said +that you only want those to be saved who have health and know how to +swim. Reflect that we have brought the ship from such remote parts, by +a route never before navigated. The little that remains cannot appear +much to those who have suffered so much with such great courage. And +how would you suffer where they look out for us, at losing the reward +your labours deserve? Reflect well that if the ship arrived well +furnished, full of healthy men, well fed and paid, in that case there +would be small thanks." They answered that "they were only sailors, +and that when the ship was anchored they would get no credit, but +only the Chief Pilot who commanded them." To this he replied that the +greatest reward for which he hoped was to anchor the ship in a safe +harbour, where all could enjoy the good things they so much desired. + +There were many very painful scenes such as this, when that merciful +Lord, who is always looking down upon us and brings succour and relief +in times of greatest necessity, like a father to his children though +prodigal, was served that we should come in sight of a boat, which +rapidly approached the ship with sail and oars. When it came near four +Spaniards could be seen in it, who seemed like 4,000 angels, and eight +natives were rowing them. This was the look-out man, who, as has been +said, is always stationed at Marivelez, named Alonzo de Albarran, with +the chief butler of the Governor and two soldiers. They came by the +Governor's order, to condole with the Governess on her misfortunes, +and to bring a letter, which she presently showed to the Chief Pilot, +and which contained many and most honourable greetings. The coming +of the ship had become known from the brothers of the Governess, who +had come by land. The satisfaction of all on board was such, and so +warmly shown, at the sight of the four Spaniards, that it cannot be +described. The sailors gave their hands, and helped them into the ship, +where they were received only with embraces, for there was nothing +else to give them. And they, looking carefully from one to another, +and seeing them so sick, covered with boils, poverty-stricken, with +tattered clothes, and surrounded by so much misery, could only exclaim: +"Thanks be to God! Thanks be to God!" + +The look-out man went down between decks to see the hospital and the +sick women, who, when they beheld him, cried out: "What do you bring us +to eat? Oh, give us food, for we are mad with hunger and thirst." With +the hope of refreshment some were consoled, and the look-out man +came on deck again, much horrified at what he had seen. Then, +seeing two pigs on board the ship, he said: "Why do they not kill +those pigs?" They told him that they belonged to the Governess, +and he prayed hard to her to allow them to be killed, having said: +"What the Devil! Is this a time for courtesy with pigs?" The Governess +then ordered them to be killed, and a soldier, who took careful note +of such things, exclaimed: "O, cruel avarice! which even with a gentle +and pious woman turns her heart into a stone, even in a business so +necessary, cheap, and clear!" God was served that all the good wine +appeared too. The ship came to Marivelez on the next tack, whence the +Governess sent a soldier with the reply to the letter she received +from the Governor, which was sent by the returning boat. + +Soon afterwards another boat was seen, in which was the Chief +Magistrate of that part of the coast, with the brothers of Doña +Isabel. They brought much fresh bread, wine and fruit, presented +by the Governor. When it was being distributed there was seen, in +respectable persons, some things which were far from well ordered. For +in such necessitous times as were those, ordinary obligations are +disregarded. All got a share, some more than others, which they +consumed during that afternoon. One boy died from exhaustion, due to +previous privations. The long night passed with hope of day, when +a large barge arrived laden with fowls, calves, pigs, bread, wine, +and vegetables brought by Diego Diaz Marmolego, the land-owner of +that part, by order of the Governor. They were also sent on board, +and plentifully distributed among all, with much liberality. + +The ship was nearing the port, though obliged to make several +tacks. Presently, Pinao, Assistant Master of a royal ship, came in a +skiff full of sailors, all dressed in coloured silks, to help the few +weak men in the ship. The Captain of the port was on the beach, with +the banner flying, and all the soldiers drawn up with their arms. At +the point of letting go the anchor, all the artillery saluted, as +well as the arquebusiers round the standard. The ship replied as well +as she could, riding by one anchor secured to the slight cable, so +celebrated during the voyage. This was on the 11th of February, 1596, +in the long desired and long sought for port of Cavite, two leagues +S.W. of the city of Manilla, capital of the Philippines, in latitude +14° 30' N. Fifty persons had died since the ship left Santa Cruz. + +As soon as the ship was anchored, some men came on board, moved by +charity, with bread and meat, which now became plentiful. Presently +the sailors and other persons from the city came to see the ship, +as a sight both on account of her great need as that she came from +Peru, as it was said, to fetch the Queen of Sheba from the Isles of +Solomon. All came on board, and, having seen how little there was, +they wondered that she should ever have arrived in safety, and they +praised God that she should have been spared, to Whom be the honour +and the glory, and to Whom the success should be attributed and +the thanks given, for His are the great mercies shown during the +voyage. It is to be noted that if the people who died had not died, +those who survived would not have arrived with more than twenty jars +of water and two sacks of flour. Thus concluded, as they say, this +unhappy voyage with safety. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + What happened until the people went to Manilla. + + +This joyful day passed, and the night came, in which there were not +wanting some new, but not unusual, annoyances with the Magistrate +of the coast, to whom Doña Isabel had made complaints in private. He +showed himself to be a judge who sided with the first comer without +hearing the other side; for if he would have heard, he would have +known how much that lady owed to him who brought her where she was, +and how little, from any point of view, he owed her. But it is very +unusual for poor men to work without pay or thanks, and for others +to do evil to him to whom good is due. He took one sailor, and to +another he gave sharp words and threatened, saying that it was an +old custom for the people of Peru to be mettlesome, and that if +they came in that spirit they must not think that they were there +in their island, where they could do as they pleased; that those +who failed to pay would be punished, or would have to pay double, +or with their lives. He made other remarks, and was answered that all +who came had been and were good vassals of the King; and as for the +rest, they were as good as others. These altercations ended at last, +but the long desired night was passed with less content than had +been anticipated. For the satisfactions of this life come tardily, +and endure little longer than a sigh. + +Next morning the Master of the Camp came to the ship by order of the +Governor, with an alderman sent by the Municipality, and a clergyman +by the officials of the Church, all to receive the Governess, and to +arrange for the sick to go to Manilla. The Governess was taken to the +royal residence at the port, and again there was a salute when she +disembarked. Having partaken of refreshments, she was received in a +boat, and conducted to the city. She entered at night, was received +with an illumination, and well lodged. + +The sick were carried out of the ship in men's arms, and taken +to the hospital. The widows were received in the houses of the +principal residents, and afterwards they were all married to their +satisfaction. The convalescents and the rest of the soldiers were +lodged by rich inhabitants. The married were put in houses where +they were received, lodged, and tended, with much love and pleasure, +by respected citizens of Manilla. In a few days ten died, and four +entered monastic orders. + +The frigate was never more seen. There was a report that she had +been found with all her sails set, and the crew dead and decomposed, +run upon a certain part of the coast. The galeot reached port at an +island called Mindanao, in 10°, having been lost among all those +islands. The people on board were reduced to such necessity that +they landed on a small islet called Camaniguin, to kill and eat a +dog they had seen on shore. Some natives, who met them by chance, +guided them to a port where there were some fathers of the Company of +Jesus. The fathers took them to a Governor in that district, who sent +five of them prisoners to Manilla, because their Captain quarrelled +with them, saying they wanted to mutiny. They were sent with a letter +to Dr Antonio de Morga, Lieutenant-General of that Government, which +he showed to the Chief Pilot. It was as follows:-- + +"Here came into port a galeot with a Captain who was as impertinent as +the things he said. He was asked whence he came, and he replied that +he belonged to the expedition of the Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña, +which was undertaken to make a voyage from Peru to the Solomon +Islands, consisting of four vessels. This galeot put in here, and, +as she carried a royal flag, I received her as was proper. If the +others were here, this would be better known. Against the soldiers +there is no process. They said that, because the Captain wished it, +he parted company from the ship with his galeot." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + + Which contains a discourse by the Chief Pilot, explaining why + they did not find the Solomon Islands. [67] + + +The reason why the Solomon Islands, of which the Chief Pilot, Hernan +Gallego, who discovered them, makes mention in his narrative, and +of which the Adelantado, Alvaro de Mendaña, went in search, are not +the Islands of the Marquesas de Mendoza, nor those of Santa Cruz +which we discovered in this voyage: and why we pressed so far in +advance of the position where he said they were in conformity with +his instructions, may, as it seems to me, be conveniently explained +here, to satisfy the doubts which may be raised respecting the cause +of our not reaching them. + +I find three reasons which might form impediments to our reaching +the Solomon Islands in the positions where we were. + +The first is the belief that they had less longitude than was really +the case, for they would not seem so far to the people who had to go +for their settlement. + +The second is some motive of private interest, leading to a concealment +of the true latitude, giving to it somewhat less or more. + +The third is ignorance, or the want of the instruments to calculate +certain distances, or an error in judgment while navigating: what +appears to be one thing being another; or a mistake in writing. + +As for the first, if it was so that we were not given the true +longitude of the Solomon Islands, I say that we really did not reach +them, and that they are further to the west than the islands we +discovered. The reason is that, if what the Adelantado told me was +true, by whose order I prepared the navigating charts, and if what +appears in his instructions and in the narrative of Hernan Gallego +is true, the Solomon Islands are in latitude 7° to 12° S., 1,450 +leagues from Lima. There cannot be an error, as we always continued to +navigate without reaching the position, and could not have passed them +when they were 400 leagues further to the west. It must, therefore, +be believed that they were not behind but in front of us. + +As to the second reason, if it was interest, as many people said, +that induced Hernan Gallego, when the Adelantado asked him for +the route to these islands, not to give him the true position as +regards latitude, this may explain it. For when he was at Court +to report to his Majesty he had not negotiated for himself; and as +the Adelantado, when he undertook the discovery, did not understand +the art of navigation, he could be deceived. On the other hand, his +observations could not be kept so secret when they were taken by four +pilots, who must have known as well as the people who were with them; +nor did Hernan Gallego then know that he would have a disagreement with +the Adelantado. Nor do I believe that a man of such high character +would do such a thing. Moreover, if in this there was deceit, I say +that if the islands were in 7° at the least, or in 12° at the most, +and we seek them between 7° and 12°, they might well remain behind us, +on one of the two sides. + +As for the third reason, if it was ignorance there is nothing more to +be said. It is very certain that navigating so much as they navigated +from east to west, they were on a course on which altitude is not +altered, nor is longitude fixed except by such estimation as each one +may make. In this there may be very great error, as well in him who +makes the estimate as in the ship which, in such a case, may have +been understood to have gone over less ground than she is supposed +to have made good. + +In proof of the greater distance between Peru and the Solomon Islands, +I may mention that Hernan Gallego says in his narrative--and the +Adelantado also told me the same--that being among the Isles of +St. Bartholome, [68] in 8° 40' N., in the position of the Barbudos, +they saw a vessel flying from them under a head sail. They sent the +boat on shore; all the natives fled to one of their villages, which +our people entered, and brought thence to the ships a chisel made of a +nail, from which they understood that Spaniards had been or were there. + +What they suspected, respecting this circumstance, was that when +the Adelantado, Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, discovered the Philippine +Islands, a pilot named Lope Martin, returned to New Spain without +orders, to bring the news to the Viceroy, Luis de Velasco, who had +sent that expedition of discovery, by whom he was very well received +and dispatched with succour. He, or one of the people who went with +him, also took a letter which a certain friend of the Adelantado +Legazpi wrote from Mexico, in which it was said that as soon as it +was received Lope Martin should be hanged for having taken the leave +which was not given to him. This letter, I know not by what order, +got into the hands of Lope Martin. Besides this, between him and the +others there were encounters and some deaths, including that of the +Captain. Arrived at the Barbudos, Lope Martin went on shore with +some of his friends. Meanwhile the Boatswain, with the men of his +party, conspired and made sail, leaving them on the island. As the +Adelantado, Alvaro de Mendaña, arrived at the islands a little time +after this event, it was suspected that those who had been left there +thought that Mendaña came in search with the object of punishing them; +and for that reason they fled in that vessel which they had probably +built, and went to New Guinea. + +I say that if this is true, as the islands of the Barbudos are in +8°, 9°, or 10°, more or less, and 2,000 leagues or more from Peru, +and as Hernan Gallego, coming from the Solomon Islands, which he +says are 1,450 leagues from Lima, to seek the coast of New Spain, +navigating from N.E. to N., for so bear the islands from that coast, +he could not fall in with the Barbudos, being from the Solomon Islands +at least N.E., having come from a much greater longitude than they +really thought, or did not wish to say. Moreover, inhabited islands +are no small indication that New Guinea is near. + +Hernan Gallego says, in these formal words, that "in 2° or 3° to +the S.W. we found very clear signs of land, but never saw any land +whatever. Finally, we concluded that we had land to the west of us, +and that it was New Guinea; not in a higher latitude than 4° S., for it +was discovered by Iñigo Ortiz de Retes, and by no one else. Bernardo +de la Torre neither discovered nor saw it, nor is there such a place +as the Cape of the Cross." [69] + +I say, touching such signs as the palms seen in the sea, which +Hernan Gallego mentions, that I also saw many, which might make me +believe that New Guinea was near, being in the same latitude, and +for other reasons that I will give further on. Also, in a northerly +direction, I came upon the Barbudos in 6°, an island peopled by good +natives. Moreover, I came from the island of Santa Cruz, 1,850 leagues +from Lima, and afterwards navigated another 40 leagues more to the +west, making 440 further than Hernan Gallego, according to his own +account. And as I navigated to the Philippines, which is more to the +west, I was more in the way of seeing the signs of the island I found +than was Hernan Gallego. For he confesses that he went 1,450 leagues +from Lima, and took his way to New Spain, which is N. to N.E. This +proves that he could not have seen those signs, nor the islands he +sighted, without having gone over much more longitude than he stated. + +Hernan Gallego says further, in his report to the Licentiate Castro, +who was at that time President of the Audience in the city of the +Kings, who despatched the expedition:--"Being in 7° S., 30 leagues +from the island of Jesus, [70] which was the first we discovered as +we saw the archipelago of islands, it was never intended to prosecute +discoveries further, but that we should return to Peru, as is public +and notorious. If we had gone on another cock would have crowed, +for we should have discovered another land, different from this, +and very near where we were. The goodness of the land I do not wish +to dilate upon, because your Lordship will hear that from others." + +I quote this to show that Hernan Gallego was certain that he was near +New Guinea as he says. He could not have come to this conclusion +if he had not known that it was 2,000 and more leagues from Lima; +for in his position he could not have been deceived, because it was +discovered at a very short distance, as the Maluco Isles are from +it. Miguel Rojo de Brito, a native of Lisbon, went from Maluco to +New Guinea, and said that they were close to each other, as may be +seen in a chapter of his narrative which will be attached to this +discourse. Although I do not know the original intention of that +expedition, I suspect that they went in search of New Guinea, because +it is explained that Iñigo Ortiz de Retes was its discoverer, and not +Bernardo de la Torres. So that it may be looked upon as certain that +it was from a report of one of these, or both, that they were deriving +the information respecting the object they sought. For Gallego says +that the Cape of the Cross has no existence, and that New Guinea +is in not more than 4° S., implying that one said it was in 4°, +which seemed most likely to be correct, and the other in more. He +went in search, but did not find it; coming by chance on the island +of Jesus in 6° 45', and presently came to the reefs of Candelaria, +and the Island of Santa Isabel, and always discovering by a higher +latitude and decreasing longitude. The reason for not sighting New +Guinea was the same as prevented us from reaching the Solomon Islands, +namely, the island of Santa Cruz. My conclusion is that New Guinea, +the Solomon Islands, and the Islands of Santa Cruz are all near each +other, for a reason I shall give presently. + +Hernan Gallego says, further, that the Adelantado asked his opinion +respecting the return from those islands to Peru, across 1,700 leagues +of sea; that the port on this island of Cristobal was three leagues +by land from the most eastern point; that with a fresh breeze from +S.E. they navigated 20 leagues N.E. 1/4 E., and 15 leagues N.E. 1/4 +N., and N.E. 25, and 18 N.N.E., and when there the latitude was 7°, +and 30 leagues from the island of Jesus to E. + +He says that this island of Jesus was the first they discovered +in 6° 45' S., and that its distance from the city of Lima was 450 +leagues. If this is as he says, that from this island of Jesus to +the port whence he had come the course runs N.-S., it follows that +the same number of leagues intervening between the island of Jesus +and Lima, also intervene between San Cristobal and Lima, both being +almost on the same meridian. It is clearly to be seen that there is +carelessness here, or that there was an error in his calculation, +and there no doubt was one throughout in trying to determine the true +longitude. For in so short a distance as there is from one point to the +other, there cannot have been a mistake of 250 leagues. Whence I infer +that, in such a long route as that from Lima to the Solomon Islands, +the error would be much greater, the course being east and west. + +If his narrative is considered, other obscure and contradictory +points will be found. In one place he says that the natives told +him that those islands to the S.E. were extensive, and that he +saw them. Presently he says that a sailor climbed up a palm tree, +and could not see them. He says that at the Island of Guadalcanal he +could not see the end, and that the coast ran westward. Further on, +he says that it would take six months to go round it; and that the land +he did not see was reported to be very good, but that he certainly did +not see it. He reports that it was better to take a northern route in +returning to Peru, because it was difficult to find favourable winds +further south. Few pilots would give this reason, because the usual +winds outside the tropics, in the same latitude, are much the same +on the north as on the south side. And how much easier was it, being +(as he says) certain that there was no land to the S.E., to go to 11° +S., where he would have found the route to 30° or 40° on that side, +than to run down 11° and go up 30° or more on the other side, and +yet be further from Peru. + +It may seem strange that the Adelantado did not meet with the islands +that we have now discovered on his first voyage. I reply that, when +he began the voyage from Peru, he made a large curve W.S.W. to 18°, +and another to W.N.W. to 6°, more or less, and followed that parallel, +as I have been told by one who was on board. This was the reason that +he did not come upon the islands in question, which are in a higher +latitude, leaving them to the south and passing to the north of them. + +There is further proof that the islands of Santa Cruz are near +the Solomon Islands. The natives are the same colour, they dye +their hair in the same way, called their chief "Jauriqui," have +the same arms, pigs and fowls, and many other things in common. It +may really be concluded that all the people of Santa Cruz and the +Solomon Islands came from the archipelago of the Philippines. The +Santa Cruz people dye their teeth red and black, and use the buyo, as +in the Philippines. In the Island of Luzon there are black men, who +are said to be the aborigines of the land. They are called Pogotes, +and are retired on the island of Maragondon and other islands. For +the Moors and other Indians occupy their lands, drive them away, +and force those that remain into corners of the land where they now +are. It may well be that, by reason of the invaders, the persecuted +people have gone away to seek other settlements, until they came to +New Guinea as the nearest place, and thence to the Solomon Islands +and Santa Cruz. The half-breeds, and differences of colour among them, +proceed from intercourse between them. + +In conclusion, I may say that the Adelantado told me, as well as +certain pilots of that time, that Hernan Gallego, navigating on the +coast of Mexico, made the land one day, and that afterwards he sailed +over 700 leagues to reach the same place again. These, added to the +1,450 leagues which, he says, intervene between the Solomon Islands and +Lima, make more than the 2,000 leagues which I say intervene between +Lima and New Guinea, from which point the distance really ought to be +drawn. This being so, my suspicion is confirmed; and there may be seen, +as he says, the signs of the land of New Guinea, when he met with the +Barbudos, and he did not see the land when he said he did. For if he +had gone over the 1,450 leagues, as he said, it would take much more +than four months of navigation. There are a little over 700 leagues +from there to the coast of New Spain, navigating by the best-known +route, which is that by the north. So that there cannot have been so +great a mistake, if it was not from having intended to go by that +point, and have taken the said 700 leagues more to the west. This +appears to explain what has been said until the contrary is shown. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. + + Of various things that happened to the Chief Pilot, Pedro Fernandez + de Quiros. + + +We were some time in the city of Manilla, which is the capital of the +government of the Philippine Islands. It is built on a clear point +running out into the sea, and by the mouth of a river. It has a good +fortress, and other houses well worthy of special note, on which a long +chapter might be written. But I must be excused, referring the reader +to a special book on the city, the Philippine Islands, and the history +of their conquest, which was written by Dr Antonio de Morga. [71] + +While I was in the city there arrived the new Governor, Don Francisco +Tello, who had been Treasurer of the Board of Trade at Seville. There +were great festivals for his reception, got up both by the Spaniards +and natives. It was a special sight to behold three elephants which +were brought into the square, of which the largest, named Don Fernando, +had been sent as a present from the King of Cambodia to the late +Governor when he asked for help. On each one there was an Indian +driver, dexterous in the method of governing the elephant, both by +words and by the use of an iron hooked instrument. Placed in front +with his goad, the driver made him run, march, go down on his knees, +raise himself, and other things well worth seeing. This hook serves +the same use as a bridle for a horse. They were performing in front of +the Governor, who was sitting at a window, to whom they put their knees +on the ground three times, the feet stretched out behind, as they are +unable to double up. The performances of the elephants were numerous, +and, as a conclusion, they took Don Fernando apart, and his Indians +placed him facing the beams on which had been fastened the castle of +fire on the night before. Saying a word, and touching his forehead +with the goad, the elephant gave a blow, and took the beam on his two +tusks with great ease; and so he upset the whole: a thing worth seeing. + +A few days afterwards (according to what was said), when this elephant +was drinking at the river, there came to him a great and well-fed +crocodile, which had taken many natives in that river. He seized the +elephant by the trunk, and when the elephant felt it, he raised up +the crocodile just as easily as a fishing rod raises a light fish, +and let him fall on the ground without more ado. A crocodile, such +as this one, weighs as much as a fat bullock. + +They say also that this elephant had a boil on his gum, of which the +native driver cured him, but the pain made him throw about his trunk +so as to hurt his driver. When the elephant was to be healed, the +driver said to him: "I am very angry, Don Fernando, for in return for +the good I did you, you tried to kill me. What do you think the King, +my Lord and yours, who sent you here, and gave me for your companion +to look after you, if he knew of it, would say. See how you can no +longer eat, and are getting thin, and you will soon die without any +fault of mine. Open your mouth, if you please, and presently I will +cure you like a friend, forgetting the harm you did me." The elephant, +having taken two turns with his trunk round a shelf that was there, +opened his mouth, and was operated upon without moving, his groans +showing what pain he endured. And so he was cured. + +Of another elephant they told me that, to avenge himself on a native +who had charge of him, he crushed him when he passed through a doorway, +and killed him. The man's wife said to the elephant: "Don Pedro, you +have killed my husband. Who is now going to maintain me?" On which +the elephant went to the market place, and took a basket of rice which +it gave to her, and when it saw that she had eaten it all, it fetched +another, and then another. Things are said of these animals which seem +incredible, and the wonderful thing is that they understand everything, +in whatever language it is spoken, as I have myself seen. An elephant +was surrounded by Spanish soldiers, and one told him, without making +any sign, to take a plantain out of his pocket and eat it. The +elephant promptly put his trunk into the pocket, and when he found +that no plantain was there, he took up a little earth in his trunk, +and threw it in the face of the soldier who had deceived him. + +When the festivities were over, our Governess married a young cavalier +named Don Fernando de Castro, a cousin of the Governor Marinas, who, +as was just, took possession of the property of his wife as his own, +and he was able to secure much in the city. With this help the ship +was victualled and furnished with all that was necessary. On the +day of St. Lawrence, we made sail to undertake the voyage to New +Spain. But, having started so late, we had to go through incredible +hardships and troubles. At last we arrived in the port of Acapulco +on the 11th of December of the year 1597, where the ship was visited, +and all received free leave to land. There I, Captain Pedro Fernandez +de Quiros, took leave of the Governess, and of my other companions, +and embarked on board a passenger ship for Peru. + + + + + + + + NARRATIVE + OF + THE VOYAGE + OF THE + ADELANTADO + ALVARO DE MENDAÑA DE NEIRA + FOR THE + Discovery of the Islands of Solomon. [72] + WRITTEN BY + THE CHIEF PILOT, + PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS, + FOR + DR. ANTONIO DE MORGA, + LIEUTENANT-GENERAL OF THE PHILIPPINES. + + + + + + + SECOND VOYAGE + OF THE + ADELANTADO ALVARO DE MENDAÑA, + BY + HIS CHIEF PILOT, PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS. + + +On Friday, the 9th of April, of the year 1595, the Commander-in-Chief, +Alvaro de Mendaña, set sail with his fleet to go and subject and people +the western islands of the South Sea, from the port of the Callao +of Lima, which is in 12 1/2° S. latitude; passing by the valleys +of Santa, Truxillo and Saña, and collecting men and provisions, +he went to Paita, where he took in water, and made a list of four +hundred persons, more or less, with his four vessels, two large +and two small. He left this port (which is 5° higher than the said +port), steering W.S.W., making for the islands of his discovery: he +took as Master of the Camp Pedro Merino Manrique, and as Admiral his +brother-in-law, Lope de la Vega, and as Chief Pilot, Pedro Fernandez +de Quiros; and he sailed on this course to the altitude of 9 1/2°, +from which point he sailed W. and to the point S.W. to 14°, where +he changed his course to W. and the point N.W.; and having reached, +by this course, fully 10° of latitude, on Friday, 21st of July, we +sighted an island, to which the General gave the name of Magdalena, +and from a port in it there came forth about seventy canoes, in +each of which came three men, in some more in others less. Others +came swimming, and others on logs: they were more than four hundred +natives, white, and of very agreeable appearance, tall and strong, +large limbed, and so well made that they had greatly the advantage +over us; with handsome teeth, eyes and mouth, hands and feet, and most +beautiful flowing hair, and many of them very fair. Amongst them were +most beautiful youths; they were entirely naked, without covering +on any part, and all had their bodies, legs, and arms, and hands, +and some of them their faces, marked after the manner of the Bisayas +here: and indeed, for savage people, naked and of so little reason, +at sight of them there was much cause to praise God who created +them. Let this not be taken for exaggeration, for so it is. These +people called us to go to their port, and we called to them from our +flag-ship, and they went on board of her, a matter of forty of them; +and we appeared to be men of less than the usual stature by the side of +them; and amongst them there came one who was understood to be a palm +taller than the tallest man of our fleet, although we had in the fleet +men of more than regulation height. The General gave there to some of +them shirts and other things, which they received with much pleasure, +and danced after their fashion, and called to the others. The General +was put out of temper at the liberties they took, because they were +great thieves; and he ordered a cannon to be fired to frighten them; +when they heard it they took to swimming, and all seized their arms, +and sounding a conch, they threw a few stones, and threatened with +their lances, for they had no other arms. From the ship they fired +at them with arquebuses, and killed five or six, and they remained +there. As our fleet sailed on we discovered three other islands. This +island may be 6 leagues round; we passed by it on the S. side; this +is high, precipitous towards the sea, with rocky ravines, in which +the natives dwell. There seemed to be many inhabitants in it, for we +saw them on the rocks and beach; so we went on making for the other +three islands. The first, to which was given the name of San Pedro, +will be 10 leagues from Magdalena, and runs with it northward and +to the point N.W.: it will have 3 leagues circuit. It is an island +beautiful to look at, with much wood and fair fields: we did not know +whether it was inhabited, for we did not come close to it. To the +S.E. of it, about 5 leagues off, is another, which the General named +Dominica; it is very fair to look at, and seemed thickly inhabited: +it may have about 15 leagues circumference; and to the S. of this, +and a matter of little more than a league off, is another island, +which may be 8 leagues round, which received the name of Santa +Christina; and our fleet passed through the channel between this +and the other island. For all that we saw of these islands is clear +sailing; and on the W. side of Sta. Christina a good port was found, +in which the fleet anchored. These natives did not come before me +like the others, but some very beautiful women were seen. I did not +see them, but persons who had an opinion in the matter affirmed to +me that there were as beautiful women as in Lima, but white, and not +so tall; and in Lima there are some very pretty. What was seen in +the way of victuals in that port was pigs and hens, sweet canes, +very good plantains, cocos, a fruit which grows on high trees; +each is as large as a large fir cone; it is very good to eat; much +of it was eaten--green, roasted and boiled, and when ripened it is +indeed so sweet and good a fruit to my way of thinking, that I know +no other which has the advantage of it; there is hardly anything +in it to throw away, unless a little husk. There was another fruit, +like chestnuts in savour, but much larger than six chestnuts together: +a good deal of that was eaten, roast and boiled; and some nuts with +a very hard shell, which were very oily, and many of them were eaten; +some suspect that they brought on looseness. We also saw pumpkins of +Castille sown in the ground. There is a pretty waterfall close to the +beach of very good water; it comes out of a rock, at the height of +two men; its volume may be of the thickness of four or five fingers; +and then, close to it, a stream of water, and the vessels supplied +themselves from it. The natives went off to the mountains and rocks, +in which they fortified themselves, and tried to do mischief by rolling +stones and hurling them; but they never wounded any one, for the Master +of the Camp stopped their advance by placing outposts. The natives +of this island, on seeing a negro of ours, made signs towards the S., +to say that in that direction there were men like him, and that they +went there to fight, and that the others had arrows, and that these +went in large canoes, which they possess. As there was no interpreter, +nor much curiosity to learn more, the matter remained thus; but in my +opinion, this is not possible for natives so isolated, unless there is +a chain (of islands), because their boats and customs in other matters +do not show that these people had come there from any great distance. + +This port is in 9 1/2° S. latitude. The Commander-in-Chief ordered +three crosses to be set up in it, and on Saturday, 5th of August, to +weigh anchor and set sail, making for the W., to the S.W., or N.W., +a matter of 400 leagues. Sunday, the 20th of August, we saw four low +islands, with sandy beaches, full of very many palms and woods, and on +the S.E. side, towards the N., a great sand-bank. All four may have a +circuit of 12 leagues. We did not know whether they were inhabited, +because we did not go close to them. This year all seemed timid: +I say this with rage. They are in 10 3/4° latitude, and were named +after St. Bernard, having been discovered on his day. Henceforward we +began to meet with S.E. winds, which appear to predominate here. With +these we continued sailing to the above-mentioned points, never rising +above 11 or going below 10 leagues, until Tuesday, 29th of August, +when we discovered a round islet, which might be a league round, all +surrounded by reefs. We tried to land on it, and could not find where +to do so, in order to get wood and water for the Admiral's ship, of +which it had run very short; it was given the name of Solitary Island; +it is in 10 2/3°, and will be 1,535 leagues from Lima. From this place +we went on navigating, with the above-mentioned orders, and a variety +of opinions were given: some saying that we did not know where we were +going, and other things which did not fail to cause grief. It was God's +pleasure, that on the eve of Our Lady in September, at midnight, we +saw an island, which might have a circuit of from 90 to 100 leagues, +and it lies about E.S.E. and W.N.W., and will be 1,800 leagues from +Lima. The whole of it was very full of woods, reaching to the highest +ridges, and where it was not cleared for the natives to sow, in all +the rest not a span of earth was to be seen. The ships came to anchor +in the northern part of the island in 10° latitude. To the N. of this +port, about 7 leagues off, is a volcano, with a very well-shaped hill, +from the top of which and from other parts issued much fire. The +volcano is lofty, and may have a circumference of 3 leagues; it is +precipitous on the side of the sea, and all bare, and without any +part where a landing can be effected; it rumbles within frequently +and loudly like thunder. To the N.E. of this volcano there are some +small islets, which are inhabited, and a great quantity of shoals; +there is a distance of 7 or 8 leagues to these islets, and the shoals +run to the N.W.; and the person who went to see said that they were +numerous. Around the great island there were some small islands: all +of them, and the great one (when it was circumnavigated), were found +to be inhabited; and within sight of this great island, to the S.E. of +it, there was seen another island of no great size: this must be the +link with others. After putting into port in the great island of Santa +Cruz, for this was the name given it, the Commander-in-Chief ordered +Captain Don Lorenzo, brother of his wife, to go with the frigate to +seek the Admiral's ship, which disappeared on the night in which we +saw the island, respecting which I make no favourable conjecture; +it was sought for this and two other times, and was not found, but +only the shoals which I have mentioned. What was seen in the way of +victuals in this port consisted of pigs, hens, plaintains, sweet canes, +one, two, or three kinds of roots like sweet potatoes, which they +eat roast and boiled, and make biscuit with it, buyos, two kinds of +good almonds, and two kinds of pine nuts, wood-pigeons, doves, ducks, +grey and white herons, swallows, pot-herbs, pumpkins of Castille, +the fruit which I mentioned in the first islands, and chestnuts and +nuts. There is a very strongly-scented sweet basil, and red flowers, +which at this port they keep in the gardens, and two other species of +another sort, also red. There is another fruit on high trees, like +pippins for their good smell and savour. There is a great quantity +of ginger, which grows there without its being cultivated, and much +yerba chiquilite, with which they make indigo. There are agave trees, +and a great deal of sagia, and many cocoa nuts. Marble was seen, and +pearl shells, and large snail shells, like those which are brought +here from China. There is a very copious spring, and five or six +other rivers, though not very large. The settlement was established +close to this spring. The natives attempted to defend themselves; +and as the arquebus tells at a distance, seeing the evil effects, +they did not defend themselves much, but, on the contrary, gave some +of what they possessed. In this matter of going for provisions there +were a few things happened, which were not very good treatment of the +natives, for they killed the native who was our best friend, and the +lord of that island; his name was Malope; and two or three others, +who were also friendly. Of the whole island no more was seen than a +matter of 3 leagues around the camp. The people of this island are +black: they have small canoes made of one tree, in which they go about +their villages, and other very large canoes with which they go out to +sea. On Sunday, the 8th of October, the Commander-in-Chief ordered the +Master of the Camp to be killed by stabbing, and they killed Tomas de +Ampuero in the same manner, and they cut off the head of the Ensign, +Juan de Buitrago, and he wished to put to death two other friends of +the Master of the Camp; but he left them alone, because we entreated +him to do so. The cause of this was public, because they wished +to go away from the country, and abandon it, and there must have +been other reasons, but I am unacquainted with them. What I saw was +much dissoluteness and shamelessness, and more than enough improper +conduct. On the 18th of October the Commander-in-Chief died: on the +17th there had been a total eclipse of the moon. On the 2nd of November +his brother-in-law, Don Lorenzo, who had succeeded as Captain-General, +died; and, seven or eight days before, the priest, Antonio de Serpa; +and on the 8th November the Vicar, Juan de Espinosa. There was great +sickness amongst our people, and as there was little care for want of +an apothecary and doctor, many of them died; and they begged the lady +Governor, Doña Ysabel Barreto, to take them out of the country. One +and all agreed to embark; and, trusting ourselves to the mercy +of God, we left this port on Saturday the 18th of the said month, +in a westerly direction to the S.W. point, making for the island of +St. Christopher; or, more exactly, in search of it, to see if it or +the Admiral's ship could be fallen in with, for so the lady Governor +commanded. We sailed two days and saw nothing; and at the request of +all the people, who cried out that we were taking them to destruction, +she ordered me to shape the course from this town to Manilla, from a +port in 10 1/2°, from which I came steering to N.W. to avoid meeting +islands on the way, for we were ill-prepared to go amongst them: +with the crews so sick that there died whilst we were sailing some +fifty persons, and there in the island forty persons, a little more +or less. We made our course, short of provisions, navigating 5° +S. and as many in N. latitude. We met many impediments and calms, +and in fully 6° N. latitude saw an island, which seemed to have a +circumference of 25 leagues, thickly wooded, and inhabited by very +many people, like those of the Ladrones, for we saw them in canoes +which came out to us. From the S.E. to the N. and then to S.W. it is +surrounded by large reefs. On its western side, about 4 leagues off, +there are some low islets; we found no place to anchor, though we +tried, for the galeot and frigate which sailed with our ship had +disappeared some days back. From this place we came by the said +course to latitude 13 3/4°, and in two days that we sailed W. in +this latitude we sighted Serpana and Guan in the Ladrones, and we +passed between the two and did not anchor, from not having ropes to +lower and recover the boat. This day was the 3rd of January of 1596, +and on the 14th of the said month we saw the cape of Espiritu Santo, +and on the 15th anchored in the bay of Cobos. We arrived there in +such a state that only the goodness of God could bring us thither, +for human strength and resources were not enough to reach to a tenth +of the way. There we arrived so dismantled, and the men so thin and +worn out, that it was the most pitiable sight that could be seen, +with only nine or ten pitchers of water. In this bay of Cobos the ship +and crew were set to rights as much as was possible, and on Tuesday, +the 2nd of February, we left that port and bay, and on the 10th of +the same month we anchored in this port of Cabite. + +Besides the desire which I have to serve your Honour, that which moves +me to leave this brief narrative with your Honour is, that an account +may remain (if perchance God should dispose of my life, or anything +else should arise, or I or she that I take with me should be missing), +and that it may give light, which may be a business of great service to +God and to the King our sovereign. May your Honour be pleased to accept +the goodwill to serve you which I retain; and if God make me return +to this port there will be an opportunity to set it forth better; +and at the same time will your Honour forgive my being so short, for +time is in fault for being so with me. I beg you to keep it secret, +for man does not know what time brings; for looking at it rightly, +it is fit that the first islands should remain concealed until His +Majesty be informed, and order whatever may be most for his service: +for as they are placed, taking a middle position between Peru, New +Spain, and this country, the English, on knowing it, might settle +in them, and do much mischief in this sea. And consider me as the +faithful servant of your Honour, whom may God preserve many years, +with much satisfaction and increase of dignity, etc. + + + +Your servant, + +Pedro Fernandez de Quiros. + +To the Dr. Antonio de Morga, Lieutenant-General of His Majesty in +the Philippines. + + + + + + + + NARRATIVE + OF + THE VOYAGE + OF + Pedro Fernandez de Quiros + IN 1606, + FOR THE + Discovery of the Austrial Regions. + + + + + + +VOYAGE OF PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE QUIROS. + +CHAPTER I. + + Of various things that happened to the Chief Pilot, Pedro + Fernandez de Quiros; until he arrived at the court of the + King of Spain. + + +Having sailed along the whole coast of New Spain, I arrived at the +port of Payta on the 3rd of May, 1598. Thence I wrote a letter to +the Viceroy, Don Luis de Velasco, and travelled by land to Lima, +where I arrived on the 5th of June, and was very well received by +the said Viceroy. He desired to be specially informed respecting all +the particulars of our voyage and discoveries, and I gave him the +best account in my power. I also offered that, if he would give me +a vessel of 70 tons and 40 sailors, I would return to discover those +lands and many others which I suspect to exist, and even felt certain +that I should find in those seas. + +But in the end he came to the conclusion that he could not give me the +necessary means without first consulting and receiving orders from His +Majesty. He thought it would be the best plan that I should proceed +in person to the court of Spain, as the business was so serious and +important, and as no one could undertake it so well as myself, who +possessed such complete information. On his part, the Viceroy would +help me by giving me letters of introduction to the King and to his +councillors. Having received them, I embarked on board the Capitana +at the port of Callao, on the 17th of April, 1598, under General Don +Beltran de Castro y de la Cueva, arriving at Panama after a voyage +of twenty-two days. Thence I went by land to Puerto Bello, where +I embarked in a frigate, and in seven days arrived at Cartagena. I +found this place in great confusion, because a fleet of twenty large +ships had appeared before it, under the command of the English Earl +of Morlant (Cumberland), who had previously taken the city of Puerto +Rico. But most of this fear disappeared on the arrival of Don Luis +Fajardo, knight of the order of Calatrava, and General of the fleet +for guarding the Indies and the route to them. + +From Cartagena I wrote to the Viceroy of Peru, in case I should die +on the voyage, giving him a more detailed account of the enterprise +I wished to undertake, and of what would be necessary when it should +be taken in hand. Don Luis de Fajardo, having returned from Puerto +Bello with the silver, I embarked on board his galleon, and we left +Cartagena on the 1st of November, 1598. After twenty-seven days we +anchored at Havanna, whence we sailed on the 16th of January in the +following year, convoying thirty ships. Having made a good start, we +encountered such a gale in 29° N. that we were in great danger of being +lost. Many ships disappeared, and others, including ourselves, were +obliged to return to Cartagena on Tuesday the 3rd of March. Thence I +wrote to His Majesty and to the Viceroy of Peru; but we had to winter +at that port all that year until, having sent the news to His Majesty +and two galleons having come for the silver, the two Generals embarked +fifteen millions on board twenty vessels. They made sail on the 4th +of January and, after encountering several tempests, they sighted +Cape St. Vincent, where they captured two English ships. On the 25th +of February, 1600, with salutes of artillery, and amidst the music +of instruments, we anchored at San Lucar. + +There I embarked for Seville, where I entered the city so well fitted +for giving an account of myself, as may be understood from the labours +I had passed through, and the hardships I had suffered. Finding myself +free from them, and considering that the year was the holy one, +during which the great jubilee is celebrated at Rome, I determined +to go to Rome, and pass the summer in a visit to the holy city. With +this object I sold the little I possessed, bought the dress of a +pilgrim, and only with the help of a pilgrim's staff I went on foot +to Cartagena of the east, encountering several adventures. When the +galleys of Italy arrived, I embarked in one of them, which coasted +along by Valencia and Barcelona. On the 5th of August we crossed the +bay of Narbonne; and soon afterwards landed at the port of Baya, +which is in the territory of Genoa. Thence, dressed as a pilgrim, +and accompanied by two others and a friar, we passed through all the +finest cities of Italy, where there was much to see and to notice. + +Finally, having reached the great city of Rome, I had the good fortune +to be well received and listened to by the Lord Duke of Sesa, [73] who +at that time held the office of Ambassador from Spain at that court. To +him I gave an account of the lands that had been discovered, and of +my desire to return to them; and submitted that it would be right for +His Holiness to favour the enterprise. I addressed myself chiefly to +the importance of saving an infinity of souls, such as exist in that +new world. It seemed good to His Excellency, and he called together +a meeting in his house of the best pilots and mathematicians to be +found in Rome. Having made a detailed examination of my papers and +charts in his presence, they came to the conclusion that all I had +said was probable, and worthy to be put into execution. + +The Lord Duke then arranged for me an interview with His Holiness +Clement VIII, which took place on the 28th of August, I having +first dined at the table of the poor. His Holiness heard me very +attentively, saw all the papers I showed him, and approved of my +zeal and veracity. He encouraged me to persevere in my laudable +intentions, and conceded many graces and indulgences for the time +when I should begin the voyage. He gave me letters to the Majesty of +the King our Lord, to whom also the Lord Duke of Sesa wrote letters +of recommendation; and he also gave me letters to other princes and +councillors of the court of Spain, with the means of proceeding +thither. Having gained the holy jubilee, and beheld many things +which were worthy of note, including the canonization of the glorious +St. Raymond, I was still detained in Rome much longer than I expected, +for the completion of the letters and indulgences already mentioned, +and that His Holiness might show me favour by giving me some rosaries +that had been blessed, and a piece of the wood of the Cross. About +this there was great difficulty. + +At length, these and others having been overcome, the day arrived for +my departure from Rome, which was the afternoon of Holy Wednesday +of the year 1602. Having visited the holy dwelling of Our Lady of +Loreto and passed through the cities of Arimino, [74] Forli, Ferrara, +and Lodi, in which I found much to see and take note of, and where I +met with various and notable adventures, I entered the city of Milan, +which contains so many grand and admirable buildings, that to treat +of them briefly would be to do them injustice. I passed by Pavia +and Tortona, and went thence to sleep at the town of San Estevan, +the first place in the territory of Genoa. Then I entered Genoa at so +fortunate a time that on the second day I was able to embark on board +one of the six galleys of Prince Doria, who was sent with his nephew +to congratulate His Majesty on the birth of a princess. We arrived +at Barcelona, where I went to Montserrat, and, passing through other +cities of Spain, I entered Madrid on the octave of Corpus Christi +of the same year, 1602. The court not being there, having moved to +Valladolid, I went to the famous convent of the Escurial, where I had +notice that His Majesty then was, with whom I might speak, and kiss +his royal hands, and give him my memorial respecting my pretensions, +on Monday, the 17th of June of the said year. + + + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + Of what happened to the Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros at + the court of Spain; negotiating for leave from His Majesty to + discover and settle the southern parts; how, and in what form, + the business was negotiated; and his voyage to Peru. + + +Having spoken to His Majesty, and placed my first memorial in his +hands, in which I declared my plan and its importance, he heard me +with his accustomed clemency and benignity, and replied that he would +order the matter to be seen to. Presently I went to speak with Don Juan +Idiaquez, with the Father Confessor, with Don Pedro Franqueza, and with +other Members of the Council of State, and important persons about +the court, who might be able to help in despatching my business. To +these I gave the letters I brought from the Viceroy of Peru and the +Ambassador at Rome; and I showed to them the letters of His Holiness, +and the other papers and charts relating to my discovery. + +Some received me well, holding the affair to be serious and worthy of +support. Others thought little of it or of me, thinking that I promised +more than I could perform, and that for the performance of so great a +deed, a person of more parts and valour was needed. Some answered me +that sufficient lands had been discovered for His Majesty, and that +what signified was to people and settle them, rather than go in search +of those I said were new, which were so distant that they would be +difficult and costly to maintain, after they had been conquered and +settled. There were not wanting those who threw doubts on the utility +of such conquests. So that I was forced to be more importunate to +His Majesty, submitting new memorials every day, representing the +arguments in favour of the enterprise, and endeavouring to satisfy +those who opposed me. During this time I had much trouble at court, +and I made a long discourse on the life passed by those who had +business to prosecute there. I had different replies, some sharp, +and others gentle, like those from Don Pedro Franqueza and others of +the Council of State. + +At last, on the last day of Easter, in the year 1603, I was sent for +by Don Pedro Franqueza, who told me that my business was despatched; +and he took me to the Chief Secretary, named Matienzo, and said that, +as he valued his regard, he was not to delay me on any point. So on +Saturday, the 5th of April, they delivered to me some orders of His +Majesty which contained my despatch, and which had been passed by +the Council of State. Their tenor is as follows:-- + + + Copy of the Order of His Majesty touching the Principal Despatch. + + To Don Luis de Velasco or the Count of Monterey, my relation, my + Viceroy and Captain General in my kingdoms and provinces of Peru, + or such other person as may be governing in my name, at the time + of the delivery of this order. + + There has come here from Rome the Captain Pedro Fernandez de + Quiros, a Portuguese; and the Duke of Sesa and of Baena, of my + Council of State and my Ambassador at that Court, wrote to me that + in the holy year he had news from Friar Diego de Soria, Prior at + Manilla of the Order of San Domingo, that there would be found at + that court the said Captain Quiros, who was a great pilot with + much experience of the South Sea and of the great gulf between + the coasts of New Spain and Peru and Japan and the Philippine + Islands, having been Chief Pilot of the second discovery made by + the Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña. The said Father represented that + it would be much for the service of God and for mine to introduce + him, that he might again return to discover these unknown parts + and islands. So the Duke sent for him to his house to ask him + concerning curious things relating to his art; and entertained + him there for near seventeen months, during which time he opened + his mind, and showed many papers he possessed, and drew up others + which he communicated to Father Clavio and other mathematicians + and distinguished geographers. All were persuaded, by the proofs + and reasonings he submitted to them, that there could not fail + to be either a continental land or a number of islands from the + Strait of Magellan to New Guinea and Java and the other islands + of that great archipelago. And they concluded that, enjoying the + best part of the torrid and temperate zones, where it has been + seen, as well in the ancient provinces of the world as in the + new discoveries, that much and very good and rich land exists + which has a temperate and therefore a habitable climate. They + are, therefore, of opinion that it is very desirable to lose + no time in discovering that southern region, unknown until now, + which will be a great service to God. + + Besides the interest and advantages that this discovery promises, + it will be easier to explore the southern region than it was to + find the Western Indies. When the said Captain returned from that + long navigation, including detentions in various parts, lasting for + two years, he offered to Don Luis de Velasco, my Viceroy of Peru + and your predecessor, to return in the same ship in which he had + come, to that discovery, if it should prove necessary, as far as + New Guinea and the Moluccas, and to return to Peru by way of the + Philippines, with a full account of all he had discovered. But + though it seemed well to the Viceroy he did not act, but gave + the Captain letters to me and to His Holiness, who has heard and + spoken with him. His Holiness was pleased with his proposals, + insomuch that he has conceded many spiritual gifts for those parts + (if I order the voyage to be undertaken), for the reasonings of the + said Captain satisfied him. The Duke has given me a good account + of his parts, good judgment, experience in his profession; and has + assured me that he is a worker, quiet, disinterested, of decent + life, zealous for the service of God and for my service. As regards + the theory (according to what the mathematicians at Rome affirm) + they say that there are few pilots who know as much as he does; + that he is expert in making globes, and charts for navigating; + that he well understands the use of instruments necessary for + navigation, and that he showed them two of his own invention, + one by which to know, in navigating, the difference made by the + needle between the N.E. and N.W. points, and the other for taking + an altitude with more ease and accuracy. Both were commended + by the Fathers Clavio and Villalpando of the Company of Jesus, + and by the Doctors Toribio Perez and Masa, who have lectured + publicly in mathematics at Salamanca, as well as by distinguished + geographers. Captain Quiros had made an offer to the Duke that, + I being served by it, he would go from Spain by the Strait of + Magellan and return by the Eastern Indies, having gone round + the world, using, by sea and land, the instruments he had made, + and that he would make quite clear the true differences made by + the needle in variation: a matter which up to the present time + is very obscure, and respecting which there are many different + opinions. The discovery of the truth will be of great advantage + to navigation, in giving a knowledge of the true latitude and + longitude of places, ports, and capes discovered, or which may + be discovered in various voyages. + + In conformity with what has been reported, the said Captain Quiros + has related to me all that he has told to others respecting the + navigations and discoveries; proving his statements by writings + and maps of the islands he discovered, when he served as Chief + Pilot under the said Adelantado, Alvaro de Mendaña, describing + the diversity of people shown by their different colours, yet + appearing to be docile, and the fertility of the islands which + promised wealth. He prayed that, taking into consideration his + zeal, and that his ends and objects being the service of God and + my service, and the conversion of these people to our holy faith, + and the good that might accrue from the discoveries (without + reference to his interests), and besides all this the way in which + the navigation of these wide seas would be facilitated through the + great practice and experience he has of them, I would be served by + ordering that a ship, not very large, should be provided with crew, + provisions, munitions, and other things necessary for the said + navigation and enterprise; and that matters should be arranged + in a manner that would enable him to accomplish what he wishes + to undertake. Having considered his proposal, with the attention + that so serious a matter requires, for the increase of the faith + and the benefit of the souls of those remote people, and placing + the service of God before all things, as is reasonable, after + consulting my Council of State, I have resolved:-- + + That the said Captain Quiros shall presently depart to make this + discovery, in the first fleet for Peru; and I ordain and command + that on his arrival you are to give him two very good ships with + which he will be satisfied, to fit them out and provide them with + the number of people necessary, well victualled, and supplied + with munitions and arms requisite for so long a voyage. The ships + are also to be supplied with things for bartering with natives, + if they should reach places where this can be done, in conformity + with the general orders which you and your predecessors have for + similar discoveries, and with all that seems most conducive to my + service. The cost of the preparations, of the people who will be + embarked, of the provisions, munitions, clothing, and other things + necessary for the voyage, is to be defrayed from my royal revenues, + and from those which are most readily available. You are to give + orders that some bare-foot friars, of the Order of St. Francis, + exemplary and of good life, are taken; and you are to see that the + people who are embarked in the said ships are good and useful, + ordering them to obey and respect the said Captain during the + voyage out and home, as their leader and superior, whom I name + for that position from this time, obeying him in all things. + + Take notice that it is my will that the said Captain Quiros is + presently to make this voyage and discovery without delay; and + so I charge and order you very positively to comply promptly + with my orders, without interposing doubts or difficulties, + notwithstanding that this order does not come through my Council + of the Indies. The business being peculiar, I have arranged and I + shall be served by its coming through the Council of State, and in + this I must receive precise service from you. By the first ship you + are to report the arrival of the said Captain Quiros in those my + kingdoms, and how you have furnished him with the said two ships, + and provided him with all that is necessary. For I shall look out, + with much anxiety, for the news of compliance with my orders. And + to such of my officials or accountants as have the duty of keeping + the accounts respecting what is contained in my royal letter, + I order and command that they receive and pass the expenditure + which you sanction out of my royal revenues, with your orders + or letters of payment without seeking any other authority; for I + approve it, from this time as well and properly spent and paid, and + this shall be their authority. In Valladolid, 31st of March, 1603. + + + +Copies of two other Royal Orders. + + + To Don Luis de Velasco, or the Count of Monterey, my cousin, + my Viceroy and Captain-General in my kingdoms and provinces + of Peru, or whomsoever shall be governing the said kingdoms in + my name at the time that this Order is presented. Although in + another separate letter I have caused to be written to you very + specially the reasons which have moved me to resolve to send the + Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, a Portuguese by nation, who + will deliver this, to proceed with two ships well supplied with + men, victuals, munitions, and artillery, to discover the southern + islands and lands as far as New Guinea and Java Major, in this I + desire to repeat those orders, as I do very particularly, that, + without hindrance by difficulties or other causes, you are to + further my service by sending the said Captain Quiros, with as + much despatch as possible, with the said two ships, so that my + orders may be complied with quickly; and I trust to you that you + will do your part in providing the two ships, in obedience to my + commands. For besides that it is furthering my service, I take a + particular inclination and pleasure in the discovery that is to be + undertaken, for the increase, which is to be hoped from it, of our + holy faith among those remote people, for the glory of God and the + public benefit, which is the object I have before me. You are to + advise me, by the first opportunity, of what steps you have taken, + for I shall await the news with the desire for it that you should + understand. From Valladolid, the 31st of March, 1603. + + + The King. + + To whomsoever my Viceroys, Governors, Lieutenant-Governors, + Captains-General, Adelantados, and Admirals of my armies and + fleets by land and sea in the eastern and western Indies, the + Philippine and other islands, and coast of Africa, and to all + my Ministers of Justice and War, of whatsoever title, quality, + nation or condition they may be, to whom this my royal order + may be presented. Forasmuch as I have ordered the Captain Pedro + Fernandez de Quiros, a Portuguese by nation, to proceed to the + city of Lima in Peru, and with two ships, well supplied with men, + victuals, and munitions of war, to proceed thence to discover + New Guinea, Java Major, and other southern lands and islands, + returning by that part of the world to these my kingdoms of Spain, + to deliver and account to me of what he had seen and discovered, + and of the observations he will have made by land and sea during + his navigation, in conformity with the orders he has received. I + hereby order and command you, that in whatever part of the said my + kingdoms and states the said Captain, or the officers and sailors + who go with him, may arrive with the said two ships or any one + of them, or with any other vessel, you shall receive, protect, + and succour the said Captain and his people in my ports and + lands, and provide them with whatever is necessary to complete + the said voyage without delay; and you are to assist them to + obtain whatever they may require, and he may ask for, as he is + my servant and Captain, going expressly to carry out my orders; + and you are not to interpose any impediments or difficulties, + but rather you are to extend to him favour and help, if you desire + or seek my approval. For this proceeds from my will, and is very + conformable to my royal service. At Valladolid, March 31st, 1603. + + +These orders were accompanied by many letters, which were given to +me at court by some great lords, for the Viceroy of Peru. Having +communicated the letters of His Holiness to the Royal Council of the +Indies, the Count of Lemos, who was President of that Council, and the +other members of it, desired that I should explain to them my objects +and intentions, and they ordered that I should bring them a map. I +went to give this account in a garden of the court, where the other +members assembled to hear me. Having listened to what I told them, +they were satisfied, and rather envious that my despatch should have +been arranged by the Council of State. But I was not yet contented, +on seeing that, in the orders that had been prepared, a special +clause had not been inserted that, in the event of my failure or +death, I might nominate another person to carry on and complete the +discovery. So I represented that an order should be given to me, with +this provision; and, after some trouble, I succeeded. The additional +order is as follows:-- + + + The King. + + To Don Luis de Velasco or the Count of Monterey, my cousin, my + Viceroy and Captain-General in my kingdoms and provinces of Peru, + or whomsoever may be governing in my name at the time that this + order is presented. The Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros who, + by my order, proceeds to make discoveries in the unknown parts + of the south and others (as is contained in more detail in the + despatches which I have ordered to be sent to you), has besought + me, in order to make more sure of the success of the enterprise + that, if he should fail through sickness, accident, or death, + that as great a success as is expected from the said discovery + for the service of God and of our Holy Faith may not be lost, + I shall be served by ordering that, in the said event, you shall + nominate a person equally able and sufficient for the duty, in + order that with the said despatches and papers and writings that + he may have left, concerning what he had seen and what he hoped + to discover, such a person may continue the said discovery. And + as what he asks is a testimony of his zeal in the service of God, + in my service, and in that of Christianity, I order and specially + charge you that if our Lord should be served by the failure of + the said Captain Quiros, or if he should not be able to go on the + said voyage, with the papers and memorial that he will leave to + explain and throw light on his intentions, you shall nominate the + most suitable person you can find to take his place and carry out + this great undertaking. And to him who may be selected you are to + give all the assistance and help he needs, in the form indicated + in the previous orders; and this is my will, and is conformable + to my service. At Aranjuez, May 9th, 1603. + + +With this I set out on the road to Seville, and found the fleet for +New Spain ready to sail. I at once applied to the House of Commerce +for my despatch; and, though there were some difficulties to overcome, +in the night of the eve of St. John I went on board a brigantine, +and proceeded down the river of Seville. But when I reached the bay +of Cadiz I found that the fleet had already sailed, consisting of +thirty ships, and in the fleet was the Marquis of Montes Claros, +going out as Viceroy of New Spain. I had to do what I could, and in +great haste. So I took a passage in a frigate, commanded by Captain +Diego Ramirez, going to Tierra-firme under convoy of the fleet. After a +good voyage we sighted the island of Marigalanta on the 1st of August; +and on the next day, which was that of a Franciscan festival called +"Porciuncula," we came into the port of Guadaloupe, when the Viceroy +and Vice-queen landed to hear Mass. At dinner-time the persons of most +consequence went on board again; but a great many remained on shore, +wandering about or washing clothes. They were suddenly attacked by +the natives of that island, who fell upon them with great shouting +and flights of arrows. It seemed certain that they would be captured, +killed, or wounded, and, in consequence, upwards of sixty persons +were drowned, seven of whom were Dominican friars. This caused great +sorrow and perturbation throughout the fleet, and was a prognostication +of what was afterwards to happen. For that night there rose a wind +from the S.S.W., which was nearly abeam; and as the ships were near +the shore and close to each other, they were all in great danger, +especially the Capitana, for another ship, named the Pandorga, came +into collision with her, and both were in danger of being lost. It was +necessary for the Viceroy and the Vice-queen, almost naked, to pass +to another ship. They left behind much property that was coming with +them; and the ships were ordered to be burnt, that they might not fall +into the hands of enemies. The other ships put to sea as well as they +were able, and proceeded on their voyage, and our frigate on hers, +making for the island called Curaçoa. The frigate's voyage was so +unlucky that, on the vespers of St. Lawrence, she struck and went to +pieces on some rocks, which we afterwards learned were those off the +island called "Aves." We found ourselves in great trouble, but by the +mercy of God most of the people were saved, being taken in the boat +to those rocks. With the same boat what was possible of the ship's +gear was got on land, with which we set to work, until the diligent +Captain ordered the boat to be sawn in two, and a small vessel to be +built of the materials, which was launched in the end of August. He +said that he was determined to send her with all the passengers, and +me as their leader, to the port of Guayra, of the city of Caraccas, +to bring back provisions for those who remained, with some vessel in +which the whole party could escape from that dangerous prison into +which God had put them. I do not know whether it was worse for those +who remained behind, or for those who went in the vessel. But by the +favour of God, having passed through great hardships, I arrived at +Caraccas, and gave an account of what had happened to the Governor, +who supplied me with what was necessary, and I returned with the +refreshments to my unhappy companions who, with penitence and prayers, +besought God for my return. They had been on an allowance of only two +ounces of bread for ten days. Having brought the relief and almost +made another frigate, I said to the Captain that it was only fair +that I should continue my voyage. So I took my leave, and embarked, +with certain persons returning to Caraccas, where I remained for eight +months, waiting for a passage. I noted and wrote in much detail the +things I observed concerning that island. [75] By great good luck I +found there three children of a brother of mine, of whom I had not +heard for many years. It appeared that he had married there and died, +leaving a widow and these three children. It seemed to me right that I +should take them out of such a bad country, and bring them with me. I +got leave from the grandfather, for the widow was also dead, and I +took the two boys, [76] leaving the little girl with her grandfather. + +At last the time for my long desired departure arrived, and I embarked +for Cartagena in a frigate. There I presented to the Governor the order +of His Majesty, in which all his officers are instructed to help me; +but he made little account either of the order or of assisting me. As +soon as I could I again embarked for Puerto Bello, and arrived at +Panama so poor that for the space of eight days I had not one rial. I +arrived, owing for the hire of the mules and many other things. So I +determined to apply to the Audience of that city to present me with +200 dols. from the treasury, or I should have to seek it at a loss +from merchants, to be repaid at Lima. But the judges made as little +of me as of the royal orders which I presented, saying that that was +no place for advances from the public funds. So I had to retire to +my poor lodging, where I was sued by the muleteer and other creditors. + +In the middle of these troubles, on Monday, the 30th of August, the +most Holy Sacrament went forth from its house to the hospital, which +was built of old wood. Ascending to the upper story, as the weight +of the people was great, a large part of the building gave way, and +we fell, sixty of us, with the beds and patients, a height of more +than twenty feet. There were many accidents. A priest was killed on +the spot, and there were broken limbs. I escaped with what I got, +which was a severe blow on the left side, a wound on the right ankle, +and a hand cut open by a nail. My cure cost me four bleedings and two +months and a-half in bed, without possessing a single maravedi during +the whole time, and in a very expensive place. Only by a miracle I +found anyone to take pity on me in my necessity. + +When barely convalescent, I was able to embark in a ship bound for +Peru, without a bit of bread or a jar of water. God favoured me +with such a good voyage that in twenty days we anchored at Payta, +and I sent a letter by the chasqui to the Count of Monterey, who had +arrived as Viceroy of that kingdom from New Spain. Embarking again, +God was served that in eighteen days I should arrive at the port of +Callao, where I disembarked on the 6th of March, 1605, with debts +for the passage and food, and with no money. I hired horses from one +I had known before, and entered Lima by night. I went round without +being able to find any hostelry, until God led me to a potter who, +for that night and for three other nights, hospitably received me with +goodwill among his pots; so that I am able to say with good reason +that I arrived at Lima weighted down with so many old labours to make a +beginning with new ones, in the way that will be seen by what follows. + + + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + Of what more happened in the city of the Kings and in its port + of Callao, to the Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, until his + despatch took effect, and he embarked for the new discovery. + + +After I had arrived at the city of the Kings, three days passed without +being able to obtain admission to or audience with the Viceroy, to +explain to him my plans, and inform him respecting the orders of His +Majesty. I spoke with him for the first time on Friday, the 11th of +March, and, having seen the royal order, he appointed an audience on +the 25th of the same month, which he gave me. He had ordered to be +present two judges, two religious persons of the Company of Jesus, +the General of Callao, Don Lope de Ulloa, the Captain of the Guard, +and a secretary. + +The Viceroy ordered me to read certain papers referring to the +business, and to explain everything. He had a general chart spread +out on a buffet, with which he satisfied himself when I answered the +questions they asked me. Although, in the course of the discussion, +the Viceroy said that it appeared more convenient to him to make the +voyage from Manilla, where the expedition could be fitted out at less +cost than would be incurred in the purchase of two ships at Lima, I +answered that the royal order expressly commanded that the expedition +should start from Lima and not from the Philippines, and that the +contrary winds would be against all successful navigation. I added +that there was a want of sailors and soldiers at Manilla. There were +those at the audience to whom my remarks seemed to be just. Don Juan de +Villela, one of the judges, was strongly in favour of the expedition; +also the Father Francisco Coello, who had been "Alcalde" of the Court +of Justice and Assessor to the late Viceroy, Don Luis de Velasco. They +were present when I gave an account of my navigation and my plans on +the first occasion; so that they were witnesses brought by God to +prove the truths of which I treated. The Viceroy showed himself to +be satisfied with my arguments, and of the importance and grandeur +of the proposed discovery. Yet, owing to his bad health and many +occupations, and to the difficulties which always arise in business of +this kind that has to pass through many hands, the despatch could not +be proceeded with as quickly as was necessary, and as I desired. If +the day of St. Francis should pass, the best time of the year would be +lost for making sail and shaping a S.W. course. So that I was forced +to continue my memorials to the Viceroy, and to set forth all the +details I deemed necessary to arm, equip, and provision the ships for +so long a voyage. I found more opposers than helpers. Don Fernando de +Castro, husband of my former Governess, Doña Isabel Barreto, who, with +all her household, had come to live in Peru, opposed my undertaking +as trenching on the Solomon Islands, which he inherited through his +wife, who was the widow of their discoverer, the Adelantado Alvaro de +Mendaña. But the good cavalier was convinced by my pious reasoning, +and he said that, as he understood it, he would condemn the soul who +pretended to disturb me. + +The Doctor Arias Ugarte, a Judge of the Royal Audience, learning +in what poverty and discomfort I lived, invited me to his house +and table: an offer such as a brother might make, or one friend to +another. Seeing that my wish differed from his, he wanted to make +me accept a great dish full of dollars, almost by force. I gave +him thanks, and said that it did not seem right for one serving His +Majesty in a great undertaking to be sustained by alms. At length, +after many memorials and much worry, I induced the Viceroy to nominate +commissaries whose duty it was to see that the most necessary things +were provided for my despatch. Those matters relating to the sea were +under the superintendence of the Admiral, Juan Colmanero de Andrada, +who was not well disposed towards me. This was the reason that I +had to return to the Viceroy with complaints and importunities, +in which he honoured and favoured me. One day he said to me that, +by virtue of the royal order I had shown him, he wished to name a +person to go in my company, who was to take my place and office in +the event of my death. I answered that I did not wish to take with +me any one who would know that he was to succeed me, for that was an +arrangement fraught with obvious danger. In the order His Majesty +allowed that I myself made the proposal, with the object that if +I should die before I reached Lima, or before I left the port, the +enterprise should continue in being. But at present I was strong and +well; so I begged him to suspend this business until it was seen what +God ordained; and that he would leave it in my charge; so that when +it appeared necessary I could select such a person as time had shown +to merit the charge of so serious an enterprise. + +In this position the matter rested, and my despatch proceeded, +though with slow steps. As the time for starting approached, it +was represented that the pay should be in advance, and the persons +who raised the question claimed that it should be given on board +the ships, or with good securities. I succeeded in satisfying them, +saying that, as His Majesty had entrusted to me and to them a business +of such importance, it was not just to proceed in all things with +such limitation. + +Having settled this, I took steps for my people to receive the jubilee +which had been conceded by His Holiness, and that a special festival +should be held for them in the convent of St. Francis of the port of +Callao, where were the six friars who were to go in our ships. The +standards and banners were to be blessed, and we were to come forth +with all our people in procession, in the clothes of sackcloth which +almost all had made for the occasion. But the envy which is so powerful +put a stop to this laudable intention, and there were not wanting +those who opposed the blessing and raising of the standard, as if the +undertaking was not for the service of His Majesty. However, all the +people confessed and took the sacrament. The standards and banners +were embarked, rolled up on their staves; and I, with other persons +of the fleet, went to seek for the six friars. These, accompanied by +many others of their Order, and by their guardian and commissary, +came forth from their convent, and were lovingly embraced by many +people, for always at such partings many tears are shed. We all went +on board together, with the Admiral and other royal officers. When +the inspection was made, there was not a single man missing who had +received pay, and not counting those, there were twenty-two. One day +before, I had been to Lima to take leave of the Viceroy, having with me +the two captains of the other two ships. I asked him to pardon me for +having been so pressing, for it had been necessary to make a finish of +my despatch. The Viceroy answered that, on the contrary, he was much +pleased, and he embraced me, and afterwards the other two captains: +saying that, owing to his serious indisposition, he was unable to go +to the port to see us start, as he desired, but that he would write +a letter to all the people of the expedition, which was to be read +publicly before making sail, as was done. Its tenor was as follows:-- + + + Letter of the Viceroy, Count of Monterey. + + Illness will not allow me to honour and favour with my presence + your departure from the port, and the commencement of your + navigation. As I am unable to say to you what is desirable in + words, I have decided to do so by a letter. + + I feel very sure that, in general, you have understood the + lofty aims for the service of God our Lord which has moved his + royal Majesty to undertake this discovery with great cost to his + treasury; and what mighty interests may result from the enterprise + to the church of God, by the saving of many souls, and to the + crown of Spain by the increase of its dominions. So I trust that + you will keep the one and the other object present to your minds, + being the principal reasons which also moved us to the undertaking. + + I desire to charge you to maintain peace and obedience from + subordinates to their officers, and from all to the Captain Pedro + Fernandez de Quiros, who has been ordered by His Majesty to make + this voyage. And I charge you to keep in memory that he represents + in his person the Viceroy himself, as if I myself was on board, + and as if I gave the orders that he will give; showing that, + in the discipline and obedience that you must exercise on all + occasions, you signally display your loyalty as good vassals + to His Majesty. He who falls away from this shall be severely + judged by the councillors of His Majesty, or the royal ministers + where the matter is reported, and especially by me in cases that + come before me. May God guide you and send you forth to do His + will. Given on December 20th, 1605. + + +As soon as the letter was read, the ships being ready, the various +banners were displayed from the mastheads and tops, and the royal +standard was hoisted, the yards were raised, and the anchors got up +in the name of the most holy Trinity. The sails were set, and the +men on their knees prayed for a good voyage to our Lady of Loreto, +saying that this fleet is dedicated to her name, and sails trusting in +her favour and protection. All the artillery, muskets, and arquebuses +were fired off. The ships passed near the other royal ships, which +were saluting with their pieces, with many people on their decks and +galleries, and many more in the town, on balconies and roofs, and on +the beach, watching attentively as we left the port. It was the day of +St. Thomas the Apostle, Wednesday, at three in the afternoon, the 21st +of December, 1605, the sun being in the last degree of Sagittarius. + +In this manner the three ships departed. The Capitana was named +San Pedro y San Pablo. She was bought from Sebastian de Goite y +Figueroa, and was well adapted for such service. The other vessel, +as Almiranta, was rather small, and was also purchased for His +Majesty in the port of Callao. The third was a launch, or zabra, +of small size, which had lately arrived from the Galapagos Islands, +to rescue the people who had been wrecked there. She was very strong +and a good sailer. In all three were embarked nearly three hundred +men, sailors and soldiers, with some small pieces of artillery, +arquebuses and muskets, provisions of all kinds for one year, iron +implements, fruits and animals of Peru for those who should form +a settlement, and the said six friars of the Order of St. Francis, +also four brothers of Juan de Dios to cure the sick. As Chief Pilot +there came one against my will, whom they made me receive, as he had +taken the Count of Monterey from New Spain. He did me much injury. [77] +The second Pilot was called the Captain Pedro Bernal Cermeño, to whom +I delivered the charge and command of the launch. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + How the Captain, Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, having left the port + of Callao with his fleet, navigated from the coast of Peru, and + his instructions to the pilots, sailors and soldiers that they + might know how to govern themselves. + + +Commencing to leave the port of Callao, the prows of the three ships +were pointed in the direction of their destination. The sun went +down. The Almiranta asked for her name. She was given the name of +San Pedro, patron of the same ship, and of the cause. They sailed +with the wind S.S.E., so prevalent on that coast, thence to E.S.E., +and as we went on the wind passed from point to point until it was +due east, where it remained for many days, blowing gently. It seems +that the lofty cordillera of Peru, running north and south, impedes +the wind from blowing east until a good offing is gained, when it is +the ordinary wind. + +The Captain, during the three first days, made entries in his journal, +but presently his health failed him. For he took such a headache from +Lima that he could suffer neither sun nor shade, and could expose it +neither bare nor covered. On this malady there came a spasm which +caused him much suffering, and, as was afterwards supposed, he was +cured by this reversed attack, though none of these changes sufficed +to finish him. For whom God wishes will live. The three eves and days +of Christmas, Circumcision, and Epiphany, were celebrated with great +festivity; and at the Conversion of St. Paul, the Captain, not having +been able to do so before, issued the following instructions to the +people of his ship, and to those of the other two ships of his fleet, +judging them to be very necessary. + + + Instructions. + + Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, Captain and Chief of the three vessels + of the fleet, of which he has command, to discover the unknown + southern regions for His Majesty. + + As it is agreeable to the service of God our Lord, and to that of + the King of Spain, Philip, third of that name, whose is this fleet, + and whose vassal I am, and in whose name I go on this service; + and as it is conducive to good government that the Captains should + have rules to keep respecting the voyage that has to be made, and + other work that has to be done, if by chance, owing to a tempest + or other legitimate cause, they should part company from me, they + should be given instructions and notices that they may follow + and carry out the orders with regard to the charge with which + they are entrusted. I, therefore, give to Luis Vaez de Torres, + Admiral of the ship called San Pedro, the orders as follows:-- + + I specially charge the said Admiral that he is to maintain + Christian, political, and military discipline among the men of + his ship. + + Further, I charge him to see that they do not curse nor blaspheme, + nor say or do other things evil against God our Lord, nor against + the most holy Mother, nor against angels, saints, or things + divine or sacred; and if perchance (which may God not permit) + there are some so wicked as to dare to utter such blasphemies, he + is to punish them severely and rigorously as their crimes deserve. + + Further, I charge him not to consent to any playings with dice or + cards, either for small or great stakes; and if by chance there + should be any playing cards found in his ship, or dice (except + for playing at backgammon), he is to throw them overboard as a + thing very prejudicial to the objects of the voyage; and if the + games at tables cause disputes and trouble, they are also to be + thrown overboard, so as to avoid all occasion for mischief. + + He is to take great care that every day, in the afternoon, all + the people go on their knees before an altar where there are + images of Christ and of the Virgin Mary, and that the Litany of + Our Lady of Loreto is recited, praying for her favour and for + her intercession, that God our Lord may guide us and show us the + lands and people we seek, and help us in all that undertaking on + which we are employed, and grant us that success which will be to + His honour and glory and for the good of so many of His creatures. + + Further, I charge him that he forbids and by all means prevents + any one from taking God's name in vain, the person so offending + forfeiting his ration for that day, and if he has already had + it, for the next day; and the same punishment is to be inflicted + on such persons as may give him to eat, even if they are his own + mess-mates. If the blasphemer repents his fault, he may be pardoned + the first time, but for the second, third, or other times he may + be put in irons, or fined for the benefit of souls in purgatory; + and this may not be remitted. And that this may be known to all, + a copy of this chapter is to be nailed to the ship's main mast. + + Further, he is to be very vigilant in preventing free or + disrespectful words being spoken of the royal person or his + service: and those who so offend are to be punished promptly + and with rigour, always justifying what is inflicted for this or + other offences. + + Further, he is to take care and use much diligence in treating + kindly and lovingly all the people under his charge, and to honour + and maintain each one of his officers in the posts they occupy, + and to cause them to be respected and to respect each other. In + short, he is to acquire those methods and habits which are + necessary to keep his people contented and firm in their love, + truthfulness, fidelity, and loyalty, remembering how worthy of + esteem that Captain is who, without the use of knife or other + rigour, governs his people in peace. + + Further, he is to look after the Master of the Ship with vigilance, + who is to see that the provisions do not turn bad and are not + wasted; and that those respecting which there is a suspicion that + they may turn bad are used first. + + The ration to be served out each day to each person on board, + whether receiving wages or not, is 1 1/2 lbs. of biscuit, 1 lb. of + meat, 2 oz. of bacon, 1 oz. of pulses, half a gallon of water for + drinking, and sufficient for cooking. On fish days the ration is + to be one fish or (if it is large) part of one, 6 oz. of pulses, + a measure of oil, another of vinegar; biscuit and water as on meat + days. If there is no fish, 4 oz. of cheese is to be substituted. As + regards extras, what appears most convenient is to be done, always + seeing that there is no pretext for complaints, and considering + that there is much time and a long voyage before us. + + He is to be very diligent, both by day and night, in following the + Capitana ship, which will shape a W.S.W. course until the latitude + of 30° is reached; and when that is reached and no land has been + seen, the course will be altered to N.W. until the latitude of 10° + 15'; and if no land has yet been found, a course will be followed + on that parallel to the west, in search of the island of Santa + Cruz. There a port will be sought in the bay of Graciosa, in 10° + of latitude, and 1,850 leagues from the city of the Kings, to the + south of a great and lofty volcano, standing alone in the sea, + about 8 leagues from the said bay. The Captain who arrives first + in this port, which is at the head of the bay, between a spring + of water and a moderate-sized river, with bottom from 40 to 35 + fathoms, is to anchor there, and wait there three months for the + other two ships. When together, a resolution will be taken as + to what further shall be done, in compliance with His Majesty's + orders. If by chance the other ships do not arrive, the Captain, + before he departs, is to raise a cross, and at the foot of it, + or of the nearest tree, he is to make a sign on the trunk, to be + understood by him who next arrives, and to bury a jar with the + mouth closed with tar, and containing a narrative of all that has + happened and of his intentions. Then he will steer S.W. as far + as 20°, thence N.W. to 4°, and on that parallel he is to steer + west in search of New Guinea. After coasting all along that land, + he is to proceed to the city of Manilla, in the island of Luzon of + the Philippines, in 14° N., thence by the eastern Indies to Spain, + to give an account to His Majesty of all that has been discovered. + + Further, he is to be diligent in taking the sun daily, and at night + the star Crucero, or at least whenever the weather admits of it, + that he may know his latitude and plot it on his chart, making + allowances for lee-way, caused by winds or currents, and for the + variation of the needle; and for greater accuracy, he shall take + care to correct it by the sun, or by a known star when on the + meridian. He is also to be careful to note the number of leagues + made by the ship each day, the winds and the changes, the showers, + currents, flights of birds, shoals of fishes, and signs of land, + with its appearance when sighted. Also, he is to note the islands, + whether inhabited or uninhabited, and place them on the chart + in their latitude, longitude, and form. If it is continental + land, he is to do the same as regards ports, capes, anchorages, + and all other features; writing descriptions of the positions of + each feature, of the rivers and places where wood and water can be + obtained, as well as the rocks and reefs that are met with. If the + bottom is sand, it is to be denoted by dots of ink, if of rocks by + small crosses. Besides these details, the colour, shape, features, + and dress of the inhabitants are to be noted, their food, arms, + boats, behaviour, and government and religion; so that a full and + detailed account can be given to the King our Lord in his Council + of State, from whence the orders for the voyage were issued. + + Every day he will come up to this Capitana, as is the custom, + to give his respects and wish for a good voyage; and to ask for + the word, which will be answered and given in the customary way. + + He is to take care that, at sunrise and sunset, and oftener if + it seems desirable, two men go to the masthead to look out over + all parts of the horizon; and at night the sentries are to be + doubled, one being on the bowsprit. The rounds and over-rounds + are to be gone by him in person, and when he is not able, he is + to delegate the duty to others in whom he has confidence. In this + he is to be punctual, and rigorous in punishing those he finds + not keeping a good look-out, or sleeping. In taking in sail, + when the weather is threatening, there must be no negligence. + + When the Capitana puts out a flag from the main topmast, it is + a signal to the pilots for the ships to close. The ships shall + then come near the Capitana to receive orders. + + If the Capitana should alter course during the night, a gun will + be fired, if it is desired to give notice that land is sighted, + or that there are rocks, two guns will be fired. The other two + ships will do the same, and all three will repeat, to show that + the signal is understood. + + If by day it is necessary to communicate, a flag is to be shown on + the main rigging, so that it may be seen by the other two ships, + and presently they will close, to learn what is wanted. If it + is night, two lights are to be shown, besides the stern lantern, + as a signal that help is needed, which presently will be given. + + Great precautions are to be taken against fire. There is to be + no lighted candle nor other fire between decks, except within a + lantern in charge of a man to watch it. And this duty is not to + be given to any person unless he can be trusted. + + Much care is to be taken that there is no waste in cord, powder, + or balls; and attention is to be given to all the royal stores + that there may be no fraud whatever in their expenditure. + + If there is both wind and sea, and both suddenly cease, being + night time, heave to and sound, and keep a good look-out, as the + cause may be the interposition of land close to. + + If there are puffs and flaws of wind besides the wind that fills + the sails, or the ship raises her head and stern as if she was + being pushed, it being night time, take soundings, for she may + be very near the land or rocks, where the sea breaks and sends + back the surf. + + If, the sky being clear, the sun, moon, and stars come out and + are higher than the horizon, it is a certain sign of land; at + night heave to and sound, at daytime look out for it. + + If on the route there should be thick mists ahead which do not + move away, or a fixed line, or a damp fog, heave to and sound, + keeping a good look-out, for there is probably land near. + + If certain flashes with little lights are seen ahead, accompanied + by thunder, or there are puffs of wind, it being night time, heave + to and sound, as they may be signs of small rocks or islets. If + the lightning is forked and the thunder loud, also heave to and + sound, keeping a good look-out. + + If in spite of the wind that is blowing there come dry gusts from + another quarter, or with rain or hail, it is a sign of land being + near; it being night time, heave to, waiting for daylight to seek + for it. + + If the sea appears greasy, with leaves of trees, grass, herbs, + wood, branches, palm nuts, and other things which the waves + carry from the shores, and rivers send down when in flood, it is + a sign of land being near in the direction of the present course + of the wind, or the currents have brought them. In that case the + circumstances will indicate what it is best to do, but land will + be left behind towards the quarter whence the wind comes. + + If there are currents it is better when they are strong, or there + are shoals of small fishes which seem to swarm over the sea, + or patches of camarones, sea snakes, seals, turtles, much bad + water, or some land birds, take care, for the ship will be very + near the land. + + If flocks of many sea birds are met with, such as boobies and + petrels, note should be taken of the direction in which they fly, + and whence they come in the morning; noticing whether they assemble + early and return late, for then they are far from the land; but + if they assemble late and return early, the land is near. If they + are not seen to assemble, and are heard to make a noise at night, + and are still to be seen at dawn, then either land is very near + or the birds have slept on the sea. It is to be noted that these + birds almost always frequent islets or rocks, because they are + nearer their fishing grounds. For this reason there should be + vigilance to avoid shoals. + + If the birds that may be met with are piqueros, ducks, widgeons, + gulls, estopegados, terns, sparrowhawks, flamingos or siloricos, + it is a sign that the land is very near; but if there are only + boobies so much care is not necessary, because these birds are + found far from land, and the same may be said of boatswain birds, + which fly where they please. Moreover, if all the birds, or part + of them, fly together, it is a sign of proximity to land; and it + should be noted whether some of these birds fly as if wounded, + seeking land on one or the other side. + + If patches of brown water are seen on the sea, it is a sign that + there are rocks near the surface; if the patches are white, it + is a sign of a sandy bottom, with little depth; a black patch + is a sign of ooze and mud; and a green patch points to a bottom + covered with weeds. In short, if the sea is of any other colour + than the ordinary one of the ocean where there is great depth, + namely, dark blue, it is necessary to exercise care, and much more + if at night the sea should be heard to make sounds greater than is + usual. All the above signs cause an obligation to be very careful + and to get soundings; but there are two things which require more + especial vigilance, and which have the most importance for the + security of the voyage. It is then the principal thing to bear + in mind that while all these signs point to land or to rocks; + that while the birds have wings and can sleep when they like on + the sea; while the fish are in their element; while the winds, + the thunder and lightning, and the clouds fly through the air, it + is only in God that we must put our confidence, for it is He alone + who knows, and who can guide and save the people and the ship. + + After anchoring in any port, a careful look-out should be kept both + by day and night, for the natives are great swimmers and divers, + and might wedge up the rudder, cut the hawsers, or set fire to + the ship. For this reason it is well, in places where there is + cause for suspicion, to have a guard in the boat at night over + the buoys, or at least to visit them many times. + + Take care not to allow so many natives on board the ship as + would be able to overpower the crew; and even when they are few, + great evil may come to them as well as to us, from ignorance of + our arms; whence may arise a commencement of war, and a faithful + peace may never then be made. + + In effecting a landing, it should always be by day, and never at + night. The landing-place should be level and clear of woods, or at + least as well situated in these respects as possible: sending dogs + in front to discover ambushes, with arms ready, marching together + and in order, and entering passes with caution. It should be + kept in mind that the natives usually get behind rocks or trees, + or stretch themselves flat on the ground even in level places, + concealed only by the grass. + + Take notice that, if it is possible, chiefs or other natives + who appear to be of consequence, should be kept in the ship as + hostages, but well treated and given presents of things that they + seem to like most. The same course should be followed on shore, + when the natives seek intercourse and conversation with us. The + barter should be conducted by one of us, who should always give + the natives to understand that the things are of great value, + as they really are for them; and this because they do not value + their own things much, and ours but little. + + Learn from the natives whether there are other islands or extensive + lands near, if they are inhabited, of what colour are the natives, + whether they eat human flesh, if they are friendly or carry on + war. Enquire whether they have gold in dust, or in small lumps, + or in ornaments; silver worked or to be worked; metals, all kinds + of pearls, spices and salt, and if they eat those commodities. If + they have names for them, write the names down. Ask in what parts + these things are to be found, and what those lands are called. Show + pleasure at what they give, and manage to let them know by signs + what they ask. + + Do not think little of the natives, for they are pilferers and + runners, and when they come for that, they know well how to do it; + at least, they try, whence follow evils from one side to another, + which is what ought to be avoided. + + Do not follow the guidance of the natives except with great + caution. Never trust or believe in them on any occasion whether + they show much or little sign of friendship, because their custom + is to watch on the roads and to make pits covered with earth and + grass. They are capable of leading those they pretend to guide + direct to their traps or ambushes, or with evil intent to get them + away from their boats or the beach, and to lead them inland into + the woods, and there do what evil they can to them. They always + carry their canes open at both ends, containing a lighted cord, + that it may not be extinguished when it rains. + + Never allow our people to mix with the natives, nor leave them + to join company, owing to the danger that, on a given signal, + three or four may fall upon and carry off one of ours to meet + the fate which they may want to inflict on him. + + On occasions when it is desirable to have an interview with the + natives, it should always be in a cleared space, with a good + distance between the two parties, and the Chief, or one named by + him, standing in the space, so as to concert with him what they + desire or ask for. It is always necessary to see that the back is + safe without ceasing to watch or even turning the face, but always + the whole body. And, when obliged, let it be back to back, with + the shields in front, so as to make all more strong and secure. + + If it should be necessary to embark in retreat, either in presence + or absence of the enemy, half the arquebusiers and shield-bearers + should face the natives, that the other half may embark safely; + and those embarked are quickly to turn, making the same guard + as the one made by those on shore until all are embarked. For, + if all embark in a troop, there is danger from arrows, stones, + darts, and lances, which are the arms of the natives. + + The natives never give up anything they have about them, or + anything in their houses, though it be gold, silver, pearls, or any + other thing of value, nor do they understand our covetousness. But + before we gave them our things we were very liberal, sowing with + them and teaching them to sow maize, beans, onions, cotton, and + all the most profitable seeds and vegetables. Whenever there is an + opportunity, such seeds should be sown even on desert islands. If + the place is suitable, rabbits, goats, and swine should be landed, + for it is an advantage to enrich those desert lands, remembering + the possible needs of future navigators. + + Take care not to feed on the things which the natives present to + be eaten, because they know how to play tricks. For which reason + do not fill your hands, nor quit your arms, nor take your eyes off + the natives. Under all circumstances these precautions should be + well attended to. One or two of our people should always be on + the watch, especially in the direction where there is most cause + for suspicion. + + Care should be taken to look out for poison put into the water + or food. Vegetables and fruits should not be eaten unless known + before, or unless they have been seen to be used as food by birds + and monkeys. + + In ports where natives come to give assistance, never ill-use + them nor detain them, unless it is to let them return with clothes + or presents, nor break the peace or the word that has been given + to them, nor cut down their fruit trees, nor injure their crops, + nor destroy their houses or canoes; for all such acts cost them + very dear, owing to the difficulty of repairing damages from + want of proper tools. For this cause they seek for vengeance, and + withdraw food supplies. In short, all is lost that was intended to + be obtained from them. If it seems necessary, they can be made to + understand the harm we can do them with our arquebuses, swords, + and other arms, but not to do it, refraining at the last. + + For two reasons the natives may give false information respecting + the land, people, and products, the latter being what we enquire + for most and come to seek. The first that we may go, the second + that we may be deceived, in revenge for some wrong that has been + done them. When it is decided to follow up any of their notices + by sea or land, the same natives that have given the information + should be made to accompany the party, to secure this point. + + The shouts and noises of the natives in their assemblies, and the + blowing and beating of their war instruments, need cause no alarm + to us, nor should the natives be despised. In forced attacks, + arquebus fire should be in the air, with or without ball; and by + taking other steps suited to the occasion, they will be made to + fly or desist. + + A very important notice is that, when seeking for wood, water, + or provisions, a boat should be sent with well-armed men to + over-awe the natives, even in places where it does not seem likely + that there will be a rupture with them. If they begin to offer + opposition, and the necessity is not very great, it will be as + well to return to the ship, and await a better opportunity. If + the necessity is great, send a large number of guards to protect + the foraging party. Finally, avoid the danger of offending the + natives, or being offended by them. The position should be as + fathers to children, but they must be watched as if they were + known enemies. Our part is always to be in the right, with open + and honest intentions; then God will help us, as He helps all + those whose objects are good. + + It is well known to all those persons who are engaged on this + discovery how His Holiness Clement VIII, at my humble petition, + has conceded that if our Lord should be served by removing us + from this world to another, at the hour of death, if unable to + confess or to take the sacrament, being contrite, we name the + most holy name of Jesus, either with our mouths or in our hearts, + he gives us plenary indulgence and remission of all our sins. I + hold the brief for this grace in my possession. + + If any person should fall sick, he should presently confess + and make his will. If he should die, it is ordered that the + master, with a clerk, should make an inventory of his goods, + and take charge of them, in order to carry out the wishes of the + deceased. If he dies intestate, the same care is to be taken in + making an inventory, and in taking care of the goods. + + All these things are to be complied with, without exceeding + them, unless time is very pressing. In that case, if it appears + necessary, counsel should be taken with the Master and Pilot, + officers, and other important persons, and with the opinions of + all of them, signed with their names, what is agreed upon may be + done, all being for the service of God and of His Majesty. Given + on board the ship San Pedro y San Pablo, by the leader of the said + discovery, in this Gulf of Loreto, navigating on a W.S.W. course, + in the latitude of 19°, on January 8th, 1606. + + + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + Recounts the navigation that was made, and the signs that were + noted, until the first uninhabited island came in sight. + + +The fleet continued to steer W.S.W. in accordance with the +instructions, from the time that the ships made sail from Callao until +they reached the latitude of 16°, where they met with a heavy and +confused swell from the S.W. On the 10th of January the first birds +were seen, and on the 11th the first showers of rain, with the wind +E. and E.S.E. On the 12th the wind was south. On the 13th a number of +gulls were seen. On the 15th the wind was N. and N.W. On the 16th we +saw great flocks of birds. On the 17th we were in latitude 24°, with +the wind S.W. and W., blowing with some force and with a high sea. At +this change the Captain presently showed a flag from the maintop mast +to take opinions, the weather not allowing of any other way. The pilots +of the ships said, by shouting, that, being outside the tropics, all +winds might be met with, and by reaching higher latitudes, the north +wind would be met with, blowing with greater force. On the 18th the +wind went all round the compass, but was generally in the north. On +the 21st we had the wind from S. and S.W. + +On the 22nd we were in latitude 26°, with a squall and showers from +the S.E., and with a great swell from the south. This brought out +the timidity of some, saying: "Whither are they taking us, in this +great gulf, in the winter season?" Some said they should get the +boat into the sea. We were obliged, by the force of winds and sea, +to stand on a W.N.W. course until we reached 25°. On the 24th, at +night, we saw the first lightning, which was not very bright. On the +25th we saw the first weeds; and on the 26th we saw birds of several +kinds flying together. On this day, at 11 o'clock, we discovered the +first island in latitude 25°, and reckoned it to be 800 leagues from +Lima. It has a circumference of 5 leagues, many trees, and a beach of +sand. Near the land the depth was 80 fathoms. I gave it the name of +"Luna-puesta." [78] It was now late, so I determined to stand off and +on during the night, waiting for the next day to go to the island; but +at dawn we were too leeward, and for this cause and others we left it. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + Relates how the Almiranta disappeared and joined company again, + and how they sighted the second uninhabited island. + + +We were steering to the west in some doubt, when we saw some whales +and many gulls. At dawn of this day the Almiranta was not in sight. The +Captain ordered the mast-head men to look carefully round the horizon, +and at 9 the ship was seen coming to us under all sail. This caused +us great pleasure, as her absence had given anxiety, for to part +company! now one sees what that means. Having arrived, the Captain +received a letter in which the Admiral said that, during the previous +night, the stern light of the Capitana went out; and that, as he was +unwell, he had not seen what happened, and had not been able to carry +out the orders exactly. + +Still steering on the same course, on the 29th of January, at dawn, +we sighted another island near, and presently stood towards it. The +launch to the S.W. found a port in a small bay, where she anchored in +27 fathoms, and almost on shore. The ships did the same. The people +in the launch told them by shouting that she was dragging her anchor; +so the ships stood out, and the launch got up her anchor and made sail. + +Three men were sent from the Almiranta in a dingey to land. Fearing to +remain they came back quickly, bringing certain fruits known to some +on board, which were too unripe to eat. They said that the landing +was very bad for a dingey, and would be much worse for larger boats. + +This island was supposed to be 870 leagues from Lima. It is 10 +leagues round. It is massive, moderately high, open, having groves +and plains. It is steep, too, and its beaches are rocky. It is only +inhabited by birds. Its latitude is 24° 45'. It was named "San Juan +Bautista;" [79] and as it had no port where we could get wood and +water, we continued our voyage to the W.N.W. + +This day the Admiral came on board to see the Captain about certain +matters; who, to put an end to discord, made the Admiral embrace the +Chief Pilot and make friends, for there was very little friendship +between them before. + +On the following day, which was the penultimate of January, a great +number of birds were seen, and on the last day of that month there +were such squalls that it was necessary to strike the topmasts. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + Recounts how they came in sight of the third island that was + discovered, and a great storm. + + +Following the W.N.W. course, on the 3rd of February, the Captain +put out a flag on the topmast for the ships to close and the pilots +to report in what latitude they were, how many leagues from Lima, +the observations the ships had taken respecting lee-way, winds, and +the variation of the needle, also the bearing of the islands of Las +Marquesas de Mendoza. The ships closed, and the pilots said that, +owing to the clouds, they had not been able to take the sun for +three days; that they thought Las Marquesas de Mendoza bore N.N.E.; +and that after they had got the sun's meridian altitude they could +make a more formal report. + +While this was going on land was sighted to the west, which, being +concealed by clouds, was near; and as it was late, all sails were +set. Night came on, and, having gone a short distance, a dark and thick +cloud rose in the north-east in three parts, which soon became one, +and made its way towards the ships with such speed and fury that all +began to seek for remedies against the evils that menaced them. The +ships, trembling, received the force of the storm, and went over on +their sides. The sea rose, and all were horrified. The lightning in the +air seemed to rend the heavens and blind the sight. Three thunderbolts +were heard to fall; the thunder was awful, the pouring rain terrible, +and the squalls of wind so violent that it seemed as if the least +damage would be the fall of the masts. The launch being close to, +her Pilot shouted in a hoarse voice: "The Capitana ahoy! Alter +course--ahoy! Luff up!" All was confusion, hurry, and noise. The +night was fearful, decision doubtful, and great the anxiety to know +whether the position of the ships was safe. + +Our Father Commissary, with a cross in his hands, passed the whole +night conjuring the sea and winds. St. Elmo appeared, as the sailors +say, which they saluted with great devotion three times. In short, it +was a dark, confused, ugly, and long night which we passed, confiding, +after God, in the soundness of our ships and the stoutness of our +sailors. When the long-wished-for daylight came, we saw that our land +was an island surrounded by a reef. Neither port nor bottom could be +found, though sought for with care, as we were in want of water, and +for fuel we only had brushwood. Seeing that the island was so useless, +we left it for what it was; and, considering the night it had given us, +it would have been dear even if it had been a very good land instead +of a very bad one. This island was calculated to be 1,030 leagues from +Lima, 36 leagues round, in latitude 20° 30'. It was named St. Elmo. + + + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + Four other desert islands are sighted, and what else happened. + + +Steering W.N.W., on the following day, we sighted an island about 6 +leagues off, and presently another, and then two more, and at none +of the four was there bottom or port. There are reefs and shoals +almost continuous. The distance from one to the other was four or five +leagues, and from the City of the Kings 1,050. Their latitude is 20°, +and they were named Las cuarto coronadas. [80] + +The Captain, considering that on all these seven newly-discovered +islands neither a port nor water could be found, and finding that there +were fewer water-jars than he ordered to be embarked, he made some +discourses with respect to the time and the present state of affairs, +and deemed it necessary to reduce, as he did reduce, the allowance of +water. Twelve or fifteen jars of water that were consumed each day he +reduced to three or four jars. He was present when it was served out, +saw the hatchway closed, and kept the keys. + +Presently he ordered a brick oven to be built over one of the hearths, +in order to make sweet water from sea water, with a copper instrument +he had with him, by means of distillation. They got two or three jars +full every day, very good and wholesome. On the least productive day +there was a jar and a-half, and altogether fifty jars. This invention, +with certain improvements, promises, with little expenditure of fuel, +to turn out in fifteen hours eight, nine, and ten jars of fresh water, +and more if it is necessary. [81] + +This was Ash Wednesday. Our Father Commissary gave ashes to every +person on board the ship. The course was W.N.W., and at a distance of +75 leagues from the four isles astern we sighted another small island +to the N.E., but could not approach owing to being to windward. We +judged its latitude to be 18° 30'. It received the name of San +Miguel. Owing to threatening weather and darkness, we were hove to +this night with all the ships. + + + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + The first inhabited island is sighted; what happened there with + the natives. + + +Next day, which was the 10th of February, having a look-out man at each +mast-head, constantly watching all parts of the horizon, the Almiranta +fired a piece, and land ahead was reported in all three ships. As all +the other islands were desert, it was expected that this one would be +the same, so the report was received with very moderate rejoicing. We +presently steered towards it, and soon a high and thick smoke was seen +to rise between two palms. Those in the launch presently shouted: +"People, people on the beach!" The news was as joyful as incredible +to many, from having been so long desired, fearing lest it should +prove a mistake, until, coming nearer, we clearly saw men, and the +sight was hailed as if they had been angels. [82] + +Of this glory the Captain got a large share, for until now he had +been saying: "God shows us in this sea millions and millions of +natives." The people were restless from sheer satisfaction, so that +they had not attended to the sails. The launch anchored near the slope +of the beach, and the two ships presently stood out to sea, as there +was no port for them. They got the boats out to search, but could +not find one, sounding until they came opposite to the place where +the natives stood in a row, with clubs and lances in their hands. Our +people who saw them thought it was war, but looked at them and spoke +by signs. They said our men should land, also by signs. + +The place was dangerous, and little satisfaction could be got from +the natives; so our people in the boats determined to return to the +ships to avoid any collision. The waves did their office, and the +natives, when they saw the high ones, told the boats to keep away, +owing to the danger they ran. As it appeared to our people that +these demonstrations were all made out of kindness, two undressed and +jumped into the water. As soon as they landed the natives, putting +down their lances, all together at one time bowed their heads and +arms, and saluted three times. Apparently, the welcome and smiles +were to receive our men, and when one was knocked over by a wave, +they picked him up, embraced him, and kissed him on his cheeks, +which is a way of showing friendship used also in France. When the +people in the boats saw the loyalty with which the natives received +complete strangers, not knowing their intentions, two others went on +shore. One of them was very white, and the natives, when they saw him, +came and felt his back, breast, and arms, showing much astonishment, +and they did the same with the other three. All four gave them what +they had, which the natives received with signs of love. The one who +appeared to be chief over the others gave to one of our people a palm +branch as a sign of friendship, and also did more. He crossed his arms, +making very friendly signs to our people that they should come to the +village, to which they pointed with their fingers, to give them to eat. + +With this they took their leave, and our men embarked, to the sorrow +of the natives. Eight of them followed the boats, and to see them +the men laid on their oars and invited them to get in, but they were +afraid. The launch and the boats returned to where the ships were +at sunset. Presently, the Chief Pilot asked the Captain what was to +be done, who replied that they would beat to windward that night, +and on the following day return to the same point, or to another, +and search again for a port or anchorage, or for water, which was +much needed. The Chief Pilot went aloft, and said from the mast-head +that he saw a bay to leeward, much better than the bay of Cadiz. + +All night we stood off and on, rather joyful at the thought of finding +this port, and at dawn we found ourselves 3 leagues to leeward of the +place where the natives had been seen; and looking out a first and a +second time, there was no sign of that bay, but only a narrow and long +reef almost covered by the water. There was one place where there were +some palm trees, for which reason the Captain sent both the boats, +well manned and armed with jars, to seek for water. They found the +beach very difficult, most of it rocks, on which the waves broke with +great fury. But undaunted by this, our people jumped into the water +up to their waists, loaded with arquebuses, spades, and crowbars, +and the last, whose name was Belmonte, [83] had such difficulty that, +if Ensign Rozo [84] had not helped him with his spear, which enabled +him to get out, there would have been an end of his career. Marching in +good order, they entered a palm grove, where they found, at the foot +of a tree, a number of brown stones, and one in the form of an altar, +covered with branches. It was supposed that this was a burial-place, or +a place where the Devil spoke to and deceived these miserable natives, +without there being any one to obstruct him. Our people, to sanctify +the place, set up a cross, [85] and gave God thanks on their knees +for being the first to hoist His royal standard in an unknown place +inhabited by heathens. In sorrow for their evil condition, they spoke +thus: "How long, O pious Lord, is the darkness in which they live to +last for these people?" They said this with all due reverence; and, +leaving the cross, they began to dig for water, which they did not +find, but were able to quench their actual thirst with cocoa-nuts. + +When they went down to embark they saw a shape, which appeared to +be that of a man, coming towards them at a short distance. They +went to see what it was, and found that it was an old woman, who +appeared to be a hundred years of age: a tall and large woman, +with fine and long black hairs and only four or five grey ones, +her colour brown, face and body wrinkled, teeth few and decayed, +and with other faults caused by a long life. She came along, waving +with soft palm leaves. She carried some cuttle-fish dried in the sun, +in a basket, and a knife made from a mother-of-pearl shell, also a +skein of thread. A little speckled dog accompanied her, which ran away. + +With this good capture the boat returned to the Captain, to show her to +him, who was highly delighted at seeing a human creature. He seated her +on a box, and gave her meat and soup from a pot, which she ate without +scruple; but she could not manage the hard biscuit. She showed that she +knew well how to drink wine. A mirror was put into her hand, and she +looked at the back, then at the front, and when she saw her face she +was much pleased. All noticed her good manners, and concluded that, +when young, she was not bad-looking. She looked at all the men with +attention, but she displayed the greatest pleasure in looking at the +boys. She looked at the goats as if she had seen them before. There was +a gold ring with an emerald on one of her fingers. She was asked for +it, but replied by signs that she could not give it without cutting +off her finger, and she seemed sorry for this. She was offered one +of brass, which she did not care for. Having given her things to +dress herself with and take away, we saw four canoes coming from the +village under sail, out of a lake which the island has in its centre, +and they anchored near the palm grove. The Captain presently ordered +the old woman to be landed, in order to reassure the natives. They +no sooner recognised her than they came to see her, and looked at +her as if she had been long absent. They came to our people with the +confidence of friends. There were seventy-two natives, and by signs +they said that they were going, as they presently did go, to see the +cross. As well as they could our people tried to make them understand +its value, and that they should place themselves before it on their +knees. Finally, they did all that they were told. + +When it was asked which of them was the chief, they pointed +out a robust, tall, and well-proportioned native, with a good +well-complexioned face, who appeared to be fifty years of age. He wore +on his head a tuft of black feathers, and towards the front some skeins +of golden hairs whose ends reached half way down his back. According +to their custom, it should be the hair of his wife. He also wore round +his neck a large plate of mother-of-pearl. He had a serious manner, +and all the others paid him great respect. He was asked whether he +would like to go on board the ship, and, having given us to understand +that he would, he was taken to the boats with some followers. One of +the boats having been swamped, they helped to raise her. The chief got +into one boat, and several natives into another, but when they had +gone a short distance they jumped overboard, apparently from fear, +and began to swim. The chief wanting to do the same, we detained +him. He tried to do so by main strength, which was great, and to +take a knife from a soldier, but failed. He made other attempts, but +nothing availed him. The boat arrived alongside, and four men took +hold of him and tried to make him go up; but it was labour in vain, +for he would not stir. The chief was stretched out at his whole length, +fencing with his nervous arms, and in this way he strove to get clear +and escape by swimming. Seeing he could not do this, he put one foot +against the ship's side and sent the boat some distance. When we saw +how much trouble he was giving, he was fastened to a whip, to hoist +him into the ship; and when he found himself secured he got into such +a fury that it shocked our eyes. + +The Captain went down into the boat, and the first thing he did was +to take in his hand the palm branch the other had given him, and to +remove the cord which had caused the chief such anger. He showed that +he felt this release very much, both by his face and his hands; but +not for this did he consider himself in safety. With melancholy looks +he gazed at those who were in the boat, then at the ships, the sails +and masts, and at the land, pointing with his finger that he wanted +to return there. The Captain was sorry to find him so discontented. He +dressed him in a pair of breeches and shirt of yellow silk, put a hat +upon his head, a tin medal round his neck, gave him a case of knives, +embraced him, and ordered the boat to go on shore. This quieted him. + +A sergeant and some men had remained on shore, collecting +cocoa-nuts. Three, who were together, saw the natives collected in +order with their lances, and appearing to be determined to force +them into their canoes, as their chief had been forced to go to the +ship. Eight of our people got together, and pointed out to the natives +that they had remained as sureties, and that their chief was now coming +on shore in the boat. With this, and owing to two of us showing off by +fencing with their swords, the natives remained peaceable until their +chief landed, when they were astonished at his being clothed. He gave +them to understand what had happened, and they ran to receive him. One +of these was a well-made youth, and very handsome. He was supposed to +be the chief's son, for he was the only one he embraced, and the two +together showed an expression of sentiment at which the others helped. + +These and other strange doings having been finished, in the order of +drilled soldiers, all carrying the chief in their midst, they marched +slowly to their canoes, and some of our men, who were looking on and +noting all this, went with them. The natives, who were now contented, +gave them water to drink, and some fish they had brought to eat. The +chief, who had left his garland of plumes and tresses on shore, gave +it into the hands of the sergeant, to be given to the Captain who had +released and clothed him. This was the final act of a man who knew +and was grateful, though himself unknown, causing confusion to some +of the company who received much greater benefits, and gave a bad +return. The natives then departed, and our people, to give them joy, +fired their arquebuses into the air, and returned on board. + +To this island the name of the "Conversion of St. Paul" was +given. It is in latitude 18°, distant from Lima 1,180 leagues. [86] +Its circumference is 40 leagues, and in the centre there is a large +shallow lake. The people are corpulent, and of very good shape and +colour. Their hair is fine and loose, and they have their parts +covered. Their arms are thick and heavy lances of palm-wood, about +30 palmos long, and clubs of the same wood. The anchorage, where the +launch found bottom, is on the east side near the palm grove above +referred to, near which is the village on the shores of the lake. + +As soon as the people had come on board, it seemed desirable to the +Captain that the ships should lie-to that night, in order to go next +day to where the natives were. The Chief Pilot said that as it was +well to windward, and not to waste the water, it would be better to +stand on, as we did, with the wind E. to N.E. Next day another island +was sighted to the N.E., and named "Decena." [87] We could not go +either to it or to other islands that were sighted later. The first +was named "Sagitaria," [88] the second "Fugitiva." [89] Afterwards, +in latitude 14°, the pilots were asked for their positions, who gave +them, some much more, others much less. + + + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + Relates how the Captain received reports that there was a plot + to seize the ship, and of the discourses he made and precautions + he took in consequence. + + +The Captain already had seen that the Chief Pilot altered the course, +and it was intimated he wanted to mutiny with the crew, and that if +there was two days' delay there would be no remedy. One man there +was who said that, with this object, it was determined to stab the +Captain and throw the body overboard. This and other things were +told to the Captain, which he did not believe, except some things +that came to him through base rumours, and that which he himself saw, +that appeared bad. He considered that a mutiny can only begin between +two or three, and that to corrupt the rest there must be sounding of +people, friendships, and much intercourse, and that such things must +be seen. It was observed that the Chief Pilot showed little zeal in +seeking for what was needed; that he wasted the water and provisions +among his particular friends, and others whose friendship he obtained +in that way, and who might well be innocent; that he showed favour +to all. The noise they made together in the ship, the quarrels with +the officers, the consultations continually held by day and night, +were suspicious. + +One day the Captain said to the whole crew that the Royal Majesty +despatched those ships at great expense, to see whether there was +in this unknown part of the earth the land which was supposed to +exist. With this object all might be quite sure that they would have +to search for it, ploughing all the ocean with long turns until it was +found, even if it cost all their lives. To the Chief Pilot he said that +he should know his duties, saying much respecting them. But this did +not lead him into better courses, and he sent to say that he wanted +leave to go on board the Almiranta with the Father Commissary. To +this the Captain answered that he might go presently; but he did not +go, nor did he refer to the matter again. There was not wanting one +who said that these invitations were misunderstood by the Captain, +and added that discoveries always cost the finders dear, and that the +Captain could not put down the discontents nor satisfy the others. For +all this, patience and vigilance were two very necessary things. + +The Captain, seeing the low latitude they had reached without having +found the mother of those islands we had left behind, hearing the +Chief Pilot shout to the Captain of the launch that winter was near, +and other things that it was not well for the men to hear; that others +said that if the course had been S.S.W. the coast of the land of +which we were in search followed the same course; that now we should +never reach it, but should be engulfed by contrary winds, where it +would be impossible to live, and that in the end all would perish; +that these sayings were witnesses of the little love some had for +the service, and of the great love they had for themselves; and that +they were far from having the valorous minds which ought to animate +the searchers for unknown lands, to uphold the original motives and +perform heroic deeds, or at least make them merit a good name--owing +to these shortcomings and many others, he said in public that they +should know how to value and enjoy having been chosen to the lot of +searching for and discovering the fourth part of the globe which is +yet unknown, and not show themselves ready to turn back and be tired +without occasion. And mark! what services are there without requiring +that men should be ready to suffer all the blows that may come? I +ordered that the course should be N.W. as far as latitude 10° 40', so +as to reach the east of the Island of San Bernardo, which in the other +voyage I helped to discover, although we did not then arrive at it. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + Relates how we came in sight of the Island of San Bernardo, + and what happened there. + + +We continued to navigate on the same course until the 19th of +February. On that day we altered course to west, and on the 21st the +Pilot of the Almiranta, Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña, said that on +that very day we should see--as we did see--the island we sought. We +lay to under little sail for the night. Next day we proceeded towards +the island, the launch next ahead, and anchored close to the land, +and thence the crew shouted to the other ships, which were coming up +to anchor, that there was no port for them. + +The Captain then lowered the two boats, and sent an officer with +the boat's crews to search for water, for the scarcity of it forced +them to be on an allowance of a cuartillo a day. They went on shore, +searched for water, but could find none, and returned on board. + +This island of San Bernardo is uninhabited, divided into four or five +hummocks, and all the rest submerged. Its circumference appeared to be +10 leagues. It is in latitude 10° 40'. The anchorage is on the north +side, and only available for small vessels. Its distance from the +city of the Kings was calculated to be 1,400 leagues. An old canoe, +lying on her side, was found on the island. + +There was a great number of fish inshore, and, owing to the water +being very shallow, they were killed with swords and poles. There were +great numbers of lobster and craw-fish, and other kinds of marine +animals. They found a great quantity of cocoa-nuts in a heap at the +foot of the palm trees, many large, and of different sizes. There were +a great quantity of sea birds of several kinds, and so importunate +that they seemed to want to attack the men. We took plenty of all +these things. + +It seemed to the Captain that on an island where there are so many +trees there could not fail to be water. He wished to wait during that +night, so that on the following day they might return and make a more +thorough search for water, and at least they could get more fish. The +Chief Pilot said that the people were tired, and made other excuses and +said things, making them all legitimate daughters of our necessities. + +The Captain, finding himself very ill and overwhelmed by cares of +many kinds, and that there were some who, like moths, were eating +against the enterprise, and causing much discontent, and that they +kept in memory the great abundance of the court, the cold snows, the +fresh fruit, and other memories which cooled their wills and changed +them in other ways, and that up to the present time we had not found +an island with a port, nor water, and that it was not right to risk +the little we had in a business that was so important, the weather +being doubtful and the point in the direction of which we should +find land uncertain: for these and other reasons, which I leave out, +it was decided that the best course would be to seek the island of +Santa Cruz, which was known to possess a port and water, and other +things necessary for the provisioning of a ship, intending to begin +to make discoveries from there, as if we were starting from Lima. In +prosecution of this decision we steered west. + +That night there was a great disturbance on board the Capitana. At +the noise the Captain came out, and found some tackling each other, +others going to arm themselves, and the Chief Pilot with a drawn +sword, with which he had wounded a man. It was taken out of his hands, +without understanding who was the culprit or who was the author of +the disturbance. That which the Captain felt he kept to himself, +confessing that he was so weak that he was unable to say in a loud +voice a third word. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + + How they sighted the second inhabited island, and what happened + there. + + +With the wind in the east, they continued on a western course until +the 1st of March. That night, the launch being ahead, she fired off a +small piece, and a man shouted, "Land ahead!" Presently we saw it, and +a fire burning, at the sight of which there was great content. When it +became broad daylight we saw an island, and steered towards it. When +we came near, two canoes came out to reconnoitre, but the people in +them, though we called, would not wait. The launch anchored very near +the land, and presently a fleet of ten small canoes, rowing fast +and as if racing, came out towards the Capitana. Having arrived, +we saw on board them some tall men, well made and handsome, and of +a good colour. They all came singing to the sound of their paddles, +one of them leading, to whom the rest replied; and by signs they told +us to call to the Almiranta, that by rounding a certain point he would +follow the way outside; showing that it gave them sorrow to see that, +and that they remained joyful now that they saw her return. They also +gave us to understand, pointing with their fingers, that we should go +to their port. What their object was they knew. Many stood upright, +and with arms and hands, legs and feet, and with their paddles, they +made sounds with great dexterity, dances, and gestures. Their chief +theme was music, and to show themselves joyful and merry before our +ships. But in spite of our importunities, they never would come on +board, nor eat of anything we gave them, which they received on the +points of their lances and showed to all the others; and what fell +into the sea they dexterously recovered, by diving for it. + +Five natives came in a canoe, the middle one vigorously bailing the +water out of the vessel. His red hair came down to the waist. He was +white as regards colour, beautifully shaped, the face aquiline and +handsome, rather freckled and rosy, the eyes black and gracious, +the forehead and eyebrows good, the nose, mouth, and lips well +proportioned, with the teeth well ordered and white. In fine, he +was sweet in his laughter and smiles, and his whole appearance was +cheerful. Being rich in so many parts and graces, he would be judged +to be very beautiful for a girl; but he was actually a youth of about +thirteen years. This was he who at first sight stole away the hearts +of all on board the ship; he was most looked at and called to, and he +to whom all offered their gifts, and to whom the Captain, with great +persuasion, desired to present a dress of silk, which he accepted, and +put on with much grace. It was pain to the Captain that the youth could +not be kept, to take as a proof of the greatness of God in those parts. + +Many natives came to the launch, and, having fastened a cord to the +bowsprit, they tried to drag her on to the beach. Others, diving +into the water, fastened ropes to the cable and dragged for the +anchor. Others took up positions to conceal their tricks. The Captain +of the launch, seeing their diligence and how quickly they went to +work, fired off arquebuses to frighten them. But they, ignorant of the +effects, showed no fear at all, even seizing hold of naked swords with +their hands, until some were hurt, when there was a disturbance and +talk among themselves, and they rowed away in their canoes at a great +rate. At this time a very audacious old man came in one of their canoes +to the Capitana, with a very long and thick lance of palm wood, well +balanced; and he had on a sort of cloak or hood made of a leaf dyed +crimson, and a hat they had given him from the launch. He was a tall, +robust man, and very supple, and showed himself to be arrogant. Wounded +in feet and legs, they trembled violently. He made fierce faces with +his eyes and mouth. In a very loud voice he seemed to order us to +surrender. With his lance, brandishing it menacingly, he made as +many thrusts as he could. With the intention of making him quiet, +two muskets were fired off. The others cried out and threw up their +arms, but he made light of it. With great pride he showed more signs +of his anger; and, finding he could do nothing, he quickly passed both +ships and went to where the launch was, following all the other canoes. + +At this time both the ships anchored, there being a land breeze, +and all the natives went on shore, and showed themselves ready for +war. In a short time the wind was abeam, and though light, it swung +the ships so as to bring them too near the shore, and they were in +great danger. The Captain ordered the cables to be slipped and sail +to be made in great haste, sending the boats to recover the anchors +and cables. The natives, it seemed, either for love or sorrow, on +seeing how quickly we departed without carrying out our good or evil +intentions, not understanding the reasons any more than we understood +theirs, many of them came swimming and taking hold of the oars of one +of the boats, trying with all their force to take them from those who +were rowing. Such was the courage and audacity of the old man with +the cloak that, only with a stick, he attacked an Ensign standing on +the forecastle, who received the blow on his shield. He did not like +to return it, because it was the Captain's order that no harm was to +be done to the natives either in person or property. But I suspect, +according to what happened afterwards, that there was less care about +this order than appeared. + +The launch and boats collected where the ships had been. The Captain +sent for the Admiral, and told him that he had determined to send an +armed party on shore next day with the boats, and the launch as an +escort. The party, by good management, was to bring on board at least +four boys, one of them being the youth who has already been described, +and the others to be like him. It is to be noted that, the ships and +crews being placed in such manifest danger in so small an island, this +method or some other is necessary to get the wood and water of which we +are in want, and which should be sought for to the S. and S.W. These +instructions were repeated several times, and a strong desire was +expressed that the Admiral himself should be the leader of the party. + +We stood off and on during the night, very desirous that it should come +to an end, and when the day dawned the Admiral started with the landing +party. At the first place the landing was opposed by the natives, +and he was obliged to go further on. Here all the men jumped into +the sea, the waves dashing against them and rolling them over, and +they reached the shore after much buffeting and in great danger. One +boat was capsized, leaving the four rowers underneath. Another wave +righted her again, and the men were saved. They were not sailors, +so that the loss caused by them was serious, in jars and other things +for getting water and fuel, and in a certain number of arquebuses. + +On the beach there were a great number of natives, ranged in order +and armed; and all with one voice gave a pabori, which I understand +to be a kind of intoned shout or war cry, and they closed with a +noise very brief but terrible. They came against us, and it was +necessary to attack them with vigour owing to their being so close; +and the arquebuses, which are a terror to those who do not know them +but see their effects, terrified them, and they fled, carrying, as +they had brought, the king or chief in a litter on their shoulders, +holding palm leaves to shade him. Two or three were left behind, and +set fire to the dry grass at intervals. We understood that this was +either a signal of peace, or an imitation of the fire from our muskets. + +The fugitives all fled to a village under a grove of palm trees, +near a lake which the island has in the middle. Most of them went in +canoes to the other side. + +The Admiral formed his corps de garde, and a boy came to them, +as they said, so beautiful and with such golden hair, that to see +him was the same as to see a painted angel. With crossed hands he +offered them his person, either as a prisoner or to do what they +liked with him. The Admiral, seeing him so humble and so handsome, +embraced him and dressed him in breeches and shirt of silk, which +the Captain had given out of the store for barter, supplied with this +object by His Majesty. The boy, to show his pleasure, climbed up some +very tall palm trees with agility, and threw down cocoa-nuts for us, +asking if we wanted more. Many other natives, seeing that he was well +treated, came down and arrived where our people were. The Admiral, +without moving, called that, the better to secure them, the capture +would be much easier when they were close together. But Satan, +who does not sleep at such important junctures, contrived that an +ill-conditioned recruit should enter one of their houses. The owner +opposed his entrance. Another of our men came up; but the native used +his club so well that he would have killed one if others had not come, +for he was lying senseless on the ground, while his companion ran +away. The native faced our people, and an ensign named Gallardo, +who came up first, fired a shot at him. When he felt that he was +wounded and saw the blood, he rushed upon Gallardo with great courage, +who, to stop him, ran him through with his sword. He fell dead on +the ground who, as a valiant defender of his house, did not deserve +such a fate. Owing to this death, and to others which followed, the +Admiral lost the opportunity he had desired and planned. And now, to +follow the plan and what depended upon it, he set forward to wrestle +with fortune. When the natives saw what had happened, they fled like +the rest, and so our people remained with all their trouble in vain; +for so great a misfortune suffices and exceeds what is wanted. One +of our men said of the dead that it was of little importance that we +should have sent them to the Devil to-day, as they would have to go +to-morrow--a sentiment very far from all reason, and especially when +they had the Faith of Christ at the doors of their souls. + +The soldiers, divided into squadrons, marched into the interior. On +the path taken by Gallardo and some friends a noise was heard, +and the branches were seen to move. They all got ready their arms, +and Gallardo cocked his piece and pointed it, moving to see what it +was. Coming near, there rose up some children in haste and fear--two +boys and three girls, all pretty creatures, the oldest about ten +years--and with them a lady, graceful and sprightly, with neck, +bosom, and waist well formed, hair very red, long and loose. She +was extremely beautiful and pleasant to look upon, in colour very +white; and, being so pretty, it was a great surprise to our people, +more than to her; for, with quick steps and smiling face, she came +forward to receive Gallardo, who gave her his new cloak, which he +carried doubled under his left arm; and presently, with great love, +both arms extended, she embraced him, and gave, according to their +custom, the kiss of peace on the cheek. The finding of this nest did +not fail to be useful to our people, as they told me afterwards, for +the lady did not prove to be prudish in going with them; so that--and +I say this--they left behind them a rich capture, which I shall always +feel to be the great loss of six souls. + +Passing onwards, they saw behind some bushes an old man concealed, +who could scarcely open his eyes. Gallardo, seeing that he was so +afflicted, gave him a hand, and was surprised that he could grasp +with such strength, and that there should be such vigour in one who +seemed so weak. + +Having seen what he could of the island, the Admiral went back to +the boats with his party, where he found the surf as furious as +when he landed. To such an extreme did they come on the sight of it, +that many wanted to remain on the island, where the sea urchins on +the beach hurt their feet. They embarked with difficulty and danger, +and returned to the ships. The Admiral excused himself from having +an interview with the Captain, whose regret need not be mentioned, +owing to his annoyance at the mismanagement. + +In the houses of the natives a great quantity of soft and very fine +mats were found, and others larger and coarser; also tresses of +very golden hair, and delicate and finely woven bands, some black, +others red and grey; fine cords, strong and soft, which seemed of +better flax than ours, and many mother-o'-pearl shells, one as large +as an ordinary plate. Of these and other smaller shells they make, as +was seen and collected here, knives, saws, chisels, punches, gouges, +gimlets, and fish-hooks. Needles to sew their clothes and sails are +made of the bones of some animal, also the adzes with which they dress +timber. They found many dried oysters strung together, and in some +for eating there were small pearls. Certain white hairs were seen, +which appeared to be those of an animal. + +This island is very flat, and about 6 leagues long. In one part, +which is nearly submerged, is the water which the natives drink, which +seems to me to be only rain-water detained in the sand on its passage +to the sea. In this same part there are some collections of huts. The +land is divided among many owners, and is planted with certain roots, +which must form their bread. All the rest is a large and thick palm +grove, which is the chief sustenance of the natives. Of the wood and +leaves they build and roof their houses, which are of four vertientes, +[90] curiously and cleanly worked, each with a roof, open behind, +and all the floors covered and lined with mats, also made of palms; +and of the more tender shoots they weave fine cloths, with which the +men cover their loins, and the women their whole bodies. + +Of these palms the natives also make their canoes, and some very large +vessels, twenty yards in length and two wide, more or less, in which +they navigate for great distances. They hold about fifty persons. Their +build is strange, there being two concave boats about a fathom apart, +with many battens and cords firmly securing them together. Of these +palms they make masts, and all their rigging, sails, rudders, oars, +paddles, utensils for baling, their lances and clubs. On these palms +grow the cocoa-nuts, which serve them for food and drink, grease for +their wounds, and cups to hold their water. It may almost be said that +these trees sustain the good people who are here, and will remain in +the wilderness until God takes pity on them. + +This island was calculated to be 1,600 leagues from Lima, in latitude +10° 20'. The port where the vessels were anchored is on the north side, +very near the land, and in front of the village. It appeared well to +the Captain that it should receive the name of "Peregrina." [91] + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + + What happened after leaving this island. + + +In latitude 10° 20' we continued our course to the westward, making +for the Island of Santa Cruz, having met with fine weather, some mists, +and some changes of wind from W. to N.W. until the 21st of March. This +day being the equinox, the needles were observed at sunrise and sunset, +and it was found that the variation was N. by E. 1/2 E. + +In the night of the following day, being Holy Thursday, processions +were made in all three vessels, with much burning of wax and +discipline. All night the altars were standing, and men on their +knees put up continual prayer. + +On the same night there was a great and total eclipse of the sun. It +seemed to begin at eight o'clock at night, and lasted two hours +and a-half. + +Now that so many days had passed without reaching the Island of Santa +Cruz, where there was the hope of anchoring in the Bay of Graciosa, +and of quenching the terrible thirst they felt in the water-springs, +and because the execution of this desire was so long delayed, the +Captain, it was said, should make amends. Some of them said that he +merited exemplary punishment for having, solely for his own profit and +advantage, taken them all to die in these great gulfs of the ocean; +that the supposed land was a dream; and that he had deceived the Pope +and the King with his stories. According to what afterwards became +known, worse things were said of him than if he had been a Turk. The +Captain replied to all this that it was not a new thing to him, for +in other voyages he had sailed with men who were easily wearied. What +such men wanted was good health, plenty to eat and drink, little +work, many complaints, much grumbling together, and as little love +as possible for the voyage, with much fear of the weather. It was +not to be desired that vile mothers should bring forth such harmful +and ugly monsters. Often it is found that officers do what they like +rather than what they are ordered to do. Some sell the stores in their +charge, others give them away to secure silence or to make friends, +in fear of enemies; and for many other objects all deceive more or +less. As the interested persons are witnesses of these truths, they +keep the secret well. So many are culpable in these or other ways, +that they force him who governs to make a faithful man of a thief, +for in any other way there would be internecine war. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + + The assembly of Pilots; what happened at it, and the arrest of + the Chief Pilot. + + +On the 25th of March, being Easter eve, the Chief Pilot said in public +that he found the distance from Callao to be 2,220 leagues, and that +he said so for what might happen in consequence. For this reason, +and because there was uneasiness and difference of opinion respecting +the voyage among some, the Captain ordered a flag to be hoisted on +the maintopmast, the signal for counsel; in order that the people, +who were little satisfied with what they heard the Chief Pilot say, +might be appeased and quieted. The two other vessels closed, and +the Admiral, Luis Vaez Torres, Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña, and +from the launch the Captain of her, Pedro Bernal Cermeño, all three +being pilots, came in their boats to the Capitana. Being together, +with the Chief Pilot and his assistant, Gaspar Gonzalez, the former, +without any apparent cause, went up into the deck-house in a great +state of agitation, a thing which appeared to everyone very strange +and very bad. The Captain called him down, and, when he had come, +the meeting was thus addressed:-- + +"This meeting is convoked in order that each one may state in public +the number of leagues he believes we are from the port of Callao, also +the reason why we have not yet come to the island of Santa Cruz, having +navigated in order to reach it, and on the same parallel. Take notice +that it is large and not low, and that near it there is a volcano so +high that it may be seen at a distance of 40 leagues; also that the +distance of Santa Cruz from Lima is 1,850 leagues." When the Captain +had said this, the Pilots showed their charts and notes. As they were +only by dead reckoning, there were great differences, especially +in the reckoning of the Chief Pilot, which was 2,300 more or less, +and in that of Captain Bernal. The Admiral said that he made it 2,000 +leagues, and that there may be currents which detained the ships, or +that he may have over-rated his distances, or that Santa Cruz may be +further from Lima than is shown in the charts; and other explanations +which at present they could not make out. If we sailed on the same +parallel to the year's end without seeing the sought-for island, +it would be understood that we had not passed by it. The Pilot, Juan +Bernardo de Fuentidueña, was of the same opinion; his position and +that of his assistant not being so far in advance as the others. + +The Chief Pilot wishing, for reasons he gave, to make it believed +that his position was the right one, asked the Captain to look to the +north, where he would see very large and swollen waves, a certain sign +that we were much further to the east than was supposed. The Chief +Pilot also said that we had been sailing for ninety-four days. The +Captain replied that in the former voyage the island of Santa Cruz +was sighted after sixty-nine days, and though it was true that we +had now been sailing for a long time, there were many nights when +the swell was against the ship's progress, and that on many others +they had been under very small sail; that there had been detentions +of days at the various islands in seeking for ports, and that during +nearly all the month of May, in which we were, there had been calms +or light winds, while there had not been wanting in other periods of +the voyage calm weather or changes of wind, or other causes for waste +of time, which reduced the real number of days' runs to sixty-four, +and that for sixty-nine there wanted five still, to equalise the two +voyages. He himself had taken the sun in the island of Santa Cruz, +and he was certain that the latitude was 10° 20', and that we neither +were behind nor in advance. + +Presently the Chief Pilot showed on his chart the track he had drawn +upon it from Callao to 26°, which the ships reached, the course +being nearly W.S.W. It seemed that this was his chief mistake, for he +multiplied degrees on the W.S.W. course, which is the direction in +which he had to navigate, and he laid down the route by the course, +which is the same as by it and by the latitude; when it should have +been, for more accuracy, by the estimated leagues and the known +latitude. He did not calculate for errors in determining distances +in a route from east to west, and their two quarters, caused by the +variation of the needle, more or less leeway, winds and sails and +other things to be considered, and necessary calculations so as to +be able to mark on the chart the position nearest the truth. This +was not the navigation that the Chief Pilot had been accustomed to +make. His experience was from Acapulco or Panama to Callao, along the +coast, and when out of sight of land, it is a short distance off, +and even if it is great, the land is extensive and well known that +he had to seek, which, if not seen on one day, will be on the next; +and if he does not make a landfall where he intended, he can do so +where the coast is known, and find the port he seeks. + +Having made a calculation of all that has been said, and laid down +what was afterwards found when we came to the port of Acapulco, it was +established that there was an error of 600 leagues, as can be proved +when necessary. The Captain gave these and other reasons to all, and +some to the Chief Pilot, who became agitated, and again went up into +his deck-house. Thence he declared that he came to serve the King, and +not for pay, and that he had worked hard in fitting out the ships and +at other duties. To all this the Captain replied that all present were +aware that, without knowing him, nor owing him anything, nor wanting +him, but only to do him good he had been taken, but the Captain had +seen that, by his inefficiency, it became impossible that he could be +any use. Finally, the Chief Pilot showed himself to be ungrateful. The +Captain said to him that it was enough to know that it was incredible +how much he had said, and that it was not to be hoped from his mind +that his work would be well to the point. In fine, in the ship it +was said that there was one who did not wish that lands should be +discovered, nor that anything should be found; and the Captain, seeing +the state of affairs, and the obligation to all, said to the Admiral +that he was to take away the Chief Pilot as a prisoner. Presently it +was reported to the Captain that the ship was in a state of mutiny, +owing to what he had said in public. "Is there one that objects, it +being for the royal service, that I turn the Chief Pilot out of the +ship?" One who spoke in his favour was ordered to hold his tongue, +being told that the day before he had said just the contrary. + +With the departure of the Chief Pilot all his friends were much +distressed; but the ship was without those licences and disturbances +which had been going on until now. + +The Captain said to Pedro Bernal Cermeño that he wished him to remain +and assume the office of Chief Pilot, and he went to fetch his clothes +from the launch. But his people showed themselves so discontented +at his going that, his exhortations not sufficing, he was forced to +threaten them. Thus he apparently quieted them, and there remained +as Chief Pilot Gaspar Gonzalez de Leza, an honest man and good pilot. + +The Captain caused a block to be placed at the yard-arm, and from +that time forward he lived with a caution necessary among such +villains. He said: "For what evil deeds that I have done do I go sold +in this ship, where are some to whom I have done such good deeds, +and desire to do more? The great mistake was not to have thought of +bringing irons, fetters, and chains from Lima, intending to oblige +by faithful treatment and to bring out the good." While the Captain +was still in Madrid, he went to see a Friar, Andrés de San Vincente, +a Dominican; and he said that, navigating with the Chief Pilot of +Ternate to Malacca, the ship he was in was lost; on account of which, +and the fault that the passenger caused, and the exigency in which +they placed him, he said: "Oh, Captain Quiros, this is your fault, +because you did not chastise me for the occasion I gave you, your +piety not allowing you." + +There were not wanting in the ship those who were tired of her, +and they asked the Captain to let them play a little, and that the +winnings should be given for the souls in purgatory. But the Captain +said to them many times that they would not risk to go on with such +new and good work if there was playing and swearing. As for the alms +offered from the results of betting, he would not want to take a soul +out of purgatory, and set it on the road to Heaven, if it left his +and the souls of others in hell; and it would be much better to give, +without playing, that which would be given by playing. For passing the +time there are very good books, and one who would teach to read, write, +and count to those who do not know how; also a master-at-arms, black +swords, [92] practised soldiers to teach recruits, and one who would +teach them the art of fortification and artillery, the spheres and +navigation; and that these pursuits were better than to play for money. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + + Relates how they came in sight of the third inhabited island, + and what happened there. + + +Still with a westerly course we proceeded, with much anxiety arising +from the confusion in determining the distance of our ships from the +port of Lima, and still more owing to the allowance being so short that +neither our thirst was quenched nor our hunger satisfied. At last God +sent us a good shower of rain, and plenty of water was collected. The +people derived much consolation from this provision of Heaven, and at +seeing soon after many snakes, fish found in shallow water, turtles, +wild fruit, cocoa-nuts, trunks of trees, land birds, currants, and +other signs of the approach of land. We therefore navigated at night +under small sail, keeping a good look-out, the lanterns lighted, with +the launch ahead, having orders to signal with lights if there were +rocks or land. So we continued until the 7th of April. On that day, +at three in the afternoon, a man at the mast-head of the Capitana cried +out: "I see land to the N.W., high and black." The voice sounded well +to all; the sails were trimmed, and the bows turned to the land. We +lay-to that night, and in the morning we found ourselves on a bank, +where the least depth was 12 fathoms. There was a great excitement +over this, which lasted during the two hours that it took to cross +over the shoal, always sounding, and with the anchors ready and +look-out men at the mast-heads to report what they saw. + +We arrived near the island, and saw some smoke rising on the north +side, which doubled our delight and gave us hopes of getting water, +which chiefly engaged our thoughts. Night closed in, and next +day the Captain ordered the Admiral, with the launch and a boat, +to go and reconnoitre the island, while the ships, at the position +where they were, found a port, where they anchored with incredible +joy. The Admiral returned in the afternoon, very well satisfied with +the appearance of the land, and it was settled that the next day we +should seek a better port, fuel, and water. + +It was scarcely dawn when the Admiral left the ships with an armed +party in the launch and boats, and at a distance of 2 leagues found a +village on a small reef. The natives, in great haste, took their women +and children inland, and all that they could carry away, while 150 of +them took their arms. One came forward shouting--it was not understood +for what purpose,--a musket was fired off merely to astonish them, +and when they heard it they all dived into the water except the first +native. This man came near us, and by signs told us not to fire, +and that he would make his people put down their bows and arrows; +so this was done on both sides. He came to the boats, and gave his +hand to the Admiral in token of friendship, giving him to understand, +by pointing to his head, that he was the lord of the land, and that +he was called Tumai, and by another name--Jalique. + +Presently another native came and looked at us with astonishment, +and we looked at him with no less care: owing to his colour being so +white, and so brown as regards beard and hair, that our people called +him "the Fleming." His name was Olan. + +The Admiral asked Tumai to order the natives not to shoot their arrows, +and to go away from there, that his men might land. At one word from +Tumai they all went away to the island, and he alone remained. Then +our people landed peacefully, before anything else forming a corps de +garde in one of the houses, placing sentinels in appropriate places, +and the rest lodged in the village. + +By signs Tumai showed the Admiral his houses, and asked him not +to set them or the others on fire. He further said that he would +assist and give what his island contained. The Admiral showed him +great friendship; and, the better to impress him with it, he dressed +him in shot silk, [93] which he seemed to value highly. Presently +a boat was sent to report to the Captain all that had taken place, +and that there was a very good watering-place near the village. The +ships should shift their berths to a port much nearer, and the launch +anchored still nearer the village, between the land and a rock. + +When the ships were anchored, all the friars landed and went to the +village; and at the request of the Captain they performed the First +Mass of Our Lady of Loreto, with a commemoration of St. Peter. The +natives, while they were saying Mass, were present, very attentive +on their knees, beating their breasts, and doing everything they saw +the Christians do. It is certainly a great pity, when one comes to +think of it, with what facility all the people of those parts would +receive the Faith if there was any one to teach them; and yet what +a great perdition there is of such a vast number of souls as are +condemned here! God will be best served if the time is made to come +very quickly that will bring the blessing of blessings, of which +these people are so ignorant, of others so desired. + +Next day, at the request of Tumai, the Admiral sent him to the ship +with a soldier, that he might tell the Captain that the Chief had come +to see him, and who he was. The Captain received him with a cheerful +countenance, and embraced him, and Tumai gave him the kiss of peace +on his cheek. They were seated in the gallery, and the table was got +ready that he might eat. But he declined to eat anything, though he +was pressed to do so. + +The Commissary was present; and that Tumai might understand that he +was a person to be respected, the Captain kissed his hand, and told +Tumai that he should do the same, which he did. + +The Captain asked Tumai whether he had seen ships or people like us. He +gave it to be understood that he had not, but that he had received +reports about them. He was asked about the volcano that had been seen +in the former voyage, and he said, by signs with fire, that it was +five days' voyage to the west, and that in his language it was called +"Mami," and that there the Island of Santa Cruz was near and in sight, +the native name of which was "Indeni." The Captain also told him of +the death inflicted upon the Chief Malope during the other voyage, +and of the head which the Adelantado Mendaña sent as payment, as may +be read in the account of the voyage. [94] It was understood that +this was the reason why he and all his people showed themselves to +be so alarmed when they saw arquebuses, and explained their knowledge +of ships and people like us. + +The Captain further asked Tumai whether he knew of other lands far or +near, inhabited or uninhabited. For this he pointed to his island, +then to the sea, then to various points of the horizon; and having +explained by these signs, he began counting on his fingers as many as +sixty islands, and a very large land, which he called "Manicolo." The +Captain wrote down the names, having the compass before him, for +noting the bearing of each island from the one where they were, +called "Taumaco," to S.W., S.S.W., and N.W. To explain which were +small islands, Tumai made small circles, and for larger ones larger +circles; while for the large land he opened both his arms and hands +without making them meet. To explain which were the distant islands, +and which were nearer, he pointed to the sun, then rested his head on +his hand, shut his eyes, and with his fingers counted the number of +nights one had to sleep on the voyage. In a similar way he explained +which people were white, black, or mulattos; which were mixed, which +friendly, which hostile. He gave it to be understood that in one +island they ate human flesh, by biting his arm, and indicated that +he did not like such people. In this way and in others it appeared +that what he said was understood. He repeated it many times until +he was tired, and, pointing towards the S.W., W., and other parts, +he gave it to be well understood how many more lands there were. He +then showed a desire to return to his house, and the Captain, the more +to please him, gave him things brought for barter, and he departed +after embraces and other tokens of love. + +Next day the Captain went to the village where our people were, and in +order to corroborate what Tumai had said, he assembled the natives on +the beach. Holding a paper in his hand, with the compass before him, +he began asking them all once and many times respecting the lands +to which Tumai had given names, and all agreed. They gave tidings of +other inhabited islands, and also of that great land. Other persons, +on that day and at other times, put the same questions to the natives, +and always with the same result, so that it appeared that these people +were truthful. They were much astonished at seeing one reading a paper, +and, taking it in their hands, they looked at it in front and behind. + +One day the natives were seen eating certain pieces of meat, and they +were asked cautiously what it was. That they might be understood, +they showed a piece of raw hide with the hair on, and one put his +hands on his head, intending it to be understood, with other very +intelligible signs, that in those great lands there were cows and +buffalo; and when they were shown pearls on the button of a rosary, +they said they had them. + +They liked much to see us place our guard. They showed themselves +well contented at the way they were treated. All they gave was eaten +without scruple, and all they were given was taken with good will. They +established great friendship with each of our people that they took a +fancy to, exchanging names, calling them comrades, and treating them +as if their acquaintance had been of long standing. It came to such +a point that some of our people went alone to their villages without +causing any offence, or any of our things being missed, such as our +clothes left in the streams where they were being washed, or pots +and copper kettles. + +An agreement was made with Tumai about wood and water for the ships, +all which he sent with great good will--as much as we needed--by +natives in canoes. Some concealed themselves, others went on board +and asked for bells, which they esteemed very much, and other things +that were given them, with which they returned contented. + +Tumai was lord of this and other islands. His age was fifty; a man with +a good body and face, handsome eyes, well-formed nose, colour rather +brown, beard and hair turning grey. He was grave and sedate, prudent +and wise in what he did, and what he promised he performed. Once he +wanted to go to a village, to see two women he had there. He asked +leave, and left one of his sons as a hostage. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + + Gives an account of this island, of the people, their food and + canoes, and of our departure from it. + + +The native name for this island is Taumaco. It received the name of +Nuestra Señora del Socorro in memory of the succour found there. [95] +It is in latitude 10° 20'. Its circumference is 10 leagues, more or +less. It is moderately high and well wooded. For this reason, and its +shape, the view of it is pleasant. It runs east and west. Along its +beaches there are many palm groves, villages with few houses, and a +quantity of canoes. It is distant from Lima 1,650 [96] leagues. On the +east side there are three pointed rocks, which are only bare when the +wind is E. or N.E., and between them and the island is the port where +we anchored first. It has 25 fathoms of depth. The second anchorage is +on the south side of the island, west of a rock which is under water, +depth 18 fathoms, with bottom of rough coral, which chafes cables, +so that ours were buoyed. It is without shelter; and for this reason, +and the high seas that rise, we lay at single anchor, and in some +anxiety and danger. + +The village of Tumai is on the south side, a little apart from the +island, and surrounded by water, so we called it Venice. They cannot +embark in or land from their canoes, except when it is high water. It +has in front, at a distance of an arquebus-shot, a small valley with +fruit trees, crops, and a small stream of very clear and wholesome +water, whence was got that which was taken on board. The houses are +large and clean, framed with wood, the roof of sweet canes covered +with palm leaves, with two or three low doors, and the floors covered +with reeds. The beds are of matting, with stools somewhat curved +to put the heads on. There are larger houses, and in them certain +canoes with large and well-carved trunks, with decks of plank, +and very strongly fastened with beams and poles. These go down on +one side until they reach the water, [97] acting as a counterpoise +to prop up, enabling them to carry more sail. The joinings of the +vessel are cemented together with a certain gum which is found here, +that burns like a candle when set on fire, and oils well. The inside +has a small cabin or retreat, in which all the provisions are kept +when at sea. The bows were ornamented with pearl shells, and close +by were the paddles, rigging, ropes, and large mat sails. Each canoe +will hold thirty or forty persons. There was also an open space with +certain poles, some of them dyed red, for which the natives have great +respect, cloths, matting, and cocoa-nuts being collected there. It +was understood to be a burying-place of some of their chief people, +or a place where the Devil speaks to them. + +The island yields roots and fruits, such as yams, cocoa-nuts, +plantains, sweet canes, and some very large almonds, whose pips are +formed of leaves. They are sweet and very pleasant to eat. The nutmegs +are only used by the natives as a paste to dye their arrows. Other +fruits were seen and eaten, and a small pig. They do not eat the +hens. They killed ten or a dozen cocks, but they hid the hens. A small +dog was seen. We found a ball of artimonia, and it was ascertained +that they make them to fight with, fastened to the ends of sticks, +serving as maces. + +The natives are tall as a rule, straight, vigorous, well-favoured, +of a clear mulatto colour more or less, others very close upon being +black. There may be some who have come from other islands by way +of contract, or as prisoners. Some of them work. They cover their +parts with cloths they weave at small looms. They use the buyo, food +also used in the Philippines, which is said to preserve the teeth +and strengthen the stomach. Their arms are bows and arrows. They +seem to be a people fond of fighting with natives of other islands; +two of them were wounded and bruised from this. They told our people +that they would go to help and to avenge the others who had been hit +with arrows. One gave us to understand that he was a surgeon. + +Two leagues to the west there is another island, inhabited, and +apparently about the same size as Taumaco. It is called Temelflua. To +the N.E. of it, at a short distance, are two small islands, rather +rocky. + +The ships being ready, the Admiral received orders to embark, taking +some natives with the objects already stated. The Admiral sent Tumai +in advance, the Captain having sent for him to take leave. Tumai +and two others were in a canoe talking with the Captain, who gave +them a sash and other things, when the boats arrived with our people +and four natives, who had been seized, so that Tumai might not see +them. But they saw Tumai, and cried out to him to help them. Tumai, +seeing that there was no remedy, was deaf to their cries, and for his +own safety he shoved off from the ship. The Captain fired a piece as +a signal for the launch to weigh. The two companions of Tumai then +jumped into the water, and swam on shore. Tumai remained without +showing any fear. This man was valorous, and his kindness was worthy +to be celebrated and to eternize his name, and his sorrow mourned +for. Our people embarked with two natives in each ship, the anchors +were weighed, and sail was made at sunset on Tuesday, the 18th of +April, running great danger of striking on a rock. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + + Another inhabited island is sighted, and it is related how three + natives escaped from the ships, and other things that happened. + + +The ships were pursuing their course, when a certain person from the +Almiranta shouted to the Captain that they should go in search of the +Island of Santa Cruz. The Captain answered that the ships had to put +their heads, as they were now put, to the S.E., with the intention +of following that and other courses, for they now had sufficient wood +and water to enable them to find what they were seeking. God had given +us a N.W. wind, one as well suited for that intention as it sounds. + +We stood on under little sail, for it was night, and the sea unknown, +when towards dawn one of the natives sprang into the sea. He was a +youth, but tall and vigorous, of good countenance and gentle bearing, +whom the Captain prized highly for the ship. The sailors called as +if he could understand them: "Come back to the ship; do not drown +yourself. See how the Devil deceives him! Why should you lose so much +good as surrounds you here?" But as his intention was different, +not caring for words so little understood, he went on swimming to +the island, which appeared to be about 3 leagues off. + +We went on our way, and in the afternoon of the third day we saw an +island [98] at a distance. We hove to for the night, and made sail +towards it at daybreak. When we were near the land, the other native, +also quite young and not less gay and well disposed, before he could +be prevented, jumped overboard, and there remained, as if he was a +buoy. At the place where he was, not caring for cries and menaces, +with great effrontery, as if he was standing in the water, he took +off a shirt he had on, and with incredible speed began swimming to +the island, which he would soon reach, being near and to leeward. The +Admiral was advised of the flight of the natives, that he might keep +a closer watch over the two he had on board. + +Only with the object of finding out whether the island was inhabited, +we coasted along it. Presently, on an extensive beach, we saw natives +running to join others who were looking at us. The Admiral got into the +dingey to see what sort of people they were. The natives made signs, +with great demonstrations of love, for us to come on shore. Seeing +we would not for all their pressing, they gave a mantle of fine palm +leaves and notice of other lands, and bade farewell with great signs +of regret. We left them in that solitude, gazing at our ships, until +we lost sight of them. + +Our people were much pleased at the sight of the island, and still +more to see such fine-looking people: but suddenly one of the two +natives on board the Almiranta, a tall, robust, and strong man, jumped +into the sea, and soon was a long way off. They lowered the dingey, +but the Captain fired a piece off as a signal that they were not to +go after the fugitive, the boat being small and easily capsized. The +resolute swimmer went on towards the island with vigorous strokes, +being 2 leagues off and to windward. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + + Relates how, by reason of a strong wind from the N.W., the sea ran + across the track of the ships, and how they sighted a high island. + + +With great regret at the loss of the three best natives, though the +one that remained was more free (being the same the Captain pointed out +with his finger when they were seized), we proceeded on a S.E. course, +with a fresh N.W. breeze, until the following day. The wind increased +in force with thick weather, with flights of birds, and the night +approaching, so we struck the topmasts and hove to until the 24th +of April. On that day the sun was taken, and it was found that we +were in 14°, the ship having drifted 20 leagues. In the afternoon, +the weather having cleared up, the Captain ordered sail to be made, +and when he was asked what the course was to be, he answered: "Put the +ships' heads where they like, for God will guide them as may be right;" +and as it was S.W., he said it might continue so. So on that course, +with little sail, we steered during the night. Before sunrise on the +following day, a sailor of the Capitana named Francisco Rodriguez +went to the mast-head, and cried in a cheerful voice: "Very high land +ahead!" We all wanted to see it, and all looked at it together with +great contentment. Much greater was their satisfaction when they came +close, and saw smoke, and natives calling to the launch to come nearer. + +This island was calculated to be 1,700 leagues from Lima. It is 7 +or 8 leagues in circumference, forms a round hill, abrupt near the +sea, the highest and best-formed I have seen. Its shape is that of a +sugar-loaf with the crown cut off. It is cut like a saddle, whence +a good stream of water falls into the sea. We saw crops growing, +plantains, palms, and other trees. The inhabitants appeared to be +of a good colour, and well made. The people were on the N.W. side, +where, at a short distance from the shore, there is a bare rock. The +latitude of this land is 14°, and it was named San Marcos, [99] +because it was discovered on that Saint's day. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + + Tells how a great land was sighted, and other islands. + + +From this Island of San Marcos we went on a S.W. course, with men +at the mast-head; and at 10 in the forenoon, at a distance of 12 +leagues to the S.E., a land of many mountains and plains was sighted, +the end of which could not be seen throughout the day. The Captain +gave it the name of "Margaritana." + +About 20 leagues to the west, an island was seen that looked so +beautiful that it was determined to go to it. About a third of the +way we saw another island, 3 leagues off. It is flat, with a hill +that looks like a rock in the distance. Two canoes under sail came +from it, from which we knew that it was inhabited. On account of its +thick woods and pleasant appearance, the name of "Verjel" was given +to it. There was little wind, and, on account of the necessary caution +in navigating among unknown islands, we hove to during the night. + +The other day, being the 27th, we saw to the N. of where we were a +large island running N.E. and S.W., and the peaks of its numerous +mountains gave the Captain a strong desire to go and see it; but he +gave it up, owing to other things that occurred. Its latitude is 13°, +and it was named "Las Lagrimas da San Pedro." + +To the N.W. another island was seen, with a circumference of 60 +leagues. It has two high and sloping hills, one at each end. The +rest is flat and of very pleasant appearance, alike from its shape +and its numerous trees. Its latitude is less than 14°. It was named +"Portales de Belen." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + + Gives an account of what passed with some natives at an island. + + +Next day we arrived near the island which I said was to the westward +of that of San Marcos, and in all directions we saw columns of smoke +rising, and at night many fires. In the centre it is rather high, and +thence its slopes extend in all directions towards the sea, so that +its form is a massive round, with only the part towards the south a +little broken with ravines. It is a land of many palm trees, plantains, +verdure, abundant water, and thickly inhabited. The circumference is +about 50 leagues, though some gave it 100 leagues, and must support +about 200,000 inhabitants. Its latitude is 14° 30'. Owing to its +great beauty, it was given the name of "Virgen Maria." [100] + +Four canoes with unarmed natives came to the Almiranta, and made +signs to offer to take him into port. Seeing that our people did not +wish it, they made presents of cocoa-nuts and other fruits. Having +received a good return, they went back to their island. + +As the disposition of the natives seemed to be good, the Captain sent +a party in the launch and one boat, to examine the coast and find a +port. The party was under the command of Pedro Lopez de Sojo. They +found to the S. and S.E. clean bottom at 20 fathoms or less, where the +ships might well anchor if the weather to be expected was known. They +saw a great number of people on the island, who came out to see and +call to us. They followed the boat without passing certain boundaries, +and by this we supposed that there were partitions of property between +people not on good terms. Among them there were two colours. While +they were looking at each other and talking by signs, a man rushed +down from some rocks behind. He was well made, of a clear mulatto +colour, the hairs of his beard and head brown and crisp, and rather +long. He was robust and vigorous. With a jump he got into the boat, +and, according to the signs he made, he appeared to ask: "Where do you +come from? What do you want? What do you seek?" Assuming that these +were the questions, one of our people said "We come from the east, we +are Christians, we seek you, and we want you to be ours." He showed +himself to be so bold, that our people understood that he wanted to +make us believe that to him we were a small affair. He presently was +undeceived, for he was seized and brought to the ship, where he came +on board so fearlessly that we had to confess he was no coward. The +Captain embraced him, and asked about other land by signs, of which he +appeared to give extensive information. He pointed to several places +on the horizon, counted on his fingers several times, and ended by +saying, "Martin Cortal." [101] It was very pleasant to hear him, to +see how lively he was, how vigorous, how agreeable among our people; +having a bright look for all, including those who importuned him with +a desire for information. + +The night having come on, the launch arrived, and the Pilot of her +told the Captain that they were bringing a native prisoner, secured +by a hatchway chain. But he broke it; and, taking part of it and the +padlock with him on one foot, he jumped overboard. The Captain heard +this with great regret, fearing that the man had been drowned. To make +sure of the other, he ordered him to be given his supper and to be +put in the stocks, but on a bed where he could sleep. He also ordered +that the ships should go in search of the one that had escaped. Going +in search at ten at night, the look-out man heard a voice from the +water, and made out the place where the native, being tired out, was +struggling with death. To the cries of the swimmer came answer from +the prisoner, in such doleful tones that it caused grief to all to see +the one and hear the other. The swimmer was got on board, to the joy +of himself and us, and to our surprise that he could have sustained +such a weight on his foot for four hours. The padlock and chain were +at once taken off, and he was given his supper, with wine to drink, +and then put in the stocks, that he might not try it on again. There +both remained all night, talking sadly and in confusion. At dawn, +the Captain, pretending that he quarreled with all for putting them +in the stocks, let them out. He then ordered the barber to shave off +their beards and hair, except one tuft on the side of their heads. He +also ordered their finger-nails and toe-nails to be cut with scissors, +the uses of which they admired. He caused them to be dressed in silk +of divers colours, gave them hats with plumes, tinsel, and other +ornaments, knives, and a mirror, into which they looked with caution. + +This done, the Captain had them put into the boat, and told Sojo to +take them on shore, coasting along to the end of the island, to see +what there was beyond. The natives came, and, the fear being passed, +they sang their happy and unhoped-for fate. Arrived at the beach, +they were told to jump out, which they could hardly believe. Finally, +they jumped overboard, where there were many natives; among them +a woman with a child in her arms, who received the two with great +joy. It appeared that she was the wife of the first native, and +that he was a chief, for all respected and obeyed his orders. They +seemed to be contented, and gave each other many embraces, with gentle +murmurings. The Chief, pointing with his finger, seemed to be saying we +were a good people. Many came to where the boat was, and they showed +such confidence that, when one of our men asked the mother for her +baby, she gave it. Seeing that it was passed from one to another, +to be seen and embraced, the natives were well pleased. In fine, +a good understanding was established. + +The swimmer ran away, and presently came back with a pig on his +shoulders, which he offered to us. The Chief gave us another, +and a bunch of curious plantains, their shape being like that of +moderate-sized egg-plants [102] without points, the pulp orange colour, +sweet and tender. The other natives emulously presented cocoa-nuts, +sweet canes, and other fruits, and water in joints of cane four palmos +long and one thick. Pointing to the ships, they seemed to say that +they should anchor here, that they might give them all they had in the +island. Our people took their leave and went on to the point, where +they saw the coast of the island trending north, and the other island +of Belen at a distance of 4 leagues to the N.W. Satisfied with their +view, they returned to the ship. The boatswain's mate of the Almiranta +was wounded in one cheek by an arrow: certain natives, being envious +of the friendship of the others, or being enraged because, when they +called to our people they did not care to stop and speak with them, +shot off arrows, and had an answer from muskets. This wound healed +quickly, by which we knew that the arrows were not poisoned. More +mischief would have been done if the swimmer had not come running, +shouting, and making signs for the boat to keep away--a great proof +of gratitude. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + + Relates how they came in sight of two great and lofty lands; + how they went in search of one of them, and discovered a bay, + and a port in it. + + +This day one Melchor de los Reyes was looking out at the mast-head, +when, at three in the afternoon, he saw at a distance of 12 leagues +to the S.W. and S., more or less, an extensive land. For this, and +because the eye could not turn to a point that was not all land, +the day was the most joyful and the most celebrated day of the whole +voyage. We went on towards the land, and next day found ourselves near +a coast running to the west. The name of Cardona [103] was given to +this land in memory of the Duke of Sesa, who had taken so deep an +interest in the voyage, as well at Rome as at the Court of Spain, +and because the Captain felt very grateful. + +When we set out for the said land there was seen, far away to the S.E., +a massive and very lofty chain of mountains, covered with thick masses +of white clouds in the middle and on the heights, while the bases +were clear. It seemed from aloft that the coasts of these two lands +approached to form one. The Captain gave the name of "La Clementina" +to this range of mountains. It seemed to be in about 17°. [104] + +Having come to the land, an opening was seen in it, and, as it +appeared to be a port, the Captain sent an officer in a boat, with +soldiers and rowers, to examine it. In the afternoon he returned, +reporting that the opening formed a narrow island 6 leagues long, +running N. and S., rather high, inhabited, and well wooded; and where +it is sheltered to the E. and N.E., there was bottom at 30 fathoms, +and a strong current. The Captain gave it the name of "San Raimundo." + +Coasting along this island to the W., there came out on the beach many +tawny men, very tall, with bows in their hands, calling loudly to our +people. As we would not approach, they threw a great bundle of capons' +feathers into the sea, intending with this, and by sending out boys, +to induce us to come within shot. Then they shot off their arrows, +which we returned with muskets. Further on they saw many natives of +fine make and good colour, and away to S. and S.E. three and four +ranges of very high mountains, which seemed to join on to the other +ranges that had been seen to the S.E. + +With such good news that the land was inhabited, we sailed onwards +on a westward course; and at a distance of 6 leagues, on the 1st of +May, we entered a great bay, where we passed the night. Next day, +the Captain sent the Admiral away in a boat to look for a port. Two +canoes came out to the ships, with men in them, having their bows +ready. They stopped for an interval and rowed for another. They spoke +loudly, and looked at us and at the shore, showing themselves to be +troubled. Those in the launch fired off a piece to astonish them, +which it did, for they took to flight, rowing as hard as they could. + +The Admiral returned in the afternoon very well satisfied, and those +who accompanied him were equally pleased, and could not hold back +the joyful news that they had found a good port; for this is what +we had hitherto failed to find, though we had sought for one with +anxious wishes to succeed. Without a port, the discovery would be of +little importance. Next day, being the 3rd of May, the three vessels +anchored in the port with great joy, giving many thanks to God. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + + Relates the first sight of the natives of this bay, and an + encounter there was with them. + + +Next day natives were seen passing along the beach. The Captain, +with the boats, went to look at them, with the desire to take some of +them and send them back clothed and kindly treated, so that in this +and other ways friendship might be established. He did all he could +to induce them to get into the boats. They did the same to get us +to land. As we would not, they flung certain fruits into the water, +which were collected by us, and we went back to the ships. + +The day after, the Captain ordered the Admiral to go on shore with a +party of soldiers, and try by all possible means to catch some natives, +so as to establish peace and friendship, based on the good work we +intended to do for them. The party ran the boat high up on the beach, +and quickly formed in a squadron, for the natives were coming, and it +was not known with what object. Being near, they made signs and spoke, +but were not understood. Our people called to them in return. Then +the natives drew a line on the ground, and seemed to say that we were +not to pass beyond it. I understand that there was no one who could +make himself intelligible; and it is a great evil, on such occasions, +when there is a want of zeal or of management. Natives were seen +in the woods, and to frighten them some muskets were fired into the +air. A soldier who had lost patience, or who had forgotten his orders, +fired low and killed a native. The others, with loud cries, fled. A +Moor who was the drummer, cut off the head and one foot of the dead, +and hung the body on the branch of a tree, without being seen to do +it by those on the beach. It then happened that three native chiefs +came to where our people were, who, instead of showing them kindness +and bringing them on board, showed them their comrade without a head +and running blood, pretending that this cruelty was a means of making +peace. The chiefs, showing great sorrow, went back to where their +people were, and shortly afterwards sounded their instruments with +great force and noise, which was heard among the trees. Then from many +directions they began shooting arrows and darts, and throwing stones, +while our people fired on them, turning on one side or the other. + +The Captain saw all this from the ship where he was, with great regret +to find peace turned into war. It appeared to him best to land more +men in the direction taken by a number of natives, who were trying to +surround our people. The supporting party got into such conflict with +the enemy that the Captain was obliged to fire two pieces. The balls, +tearing branches off the trees, passed over the natives; but with this, +and the resistance made by our soldiers, the enemy retired. + +At the same time, the natives who were on the beach moved forward, +brandishing their clubs, and with arrows fitted to their bows and darts +poised to throw, menacing with loud shouts. Then a tall old native +advanced, making a sound on a shell with great force. He seemed to be +the same chief who had spoken to our soldiers, and I believe he said +that they would defend their country against those who came to it, +killing their inhabitants. Eight of our musketeers were in ambush, +and one of them unfortunately, as he afterwards stated, killed this +chief; and presently the rest desisted. Three or four raised their +dead on their shoulders with great celerity, and went inland, leaving +the neighbouring villages deserted. Such was the end of the peace that +the Captain hoped for and sought for, as the means of discovering the +grandeur of the land, and all that was contained in it; and such was +the intention that the Captain had, but which was but a sound. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + + Relates the causes which led the Captain to create a ministry of + war, and the names of the officers. + + +The Lord having been served that the Captain should find anchorage +for his ships in so long sought-for, so good, and so necessary a port, +seeing the excellence of the land which surrounded it, the necessity +there was to take possession in the name of His Majesty, feeling the +contest in his mind that his desires should be fulfilled, that there +should be full security for celebrating the divine offices, and that +for this and the rest that had been done here there was manifest risk, +for the natives with their arms, from the woods and the beaches, +continually attacked, so that we could not seek for wood, water, +or provisions, or fell timber for the ship's use to make certain +bulk-heads for storing and arranging the cargo; seeing, also, how much +it imported that the roads should be guarded by escorts, and that there +should be ambuscades to alarm the enemy and secure our safety; knowing +further that for the royal authority, the better establishment of the +work, the discipline of the people, the union of all their wills, +and for other hidden reasons, and for them altogether, it was very +necessary and obligatory to create a ministry of war and marine, so +that by land and sea there might be established such order that what +was desired might be the better secured; and that it may not be a cost +of His Majesty, and be the means of giving satisfaction, and of making +a foundation, and they themselves having petitioned for it, he named-- + + + To act as Admiral Pedro Bernal Cermeño. + Master of the Camp Luis Vaez de Torres. + Royal Ensign Lucas de Quiros. + Captain and Sergeant-Major Pedro Lopez de Sojo. + His Ensign Pedro de Castro. + His Sergeant Francisco Martin Toscano. + His Aide-de-Camp Francisco Davila. + Captain of the crew of the "Almiranta" Alonso Alvarez de Castro. + His Ensign Manuel Rodriguez Africano. + His Sergeant Domingo Andres. + Captain of the Launch Pedro Garcia da Lumbreras. + His Ensign Francisco Gallardo. + His Sergeant Antonio Gonzalez. + Captain of the Artillery Andres Perez Coronado. + Constables of the three Vessels Francisco Ponce. + Lazaro de Olivera. + Antonio Balalan. + Chief Pilot Gaspar Gonzalez de Leza. + Assistant Pilot Francisco Fernandez. + + +These elections having been made, presently the Camp Master asked the +Captain to leave him to sleep on shore with the people. The Captain +never wished to consent, because they should not sleep on the ground, +and because he did not wish for further licence with the natives, +and to avoid danger, and for other reasons which they could understand. + +The Master of the Camp, with the Sergeant-Major, officers, and sailors, +who were serving as soldiers, made such good progress on shore that by +Friday, the eve of Pentecost, they finished all that had been arranged, +without injury to any of our people. + +On the same afternoon the Captain assembled the people of all the +vessels, and addressed them in the following manner:-- + +"His Majesty, the King, our Lord, was served by sending me, at the +cost of his royal treasury, without giving me instructions or orders, +nor other memoir whatever, of what I was to do in these parts, nor +did he restrict my will as to what I was not to do; therefore, in the +name of the royal grandeur, I undertake what is best for His Majesty's +better service, and greater honour. In fine, all is left to my charge; +and this mercy was so great, that it has made me his perpetual vassal +and slave, and put upon me new obligations and cares to find how I can +better serve and please His Majesty so long as my life lasts. For this +I am of a mind, and determined to make a beginning of my honourable +thought, some time planned and desired to be put into execution; +for the good work that it promises for God and for the King, for +the strengthening of your resolves, for giving firmness and hope, +which are the qualities needed to achieve great and famous deeds, +the more when the honour and the reward are to be seen and palpable: +which are two things so sought after and loved in this present life, +and the want of which causes what happens to be evil. + +"The present subject to be announced to you, gentlemen, is that of an +Order, the title of which is to be the 'Knights of the Holy Ghost,' +with the constitutions and precepts to be kept and professed, guided +by such lofty and Christian ends as will be seen in them when the Lord +is served, as I shall be able to show. All is done in confidence that +His Holiness and His Majesty, each of those two Lords as regards what +concerns them, will be served in payment of my continual labours and +good desires, by confirming this Order, with advantageous privileges, +as long as the world endures: as well for the good that it secures +as for the merits of vassals so honourable and so loyal, as is shown +by the numerous services they perform, and will continue to perform, +in these parts. + +"For all I have said and can say on this subject, I seek from all the +consent of their free wills, in the names of the Most Holy Trinity, +in the name of the Roman Pontiff, in the name of His Catholic Majesty +the King, Don Philip, third of that name, King of Spain, and my Lord; +and I, the Captain Don Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, give to each one of +your mercies this cross, of a blue colour, which presently you are to +place on your breasts, being the insignia by which the Knights of the +Order of the Holy Ghost are to be known; and for the persons in whose +charge, if I should fail, is to be placed the discovery, pacification, +and possession of all these parts that we are discovering and may +discover in the time to come. + +"I pray heartily that the Knights may know and esteem the value of +this cross, gained with a determination to win much higher honours; +and they must bear in mind that, though it has not cost much money, +labour, sickness, nor time, that which it remains in their power to +pay in this very high enterprise is very great, for it is now known +that the enterprise holds a world for its heaven and its earth. + +"Pray to God, gentlemen, that it may serve Him to show me greater lands +and other things; for greater are my desires that the King our Lord may +deign to grant to all still greater favours. Here I, in his royal name, +offer to raise you to higher offices and dignities. I charge you all to +be, as it were, members of one body; and I announce to you that from +this day forward your obligations will be greater, and the rewards +or punishments greater which are merited for good or for bad deeds." + +All this was listened to with much pleasure and accepted with +satisfaction. The Captain asked them all to confess on Saturday, that +on Sunday, the day of Pentecost, they might earn the Holy Jubilee +which His Holiness had conceded to this expedition, and five other +days in each year. Presently the Father Commissary persuaded all, +and with his three priests he offered to confess, and all confessed. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + + Describes the celebration of the feast of the eve and the day of + Pentecost, and the taking possession in the names of the Catholic + Church, and of His Majesty. + + +On that night all three vessels displayed many lights, and they sent +off many rockets and fire-wheels. All the artillery was fired off; +and when the natives heard the noise and the echoes resounding over +hills and valleys, they raised great shouts. We sounded drums, rang +the bells, had music and dancing, and had other forms of rejoicing, +in which the men showed great pleasure. The Captain said to all: +"Gentlemen, this is the eve of my long-desired day, for which there +should be no empty hand nor person for whom the appointed good things +are not welcome, and as much more as the part he takes may deserve." + +It was not quite dawn when the Camp Master and ministers, taking with +them an armed party in the two boats, went on shore. They landed near +the launch with four small pieces to be used in a fort. Presently, +with joyous diligence a booth made of branches was set up on the beach, +surrounded by stakes, to serve as a fort in case of necessity. Within, +the monks arranged a clean and well-ordered altar under a canopy. This +was the first church, and was named by the Captain "Our Lady of +Loreto." Everything having been arranged as well as the time would +allow, it was reported to the Captain, and presently he left the ship +with the rest of the people. All the three companies were drawn up in +good order on the beach. The officers and soldiers looked so active and +honourable, with the crosses on their breasts, that I believe, if His +Majesty could see them, with such sharpened resolves to finish what +they had commenced, and to begin much greater things, that he would +estimate their value at what it was worth, and increase his bounties. + +The Royal Ensign came forth with the standard in his hands. The +banners, which were fluttering and brightening the whole +scene, received their tribute from discharges of muskets and +arquebuses. Presently the Captain came out and went down on his knees, +saying: "To God alone be the honour and the glory." Then, putting +his hand on the ground, he kissed it, and said: "O Land! sought for +so long, intended to be found by many, and so desired by me!" + +Then the Admiral came out with a cross made of the orange wood of +the country, which the Captain had caused to be made. Our Father +Commissary, with his five monks, all bare-footed, kneeling on the +beach, received it in their arms, saying with great tenderness: +"I adore thee, O Holy Cross, for the Author of our life, made +flesh, died on thee for me, so great a sinner, and for the whole +human race." Raising it and singing the "Lignum," with the people +in procession, we arrived at the door of the church; and there, +on a pedestal which had been placed for the purpose, the Captain +planted our cross, and ordered that the people should come round, +and that the secretary should read, as in a loud voice he did read, +the following documents:-- + + + Raising of the Cross. + + Be witnesses the heavens and the earth, and the sea with all its + inhabitants, and those who are present, that I, the Captain Pedro + Fernandez de Quiros, in these parts which up to the present time + have been unknown, raise and plant in the name of Jesus Christ, + Son of the eternal Father, and of the Holy Virgin Mary, true + God and man, this sign of the Holy Cross, on which His most holy + body was crucified, and where He gave His life as a ransom for + the whole human race. + + +In the same place, and at the same time, the six following possessions +were read, which our people heard with joy and gladness, the eyes of +many filling with tears. + + + Possession in the name of the most Holy Trinity. + + In these parts of the South, until now unknown, where I am, and + have come with authority from the Supreme Roman Pontiff, Clement + VIII., and by order of the King, Don Philip III., King of Spain, + despatched by his Council of State, I, Captain Pedro Fernandez + de Quiros, in the name of the most Holy Trinity, take possession + of all the islands and lands that I have newly discovered, and + desire to discover, as far as the South Pole. + + + Possession in the name of the Catholic Church. + + I take possession of all these, the said lands, in the name of + Jesus Christ, saviour of all men, how unknown soever they may + be, and in the name of His mother the most Holy Virgin Mother + of Loreto, and in the name of St. Peter and St. Paul, and of all + the holy apostles and disciples, and in the name of the universal + Vicar of Christ, the Roman Pontiff, and in the name of the whole + Catholic Church, and of all those pious, just, and holy things + that have a right in such possession; which I do with joy and to + the end that to all the natives, in all the said lands, the holy + and sacred evangel may be preached zealously and openly. + + + Possession in the name of St. Francis and his Order. + + I take possession of all the said lands in the name of my father, + St. Francis, and of all his religion and professors of it, and + being present, in the name of the Father Commissary, Friar Martin + de Monilla, Friar Mateo de Vascones, Friar Antonio Quintero, and + Friar Juan de Marlo, all four priests; and in the names of Fray + Juan de Santa Maria and Fray Francisco Lopez, both lay brethren, + come here, all six, at my request by order of His Holiness and of + His Majesty, and of their Commissary General and Provincial of + the province of the Twelve Apostles of Peru; from whose order I + desire that all the workers sent to tend this vineyard may come, + and the labourers who have to show His holy word and doctrine, + and to gather in the fruits. + + + Possession in the name of John of God and his Order. + + I take possession of all the said lands in the name of John of God, + and of all the professed brothers of his Order, and, being present, + in the name of Lazaro de Santa Maria, who came here in compliance + with a brief of His Holiness, given to me for that end, that the + same Brotherhood might found, administer, and maintain by their + professed charity all the hospitals there may be in those parts, + so necessary that the natives may learn all our methods, and hold + us in the love and veneration which the sight of our curing the + native sick, and giving them other benefits, deserve. + + + Possession in the name of the Order of the Holy Ghost. + + I take possession of all these lands, by the right that His + Holiness and His Majesty granted, to make just divisions of the + lands and of the people on them; for all the Knights that are + in these parts of the Order of the Holy Ghost as discoverers, + settlers, defenders, and preservers, and no other, obliged without + pay to serve in all the royal and public employments, with every + human and divine office as regards the natives as their defenders, + and with profession of all the rest that is in their constitution. + + + Possession in the name of His Majesty. + + Finally, I take possession of this bay, named the Bay of St. Philip + and St. James, and of its port named Santa Cruz, and of the site on + which is to be founded the city of New Jerusalem, in latitude 15° + 10', and of all the lands which I sighted and am going to sight, + and of all this region of the south as far as the Pole, which + from this time shall be called Australia del Espiritu Santo, + with all its dependencies and belongings; and this for ever, + and so long as right exists, in the name of the King, Don Philip, + third of that name King of Spain, and of the eastern and western + Indies, my King and natural Lord, whose is the cost and expense + of this fleet, and from whose will and power came its mission, + with the government, spiritual and temporal, of these lands and + people, in whose royal name are displayed there his three banners, + and I hereby hoist his royal standard. + + +The reading being finished, all cried with loud voices: "Long live +the King of Spain, Don Philip III., our Lord!" Then we entered the +church to give due thanks to God. + +They said three Masses, and the fourth, which was sung, was by +our Father Commissary. All the people took the sacrament very +fervently. This done, the three Ensigns, who now held the banners +in their hands, inclined them to the ground in front of the altar, +the Royal Ensign holding the royal standard. The Commissary blessed +them with great solemnity; and, at a certain signal that was given +to the ships, whose mast-head banners displayed the royal arms, and +at the sides the two columns and the plus ultra, with the streamers +fluttering, fired off all their guns with full charges; the soldiers +discharged muskets and arquebuses, and the gunners sent off rockets and +fire-wheels. In the middle of all this noise, all shouted with almost +infinite joy, and many times: "Long live the Faith of Christ!" And +with this the celebration of the festival came to an end. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + + What passed between the Captain and the late Chief Pilot, and + certain persons who spoke for and against; and how freedom was + given to two slaves. + + +Presently the former Chief Pilot prayed the Captain, with exaggerated +supplication, to pardon him. The Captain enquired of him for what +he asked pardon: for if he referred to things that affected him, +he might be certain that, without having to ask for pardon, he would +be pardoned; but if the pardon was asked for things connected with +the royal service, he must tell him what was well known, that his +treatment was reasonable and just. The Chief Pilot replied to this by +swearing, with great demonstrations of innocence, that he had neither +offended the King nor the Captain in anything, nor had desired to give +offence. According to him, I am the person who ought to ask for pardon. + +Then a certain monk took the Captain aside, and said that the Chief +Pilot was very obliged and grateful, and that from this time forward +he would work marvels in all things; and that he was already doing so, +as the monk could witness. The Captain answered that he left that to +God, who knew the most secret intentions and could not be deceived; and +that for himself, he looked to have treated the Chief Pilot in quite +a different manner, having entrusted to him business which included +good things and likewise his honour; and that although it was very +early, his recent acts having shown that neither his word nor his +offers were to be trusted, the fact of his having done so much good +to anyone made it unprofitable that he should remain under punishment. + +Other persons had given evidence to the Captain against the Chief +Pilot, and to all he answered that before God he could justify his acts +in giving information, pardoning, or giving hope. When such means were +of no avail, he held the rod in his hands, giving such blows as the +culprit deserved; and that he had kept the Chief Pilot a prisoner, +considering that to be a punishment which would be sufficient. + + +Freedom given to two slaves. + +The Captain asked an officer named Alonso Alvarez de Castro, and +Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña, Pilot of the Almiranta, that they +would give--as they did give with very good will, by reason of pious +motives and of the honour of the festival of that day--freedom to a +slave which each of them possessed, for which purpose they drew up +letters. This being done, we went to dine under the shade of great +tufted trees near a clear running stream, the corps de garde being +alert and the sentries posted. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + + The election of a municipality and of magistrates, names of the + persons elected, and what else happened until the crews embarked. + + +Having had his siesta, the Captain assembled the Master of the Camp, +Admiral, Royal Ensign, Sergeant-Major, and Captains, and said to them +that, possession having been taken of that land, and the city having +received the name of the New Jerusalem, with their concurrence, +he would elect a municipality and such officers as is usual in a +city that was the capital of a province. As they expressed their +concurrence, it was agreed among all that the elections should be +made in the manner following:-- + + + Magistrates Don Diego Barrantes y Maldonado. + Luis de Belmonte Bermudez. + The Licentiate Alonzo + Sanchez de Aranda. + The Captain Manuel Noble. + Francisco de Medina. + Francisco de Mendoza y Sarmiento. + Francisco de Zandategui. + Antonio Francisco Camiña. + Juan Ortiz. + Alonso Perez de Medina. + Juan Gallardo de Los Reyes. + Pedro Carrasco. + Gil Gonzalez. + Secretary to the Municipality Santiago de Iriarte. + Justices of the Peace Don Alonzo de Sotomayor. + Captain Rodrigo Mejia de la Chica. + Chief Constable Captain Gaspar de Gaza. + Royal Officers: + Accountant Don Juan de Iturbe. + Treasurer Don Juan de la Peña. + Factor Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña. + Registrar of Mines Don Antonio de Chaves. + Store-keeper General Don Diego de Prado y Tovar. [105] + Overseer Don Juan de Espinosa y Zayas. [105] + + +As soon as the elections were completed, all the officials took +the oath, placing the right hand on a breviary, which the Father +Commissary held; swearing that they would be loyal to His Majesty, +in whose name the different offices had been given to them; and with +this the proceedings terminated. + +Afterwards, the municipal officers formed in order, and accompanied +by the rest of the people, went to the church. Within was the Father +Commissary, who, pointing to the upraised cross, said, "Here, +gentlemen, you have the Holy Cross, the semblance of that which, +by the mercy of God, secured all our remedy and all our good;" but +such were the tears he shed that he could not proceed. + +The Captain embarked, taking with him the same cross, the standard +and banners; and, on arriving on board, he ordered that block on +the yard-arm to be taken down, where it had been placed to punish +crimes. For the Captain could not believe that persons with such +an honourable destiny would do things the punishment of which would +be the rope. The Captain ordered the Master of the Camp to take an +armed party, and penetrate further into the interior than he had done +before. They saw more and better farms and villages than before, +and at one village they found the natives much occupied with their +dances. When they saw us they began a flight to the mountains, leaving +strewn about as they fled, bows, arrows, and darts. Our people found +two roast pigs, and all their other food, which they ate at their +ease. They carried off twelve live pigs, eight hens and chickens, and +they saw a tree which astonished them, for its trunk could not have +been encircled by fifteen or twenty men; so they returned to the ships. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + + Relates how they sowed some land; the entry into a valley; + capture of three boys, and what happened with the natives. + + +The Captain, on the last day of Easter, taking with him such an escort +as seemed necessary, went to an adjacent farm of the natives and sowed +a quantity of maize, cotton, onions, melons, pumpkins, beans, pulse, +and other seeds of our country; and returned to the ships laden with +many roots and fish caught on the beach. + +Next day the Captain sent the Master of the Camp, with thirty soldiers, +to reconnoitre a certain height, where they found a large and pleasant +valley, with villages. When the inhabitants saw us coming, many +assembled together in arms. We caught there three boys, the oldest +being about seven years of age, and twenty pigs. With these we began +a retreat, and the natives, with vigour and bravery, attacked our +vanguard, centre, and rearguard, shooting many arrows. The chiefs +came out to the encounter, and by their charges forced us to lose +the ground we were gaining. Arrived at a certain pass, our people +found the rocks occupied by many natives, who were animated by the +desire to do as much harm as possible. Here was the hardest fight, +their arrows and stones hurled down from the heights, causing great +danger to our men. When the Captain heard the noise of the muskets +and the shouting, he ordered three guns to be fired off, to frighten +the natives and encourage our people; and the better to effect this +at the port, those in the ships and on the beach were sent to support +the retreating party in great haste. The forces having united, they +came to the ships, saving the spoils, and all well. + +There was a certain person, who said in a loud voice: "Thirty pigs +would be better eating than three boys." The Captain heard this, +and said, with much feeling, that he would rather have one of those +children than the whole world besides. He made a speech on the subject, +concluding with the following words: "I give the blame to my sins, +and to those alone. And how much better would it be for the person +who spoke such nonsense if he had given praises to God, who, in a +way so strange and unthought-of, saved these three souls--a thing +which we must believe to have been predestined?" For this speech +there was some ill-feeling on the part of the man who had spoken, +and more from his friends. + +The natives, on the following day, having other ambuscades, came to +attack our watering party, who armed themselves in great haste. The +natives shot off their arrows, and our people fired their muskets. The +natives then fled, shouting as they went, leaving marks of the harm +done them by the balls. + +It seems that the natives, in their rage that they could not revenge +themselves on us, came to destroy the church. The Captain hurriedly +sent off an armed party in the two boats to prevent them. When the +natives saw this, they slowly retreated. Their object appeared to +have been to draw our men away, to lead them to where many other +natives were concealed; for we afterwards saw them go away, crossing +the river of Salvador. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + + How the launch went to examine the mouth of the great river, + and what else happened with reference to excursions inland. + + +The Master of the Camp was sent to examine the mouth of the river, +which is in the middle of the bay, with the launch, a boat, and a party +of men. He tried the depth of the river mouth, and found that there was +no bottom, with the length of an oar and his own arm. He went further +up in the boat, and the view of the river gave much pleasure to those +who were with him, as well for its size and the clearness of the water, +as for its gentle current and the beauty of the trees on its banks. + +The launch passed further up, and our people landed on the bank and +went inland. They found a small village of four streets, and an open +space at the most elevated part. All round there were many farms, +surrounded by palings. Two spies were posted, who warned the natives, +and they all fled. Our people found in their houses several kinds +of fish, roasted and wrapped in plantain leaves, and a quantity of +raw mussel-shells in baskets, as well as fruits and flowers hung +on poles. Near there was a burial-place. They also found a flute, +and certain small things worked out of pieces of marble and jasper. As +they heard drums and shells, and a great murmuring noise, understanding +that it came from a large number of people, they retreated, followed +by the natives, who did not dare to attack them. Finally, they got +to the launch in peace, and returned to the ships. + +On many other occasions our people went to fish and to seek for +things very necessary for the requirements of the ships, returning +well content with the excellence of the land. Encounters with the +natives were not wanting, and I believe they killed some natives, +although they denied it to me. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + + Describes the festival of Corpus Christi, and the procession + they made. + + +All the carpentering work was finished by the 20th of May. On that +day the Captain gave orders to the Master of the Camp to go on shore +with a hundred soldiers, and to collect things to adorn our church of +Loreto, and to make streets round it, so that on the next day, which +was that of Corpus Christi, we might there celebrate its festival with +all the force we could muster. In the night, the eve of the festival +was celebrated on board. + +Before daybreak our people went on shore, and formed an escort for +our six monks, who got everything ready that was required. When +all was ready, the Captain was informed, who presently got into the +boat, leaving two men on board each ship, and taking all the rest +with him. On reaching the shore, they all jumped out and went to the +church. Its door was to the north, bravely decorated with things of the +country, the roof and part of the body of the church being covered with +green branches; and there was a very curious altar under a canopy, +with a service of silver. For an altar-piece there was a painted +Christ crucified, on a great cloth, with four candles at the sides, +and incense-sticks burning. + +Having said his prayers, the Captain went out to see the place. At +the commencement there were three high triumphal arches, enlaced +with palms, shoots, and flowers, while the ground was also strewn +with flowers. The streets were formed with many trees, those within +forming a cloister; and here were planted divers branches and herbs +to look like a garden. At two angles, under two other arches, were +placed two altars with their canopies, and the images of St. Peter and +St. Paul; while its author, the Brother of the Order of John of God, +on his knees at one side, was saying his prayers. + +The day was clear and serene, and as the sun rose over the crowns of +the trees, its rays entering through the branches, the difference in +the fruits of each plant was shown in great profusion. Here, too, could +be heard the persistence with which the birds sang and chaunted; the +leaves and branches were seen to move gently, and the whole place was +agreeable, fresh, shady, with a gentle air moving, and the sea smooth. + +Presently returning to the church, two Masses were said. A third was +said by the Father Commissary, and the procession was then ordered +in the following manner:--A soldier went first, carrying in his hands +the heavy cross of orange wood. Next came a lay brother, with another +gilt cross from the sacristy, with the bag raised on a lance, and +on each side two acolytes, with candlesticks and red cassocks, and +all those in surplices. Then followed the three companies in order, +each one bearing its banner in the centre, with its drums sounding a +march. There was a very picturesque sword-dance by eleven sailor lads, +dressed in red and green silk, with bells on their feet. They danced +with much dexterity and grace to the sound of a guitar, which was +played by a respected old sailor. This was followed by another dance +by eight boys, all dressed like Indians in shirts and breeches of +silk, coloured brown, blue, and grey, with garlands on their heads, +and white palms in their hands. Bands of bells were round their +ankles, and they danced with very quiet countenances, at the same +time singing their canticles to the sound of tambourines and flutes +played by two musicians. + +Then followed the royal standard, accompanied by the Master of the +Camp, the Sergeant-Major, and the Captains. Then six Magistrates, each +with a lighted torch in his hand. Then came the Father Commissary, +whose pall of yellow silk, six yards long, was borne by three royal +officers and three Magistrates. He carried in his hand a coffer of +crimson velvet, with gilded nails, which contained the most blessed +sacrament. Another lay brother incensed it. All the four priests +marched joyfully, singing the hymn "Pangelingua." The Captain carried +the royal standard as far as the door, where he delivered it to the +Ensign, whose place was behind the pall, with the two Justices of +the Peace and the Chief Constable. + +When the Lord now came forth from the door, all the bells rang, and +the people, who were looking on attentively, fell on their knees; +the Ensigns lowered the banners three times, the drummers beat the +drums for battle; the soldiers, who had the cords ready, fired off the +muskets and arquebuses; the constables fired off the guns which were +on shore for defending the port; and in the ships the artillery-men +fired off the bombards and pieces, and those placed in the launch +and boats for the occasion. Once more, and once again, they were +discharged. When the smoke cleared away, there were seen amongst the +green branches so many plumes of feathers and sashes, so many pikes, +halberds, javelins, bright sword-blades, spears, lances, and on the +breasts so many crosses, and so much gold, and so many colours and +silken dresses, that many eyes could not contain what sprung from the +heart, and they shed tears of joy. With this the procession returned, +the church being guarded by four corps de garde. The dancers kept +dancing to keep up the festival, and remained within; and the Captain +at the door said to them: "All the dresses you wear you can keep as +your own, for they are from the royal treasury. I would that they +were of the best and richest brocade." + +As a finish a fourth Mass was said, that it might be heard by the +sentries who were posted to keep a look-out for any approach of the +natives, though they were far off on the beach and on the hills. + +This done, the Captain ordered the bells to be rung in honour of +those, in Lima, who had said that they would come to that land when +they could have a passage. + +The native who was taken from Taumaco, and was afterwards named Pedro, +went about dressed in silk with a cross on his breast, and bow and +arrows, so astonished and pleased at all he saw, and at his cross, +that he looked about and showed it, putting his hand on it, and named +it many times. It is a thing worthy of note that the cross elevated +the mind, even of a barbarian who did not know its significance. + +Having given the souls such sweet and delicious food, friends and +comrades divided themselves off to the places dedicated to hearths and +pots, where, with tables spread under the shade of tall and spreading +trees, they gave themselves up to feeding their bodies. + +During the subsequent siesta there were dances, music, and pleasant +conversation; and he who said this was fortunate that day, as well +as those who saw it all, for it was the first festival celebrated in +honour of the most high Lord in these strange and unknown lands. As +our force was small, and the natives numerous, it was considered by +some to be an act of great audacity. I say that it was a great hit, +and that it was done in full faith. + +There was one who said that this octave of Don Alonso de Ercilla +seemed to foretell it, which one sincerely devoted to the expedition, +by slight alterations, adapted to the present occasion as follows:-- + + + Araucana. [106] + + Behold where are hidden the lands, + Scarce discerned by mortal ken, + Those are regions still unknown, + Never pressed by Christian men. + This will ever be their fate, + Want of knowledge keeps them there, + Wrapt within a fleecy cloud, + Until God shall lay them bare. + + +Version of the friend of Quiros. [107] + + + Behold how we have found these lands, + Now clearly seen by mortal ken, + Those are regions now made known, + Pressed by feet of Christian men. + Unknown no longer is their fate, + Now full knowledge points them there, + No longer hid in fleecy clouds, + God His secrets now lays bare. + + +The Captain sent some of the people on board again, and marched inland +with the rest to the sound of drums. He saw what he had sown already +sprouting, the farms, houses, fruit orchards; and having walked for +a league, he returned as it was getting late. When he came on board, +he said that as these natives were at war with us, and there was not a +chance on our side, we would leave the port next day to visit the lands +to windward. The Admiral asked, in his name and those of the crew, +that another day might be allowed for the people to catch fish. It +happened that they fished in a certain place whence they brought to +the ship a quantity of pargos, which are considered poisonous, like +those in Havana and other ports. As many as ate them were attacked +by nausea, vomiting, and feverish symptoms. [108] + +This unexpected and sudden evil caused much grief to all, and there +were not wanting opinions, nor the conclusion of one who said, that +to get much it will cost something, and that the sweet is mixed with +the bitter. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + + Gives some account of this bay, and of all that is contained in + it, and in its port. + + +This bay, to which the Captain gave the name of St. Philip and +St. James, because it was discovered on their day, is 1,700 leagues +from Lima, from Acapulco 1,300, from Manilla in the Philippines 1,100 +leagues. Its entrance is to the N.W. in 15° S., and the port is in 15° +10' S. The bay has a circuit of 20 leagues, at the entrance 4 leagues +across. The variation of the compass is 7° N.E. + +The land which forms the bay runs directly N. on the E. side, with +sloping heights and peopled valleys well covered with trees. This +side ends at the mouth of the bay with a height rising to a peak, +and the coast runs E. and then S.E., but we could not see how it ends. + +The other land to the W. runs nearly N.W., and to the point is 11 +leagues in length, consisting of a range of hills of moderate height, +which the sun bathes when it rises, and where there are patches +without trees, covered with dried-up grass. Here are ravines and +streams, some falling from the heights to the skirts of the hills, +where many palm groves and villages were seen. From the point on this +side the coast turns to the W. + +The front of the bay, which is to the S., is 3 leagues long, and +forms a beach. In the middle there is a river which was judged to be +the size of the Guadalquivir at Seville. At its mouth the depth is +2 and more fathoms; so that boats and even frigates could enter. It +received the name of the "Jordan." On its right is seen the Southern +Cross in the heavens, which makes the spot noteworthy. + +To the eastward, at the corner of this bay, there is another +moderate-sized river called "Salvador," into which the boats entered +at their pleasure to get water. The waters of both rivers are sweet, +pleasant, and fresh. The one is distant from the other a league and a +half, consisting of a beach of black gravel, with small heavy stones, +excellent for ballast for a ship. + +Between the said two rivers is the port. The bottom is clean, +consisting of black sand, and here a great number of ships would have +room up to 40 1/2 brazas. It is not known whether there are worms. As +the beach is not bare nor driven up, and the herbs are green near the +water, it was assumed that it was not beaten by the seas; and as the +trees are straight and their branches unbroken, it was judged that +there are no great storms. The port was named "Vera Cruz," because +we anchored there on that day. + +In the whole bay we did not see a bank, rock, or reef; but it is so +deep that there is no anchorage except at the above port. It is better +to approach near the river Salvador, and there is another moderate +port which is distant 2 leagues from this on the N. to S. coast. + +All the said beach is bordered by a dense mass of great trees, with +paths leading from them to the shore. It seemed to serve as a wall, +the better to carry on defensive or offensive operations against other +natives coming to make war. All the rest is a level plain, with hills +on either side. These on the W. side run southward, becoming more +elevated and more massive as their distance increases. As for the +plain, we have not seen where it ends. The earth is black, rich, and +in large particles. It is cleared of wild trees to make room for fruit +trees, crops, and gardens surrounded by railings. There are many houses +scattered about; and wherever a view could be obtained, many fires +and columns of smoke were discerned, witnesses of a large population. + +The natives generally seen here are corpulent, not quite black nor +mulatto. Their hair is frizzled. They have good eyes. They cover +their parts with certain cloths they weave. They are clean, fond of +festivities and dancing to the sound of flute and drums made of a +hollow piece of wood. They use shells also for musical instruments, +and in their dances make great shouting at the advances, balances, +and retreats. They were not known to use the herb. [109] + +Their arms are heavy wooden clubs, and bows of the same, arrows of +reed with wooden points, hardened in the fire, darts with pieces of +bone enclosed. + +Their interments are covered. We saw some enclosed with their oratories +and figures, to which they make offerings. It is, to all appearance, +a people courageous and sociable, but without care for the ills of +their neighbours; for they saw some fighting with us without coming +to help them. + +The houses are of wood, covered with palm leaves, with two sloping +sides to the roof, and with a certain kind of outhouse, where they +keep their food. All their things are kept very clean. They also have +flower-pots with small trees of an unknown kind. The leaves are very +soft, and of a yellow-reddish colour. + +The bread they use is mainly of roots, whose young shoots climb on +poles, which are put near them for that purpose. The rind is grey, +the pulp murrey colour, yellow, or reddish; some much larger than +others. There are some a yard and a-half in thickness, also two kinds: +one almost round, and the size of two fists, more or less. Their +taste resembles the potatoes of Peru. The inside of the other root +is white, its form and size that of a cob of maize when stripped. All +three kinds have a pulp without fibres, loose, soft, and pleasant to +the taste. These roots are bread made without trouble, there being +nothing to do but to take them out of the earth, and eat them, roast +or boiled. They are very good cooked in pots. Our people ate a great +deal; and, being of a pleasant taste and satisfying, they left off the +ship's biscuit for them. These roots last so long without getting bad, +that on reaching Acapulco those that were left were quite good. + +Their meat consists of a great quantity of tame pigs, some reddish, +others black, white, or speckled. We saw tusks 1 1/4 palmos in +length, and a porker was killed weighing 200 lbs. The natives roast +them on hearths, wrapped up in plantain leaves. It is a clean way, +which gives the meat a good colour, and none of the substance is lost. + +There are many fowls like those of Europe. They use capons. There +are many wild pigeons, doves, ducks, and birds like partridges, with +very fine plumage. One was found in a lasso, with which the natives +catch them. There are many swallows; we saw a macaw and flocks of +paroquets; and we heard, when on board at early dawn, a sweet harmony +from thousands of different birds, apparently buntings, blackbirds, +nightingales, and others. The mornings and afternoons were enjoyable +from the pleasant odours emitted from trees and many kinds of flowers, +together with the sweet basil. A bee was also seen, and harvest flies +were heard buzzing. + +The fish are skate, sole, pollack, red mullet, shad, eels, pargos, +sardines, and others; for which natives fish with a three-pronged dart, +with thread of a fibrous plant, with nets in a bow shape, and at night +with a light. Our people fished with hooks and with nets, for the +most part. In swampy parts of the beach shrimps and mussels were seen. + +Their fruits are large, and they have many cocoa-nuts, so that they +were not understood to put much store by them. But from these palms +they make wine, vinegar, honey, and whey to give to the sick. They +eat the small palms raw and cooked. The cocoa-nuts, when green, +serve as cardos [110] and for cream. Ripe, they are nourishment as +food and drink by land and sea. When old, they yield oil for lighting, +and a curative balsam. The shells are good for cups and bottles. The +fibres furnish tow for caulking a ship; and to make cables, ropes, +and ordinary string, the best for an arquebus. Of the leaves they +make sails for their canoes, and fine mats, with which they cover +their houses, built with trunks of the trees, which are straight and +high. From the wood they get planks, also lances and other weapons, +and many things for ordinary use, all very durable. From the grease +they get the galagala, used instead of tar. In fine, it is a tree +without necessity for cultivation, and bearing all the year round. + +There are three kinds of plantains: one, the best I have seen, +pleasant to smell, tender and sweet. + +There are many "obos," which is a fruit nearly the size and taste +of a peach, on whose leaves may be reared silk-worms, as is done in +other parts. + +There is a great abundance of a fruit which grows on tall trees, +with large serrated leaves. They are the size of ordinary melons, +their shape nearly round, the skin delicate, the surface crossed into +four parts, the pulp between yellow and white, with seven or eight +pips. When ripe it is very sweet; when green, it is eaten boiled or +roasted. It is much eaten, and is found wholesome. The natives use +it as ordinary food. + +There are two kinds of almonds: one with as much kernel as four nuts +lengthways, the other in the shape of a triangle. Its kernel is larger +than three large ones of ours and of an excellent taste. + +There is a kind of nut, hard outside, and the inside in one piece +without division, almost like a chestnut: the taste nearly the same +as the nuts of Europe. + +Oranges grow without being planted. With some the rind is very thick, +with others delicate. The natives do not eat them. Some of our people +said there were lemons. + +There are many, and very large, sweet canes: red and green, very long, +with jointed parts. Sugar might be made from them. + +Many and large trees, bearing a kind of nut, grew on the forest-covered +slopes near the port. They brought these nuts on board as green as +they were on the branches. Their leaves are not all green on one side, +and on the other they turn to yellowish grey. Their length is a jeme, +[111] more or less, and in the widest part three fingers. The nut +contains two skins, between which grows what they call mace like a +small net. Its colour is orange. The nut is rather large, and there +are those who say that this is the best kind. The natives make no use +of it, and our people used to eat it green, and put it into the pots, +and used the mace for saffron. + +On the beach a fruit was found like a pineapple. Pedro was asked if +it was eaten, and he replied that only the bark was eaten of the tree +which yielded that fruit. + +There were other fruits, like figs, filberts, and albaricoques, which +were eaten. Others were seen, but it was not known what fruits they +were, nor what others grew in that land. To give a complete account of +them and of other things, it is necessary to be a year in the country, +and to travel over much ground. + +As regards vegetables, I only knew of amaranth, purslane, and +calabashes. + +The natives make from a black clay some very well-worked pots, large +and small, as well as pans and porringers in the shape of small +boats. It was supposed that they made some beverage, because in the +pots and in cavities were found certain sour fruits. + +It appeared to us that we saw there quarries of good marble; [112] I +say good, because several things were seen that were made of it and of +jasper. There were also seen ebony and large mother-o'-pearl shells; +also some moderate-sized looms. In one house a heap of heavy black +stones was seen, which afterwards proved to be metal from whence +silver could be extracted, as will be seen further on. Two of our +people said they had seen the footprints of a large animal. + +The climate appeared to be very healthy, both from the vigour and size +of the natives, as because none of our men became ill all the time +we were there, nor felt any discomfort, nor tired from work. They +had not to keep from drinking while fasting, nor at unusual times, +nor when sweating, nor from being wet with salt water or fresh, nor +from eating whatever grew in the country, nor from being out in the +evening under the moon, nor the sun, which was not very burning at +noon, and at midnight we were glad of a blanket. The land is shown +to be healthy, from the natives living in houses on terraces, and +having so much wood, and because so many old people were seen. We +heard few claps of thunder, and had little rain. As the rivers flowed +with clear water, it was understood that the rains were over. + +It is to be noted that we had not seen cactus nor sandy wastes, +nor were the trees thorny, while many of the wild trees yielded +good fruit. It is also to be noted that we did not see snow on the +mountains, nor were there any mosquitos or ants in the land, which +are very harmful, both in houses and fields. There were no poisonous +lizards either in the woods or the cultivated ground, nor alligators +in the rivers. Fish and flesh keep good for salting during two or +more days. The land is so pleasant, so covered with trees; there are +so many kinds of birds, that, owing to this and other good signs, +the climate may be considered to be clement, and that it preserves +its natural order. Of what happens in the mountains we cannot speak +until we have been there. + +As no very large canoes were seen, with so large a population, and +such fine trees, but only some small ones, and the mountain ranges +being so high to W. and E., and to the S., and the river Jordan being +so large, with great trees torn up and brought down at its mouth, we +came to the conclusion that the land must be extensive, and yielding +abundantly; and that consequently the people were indolent, and have +no need to seek other lands. + +I am able to say, with good reason, that a land more delightful, +healthy and fertile; a site better supplied with quarries, timber, +clay for tiles, bricks for founding a great city on the sea, with a +port and a good river on a plain, with level lands near the hills, +ridges, and ravines; nor better adapted to raise plants and all that +Europe and the Indies produce, could not be found. No port could +be found more agreeable, nor better supplied with all necessaries, +without any drawbacks; nor with such advantages for dockyards in +which to build ships, nor forests more abundant in suitable timber +good for futtock timbers, houses, compass timbers, beams, planks, +masts and yards. Nor is there any other land that could sustain +so many strangers so pleasantly, if what has been written is well +considered. Nor does any other land have what this land has close by, +at hand, and in sight of its port; for quite near there are seven +islands, with coasts extending for 200 leagues, apparently with the +same advantages, and which have so many, and such good signs, that +they may be sought for and found without shoals or other obstacles; +while nearly half-way there are other known islands, with inhabitants +and ports where anchorages may be found. I have never seen, anywhere +where I have been, nor have heard of such advantages. + +I take the port of Acapulco as an example, being well known as such a +principal city of Mexico. I say that if it is good as an anchorage, +it is very bad owing to the frequency of fogs, and the want of a +river and of ballast; also, from being unhealthy most of the year, +and intolerable from the heat and the mosquitos, and other molesting +insects for the rest; also for its inconvenient site near stony and +dry hills, and because provisions have to come from a distance, and +soon turn bad; and finally, because it is dear, and ships have a bad +time from the S.E. + +If we look from the Strait of Magellan along its two coasts, on one +side to Cape Mendocino, on the other to Newfoundland, being 7,000 or +8,000 leagues of coast, it will be found that, out of the ports that I +have visited, that of San Juan de Ulloa does not merit the name of a +port, nor its town to be inhabited by people; that Panama and Puerto +Bello have little and bad accommodation; and that Payta, Callao, +Havanna, Carthagena (the two latter being famous), La Guayra and +Santa Martha, and many others, including those of Chile and Brazil, +according to what I have been told, are wanting in many necessary +things. Not one will be found which has all the advantages possessed by +the port and land of which I treat. Being in 15°, more good things may +be expected than from places in 20°, 30°, and 40°, if things turn out +as they promise. I also say that if there is nothing better than what I +have seen, it is sufficient for a principal place that may be settled. + +If we look round the coast of Spain, so good a port will not be found; +while its soil only produces thorns, ilexes, and broom, or at best +arbutus and myrtles, and other poor fruits; and he who grows them for +profit has nothing for his pains. April and May failing, the fruits +fail. [113] + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + + Gives an account of the departure from this port, and of the return + to it; also of what happened, at that time, with the natives by + reason of the three boys. + + +As it was arranged that the ships should leave the port, understanding +that the sickness was not very bad, they made sail on the following +day, the 28th of May. In the afternoon the sick were so helpless +that the Captain ordered the Pilots to keep the ships within the +mouth of the bay until the condition of the people was seen next +day. They were all in such a state that the Captain gave orders for +the ships to return to port, where, the wind being fair, they were +easily anchored. Then steps were taken to confess and take care of +the sick, and they all got well in a short time. + +On the day after we anchored a number of natives were seen on the +beach, playing on their shells. To find out what it was about, the +Captain ordered the Master of the Camp to go with a party of men +in the two boats to learn what they wanted. When our people were +near them, they vainly shot off their arrows to the sound of their +instruments. From the boats four musket-shots were fired in the air, +and they returned to the ships. + +Soon afterwards the Captain ordered them to return to the shore, +taking the three boys, that the natives might see them, and be +assured that no harm had been done to them, the fear of which was +supposed to be the cause of all this disturbance. When they arrived, +the boys called to their fathers, who, though they heard them, did not +know their sons by the voices or by sight, because they were dressed +in silk. The boats came nearer, that they might get a better view; +and, when the boys were known, two natives waded into the water up to +their breasts, showing by this, and by their joy during all the time +the sweet discourse lasted, that they were the fathers of the boys. + +The natives were given to understand that the muskets were fired +because they fired the arrows. To this they answered that it was not +them, but others of a different tribe; and that, as they were friends, +they should be given the three boys. They said they would bring fowls, +pigs, and fruit, and present them. They were told, by pointing to the +sun, that they were to return at noon. They went away, and the boats +went back to the ships. At the time arranged the natives sounded two +shells, and the boats went back with the three boys, whose fathers, +when they saw and spoke to them, did not show less joy than at the +first interview. They gave us a pig, and asked for the boys. They said +they would bring many on the next day, which accordingly they did, +sounding the shells. + +The boats again went to the shore, taking a he- and a she-goat, +to leave there to breed; also taking the boys as a decoy to induce +the natives to come, so as to take them to the ships, and let them +return. They found two pigs on the beach; and, when they were delivered +up, our people gave the goats in exchange, which the natives looked +at cautiously, with much talking among themselves. + +The fathers begged for their sons; and, because we would not comply, +they said they would bring more pigs, and that we were to come back for +them when they gave the signal. In the afternoon the same signal was +made, and the boats returned to the shore. But they only saw the goats +tied up, and two natives near them, who said that they would go to seek +for others, as they did not want the goats. Thinking that this looked +bad, a careful observation was made, and many natives were seen among +the trees with bows and arrows. Understanding that this was a plan +for seizing some of our men, or for some other bad object, the muskets +were fired off, and the natives hastily fled with loud shouts. Our men +recovered the goats, and returned to the ships. Then the biggest boy, +who was afterwards named Pablo, said to the Captain, not only once, +but many times, with signs of great affliction, "Teatali"; which was +supposed to mean that he wanted to go on shore. The Captain replied: +"Silence, child! you know not what you ask. Greater good awaits you +than the sight and the communion with heathen parents and friends." + +It is to be noted that a cross, which had been left on the banks +of the river Salvador, was found raised in its place, and that the +natives had put branches and flowers round it. + +There was not wanting one who said to the Captain that, as he had +before him a land with so many rivers and ravines, he should make +tests to ascertain whether they contained the metal called gold, +so acceptable in the eyes of men. The Captain replied to this that +he had only come to discover lands and people; and that, as God had +been pleased to show him what he sought, it would be neither just +nor reasonable to risk the whole for a part; that, if it could be +done, understanding that this might have the colour of an excuse, +he would have done it without the interference of another; and that +it will be for the settlers who may come to these lands to undertake, +with proper security, these and other cares. The man replied to this +that the time was now full for such work; that if it was not known +that there was gold and silver, there would not be the incentive to +come and settle. To put an end to the argument, the Captain answered +that the cause was that of God; and when the hour chosen by the Divine +Majesty arrived, there would be given for this his estate, overseers, +and workers, not only for gold, but for the saving of souls. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + + The causes which led the Captain to leave this port a second time; + and how, in returning to it, the Capitana parted company with + the other vessels; how a better view was obtained of the plains + that were seen before entering the bay, and of that great and + high range of mountains far away to the S.E., and how an island + was discovered. + + +The Captain, seeing that the natives of that bay continued to be +hostile, owing to the bad treatment they had received, resolved to +proceed to get a near view of that great and high chain of mountains, +desiring by the sight of them to reanimate all his companions; because, +if he should die, they would remain with the ardour to continue the +work until it was finished. He considered that, failing his person, +discord and danger would not be wanting, owing to the pretensions of +those who wished to be chief; also that, of necessity, there should +be agreement respecting the route that should be followed. There did +not fail to be diverse opinions whether it should be to windward, +leaving as a possibility what it was so much desired that we should +see. It also seemed to many who had a look-out from the mast-head, +that all those lands were joined one to the other. To the Captain +it seemed that what was desired to be seen was of great importance, +and that it would be well to keep that port to leeward. + +To give effect to this desire, he left the bay with the three vessels +on Thursday, the 8th of June, in the afternoon, three days after the +conjunction of the moon, there being a light wind from the E., which +was the point from which the wind had blown most of the time we had +been there. Outside it veered to S.E., and blew with some force. So +that we were all that day working against it without being able to make +any progress. For this cause the Pilots cried from one ship to another: +"Where are we going?" The Captain had these and other reasons submitted +to them, and resolved to return to the port, with the intention of +wintering there, building a strong house, sowing the land, getting +a better knowledge of the season, and building a brigantine to send, +with the launch, to discover what was so much desired, it being clear +to all that this was very necessary; because the place which seemed +so important to the sight had as yet yielded but a bad account. + +All night we were beating on different tacks at the mouth of the +bay. At dawn the Almiranta was 3 leagues to windward, and at three in +the afternoon she and the launch were near the port. The Captain asked +the reason why these vessels, which were not so good on a bowline as +the Capitana, were so far ahead. He was told that they had met with +more favourable winds. Presently it was said that there had been very +little sail on the Capitana, and that she had made very short tacks, +and that this was the reason, and it seems a good one, that she was +so much behind. The force of the wind was increasing, and the night +was near, owing to which the Pilot ordered that if they could not +reach the port, they were to anchor wherever it was possible. The +night came on very dark. The Almiranta and the launch appeared to have +anchored. They saw the lanterns lighted, to give the Capitana leading +marks, as she was also going to anchor. Soundings were taken, and they +found 30 fathoms, not being an arquebus shot from the port. The wind +came down in a gust over the land. Sails were taken in, and the ship +was only under a fore course, falling off a little. The Chief Pilot, +exaggerating very much the importance of being unable to find bottom, +together with the darkness of the night, the strong wind, the numerous +lights he saw without being able to judge with certainty which were +those of the two ships, said to the Captain that he was unable to +reach the port. The Captain commended his zeal and vigilance. + +There was one who said, and made it clearly to be understood, that +more diligence might easily have been shown to anchor or to remain +without leaving the bay; and that, with only the spritsail braced up, +she might have run for shelter under the cape to windward. It was also +said that they went to sleep. In the morning the Captain asked the +Pilot what was the position of the ship. He replied that she was to +leeward of the cape, and the Captain told him to make sail that she +might not make leeway. The Pilot answered that the sea was too high +and against them, and that the bows driving into the water would cause +her timbers to open, though he would do his best. I say that this was +a great misfortune, owing to the Captain being disabled by illness on +this and other occasions when the Pilots wasted time, obliging him to +believe what they said, to take what they gave, measured out as they +pleased. Finally, during this and the two following days, attempts +were made to enter the bay. The other vessels did not come out; the +wind did not go down; while, owing to the force of the wind the ship, +having little sail on, and her head E.N.E., lost ground to such an +extent that we found ourselves 20 leagues to leeward of the port, +all looking at those high mountains with sorrow at not being able to +get near them. + +The island of "Virgen Maria" was so hidden by mist that we could never +get a sight of it. We saw the other island of "Belen," [114] and passed +near another, 7 leagues long. It consists of a very high hill, almost +like the first. It received the name of "Pilar de Zaragoza." [115] +Many growing crops, palms, and other trees, and columns of smoke +were seen on it. It was about 30 leagues to the N.W. of the bay; +but no soundings and no port. We diligently sought its shelter, but +were obliged to give it up owing to the wind and current; and on the +next day we found ourselves at sea, out of sight of land. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + + Gives the sorrowful discourses made by the Captain and others, + to mitigate the grief they felt at having lost the port, and to + settle what must be done with the consent of all. + + +Here it was represented to the Captain that if in Lima they had +given him his despatch on the day of St. Francis, so ordered that he +should go on with his plan, which was to steer for the thirtieth degree +towards the south, for this forty days or less seemed sufficient. If by +that route the sought-for land was found, it would be the best time of +the year for exploring its coasts and islands. If land was not found +on that parallel, there was still a month and a-half before the sun +took its turn, for them to navigate towards the W., or with tacks to +S.W. and N.W., to cross those seas until it was made clear that the +supposed lands do not exist; and he might make many other researches, +according to the position in which he found himself. + +In short, I say that from the day of St. Francis to the end of May +there are eight months less those four days, and that to go from Lima +by the usual route to Manilla two months and a-half, or at most three +months, are sufficient. The other five months give plenty of time to +discover and see very extensive lands and many ports, or to go in May +to Manilla, which is before the S.W. winds begin, and in October or +November, which is the beginning of the N. winds; and by these breezes +to leave that city and go outside the two Javas to the S.S.W. in +search of lands, passing the Cape of Good Hope in January, February, +or March, the best months in the year for that, so as to reach Spain in +July, August, or September, which is the summer. To make such a grand +voyage as this twenty months are enough, or at the outside two years, +and this truth will be confessed by all who know how to navigate; and +also how great will be the regrets of him who knows that this time he +is unable to get from such labours those fruits for others which he so +truthfully expected. With his great loads of sorrow the Captain said in +public that all of us should be witnesses, because if he should die, +it should remain in the memory of the people that these two months +and a-half of summer that he was delayed at Callao had robbed him of +the power of following up so great an enterprise as was the present, +while only half an hour of time took it from his hands. + +He considered the strong contrary winds, the very threatening weather, +the fact that their present position was unknown, that the ship must +need repairs, the necessity for going to a place where she could +be either got into harbour or careened on a coast, and that all +was ended there. He had very prominently in his mind that at the +first difficulty or danger there would be a want of resolution or +of management, or of the desire to apply a remedy; for which reason +it might with truth be said that he was without pilots on whom he +could rely, and that from some other persons there was little to +be expected or hoped. Then there were his own infirmities; so that +altogether the case was one of evident danger. + +Putting on one side the ordinances of God, His high and secret decrees, +and how limited was his understanding to enable him to decide whether +what happened was or was not in conformity with them, the sorrowful +Captain said discretion was of little use to arrange things, nor the +mind to undertake business, though it be easy, if there be any one +who has the will and power to take away all his just value or great +part of it. Sovereigns, he said, when they undertake great enterprises, +ought to distinguish, make clear, and strengthen their orders in such a +way that the persons to whom their execution is entrusted can have no +room for doubt, nor to contend, nor any one who can make excuses; and +not pledge men so that they find themselves in positions so confused +and difficult as had the Captain. For he could not tell what advice +was mature nor what was inexperienced, nor the choice he should make, +nor the resolution he should take which, if followed, might lead at +least to part of the remedy for the evils which were menaced in so +important a matter. + +He arranged to go, as we were then steering to N.E. and N. as far +as 10° 30' S., the latitude of the island of Santa Cruz, which being +settled, the Captain made the following discourses. + +In the first place the S.E. wind had the same force, and if with such +threatening weather he steered to the W. in search of the island of +Santa Cruz, it might remain at the E., and, without the danger in +which he would have to put the vessel, he would place himself still +more distant from help if he did not make the landfall. + +Secondly, he knew, for he had already made the voyage to the +Philippines, there was the beginning of those furious westerlies +which last at least until the first days of October, for which cause +it was impossible to go there at that season. + +Thirdly, to undertake the voyage to Acapulco; the distance was very +long, and it would be necessary to cross the equator without knowing +which time would be the best; while there was very little water +left and no meat: for the Chief Pilot had buried the casks among the +ballast where the bilge-water sucked in, and for that reason it had +all turned bad. + +He felt that he had many sick, and no medical man, nor the necessary +comforts to nourish them. + +He knew that in the ship he had some few friends and all the rest +enemies; and those he had to help him and take part of his duties +were those who were soonest tired, and were least able to manage +things, or to treat of more than the security of their own persons, +while they disliked work. + +He did not certainly know what had happened to the other two vessels; +so that he reflected that only the ship in which he was, was available +to bring the news of the discoveries and how much they imported, +and that the same news should be given by those who remained. He +made other very sorrowful discourses, and the following, which were +more consolatory. + +The first was that many exploring ships and fleets, full of men and +riches, have been lost in known seas, without, in many cases, having +secured their objects, either in whole or part. + +The second, that he had completed the discovery of such good peoples +and lands without knowing where they ended, with such a large bay +and good port within it, and had taken possession in the name of +His Majesty, without the loss of a single man; and that all this +was a beginning, with very great foundations, for the settling and +completing the discovery of all that those lands contain; and that +so arduous an undertaking could not be finished in one voyage, nor +in three, even with very efficient help, and with men who would work +with the same love for the cause as the Captain felt. + +The third, that as God had been served to guide them to those parts, +and to give them time for all that had been done, it was very just that +he should be consoled and in conformity with the will of the Lord of +times and seasons. He could understand that if another voyage should +be desired, that also it could be made, although it should be more +in the winter, and though men should contradict or favour, and other +thousands of opponents should bar the way. It would be well to agree to +what had happened, for causes which, at present, are not comprehended. + +The fourth is that, in the other two vessels, there remained the +instructions that had been given, and it was understood that, if +they were safe, they would do all in their power to discover more +lands, and bring from them such news as might be hoped from God, and +the Admiral, and his Pilot, Juan Bernardo de Fuentidueña, a person +from whom great things might be hoped; and also from the Captain of +the ship, Gaspar de Gaya, and from three very respectable monks; in +fine, from all the people connected with that ship, as likely to be +useful. Finally, he said that the present time ought to be cared for +to ensure the time to come, and that he who rules must entrust to some +man all or part of the business, present or absent, great or small; +and if those who are so trusted deceive those who put confidence in +them, where can there be a remedy except in heaven. + +The Captain saw that it was indispensable to decide at once what ought +to be done; and, therefore, he called a meeting of all the officers +and other persons in the ship, telling them that they must carefully +consider all the reasons he would put before them, the present state +of affairs, and what should be done. There were some who, through the +mouth of one as ignorant as themselves, said that they should go to +the Philippines. To this, others replied that as they had money they +wanted to go and get employment in the porcelain and silks of China, +where the work should pay them, or at least the Royal Treasury. In the +end all were of opinion that they should make for the port of Acapulco, +and they signed their names to this resolution on the 18th of June. + +The Captain at once ordered the Pilots to shape a course N.E. by N., +if the weather would allow it, and if in the southern part where we +were any islands should be found, we were to anchor there to build +a launch and come to a new resolution, in order that God and His +Majesty might be better served. In case no such island could be found, +we were to continue on the same course until the ship was in 13° 30' +N. latitude, the parallel of the island of Guan in the Ladrones, on +the route of ships going from Acapulco to the Philippines. There, with +reference to the feelings of the crew, the weather, the condition of +the ship, and the provisions, another final agreement was to be made, +and a resolution taken with reference to the route to be adopted for +reaching a friendly port. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + + Relates how a quantity of water was collected from two great + showers of rain; how the ship crossed the equator; how an island + was discovered; how the last agreement was made at a meeting; + and of the courses and latitudes as far as a certain point. + + +With the wind S.E., which had now broken its fury, they continued to +navigate until the eve of St. John the Baptist. On that day God was +served by giving us a great shower of rain. With twenty-eight sheets +stretched all over the ship, we collected, from this and another +rainfall, three hundred jars of water: a relief for our necessities, +and a great consolation for all the people. With a few changes of +wind and some calms, heading to the N., we reached the line on the +2nd of July. That night the needle was marked, and it was found that +the variation was to the N.E. by E., a notable thing, for in the bay +it was 7° almost on the same meridian, and the distance so short. + +With the wind S. and S.W. we continued to navigate until the +8th of July. On that day we saw an island, about 6 leagues in +circumference. As until now we had not met with any island or rock +whatever to impede our road, we gave it the name of "Buen Viaje." Its +latitude is 3° 30' N. It was decided not to approach it nearer, as it +was not convenient, and for fear of rocks. In this part, in a higher +latitude, we had some rain, especially one shower, which filled all +the jars that were empty, and it was drunk without doing the least +harm, nor did it ever get bad. In short, after God, the rain showers +saved our lives. + +On the 23rd of July the Captain ordered the Pilots to state the +latitude they were in, and the distance in leagues from the Philippines +and from the coast of New Spain, according to their calculations; +also, they were to declare definitely in which direction the ship's +head was to be turned. + +They gave 3° 10' N. as the latitude, 780 leagues east of Manilla, +and 780 leagues S.W. of the coast of New Spain, adding that the ship +could not go to Manilla owing to contrary winds [116] at that time; +and it was, therefore, their opinion that the course should be steered +for the coast of New Spain and the port of Acapulco. + +It appeared to the Captain that the best service he could do to His +Majesty at present was to save the ship, save time, save the expenses +caused if they went to Manilla, and the cost of the ship with all hands +during a whole year; and being so far to windward of the meridian of +Japan, there was no wind that could impede their reaching a higher +latitude or to reach the coast. He also considered that the ship +was well supplied with water and biscuit, and all the crew healthy, +and that there were two natives of those parts on board to give +information; that if he should die at sea there would be others to +navigate the ship, so that His Majesty would be informed of all that +had been discovered and promised, and that he was bound to choose the +least of two evils; he ordered the Pilots to shape a course for New +Spain and the port of Acapulco, and to give an account of the route +they followed, and the latitude each day. He said to them that he +who suffered most and should be most useful, would be most worthy +of reward. + +Considering the state of affairs owing to the delayed despatch +at the Court of Spain and in Callao, I say that, for its grandeur +and importance, and the facility with which the Captain is able to +demonstrate all his thoughts and wishes by his works, so many times +made known, it has been the greatest of the injuries done to a man +who has bought it by such continual labour and misery, and other +very high costs, wandering and finding in so long a journey very +great difficulties. For all these, and a thousand other reasons, +the Captain did not know whether to throw the blame on ignorance +or malice, and ended by attributing it to his many great sins. He, +therefore, confessed that he was not worthy to see the end of a work +in which those who lived righteously would be well employed, having +all the qualifications that so sacred an enterprise requires. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + + Relates how a great shoal of albacore fish accompanied the ship + for many days; the fishing of them; and the rest that happened + until they sighted the land of New Spain. + + +With the winds between E. and N.N.E. we navigated until the 26th of +July, when we were in 18° N. On this day we had the sun at the zenith, +and crossed the tropic of Cancer on the 1st of August. Up to this +position we had seen gulls and other birds almost every day. + +On the 5th we had the wind aft and ran before it, with an E. course, +for nearly three days, then more northerly as far as 25° N. This day, +which was that of St. Lawrence, they collected from a shower of rain +fifty jars full of water. Certain albacore and bonito, in a large +shoal, had hitherto followed the ship, and every day the men fished +with nets, fizgigs, and harpoons, catching ten, twenty, thirty, even +fifty, some of them weighing 3, 4, and 5 arrobas. We ate them fresh, +and salted them down, filling many jars. About 2,500 arrobas [117] +of fish supplied the place of meat, and lasted until we reached the +port of Acapulco, with some over. + +The voyage was prolonged owing to scarcity of wind and calms, and +it was necessary to go as far N. as 38°; and we kept working to the +E. with wind S.S.E., not always steady. + +On the 1st of September, at three o'clock in the afternoon, there was +a great trembling of the sea and of the ship--a notable thing, and +new to me. Then, with wind S. and S.W., we navigated until the 26th +of September. On that day, at three o'clock in the morning, there was +a great eclipse of the moon, which lasted three hours. The variation +of the needle was here very slight. The pilots were making for land, +and all the people were tired of the long voyage, with the allowance +of water reduced to a quartilla, and other hardships, caused by so +many months at sea. They were most anxious to see land, or signs of +it, when a great weed was seen on the sea, called "porra." In that +season the wind is S.E., and the course E.N.E. The wind changed to +N.E., and it has been necessary to go further N.; but the Captain, +knowing by that weed, and many others of the same kind, that the land +was near, ordered an E.S.E. course to be steered. So they proceeded, +meeting with signs that consoled them: such as the sight of seals, +leaves of trees, and birds of the sea-shore sitting on a tree-trunk. + +Much care was exercised with regard to the look-outs. At night +there were two men on the bowsprit, and in the daytime one at each +masthead. At last, on September 23rd, early in the morning, one +Silvestre Marselles reported with great joy: "I see land ahead. It +is high, bare, and dry." Many went aloft to see, and confirmed the +news. The Pilots took the sun at noon, and found the latitude 34° +N. Presently, the Captain told four men to look out carefully, to see +if it was islands. All said it was mainland, but they were wrong: +for on the first night, with a very clear sky, we found ourselves +between two islands, the sight of which disgusted everybody, and caused +the Captain much sorrow. For, during that day and night much care +was required, and even more from not knowing who to trust, each day +bringing its trials. As a remedy, he stationed an overseer on the poop, +but very soon he went with all the rest, who had their own methods. In +fine, it was God's pleasure that the channel should be clear. We sailed +out of it; and, coasting along the main-land, we passed the island of +"Cerros," with the loss of some days from calms and light winds. + + + +Will of the Captain. + +"I desire much that in these regions which it has been the will of +God to show me, and in all those still hidden but, no doubt, as well +peopled as those I saw, there be designed and fabricated some nests +without brambles, nor other kinds of thorns, refuges and pleasant +abiding-places of pelicans, who first tear their flesh, open their +bosoms, and clearly show entrails and heart; and, not content with +that, they should give to these people dishes cooked in many ways +in the braziers of enlightened charity being the pots and pans of +piety and pity, and the table-service of all equity; and that for +drink there should be the sweat of their brows, if they prefer not +giving the blood of their veins; all this with pure and clear love, +always without ever a step backwards. + +"I should not wish, in no way whatever, that among these new and tender +people there should come to settle and to live, or to enter into grand +palaces for their nests, any falcons, or sakers, or other birds of +prey, which, circling and dissimulating, spring suddenly on their +prey and grasp them with their cruel talons, and with their fierce +and sharp beaks tear them into two thousand pieces, without ever being +gorged, or picking the bones when there is no flesh left on them. To +give a relish to dishes of such impious wickedness, there is offered +certain salts; and they give for fruit certain honeyed excuses void +of all the law of reason and unworthy of all good memory, but very +worthy of due punishment. An example of this is in the Indies with +their islands. Ask all the natives respecting all that affects life, +liberty, honour, and estate (I leave the spiritual out of account), +what there is to say as compared with their state in those former +times, and they will say how things go now: and how they hope they +will go, though not by a post which goes in haste. + +"But I answer for them, and say in this wise, that the force, +injuries, injustices, and great evils that have been done, and are +done, are incredible, the methods infernal, the number not to be +counted: and that never have I seen their masters, nor others who +enjoy great part of the toil of the people, to lament the evil things +they have done and do, that they alone may take their ease in all +comfort. If perchance I have heard one grumble, cry, or quarrel, it +is for me a pretence, and nothing more. For they have not pardoned, +nor pardon, nor intend to pardon, for the least thing they want, much +less excuse any payment of money. It is money, I say, that they want, +and more money, though it be torn from men's entrails. This I have +seen, and how much the loss comes in, so much the more money they +want; and they do not return that which they have taken by force, +but rather seek anew and with increased eagerness, dyed in unknown, +dark, and strange colours. I say they require from them always more, +and never less, though it should be in the deprivation of the glory +and eternity of their hell and that of their victims. + +"They see this with eyes of the body and soul, those gentlemen who have +to be the judges in so pious a cause as is represented here; for with +theirs I discharge my conscience, announcing in all I have written +and shown with much facility that, if it is desired to mitigate such +diabolical avarice, it will be shown that there is plenty for all; +and that in this and other gentle and reasonable means there will +not be so many fishermen, huntsmen, owners, with such correspondence +as I have seen and well noted. They will do works so honourable and +beautiful as will make all others of the same kind look ugly. And more +also: for God and His Majesty will be served in all those regions, +and the natives will be made to prosper, as is just and right, under +heavy penalties, to be attempted and seen to in the great and the +small affairs; and this will be my reward." + + + +The reasons the Captain gave for Punishing Certain Men, and those he +gave for not doing so. + +There were in the ship some persons who always desired all the good +things of the voyage, which they obtained at the cost of much care and +vigilance, but who were annoyed to have been seen, and to be seen by +others, to have little will for the work, and to make a bad return +for the affectionate treatment and the benefits they had received +from the Captain. Others spoke to him many times, wishing to incite +him to punish them, or to give them permission to stab such people. + +To this the Captain replied that he had duties to all, and that it +was for him, for just causes, to dissimulate and to suffer. And he +did suffer; and those who were his friends suffered with him, and they +would bear witness that during the expedition he was determined never +to take life or reputation; and if he had done so, he would have been +discontented and unquiet for all the rest of his life. For the rest, +who could seek to have dead men present with him, or dishonoured men? + +They said that these men did not recognise good works, nor do they +merit untiring courtesies; nor could it be suffered that these men +should go about with the full intention, as soon as they put their +feet on shore, to speak evil of his person and services, and to +ruin the cause he loved so well, without regard for what is true or +reasonable and just, and merely with the object of avenging themselves. + +The Captain said to this that it would be great cowardice to fear for +the truth on account of lies; and that, if he should take account +of ten or twelve worthless men, it would be here that it should be +shown. He well knew, he said, the bad recompense of men, and that he +never hoped for good report, so that he was not deceived; nor did he +wish to waste a single moment on such nonsense, having need for time +for more important matters. + +They said that God punishes those who deserve it. + +The Captain answered that God pardons, has long suffering and waits, +and that when He determines to punish, He cannot deceive nor be +deceived. He himself had understood the naturally evil dispositions of +some, and the unstable and changeable characters of others. He feared +from many the vengeance desired by their passions, which being blind, +can deceive as much as he can be deceived by his enemies. To pardon +ingrates and enemies without having cause to do so--to do them good by +force, if they wish to know--was a very great vengeance; and greater +courage was shown by having power and not using it, and still greater +to defend them, being enemies, and to overcome them when he addressed +his discourses to them. He had come out of this first attempt without +blood having been on his knife, although he had bought this result +very dear, and it would cost him more hereafter. He considered himself +well employed in securing that this expedition should have fame equal +to that of other passed expeditions; and that over the bones of so +many martyrs there should rise such a good work, with good repute in +the world, which was that for which he took most heed. + +They said that piety was very good, and also that it was reasonable +to punish the bad. + +The Captain replied to this that the Emperor Theodosius said, on a +certain occasion, that he would like to have the power to give life +to all who are dead. Charles V suffered, and pardoned very many; +deemed it right to give punishment measured out by his will; and +the same was done by George Castriot and many valorous and prudent +Captains--mirrors in which he was looking night and day, with the +desire to imitate them. Piety is worthy of praise, and is the more +celebrated when it is most observed. If to pardon the faults of men, +as he was, hoping for their amendment, was not caused by natural +piety, it would have been less so to treat, so much at his cost, +a work altogether pious. For his part, piety was so applauded and +practised in the greater; but this did not appear a reason to deny it +in lesser, nor that suffering should come to an end for all. Being +about to die, and at a time when he was seeking a port in which to +bring the voyage to an end, all the ill-will that had appeared and +the concealed spite might also end; and the more to humiliate them, +though they might be rebels, he would protect them; saying that he +had experienced this time, for the undeceiving of others, that there +were men with hearts so hard that kindness would not soften them, +and that they would give evil for good. When it should be so, he +would say what he wished and do what he could; that his voice had +been as little heard as the little justice done him, and the low +opinion of him. It is certain that the vulgar will have to judge +this business with very different feelings from what he intended; +and that when he should give sentence it was more desirable that it +should be pious than cruel--rather reputable than severe. He said, +finally, that justice was an excellent virtue, and very necessary in +the world; but yet let it be exercised by others who have the habit, +rather than by him among those who use little reason, the witnesses +being enemies, to investigate the truth without more or less help. + + + +A Notable Event. + +There was a sailor in our company, of Aragonese nationality: a +well-disposed and soldierly youth, so well endowed with parts and +graces, that for them his person deserved and was highly esteemed +by all on board. Being in 24° N., and two leagues from the shore, +this lad was called and searched for in all parts of the ship and +in the parts aloft, without an answer and without being found, being +wanted to take the helm in the morning watch. It was reported to the +Captain, who ordered the ship to be put about and further search to +be made. All parts of the sea were examined, his name was cried out, +signals were made with fire, all the rest of the night and part of +the following day being devoted to the search, without getting a +sight of him, nor any mark to guide us. + +In this confusion and in great sorrow we continued on our course. The +Captain was anxious to clear up the mystery, and made enquiries. He +found that, on certain days, the lad had filled two pitchers with +seeds, beads, bells, twine, nets, knives, and a hatchet; that he had +closed their mouths with wax of Nicaragua, that he had put wine and +a small box of conserves into a moderate-sized jar, and had taken his +sword. On that same morning he had been very attentive, listening to +the life of St. Anthony the hermit being read to him, and praising it +much. He turned down the page and kept the book. All the afternoon +he was at the masthead looking out, and taking bearings of the land +with a compass he possessed. On the night that he disappeared it +was noticed that he was very watchful. It was conjectured that with +a board, and some battens and cord he had in his berth, he had made +a raft, and that he went away on it, taking with him all the things +that have been mentioned, for none of them were to be found. It was +also said that he had a strong wish to remain with the natives of the +discovered land, and that he had asked one man to stay with him; but +as our departure had been sudden, he had no opportunity of carrying +out his intention. He had, therefore, determined to leave us here, +to teach the heathens or to live in solitude. His chest was opened, +and there was found his clothes, his money, and a memorandum of all +that did not belong to him and had been given to him to take care of, +desiring that it should be returned to the owners. + +This was the act of a man whom we held to be rational and a good +Christian, and when I think of his strange resolution it causes me +sorrow, much more that he should have launched himself on such a raft, +with great risk that he would never put his feet on land. Even if he +did, he might not find the requisites to sustain him. If he tried to +go inland, or to the banks of some river, or along the shore, who was +to carry the two pitchers for him, with the things he had with him, +and the other necessaries to maintain life? If eventually he met with +natives, they might be those who would receive him and treat him well, +or they might be those who eat human flesh. Then, to think of the +solitude, of his nakedness, and of the inclemency of the weather. If +he finds that the land does not suit him, from not offering the means +of carrying out his intention, or from having repented of what he had +done, how far he will be from any remedy, and how near to danger and +evil! There are other things well worthy of consideration; above all, +his being cut off from the divine offices and the sacraments. As I know +not his motives, I will not venture to be his judge in this matter; +only desiring that the Lord may have been served by guiding his destiny +in such a way that he may have been saved, and many others with him. + + + +A Great Storm. + +We continued on our course, the men ready with their arms, and +look-out men at the mast-heads, because we were approaching a cape +called San Lucas, where the Englishman, Thomas Cavendish, robbed the +ship Santa Ana. We soon passed it and in peace, and on Wednesday +the 11th of October, the sky was serene, the sea smooth, without +conjunction or opposition of the moon. But, in the mouth of the +Gulf of California, towards dawn, a wind sprung up from the N.E., +with very thick weather. At nine o'clock the wind shifted to N., +and increased so that we were obliged to batten down the hatchways, +and run before it only under the foresail, which was soon blown to +ribbons, and the ship broached to, breaking the rudder pintels. The +rudder being thus left free, gave such violent blows on either side +that the least harm to be feared was that it would be smashed into +splinters and leave the ship ungovernable. Presently the sailors, +understanding what that signified, helped each other and rigged +tackles, with which the rudder came under control. In bending another +foresail the man who was at the yard-arm was twice covered with water, +and was under water for long spaces of time. + +Presently we tried to make sail and run before it; but the wind +increased to such an extent that the violent seas threw up spray +which seemed like showers of rain, and the drops made the eyes smart. + +The waves filled the boat with water, and it was quickly washed into +the sea. It was scarcely gone when three seas broke over the ship, with +such force that they left her with the waist half full of water. With +this weight and the violence of the wind the ship could not rise to +it. Seeing this, the Moorish drummer said: "Here we have nothing more +to hope for." Presently he tossed himself into the sea, and such was +his luck that another wave brought him on board again. That he might +not commit such an act of folly again, he was taken into custody. + +The scuppers, where the water flows out of a ship, were small and +few. With water up to their waists, the men succeeded with bars and +levers in tearing away some of the planks, so as to allow the water +to escape. Here was seen those who helped without intelligence, and +others who ought to have helped but did not. Some were to be seen at +the pumps, others trying to lighten the ship, and many hoarse with +crying: "Cut away the main mast; it is that which is taking us to +the bottom." Some said Yes, others said No; but, in an instant, with +knives and hatchets, they were cutting away the weather rigging. The +Captain called to the Pilots to look out. They remained deaf. He sent +to tell them all to wait another hour. Many, seeing that the remedy +was delayed and the knife was only threatened, the diligence they used +was for what was important for their souls. Some confessed, others +sought pardon and pardoned, embraced and took leave of each other. Some +groaned and others wept, and many went into corners awaiting death. + +The Captain, in great haste, ordered the two natives to be brought +to the bed where he was lying, and the Franciscan Father to ask them +whether they wished to be Christians. Both replied in the affirmative +very fervently, and, when they had recited the creed, he baptized them, +calling them Pedro and Pablo. + +The Captain was their godfather, and embraced them with his eyes +full of tears. Seeing that they were frightened, he consoled them, +saying: "To God be the thanks that I owe and ought to give, oh eternal +Father! for such signal mercies. For you have been served that I should +go through such labours, without meriting this small fruit: small as +compared with my desires, but really great, for they are two souls +newly baptized and brought into the bosom of our Catholic Church." + +Pedro and Pablo were very devout and constant in prayers, with their +hands joined, and when the ship appeared to be sinking they cried: +"Jesus! Mary!" making the sign of the cross towards the sea. It +was enough to see and hear them, to melt the hardest hearts. The +ship ran on, and hope arose. There was one who said: "Fear nothing; +for such a work is done that God will add what is needed to save the +ship and crew." + +It was three in the afternoon. The wind and sea did not work nor +seem to fight with our poor ship, which was so much over on one side, +when a great sea arose, followed by two frightful claps of thunder, +and by such a fierce gust of wind that there seemed to be nothing +left for the ship but to turn over on her keel. Then the semblances of +the dead were seen, the most courageous ordering they knew not what, +and the Pilots dumb. Sighs, vows, promises, and colloquies with God +could be heard, and one who said: "O Lord! for what have I served in +all that has been done and seen if this ship is to go the bottom?" and +he passed on with great demonstrations of faith. In short, all were +crying out, seeking help from God, who was served that the fury of the +wind passed from N.E. to W., and it began to go down. The ship, raising +her neck and shaking her sides, quickly righted, and before night we +made sail and shaped an E.S.E. course, making for Cape Corrientes. + + + +Death of the Father Commissary. + +Now we proceeded under all sail with the wind astern and the people +happy, recounting the events of the recent battle with the elements +that it was well to note; some to arouse laughter, others with +amazement at having been witnesses of such a violent storm, the +rigour of which would have been greater and the damage worse if it +had continued through the night. Some praised the ship, its handiness +and strength; others the courage and nerve, and the prompt diligence, +and all the most high Lord for His mercies. Others there were who said +that the tempest and its furies were necessary to humiliate the proud, +to make the ungrateful grateful, and that might come to an end all the +enmities caused from want of love. For with such love can be suffered, +with manly fortitude, what had passed and a little more. Such events +more quickly give than offer; how much more where there was not one +who had a bad taste except this, which it was more difficult to suffer, +one to another for so long a time, in one ship always seeing the same +faces. I say no wonder, if fathers tire of their sons, brothers and +friends quarrel, and a husband sometimes comes to abhor his dear wife. + +Our Father Commissary, who had been ill for some time (I think from +want of proper nourishment, and owing to his great age), was attacked +with paroxysms and agonies in the middle of the following night, +and God was served in taking his life. Having worn his habit for +forty years, and being nearly eighty years old; also having died in +a just cause, having gained the jubilee conceded to the expedition, +we may well hope that he enjoys the presence of God. For the rest of +the night his body was lighted with four wax candles. When the day +came, the Father, his companion, with the crew of the ship, prayed +to God for his soul, and with much feeling he was buried in the sea +in sight of the islands called "Las Tres Marias." [118] + +The native named Pablo was very attentive, looking on at what was +taking place. As he saw that the body, owing to the weight attached +to its feet, went down, while, at the time of his baptism, they told +him that when Christians die they go to heaven, he asked how it was +that the Father, being a Christian, went to the bottom of the sea. As +best we could, he was given to understand that only the soul went to +heaven. As he knew little about that, he remained doubtful; and all +were full of admiration at seeing a boy of eight years old ask such +a question, who, only the other day, was a brutish gentile. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + + What else happened until the ship anchored in the port of Navidad. + + +We were in sight of land, and sailed along the coast, making the +short hours long, for the longing we felt to see the ship anchored +in the port of Zalagua for which we were making. Being almost there, +it fell calm. We struggled against it, but could never enter. It was +very unlucky, for the want of one hour's wind robbed us of the great +satisfaction of reaching port after all the want of rest during our +past labours. + +There was much discourse touching the necessity in which we were +placed, and meanwhile there was such a strong current that, in a short +time it nearly made us lose the 4 leagues there are between the port +of Zalagua and that of Navidad. Although it was a bad coast, it was +agreed to send two men on shore to seek for people and help. But, +as one of the barrels, on which they were, was carried away by the +current, the Captain ordered the men to come on board again lest they +should be drowned. If the ship passed the port of Navidad, for which +both wind and current were favourable, there was no other known port +near where we could be refreshed. + +Seeing the disgust and disquiet of the crew that the ship rolled, and +that there were only forty jars of water left on board, for all this, +and so as to run no further risks, it was resolved to make for the port +of Navidad. The Captain explained to the Chief Pilot the causes which +moved him to do so, the chief of which was the desire to send the news +to Mexico, that the Viceroy might send it to His Majesty, touching all +that happened, being that for which he had most care, finding himself +so near to death. The Pilot showed himself to be lukewarm about it; +in consequence of which the Captain issued an order to go at once to +that port, on pain of grave penalties, because so it was ordered. + +So the night closed in. The most expert of the sailors was stationed on +the bowsprit to give notice of the steering when she entered. Helped +much by the light wind, and much more by the current, we proceeded, +though slowly, and entered near a great rock, with a reef to +leeward. The night being dark, there was temerity in entering. Some +anxiety was caused at seeing the ship near the rocks, and some men +stripped ready to swim. There were these alarms, but good government +in the ship, which went further in. Then it fell a dead calm, and +we anchored in an insecure place, so as not to be carried out by the +tide. Soon a fresh S.E. breeze sprang up. The anchor was raised in a +great hurry, sail was made, and we were able to anchor further in. At +last, having passed the night in these brief voyages, the day came, +and we entered the port, anchoring in 12 fathoms in front of a beach +exposed to several winds. The ship was, therefore, secured with four +cables on the 21st of October, 1606. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. + + Relates what happened in this port of Navidad until we left it. + + +The ship was anchored; but, as we had no boat, we made a raft of two +barrels and a yard. The Captain ordered four men, with the necessary +provision of biscuits and arquebuses, to go on shore and look for some +settlements, of which he had notice. The raft was taken on shore by +the force of the waves. Three sailors who were on it found a new +boat in a certain place, and two jars in a straw hut. They also +found a river, from which they filled the jars. From this supply, +and the twenty-seven jars that remained full on board, the crew were +allowed to drink freely and quench their great thirst. They then +waited hopefully for a good report from their four companions. A day +and night passed, and on the next morning the four sailors came back, +who had been wandering all night among dense and thick trees, along +rivers and swamps, without having found a sign of any settlement. The +crew were very sad at this news; but presently two courageous sailors +came forward--one from Ayamonte, the other from Galicia--and said +to the Captain that, if he would give them leave, they would go on +shore and search for villages or people where God might guide them. + +That day they finished building a small boat on board. Some tents and +booths were set up on shore. The Captain landed with the standard and +banner, and with half the men armed; and he ordered that three pieces +should be fired from the ship at sunrise, and sunset, and at noon: +for by chance the report might be heard by cowherds or other people. + +Soon they began to try to catch birds, rabbits, and to fish; thinking +that, when provisions failed, they could in this way supply present +necessities. + +Things being in this state, one afternoon two mounted men were seen to +ride on to the beach in great haste, and dismount. Our people received +them with incredible joy, and gave them many cordial embraces. One was +an Indian farmer, a sharp fellow; the other one, Jeronimo Jurado de San +Lucar de Barrameda, who said that when he heard the report of the guns +he concluded that there must be a ship in need, for which cause he had +come; and there he was to do what he could that they might be relieved. + +The Captain, seeing his good will, embraced him a second time, and +contented both by giving them things from the ship. He asked Don +Jeronimo to return with the Sergeant-Major, who would go to Mexico +with the letter for the Viceroy, and with two other persons, who +would take money to buy provisions. Next day they sent fowls, eggs, +chickens, a calf and an ox, which sufficed, and more. + +The two good sailors arrived the same day, with natives, horses, +and succour of all kinds. It seemed to the crew that, coming second, +their work was not so much esteemed. But the Captain embraced them, +and said how much he valued their honourable resolves, and how pleased +he was, as all ought to be, with the trouble they had taken. + +The news of our being in the port, and of the good treatment we +extended to all who came to it, soon spread. Many natives, who were +concealed in the woods, by reason of those aggregations of one village +with others, came to bring us fruits, maize, and other things, for +which double their value was paid. In order that they might continue +to help, the Captain gave them biscuits, salt, wine, and other things, +and dressed three or four in silk. + +The Chief Admiral of Colima, Don Juan de Ribera, at the request of the +Captain, and on payment, sent a quantity of biscuits and fowls. So, +in the twenty-seven days that we were there, we were gaining new +strength, and recovering from a certain disease in the gums, which +on these coasts usually attacks those who come from Manilla. + +Satan did not neglect to sow bad and mischievous seeds in this port, +such as he had sown up to this time; and, what was worse, he found +soil disposed to receive, to blossom, and to yield fruit, which was +all he wanted. + +As soon as our Father saw natives, he wanted that they should find +him horses, to go to Mexico. The Captain knew this, and asked him +many times to consider the little space of time that was needed for +reaching Acapulco, and that nothing would be more noteworthy than to +complete the voyage. To this the priest replied, that he knew what +suited him best; that he did not want in that short space to die and +be thrown into the sea, like the Father Commissary, but to go direct +to his cell, and there live and die surrounded by his brethren. The +Captain answered that it would certainly look very bad to leave the +ship without a priest to attend to such spiritual needs as might +arise. After the loss of the other priest, his companion, he was our +curate; that he should not leave us without any one, but use charity, +for which God would give him as much life as He gave health. To this +he replied: "Let what may appear, appear: for I owe more to myself, +and charity must begin at home." Other replies there were, which +need not be repeated; and, with regard to what has been told, and +what silence has been kept about it, the Captain said: "My Father, +at the end of so long a voyage, let us be blind to our passions--we +who have another voyage to make." On this, the Father threw himself at +the feet of the Captain; and, without the Captain being able to stop +him, owing to his weakness, he kissed both his groins. The Captain +stretched himself out, as the Father had done, and kissed the soles +of both his feet, saying: "I do not intend to be behind in this." + +There were certain people who, for themselves and others, wished to +be left on shore. The Captain said to this, that for the service they +had done until now they might as well be on shore. + +Another there was who asked the Captain to certify that he had not +received royal pay, he himself having given it. He also wanted the +title of Admiral while another did the duty. Many others each wanted +to be the person to take the letters to the Viceroy, each alleging +his own great merits. Owing to this, and for many other reasons which +need not be specified, there were many disputes and complaints; from +which it may be judged, as well as from all that has gone before, +how much the discoveries cost, made by the wills of men who thought +little of discovering new lands. + +There had come on the voyage, serving the Fathers, an Indian youth +aged about twenty years, named Francisco, a native of Peru. He wore +the habit of a lay brother, his life being one of self-denial. He +was a humble, frugal, and grateful man, very peaceful, and so zealous +for the good of the souls in the new discoveries that he wished to be +left behind with them. He had a great love and respect for God, and in +everything, however hard it might be, he conformed to His will. To all +he showed a good disposition and pleasant countenance, did good for +evil, never complained, or sought recompence nor treated of it. His +example aroused envy in the mind of a soldier who was annoyed at +hearing his virtues praised. So I say that there is no escape from the +tongues of men, and whether high or low he has to receive their blows. + +The feast of All Saints was approaching, which was one of the +jubilee days of the voyage. For this all our people confessed, +and an altar was prepared under a tent, having obtained hosts from +a village called Utlan, and invited all the people in the farms to +come. They came, Spaniards, Indians, and others, to hear the Mass said +by our Father. Pedro and Pablo were on their knees, each one with a +lighted torch, throwing light all the time that the sacrifice and the +communion lasted. A few days afterwards this monk departed by land, +while we got ready to go by sea. + +Being very desirous of flying from this beach, and from the annoyance +of such a quantity of mosquitos, sand-flies, and jiggers, which swarm +in this port day and night, without the possibility of any defence +from them, we made sail on the 16th of November. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVIII. + + The remainder of the voyage, and how the ship anchored in the + port of Acapulco. + + +We navigated with little wind to the purpose, and with land and sea +breezes. For some time there was a current against us, and we were +obliged to go in shore until we grounded on the beach of Citala. We +touched bottom twice; but at last we came near the port, and a boat +under sail and oars came out to know what ship we were. The Captain +sent a messenger in the dingey, and ordered the boat to keep off +until we anchored in the port of Acapulco, on the 23rd of November, +1606. We had only one death--that of the Father Commissary--and all +were in good health. Thanks be to God for these and all His other +mercies shown to us during the voyage! + +It is to be noted that when from the bay the S.E. wind rushed upon us, +it was not settled to come to New Spain, for which reason we did not +come, as we might have done, to E.N.E. To cross the line 400 leagues +further east than we crossed it, would have made a shorter passage. If +the N.W. wind we had when we went from Taumaco to the bay is constant, +it would be much shorter. + +The following day was the Feast of St. Catherine the Martyr. The +Captain left the ship with all his crew, following the royal standard, +accompanied by many of the townspeople, and proceeded from the beach to +the church. They brought Pedro and Pablo, both dressed in new clothes, +to the font. Having said Mass, the Vicar gave them the oil and chrism, +what they had not received before, because the ship was rolling so much +when they were baptized. They returned to the ship in the same order. + +A few days after our arrival, a ship came from the Philippines with +the news that Don Pedro de Acuña, the Governor of them, had taken +the island of Ternate with little loss. This was very joyful news, +and was celebrated here by ringing of bells and rejoicing of the +people. In Mexico they made high festival, worthy of so desirable a +victory. I say this, and hope there will be greater festivities for the +discovery of so many islands it pleased God to show me. All is under +one master, and it will be very just that they should be known to the +world for the greater glory of God and honour of our Spain. Another +ship also arrived, on board of which sixty-nine persons died at sea, +of a great sickness that broke out during the voyage. I was told that, +during the voyage, a fowl was bought for 2,400 reals and another for +3,200, yet the owners did not wish to sell. + + +Account of the solemnity with which the cross of orange wood was +landed and received, that had been raised in the bay of St. Philip +and St. James. + +Fray Juan de Mendoza, Guardian of the Convent of Barefoot Franciscans +in this port, with much endearment, asked the Captain for the cross of +orange wood, being envious of the veneration with which it had been +received by the two monks of his order on the day that it was set up +in the bay of St. Philip and St. James. He said he wanted to receive +it on the beach, and carry it in procession to his convent. Over +this there was a very honourable and holy discussion, for the Vicar +of the town wanted to receive it with the same reverence, to put +it into the parish church. The question was argued by both sides; +and, finally, owing to certain prayers, the Vicar gave up his claim, +and the Captain gave it to the Guardian, to remain in his power. + +On the day of the Conception of the Mother of God, the Captain, +with the greatest solemnity possible, took the cross from the ship +to the sea shore, and delivered it to the said Father Guardians, with +six other monks. They received it on their knees with much devotion, +then forming in procession. On each side of the cross were Pedro and +Pablo, with lighted torches. Behind were all the people of the town, +carrying banner and box. So we marched to the convent. At the door of +the church there was a Father in vestments. The Captain, who arrived +first, was acting as mace-bearer until he came to where the Guardian +was, who on his knees delivered the cross to him. The Captain gave it +to the Father, who took it into the church and fastened it to the high +altar, with ringing of bells at both churches, sound of trumpets, and +discharge of guns and of arquebuses and muskets by the soldiers. All +the people showed their joy; and not less did the Captain, although +he had desired to go to Rome and put this cross in the hands of the +Pontiff, and tell him that it was the first that had been raised in +those new lands in the name of the Catholic Church. He wished to bring +the natives as first-fruits, and to ask for all those and other great +favours and concessions. It happened that events robbed him of this +triumph: but he gave many thanks to God, through whose goodness he +hopes to return the cross to the place whence it came. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIX. + + What happened to the Captain in Mexico, and in his voyage, until + he arrived at the Court of Spain. + + +No sooner had the crew disembarked, than there were persons who, to +gratify their evil passions, wrote to the Marquis of Montes Claros, +Viceroy of Mexico, and sowed many letters all over the land, trying to +misrepresent and discredit the expedition. I did my best to satisfy +people through others, proclaiming my truthfulness and zeal. I sent +one letter to the Viceroy, asking for orders respecting the disposal of +the ship. They were that I was to deliver her to the royal officers at +Acapulco, as she belonged to His Majesty. I did this, and left Acapulco +on the first day of the year 1607, entering the city of Mexico on +St. Anthony's Day. On that of St. Sebastian the Viceroy received me +kindly, and by his order I made a report and narrative of all that +had happened. Hearing that Don Luis de Velasco, who had been Viceroy +of Peru at the time when I first proposed this voyage, was living +near Mexico, I went to see him, and gave him an account of all that +had happened. He gave me encouragement and showed me much kindness. + +Pedro, who was in Mexico, was now very conversant in our language. He +made certain very important statements in answer to questions asked of +him, respecting his country and the surrounding regions; making known +its extent, its food resources and riches, and how there were silver, +gold, and pearls in abundance; and describing the idols they worship, +their rites and ceremonies, and how they ordinarily converse with the +Devil. Showing him some of our things, he gave the names for them in +his language. But in a short time he died, and so did the other native, +Pablo, who was a boy with a very beautiful countenance and disposition. + +I again spoke with the Viceroy respecting my departure and my +necessities. He gave me no remedy for them, but treated me with +kindness, and said that he was about to go to Peru, where he had been +appointed Viceroy, and that if I should return during his time he would +issue good orders which all would obey, and that he felt an interest +in my enterprise, which he understood to be a great affair. With this +he took leave of me, and the day of my departure arrived without my +possessing a single dollar to set me on the road. But God helped me +through the kindness of one Captain Gaspar Mendez de Vera and one +Leonardo de Oria, in San Juan de Ulloa, who received me on board his +ship. We arrived safely at Cadiz, where I landed. I sold my bed to +reach San Lucar, where I pawned something else, which enabled me to +go on to Seville. There I sold all I had left to sustain me, and with +500 reals given to me by Don Francisco Duarte, and other help from +my companion, named Rodrigo Mejia, I arrived at Madrid on the 9th of +October, 1607. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XL. + + What happened to the Captain during this his last visit to the + Court, until he negotiated the issue of an order for his despatch. + + +During the first eleven days after my arrival at the Court, I could +not obtain the convenience for writing my memorials, nor succeed +in getting an interview with the Count of Lemos, who was President +of the Council of the Indies. At last he saw me, read much of this +narrative, and said: "What right have we to these regions?" I replied: +"The same right as we had to possess ourselves of the others." I +had several other interviews with him, and he ordered me to kiss the +hand of His Majesty, and that I should see the Duke of Lerma, which I +did. I presented many and very difficult memorials, giving my reasons, +and declaring my enterprise and its advantages, and soliciting and +urging my despatch. + +I had these memorials printed when I had the means; and when I had not, +they were copied, presented and distributed among the members of the +Councils of State, of War, and of the Indies, and the Ministers. Most +of them received the memorials well, and seemed to value them; but +not for this did my despatch progress any faster. On the contrary, +on the 6th of March, 1608, His Majesty, through the Duke of Lerma, +sent a long memorial to the Council of the Indies, by which my +affairs were treated carelessly and harshly, because on the first +occasion they had been managed by the Council of State. In effect, +they told me that I should receive their reply from Don Francisco de +Tejada, who was a member of the said Council of the Indies. He told +me that I should return to Peru, to the city of the Kings; and that +there the Viceroy would give orders as to what was to be done. I +answered that it would not be well to send me on so long a voyage, +on so serious a business, without knowing what would be done. So I +went on sending my memorials, and I had hopes for better success: +because, at that time, the Council received a letter, which Juan de +Esquirel, Master of the Camp at Ternate, wrote to the Audience of +the city of Manilla, in which he said that there had arrived in that +port a vessel, whose Captain was one Luis Velez de Torres, said to +be one of the three under the command of the Captain Pedro Fernandez +de Quiros, with which he left Peru to discover the unknown parts +to the south. "He says he parted company 1,500 leagues from here, +and had coasted along for 800 leagues of a land. He arrived in want, +and I supplied him with what I could. He goes to Manilla, and will +send a more particular account to your Highness." + +Afterwards, I saw the narrative of the voyage of Luis Vaez, in +possession of the Constable of Castille, which gave me great pleasure, +and incited me to send in more memorials, praying for my despatch, +and for the things that must be conceded with a view to it. But my +ill-luck was so great, that I could never get anything settled. All +appeared to point to my detention, and at times I was depreciated by +the Ministers, and especially by those of the Council of the Indies; +for I always found more recognition from those of the Council of State. + +Seeing this, I procured another audience of His Majesty, and obtained +what I wanted, on Epiphany, in the year 1609, after dinner, being +favoured in this, as in other things, by the Marquis of Velada. I +showed my papers, maps and sea-charts: explained which were the lands +I proposed to seek, and their grandeur; and related the events of the +voyages I had already made. Having seen all my demonstrations with +interest, he rose; and, asking for my despatch, the Marquis answered +that all would be well. + +So, on the 7th of February, a decree was issued really treating +of this business, and granting me some money in aid. After several +consultations, and an order for me to frame an estimate of the expenses +of the expedition, another decree came out, passing the business on +to the Council of the Indies; where I had to begin all over again, +and at the end of many months an order was given to me, according to +the following tenor: + + + Royal Order. + + The King.--To the Marquis of Montes Claros, my cousin, my Viceroy, + Governor, and Captain-General of the provinces of Peru; or to + the person or persons in whose charge the government may be. The + Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, who, as you have been informed, + is the person who has undertaken the discovery of the unknown land + in the south, has represented to me how that, I having ordered the + necessary despatch through my Council of State, for him to make + the said discoveries, and that the Viceroys, your predecessors, + were to supply him with all that was necessary for the voyage, + he sailed with this object from the port of Callao on the 21st + of December, of the year 1605, with two ships and a launch, + having on board crews and the rest that was needed, and steered + W.S.W. until he reached the latitude of 26° S., by which course, + and by others, he discovered twenty islands--twelve inhabited by + various tribes--and three-parts of a land which he conceived to + be all one, and suspected to be continental, and a great bay with + a good port within it; whence he sailed with the three vessels, + with the object of exploring a great and high chain of mountains + to the S.W.; and in returning to the said port the Almiranta and + the launch anchored. But the Capitana, in which he was, could + not, and was driven out; for which cause, and for many others + which obliged him, he arrived at the Port of Acupulco, whence he + came to Spain to give me an account of the success of the voyage, + in the year 1607. He stated that the land he had discovered was + pleasant, temperate, and yielding many different kinds of fruits; + the people domestic and disposed to receive our Holy Faith; and + that what was left to be seen and discovered is much more beyond + comparison. With great perseverance he has prayed and supplicated + me to consider the importance of this discovery and settlement, + and the great service it will be to our Lord that this land should + be settled and the Faith planted in it, bringing to the bosom + of the Church and to a knowledge of the truth such an infinite + number of souls as there are in that new world, where he has + taken possession in a good port, and celebrated Mass; as well as + the usefulness and aggrandizement that will result to my crown, + and to all my kingdoms. His object and intention is no more than to + perform this service to our Lord, and to follow that cause which he + had served for so many years, suffering shipwrecks and hardships; + it is now ordered that he be provided with all things necessary + again to make that voyage and form a settlement; for which it is + necessary that he should have a thousand men of this kingdom, of + which twelve to be monks of the Order of St. Francis, or Capuchins, + who must be learned, with the necessary powers, and provided with + requisites and ornaments; also six Brothers of St. John of God, + medical man, surgeon, barbers, and medicines; and that in these + provinces he be given ships, artillery, muskets, arquebuses, and + other weapons and stores that may be necessary; also a quantity of + things for bartering with natives, a good store of iron in sheets, + and tools to cultivate the land and work mines. [119] + + By reason of my great desire that the said discovery and settlement + should take effect, for the good of the souls of those natives, I + have ordered the said Captain Pedro Fernandez de Quiros to return + to Peru by the first opportunity; and I charge and order you + that as soon as he arrives you are to make arrangements for his + despatch, and provide all he requires for the voyage, by account + of my royal treasury, so that it may be done with all speed, not + offering any obstacle, but giving all the supplies necessary, and + orders that he may be obeyed by all who go with him and under his + command; and let all else be done that is convenient and usual in + making other similar voyages, discoveries, and settlements. I order + the officers of my royal revenues to comply in conformity with + this decree; and for this compliance this is my command. [120] I + again charge you to despatch the Captain Quiros well and speedily; + and you advise me that you have done so, for I shall be pleased + to know it, honouring, favouring, and treating him well: for in + this you will serve me. I, the King. By command of the King our + Lord.--Gabriel de Hoa. Witnessed by those of the Council. + + +Copy of a letter which the Secretary, Gabriel de Hoa, sent to the +Viceroy with the Royal Order. + + + Captain Quiros returns to the kingdom with the enclosed despatch, + in pursuance of his discovery:--"I have assisted here in this cause + with much trouble and inconvenience, and with great zeal, for the + service of our Lord and of His Majesty. Your Excellency animates, + enforces, and helps this enterprise in furtherance of the orders + of His Majesty, whose will is that Captain Quiros shall have quick + despatch and good treatment, which your Excellency will know how + to extend to one whose labours and voyages merit recognition, and + who again offers himself for other greater labours. May our Lord + guard your Excellency as I desire.--Madrid, December 19th, 1609." + + + + + + +CHAPTER XLI. + + Of what the Captain did after he had received this Order, and + how he was given another. + + +I was not satisfied with this Order, because it was confused, and +did not give me the power that was necessary to order myself what +was necessary for my despatch; and because in effect it left it open +for the Viceroy to order from what port in Peru I should sail as he +might choose. Remembering how badly the orders and decrees of His +Majesty are complied with in distant provinces, even when they are +very imperative, I began again to send in more memorials representing +these inconveniences, and declaring that 500,000 ducats were required +for my undertaking, and for what I had to spend and distribute; +and I sent in a detailed account of how I had spent what was given +me for the last expedition. + +Don Francisco de Tejada told me that there were not wanting those who +considered that the despatch they had given me was well enough. I +replied that it must have been measured out according to my small +merits, not according to the grandeur and necessities of the work. So +I went on sending in more and more memorials to His Majesty, his +Councils and Councillors, until in the month of May I was sent for +by the Secretary, Antonio de Aroztegui, who told me that things had +been arranged as I wished, as regards the terms of the Order and the +expenses. I answered that the expenses of a cabin boy were enough for +me personally if the despatch was good; that I did not put a price on +my services. With this object I began new memorials to the Council +of State, and when I thought that I was about to secure my desires, +the business was again turned over to the Council of the Indies. In +this Council, as the feeling was cold towards me and my cause, they +turned and twisted much that His Majesty had ordered. On the 1st of +November, 1610, they gave me an Order of the following tenor:-- + + + Revised Royal Order. + + The King. To the Marquis of Montes Claros, my cousin, my Viceroy + and Captain General of the provinces of Peru, or to the person + or persons in whose charge their government may be. [121] + + Dated at San Lorenzo, the 1st of November, 1610. I the King. By + order of the King our Lord, Pedro de Ledesma. + + + + + + +CHAPTER XLII. + + Of what the Captain did after having received the above Order. + + +Seeing the weakness of the new Royal Order, and that there was wanting +in it many things for which I had stipulated and which I held to be +important for my enterprise, I again renewed my representations to +the Council of State that they might be conceded to me, and sent in +several memorials with this object, and others to represent the harm +done to the enterprise by the delay; that now the English and Dutch +would hear of it, and that if we did not occupy first, they might +get those lands and seas into their power. The result was that I was +detained longer, with an Order that a certain quantity of money was +to be allowed to me each month for my sustenance, and 300 ducats to +pay my debts, which was insufficient. Other help was given me by the +good secretary, Antonio de Aroztegui. + +I also submitted a memorial in which I proposed the way that, in my +opinion, the discovery, settlement, and government of those nations +should be conducted; avoiding the evils which, by adopting other ways, +had accompanied former discoveries. All this was heard and received +well, but unluckily my despatch was delayed, and at the end of many +years [122] the Secretary, Juan de Eiriza, read to me and gave me a +letter to this effect: "Resolved by His Majesty in the business of +Captain Quiros, that in an affair of such magnitude it is necessary +to proceed circumspectly, and to be sure of the consequences of +each step. His Majesty will rejoice that half should be given for +the discovery desired by Quiros. For this he is to return to Peru, +and follow the instructions given to him by the Viceroy, with the +assurance that they will be such as if he alone had the conduct of +the discovery." To this decree I answered what appeared convenient, +referring to my honour and that of the cause; and declaring that +I could not go except with sufficient papers and securities very +clearly and positively drawn up. + +But the more time slipped away the more my claims went back, owing +to those who were against me, and the little confidence they had in +myself and in my promises. As the Council of State would not decide +anything without first referring it to the Council of the Indies, +my prospects became worse. Don Luis de Velasco, who had come as +President of that Council, instead of helping me, owing to having +been the person who first received my project in Peru, and to having +received such full notice of it, was the least favourable. Finally, +Don Francisco de Borja, Prince of Esquilache, having been appointed +Viceroy of Peru, both Councils concurred in giving me an order to go +out with him, assuring me that he had an urgent order from His Majesty +to despatch me as soon as I should arrive at Callao, and to arrange +for everything that was necessary for my voyage. On this subject +there was a meeting in the house of the President of the Council of +the Indies, at which the new Viceroy was present. He assured me that +what I wanted would certainly be done: that he was able to promise; +and that if there was any wrong in the business of my despatch, +it was not to be charged to him for the value of the whole world, +because he was jealous of his reputation. + +With this, and seeing that in so many years I could not negotiate +anything else, and that my life and patience were worn out, +I determined to put into his hands my life and work. He said: +"Trust me, and see what I shall do." Afterwards I spoke with him +several times, and made him thoroughly acquainted with my affairs, +and with what was necessary for them. I had been anxious to send +to Rome to ask for certain grants from His Holiness. I petitioned, +and the Prince gave me the following certificate: + + +Don Francisco de Borja, Prince of Esquilache, Count of Mayalda, +Gentleman of the Chamber of the King our Lord, and his Viceroy and +Captain-General of his kingdoms of Peru: I certify that His Majesty +has ordered me to take in my company the Captain Pedro Fernandez +de Quiros, that I may despatch him from the Port of Callao to the +settlement of the southern region; and that this will be when I may +judge it to be convenient, and the state of affairs in Peru makes it +proper to carry it out.--Given in Madrid on the 21st of October, 1614. + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] Historia del descubrimiento de las regiones Austriales hecho por +el General Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, publicada por Don Justo Zaragoza +(3 vols. Madrid, 1876.) + +[2] One in the early part of the second voyage of Mendaña, where +he compares the importance and influence of small things to stars +of unequal sizes (see p. 5); and other passages, though written +in prose are really in verse, in the Spanish. Such is the passage +describing the reappearance of the Almiranta after being out of +sight (p. 192); the description of a visit made by natives to the +Spanish ships (p. 210); and, again, when the Almiranta stood out +to sea (p. 212). The description of Quiros on a bed of sickness at +the mercy of his Pilots is really in verse in the Spanish (p. 280); +and the reasons given by Quiros for not punishing mutineers may be +those of the leader of the expedition, but the words are certainly +those of his poetical Secretary. + +[3] See p. 262. + +[4] See pp. 200 and 418. + +[5] See pp. 254 and 383. + +[6] I have given an account of Suarez de Figueroa and of his works in +a footnote to my translation of the Spanish account of the capture of +Sir Richard Hawkins, also taken from the Hechos del Marques de Cañete. + +[7] Quiros was devoted to the Franciscans, and had several in +his fleet. Torquemada was Provincial of the Order in Mexico. At a +later date, two historians of the Order of St. Francis in Peru gave +accounts of the voyage, quoting from Torquemada, and without any +other original sources of information. One was Fray Antonio Daza, +who wrote Cronica General de la Orden de San Francisco. The other is +a folio with double columns: Cronica de la religiosissima provincia +de la Orden de San Francisco de la regular observancia compuesta +por el R.P. Fray Diego de Cordova, Salinas (1651). This work is very +rare. There is no copy in the British Museum. There was one in the +Library at Lima. Cordova gives a brief account of the voyage of Quiros, +copying from Torquemada. Neither of these Franciscan historians, +writing in Peru many years afterwards, are of any authority on the +voyage of Quiros beyond what they derive from Torquemada. Daza, +however, gives the Act of Possession at Espiritu Santo, which is not +quoted in full by Torquemada (see p. 444). Antonio de Ulloa, in his +Resumen, quotes from Cordova respecting an island discovered in 28° +S. by Quiros, but the quotation is not correct. It is referred to by +Mr. Major in his Early Voyages to Australia, p. lxxii. Mr. Major had +never seen the work of Cordova. + +[8] See Antonio (Nic.), Bibliotheca Hispana vetus et nova, sive +Hispanicorum scriptorum. + +[9] Diego de Prado y Tobar (see p. 513). + +[10] These particulars are gathered from the information given +and recorded, when Quiros and his family sailed for Peru in +1615. "Informaciones presentados por el Capitan Pedro Fernandez de +Quiros para paser a las Indias con su mujer y hijos, en la casa +de contratacion de Sevilla, 24 Marzo, 1615" (Archivo de Indias), +referred to by Zaragoza, vol. iii, p. 79 (n). Marriage and ages of +wife and children are given. + +[11] Don Luis de Velasco, Viceroy of Peru from 1596 to 1604, was the +son of a distinguished father of the same names, of the family of the +Constables of Castille. The father was the second Viceroy of Mexico. He +sent an expedition to Florida, and another to the Philippines under +Miguel Lopez de Legaspé. The elder Don Luis died at Mexico, where his +son was born in 1555. The younger Don Luis de Velasco was Governor +of Cempoala, and proceeding to Spain, was appointed by Philip II +Ambassador at Florence. In 1590 he became Viceroy of Mexico, and in +1595 Viceroy of Peru. In January, 1604, he returned to Mexico, and +lived there privately for three years. He was appointed Viceroy of +Mexico a second time in 1607, and was created Marquis of Salinas. In +1611 he became President of the Council of the Indies, serving in +that post until his death in 1616. + +[12] Arca de Noe, por El Capitan de navio Cesario Fernandez Duro +(Madrid, 1881), p. 560. Lucas de Quiros drew a map of the western +side of South America, from Cartagena to Magellan's Strait, under the +auspices of the Prince of Esquilache, Viceroy of Peru. Lucas is called +on it "Cosmógrafo del Peru." The map is drawn on parchment. See also +J. de la Espada, Relacion Geografica, p. cxl. + +[13] Don Gaspar de Zuñiga y Azevedo, Count of Monterey, had been +Viceroy of Mexico from 1595 to 1603, and was transferred to Peru to +succeed Don Luis de Velasco. He arrived at Lima in very bad health. + +[14] He had been Pilot of the ship which brought the Count of Monterey +from Acapulco to Callao. + +[15] Juan de Iturbe says 40°, for which there is no other +authority. But Arias, in his Memorial (see p. 528), says that Quiros +was advised by Torres and his other companions to go as far as 40° +S. Quiros and Torres give 30° as the limit. It was the proposal of +Quiros himself, not in any instructions given to him. There were no +such instructions. + +[16] Royal Geographical Society's Journal, Aug. 1902, vol. xx, p. 207. + +[17] La Encarnacion, p. 487 (Luna-puesta, p. 192; Anegada, p. 329), +is one of the coral islands of the Dangerous or Low Archipelago, +probably Ducie Island. + +San Juan Bautista, pp. 193, 487 (Sin Puerto, p. 330; San Valerio, +p. 456), is Henderson Island. + +Santelmo, pp. 195, 487, Marutea, or Lord Hood Island. + +Las Cuatro Coronadas, pp. 195, 487 (Las Virgenes, p. 456), Actæon +group. + +San Miguel, pp. 196,487, Aburaa Island. + +La Conversion de San Pablo, pp. 204, 487, Anaa or Chain Island. + +La Decena, pp. 204, 487 (Santa Polonia, p. 456), is Niau or Greig +Island. + +La Sagittaria, pp. 204, 487, Mahatea or Aurora Island. + +La Fugitiva, pp. 205, 487, Matahiva or Lazareff Island. + +San Bernardo, pp. 207, 425, 457 (Island of Fish, p. 342). + +Peregrino, pp. 217, 487 (Gente Hermosa, p. 431; Matanza, p. 459), +"Genta hermosa" on modern charts. + +[18] This latitude is only given in the Memorial of Arias. See p. 525. + +[19] See p. 469. There was also a general map of the discoveries of +Torres, which is lost. + +[20] See his extraordinary Will at p. 291. + +[21] Zaragoza, vol. ii, p. 191 (23 pages). + +[22] See p. 477. + +[23] See p. 487. + +[24] See p. 504. + +[25] Zaragoza, vol. ii, p. 242. + +[26] Ibid., vol. iii, p. 268. + +[27] These letters were published by Zaragoza (vol. ii, p. 187), +and also in the Boletin de la Sociedad Geografica de Madrid for 1878 +(tom. iv, p. 62). Lord Stanley of Alderley gave a translation of one +of them in his Philippine Islands, p. 412 (Hakluyt Soc., 1868). + +[28] See p. 469. + +[29] Tom. iv, Jan. 1878. The maps were reproduced, without colour, +in Collingridge's Discovery of Australia (1895). + +[30] In the Biblioteca Nacional at Madrid (J. 2). + +[31] Papeles tocantes à la Iglesia Española (British Museum, 4745, +f. 11). + +[32] See pp. 526 to 528 and footnotes. + +[33] Zaragoza, vol. ii, p. 259. + +[34] Dr. Don Bernardo de Sandoval y Roxas, a grandson of the +second Count of Lerma, was then Archbishop of Toledo, Cardinal and +Inquisitor-General. He died in 1618. + +[35] Don Juan Fernandez de Velasco, Duke of Frias, Marquis of +Berlangas, and Count of Haro, was hereditary Constable of Castille. He +died at Madrid in 1613. + +[36] Don Juan Hurtado de Mendoza, Duke of Infantado and Marquis of +Santillana. He died in 1624. + +[37] Don Pedro Fernandez de Castro, seventh Count of Lemos, was +Ambassador at Rome in 1600, President of the Council of the Indies, +and afterwards Viceroy of Naples. He married his cousin, a daughter +of the Duke of Lerma. He was the patron of Cervantes. His son was +Viceroy of Peru 1667-72. + +[38] He was a grandson of Francisco de Borja, Duke of Gandia, and +the third General of the Jesuits who was canonized. He was Prince of +Esquilache by right of his wife, and his age was thirty-two when he +went out as Viceroy of Peru in 1615. He reached Lima in December. + +[39] Luis de Belmonte Bermudez then went to Mexico, and he appears to +have returned to Seville in 1616. There he wrote El Cisma de Jordan. In +1618 he settled at Madrid. Then appeared his Aurora de Cristo and +Hispalica. In the Comedias Escojidas (4to, Madrid, 1682-1704) there +are eleven plays of Belmonte, including the Renegade of Valladolid, +and God the Best Guardian. Ticknor mentions them as a singular mixture +of what is sacred and what is profane (Ticknor's Spanish Literature, +vol. ii, p. 300). + +[40] Historia del descubrimiento de las Regiones Austriales. + +[41] An office corresponding to the President or Governor of a +province. Præfectus. "Adelante," in front; more advanced than others. + +[42] Here Suarez de Figueroa inserts the following speech, made by +the Marquis of Cañete to Mendaña. + +On one of the many occasions when Alvaro de Mendaña (then fitting out) +had interviews with the Viceroy to communicate some particulars and +to kiss his hand for the many kindnesses and favours he had received +from him, his Excellency said: "My Lord the Adelantado, I may well +wish you God speed on commencing this business with as vigorous a set +of men as can be found in the world. Prodigious are the deeds of the +Spaniards at various times and in various places, and especially when +led by valorous generals who know how to overcome difficulties; who +have met dangers with prudence; who under adverse circumstances have +maintained a cheerful countenance and kept up the spirits of their +followers with encouraging words and promises; who rewarded them; who +cherished them; who succoured them; and who, ruling by kindness, took +advantage of every opportunity with wisdom. There are so many glorious +leaders of our nation who have acted thus, that might be named, that +I undoubtedly should tire my tongue in enumerating them and my memory +in bringing them to mind. On the other side their valiant followers +have always been, on these occasions, loyal and obedient, and full +of courtesy and virtue both in word and deed. If in the present age +these generalities suffer from some exceptions, it is not the fault +of the men. Various times bring forth misfortunes. A few years soon +pass in the harvest of valour, and few good things are known of the +leaders. This is especially the case in maritime expeditions where the +inconveniences and difficulties are innumerable, while the remedies +that can be applied to them are few and of little efficacy. Certain +ancient mariners make a notable clamour, in whose eyes our ancestors +were so excellent that they hold them in great veneration. But they all +made furrows in the eastern sea; very little was done by them on the +western side, which scarcely puts limits to the imagination. On that +side some navigators have been eminent. In the first rank is Columbus, +who, being despised by various sovereigns, made his discovery finally +for the Catholic ones, Isabella and Ferdinand, and showed America, the +foundation on which has been built so many and such important edifices, +alike spiritual as temporal. He was succeeded by the wonderful Cortes, +with his extensions of empire and his marvellous deeds. In the part +where we are now was the famous Francisco Pizarro, conqueror of +so many provinces. Then came Magellan, who nearly went round the +world, and came to an end which was less fortunate than his spirit +deserved. Next Gama sought remote regions, and opened to the nation +the commerce of the east. Valiant (it need not be denied) were the +audacious enterprises of Drake, Cavendish, and Hawkins, emulous of the +fame of Magellan. Traversing the strait which bears Magellan's name, +they came to disturb the seas which for many previous years had been +secure and peaceful. But this notwithstanding, it appears to me that I +now behold in you a discoverer not less distinguished and famous than +those. It has been so in all countries, in times past, that important +affairs have been entrusted to him who, either by reason of his genius, +or the dignity of his person, or the purity of his life, or his grace +and authority, had acquired the universal fame of a true umpire of +peace and war, justly committing to his prudence the preservation and +prosperity of the state. It is certain that all these qualifications +are combined in your person. Your actions prove it, and confirm the +choice made by His Majesty for so great a service to God and to him. I +hold that there can be no doubt that your established government will +be glorious and triumphant, and that the people in your company will +remain under it; so that, almost from this time thanks may be given +to you for your great industry and valour." + +[43] Equivalent to Colonel. He was an old soldier named Pedro Merino +Manrique. The name is given by Suarez de Figueroa. + +[44] 12° 3' 45'' S. Callao Castle; 12° 2' 34'' S. Lima. + +[45] Magdalena is in 10° 25' S. and 138° 28' W. + +[46] Suarez de Figueroa says it was a girl. + +[47] Suarez de Figueroa quotes all this word for word, and here says +that he is quoting from the papers of the Chief Pilot. + +[48] Joints of bamboos in which they carry water. + +[49] A palmo is 8 inches, being a quarter of a vara, which is 32.9 +inches. + +[50] The earliest description of the bread fruit. + +[51] Piece of canvas laced to the foot of the mainsail and foresail. + +[52] This is the island of Tinakula, an active volcano rising 3,000 +feet above the sea in a most perfectly shaped cone, to the north of +the island of Santa Cruz. The volcano is still in full activity. It +is in lat. 10° 24´ S., long. 165° 45´ W. + +[53] 8.346 inches. + +[54] Nupani, Nukapu, and several other small reef islands north of +Santa Cruz. + +[55] In lat. 10° 40' S., long. 165° 45' 30'' W. + +[56] Not a Spanish word. + +[57] Felipe Corzo. He was an enemy of Quiros. + +[58] Outpost guard, whence sentries were selected. A picket. Usually +consisting of twenty or thirty men. + +[59] Caracha is a cutaneous disease in Peruvian parlance; caaranta, +a person who has no eyebrows, also a Peruvianism. + +[60] Tauriqui of Mendaña's first voyage. + +[61] Namely, the Devil. + +[62] A quarter of an azumbre, which is about half a gallon. + +[63] No such word in Spanish, nor is it a Peruvianism. + +[64] The brothers Ulloa, in their Noticias Secretas, spoke very highly +of the "guatchapeli" wood of Guayaquil (p. 58) for ship-building, +especially extolling its durability. + +[65] The "honest man" is evidently the Chief Pilot himself. + +[66] Here Suarez de Figueroa introduces a fuller account of the +Ladrone Islanders, especially of their customs connected with the +burial of the dead, with an anecdote about an adventure between a +Spanish soldier and a native of Guan. + +[67] The object of the voyage had been to reach the Solomon Islands, +which Alvaro de Mendaña had discovered in his first voyage. The +arguments of Quiros consist of a criticism of the report of Gallego, +the Chief Pilot of Mendaña's first voyage. + +[68] Solomon Islands, vol. i, pp. 67, 68 (Hakluyt Society, 1901). + +[69] Solomon Islands, vol. i, p. 66. + +[70] Identified by Mr. Woodford as Nukufetan in the Ellice Group, +in 7° 50' S.--Solomon Islands, vol. i, p. 14 (n.), 1901. + +[71] Edited for the Hakluyt Society by Lord Stanley of Alderley +in 1868. + +[72] Contained in the Sucesos de las Islas Philipinas of Antonio de +Morga (1609); translated by Lord Stanley of Alderley for the Hakluyt +Society, 1868. + +[73] Don Antonio de Cardona y Cordova, sixth Duke of Sesa, was +descended from the Great Captain. He was son of Don Fernando de Cordova +y Requesens, second Duke of Soma, by Doña Beatriz de Figueroa. He +became Duke of Sesa by renunciation of his aunt, Francesca de Cordova, +and succeeded an elder brother as Duke of Soma. He was also Duke of +Baena. The Duke of Sesa died at Valladolid on January 6th, 1606. + +[74] Rimini. + +[75] He forgets that Caraccas is on the main land. + +[76] One of these nephews was no doubt the Lucas de Quiros who was +appointed Royal Ensign by his uncle on May 13th, 1606, at the bay of +St. Philip and St. James. Zaragoza mentions that, in 1616, Lucas de +Quiros was acquiring a certain reputation at Lima as a cosmographer +(IV, Apuntes Biograficas, p. 139). He constructed a map of the western +side of South America, from Carthagena to Magellan's Strait, by order +of the Viceroy, Prince of Esquilache, on parchment (see Duro Arca de +Noc, p. 560). + +[77] His name was Juan Ochoa de Bilboa. + +[78] Leza calls it "Anegada." In the Memorial of 1609 the name "La +Encarnaçion" was given to the first island. + +[79] Leza calls it "San Puerto." Torres gives the name of "San +Valerio." The two islands are 75 leagues apart. + +[80] Torres calls them "Las Virgenes." + +[81] This is a very early notice of the use of a method of obtaining +fresh water by condensing. + +[82] This island is Anaa, or Chain Island, about 200 miles east of +Tahiti, in the same latitude. It was named "Conversion de San Pablo" by +Quiros. No name is given by Torres or in Torquemada. Burney confused +"Sagittaria" a small atoll seen after leaving "Conversion de San +Pablo" with that island. Whenever he mentions "Sagittaria" it should +be "Conversion de San Pablo." Burney says that the "Sagittaria" of +Quiros is generally believed to be Tahiti (vol. ii, p. 277 n.). It was +Captain Wallis, the discoverer of Tahiti in 1767, who first thought +that he had identified that beautiful island with the "Sagittaria" +of Quiros: because the latitude is about the same, and because a low +isthmus is described. But Tahiti has several good anchorages; the +island of Quiros has none. Tahiti is very lofty; the island of Quiros +is flat. Tahiti has abundant supplies of water; the island described by +Quiros has none. Moreover, Quiros says that his first inhabited island +has a large shallow lake in its centre. The Pilot Leza describes it +as a ring of land encircling part of the sea. Sir William Wharton, +who identifies the island with Anaa, or Chain Island, has pointed +out that the passages describing the landing, especially the one in +Torquemada, are excellent accounts of the difficulty of landing on +the foreshore of a low reef island; but Tahiti, though there is a +barrier reef round it, has a smooth lagoon within, with easy landing, +and there are numerous openings in the reef. The description of the +march across what has been supposed to be an isthmus, answers to the +low land of an atoll, the water on the other side being the lagoon. + +The only low island near Tahiti is Tetaroa, which is 20 miles from +it. But another low island was not seen by Quiros, after leaving +"Conversion de San Pablo," until the second day. Starting from +Tahiti, there is no such island; but, sailing from Anaa and steering +W.N.W. before the trade wind, there are such low islands as are +mentioned. + +These considerations make it quite certain that Quiros never sighted +Tahiti, as Burney supposes. + +[83] Luis de Belmonte Bermudez, the Secretary to Quiros and probable +author of the narrative. + +[84] It should be Sojo. + +[85] Dr. Bolton G. Corney found at Seville the journal of the frigate +Aquila, which was sent by the Viceroy of Peru on a voyage to Tahiti, +under the command of Don Tomas Gayangos in 1774. In reconnoitring the +island of Anaa, on November 2nd, 1774, a well-proportioned cross was +seen, set up on a sandy beach, on the skirts of a wood. The Spaniards +of 1774 named the island "Todos Santos." + +[86] The S.E. end, 18° 30' S. (Torres); N.W. point, 17° 40' +S. (Torquemada). Burney calculates the longitude 147° 7' W. + +[87] Niau, or Greig Island, of the chart. Torres calls it "Santa +Polonia." + +[88] Makatea, or Aurora Island, of the chart. + +[89] Matahiva, or Lazareff Island, of the chart. The present editor +may be excused for referring to Lazareff as the first coral island he +ever saw. He was a naval cadet on board H.M.S. Collingwood when, at +seven bells in the forenoon of Friday, August 8th, 1845, she sighted +the island. There was a border of white sand between the blue sea +and the dense cocoa-nut grove. He went to the main-topmast head for +a view of the interior lagoon over the cocoa-nut trees. At that very +time he was reading Burney's account of the voyage of Quiros. + +[90] The sloping sides of a roof. + +[91] Torres called it "Matanza." In Torquemada the name "Gente Hermoso" +is given. The Memorial (1609) gives "Peregrino." + +[92] Probably wooden swords for teaching the drill. + +[93] "Tafetan tornasol." + +[94] See pp. 81 and 85. + +[95] Torres and Torquemada give the native name. Leza calls the island +"Nuestra Señora de Loreto." In the Memorial the name is "Monterey," +after the Viceroy of Peru. + +[96] Torres gives 1940 leagues (169° 45' E.). Latitude, 10° 10' S. + +[97] Outriggers. + +[98] Torres calls it "Chucupia." The Memorial has "Tucopia." Quiros +gives the latitude 12° 15' S.; Torres, 12° 30' S. Undoubtedly, the +Tucopia of modern charts, in 12° 15' S. and 169° 50' E. + +[99] Torres calls it a very high volcano. Torquemada gives the name of +"Nuestra Señora de la Luz." The Memorial has "San Marcos." It is the +Pic de l'Etoile of Bougainville. The volcano is now extinct. Latitude, +14° 25' S. "Merlav," or "Star Peak," on modern charts. + +[100] Torres has "Santa Maria." It is the "Gaua" of modern chart in +the Banks Group. + +[101] Martin Lope Cortal was Pilot of Lopez de Legazpi's ship on +the voyage from Mexico to the Philippines, and he afterwards made +a voyage to Mexico without licence. He and some companions landed +at islands called Barbudos, and the ship left them there. That this +native should have used these words is extraordinary. + +[102] Egg-plant nightshade, Solanum melongena, L. + +[103] The name of the Duke of Sesa was Don Antonio de Cardona y +Cordova. See pp. 163 and 168. + +[104] Cardona and La Clementina, looking like a range of mountains +and main land, were the islands of Pentecost, Aurora, and Leper, +overlapping each other. + +[105] Not in Leza's list. + +[106] "Araucana," por Don Alonso de Ercilla. Canto XXVII, octava 52. + +[107] The "friend" is, of course, Belmonte Bermudez, the Secretary +of Quiros. + +[108] Captain Cook relates that his people caught two reddish fish +with hook and line in Port Sandwich, Malicolo Island (one of the +New Hebrides), on July 24th, 1774. The fish were about the size of a +large bream. Most of the officers, and some of the petty officers, +dined on them the next day. The following night, every one who had +eaten of them was seized with violent pains in the head and bones, +attended with a scorching heat all over the skin, and numbness in +the joints. The pigs and dogs who had partaken of the fish were also +taken ill, and two died. It was a week or ten days before all the +officers recovered. In mentioning this, Cook refers to the similar +experience of Quiros and his crew, as described by Dalrymple, vol. i, +p. 140.--Cook's Second Voyage, vol. ii, p. 39. + +[109] He means betel. See p. 51. + +[110] Thistles; teazel. + +[111] The space between the end of the thumb and the end of the +forefinger, both stretched out. + +[112] Coral cliffs. + +[113] Captain Cook visited the Island of Espiritu Santo in August, +1774, and on the 25th entered the bay of San Felipe y Santiago, +discovered by Quiros. The wind being S., Cook was obliged to beat to +windward. Next morning he was 7 or 8 miles from the head of the bay, +which is terminated by a low beach, and behind that an extensive +flat covered with trees, and bounded on each side by a ridge of +mountains. The latitude was 15° 5' S. Steering to within 2 miles of +the head of the bay, he sent Mr. Cooper and Mr. Gilbert to sound and +reconnoitre the coast. Mr. Cooper reported that he had landed on the +beach near a fine river. They found 3 fathoms close to the beach, +and 55 two cables' lengths off. At the ship there was no bottom with +170 fathoms. When the boat returned, Captain Cook steered down the +bay; and during the night there were many fires on the W. side. In +the morning of the 27th the ship was off the N.W. point of the bay, +in latitude 14° 39' 30''. The bay has 20 leagues of sea-coast--6 on +the E. side, 2 at the head, and 12 on the W. side. The two points +which form the entrance bear S. 53° E., and N. 53° W., from each +other distant 10 leagues. An uncommonly luxuriant vegetation was +everywhere to be seen. Captain Cook named the E. point of the bay +"Cape Quiros," which is in 14° 56' S., and longitude 167° 13' E. He +named the N.W. point "Cape Cumberland." It is in 14° 38' 45'' S., +and 166° 49' 30'' E.--Cook's Second Voyage, vol. ii, p. 89. + +The Editor has to thank Dr. Bolton G. Corney for the following very +interesting account of his visit to the bay of San Felipe y Santiago +in 1876:-- + +"While on a voyage through the New Hebrides in the barque Prospector, +of 260 tons, in August, 1876, I visited the bay of San Felipe y +Santiago, now commonly known to shipmasters and other habitués of +the Western Pacific as the 'Big Bay.' + +"The island itself is, for short, spoken of as 'Santo,' not only +by local white men, but also by many of the natives of it and the +neighbouring ones, many of whom have been in Fiji or Queensland, +and have picked up a little Fijian or English, as the case may be. + +"The Prospector was chartered by the Government of Fiji to return 476 +of these people to their homes, in completion of contracts made with +them a few years before, after performing a term of labour on the +cotton and maize or cocoa-nut plantations of that group of islands, +which, in 1874, became a British Crown colony. I was in charge of these +returning emigrants, both medically and as representing the Government. + +"We passed from Malikolo to 'Santo', and worked up under the lee of its +western side to Pusei and Tasimate, landing and recruiting emigrants +as we went, and bartering for yams, and taro, and pigs by way of +provisions. We rounded Cape Cumberland (the extreme N.W. point of the +island), and worked into the bay of San Felipe y Santiago, making one +long board to the E.N.E or N.E. by E. first, and then a long leg to +the S.S.W., or thereabouts, which brought us close in with the land on +the W. side of the bay. The land there was high and steep, and we had +deep water until quite close into the beach. We then went about and +made short tacks towards the fundus of the bay, where we had to lay +the barque quite close in to the shore before getting anchorage. The +water was blue and clear, and I do not recollect seeing any reefs or +patches. The anchorage we made for was known to our recruiting agents, +who called it the 'river Jordan.' I have a recollection of hearing +that we got 9 fathoms with the lead just before letting go. The water +was quite smooth, protected by the land at the head of the bay from +the prevailing trade-wind; and the barque lay at a few boats' lengths +from the beach--about 300 yards W. from the embouchure of the river. + +"Our objects in calling there were (i) to land certain natives of the +place whom we had on board, with their earnings; (ii) to recruit others +if any suitable ones offered; and (iii) to obtain wood and fill water. + +"The beach, if my memory does not mislead me, was of black sand, +which is not an uncommon thing in islands of volcanic origin, such as +the New Hebrides: the distance from low water-mark to the edge of the +timber and undergrowth which fringed it just above high-water mark, +was only a few yards--perhaps 18 or 25--except near the mouth of +the river, where it was more shelving, and extended out into a sandy +foreshore or bank corresponding to the bar, the dry land being flat +and of alluvial formation. + +"The river was about as large as the Thames at Isleworth, and flowed +into the bay through a wide and far-reaching valley from S. to N. Its +banks were low, and overgrown with reeds and scrub, and more than +usually free from the customary mangrove trees and bushes. We did not +explore it for far, because the friendly attitude of the natives could +not be depended on to last, if they should get us into a 'corner;' +but I pulled into the river in one of the recruiting boats for a +short distance, and selected a place at which we filled our beakers +and water-casks with water of good and fresh quality. This was perhaps +less than half a mile from the mouth: the water was clear, and we could +see the bottom in mid-stream; but the tide was at the last of the ebb, +as we had chosen that time for the sake of getting the freshest water. + +"The natives brought us some dead logs to the beach, and others on +bamboos to the vessel's side, much of which the sailors and officers +bartered for in the belief that it was sandal wood. It was in reality, +I believe, the wood known in Fijian as Sevna or Cevna, a kind of +Pittosporum, which grows near the sea and has a strong sandal-wood +odour. We also obtained the natives' consent to our cutting some +firewood, which was mostly wild dawa (Nephilium pinnatum), and mulomulo +(Hiliuscus populnea), a littoral tree often used in Fiji to cut boats' +knees from. + +"We recruited four men to go with us to Fiji for three years. They +were all adults of about 20 to 24 years, tall, black, and athletic +young men, much above the average stature of New Hebrideans anywhere +north of Eromango; and the other people of the locality appeared +to me equally well-built, and some 5 ft. 10 in. or 5 ft. 11 in. in +height. I cannot say whether they were the true inhabitants of the +place, as we saw no village nor huts: they may have been mountaineers +from the interior on an excursion to the coast, the mountaineers +in these islands being as a rule blacker, and I think taller (with +exceptions), than the coast people. + +"They had no canoes--at least I saw none--except two small catamarans; +and the timber they took alongside the ship was floated off by means +of bamboos. + +"It is doubtful whether mountaineers would have possession of +catamarans on the coast, or trust themselves to bamboo rafts. + +"The west shore of this bay rises steeply from the water throughout +most of its extent: but there are narrow strips of low-lying flat +land between the beach and the mountain side at intervals, continuous +with the small valleys, where creeks or torrents, of which there are +several, have deposited silt and boulders, and rocky débris from the +higher slopes. But, in so far as I remember, they are all insignificant +in extent, as the mountain ridge which forms this large promontory +and ends abruptly in Cape Cumberland, rises, as already mentioned, +steeply from the sea, which is deep all along and around it, with +only here and there even a fringing shore reef. There is no barrier +reef whatever, and consequently no lagoon. + +"As to size of the 'Big Bay,' I should say that the distance from +Cape Cumberland to the 'Jordan' is something like 30 miles. The head +of the bay runs from the river mouth in an easterly direction for 3 or +perhaps 4 miles, being mostly flat, low-lying alluvium, and then sweeps +round towards the N.E. and N., being more elevated and undulating, +and ends in Cape Quiros. This land, forming the eastern horn of the +bay, does not project so far seaward as the western promontory, and is +neither so high nor so steep, nor so heavily timbered as the latter, +which is in fact a continuation of the backbone of the island, as far +out as Cape Cumberland. The eastern horn extends northward perhaps +10 or 12 miles only. + +"The depth or extent of the bay itself, from its chord formed by +an imaginary E. and W. line drawn through Cape Quiros, seemed to me +about a dozen miles, and it is of similar width. It may, therefore, +contain nearly 150 square miles in area. + +"The anchorage is well protected from the prevailing trade-wind, +which blows from E.S.E., and is sheltered from that point round by +S. to N.W. It is not exposed either from E.N.E. to E.S.E., but from +N.W. to N. and N.E. it is unsafe." + +[114] Probably Vanua Lava. + +[115] Ureparopara, or islands to N.W. + +[116] Vendavales. + +[117] An arroba=25 lbs. + +[118] Wooded islands, off the port of San Blas, on the west coast +of Mexico. + +[119] 6,000 quintals in the second Order. + +[120] In the second Order:--"In this kingdom I have ordered 6,000 +ducats in aid of expenses on the way out, and 3,000 quintals of iron +to be bought at Seville, and sent out." + +[121] Same as the former Order, except that 6,000 ducats are granted +for expenses on the way out; and the quantity of sheet iron is +specified and ordered to be bought at Seville. + +[122] Months (?). + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Voyages of Pedro Fernandez de +Quiros, by Pedro Fernandez de Quiros + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41200 *** |